Compress software manual.pdf

User’s Manual

Table of Contents 1 - Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 2 - COMPRESS Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 2 - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - Sample COMPRESS Design Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1 3-1 4-1

Step 1: Begin a New Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 Step 2: Set the Design Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5 Step 3: Select the ASME Edition / Addenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7 Step 4: Set the Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9 Step 5: Save Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10 Step 6: Design the Vessel (Add Components) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 Add a Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Add Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14 Add a Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16 Add the Final Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18 Add a Hemispherical Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19 Add Wind and Seismic Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21 Add Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23 Add Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26 Add Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29 Generate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36 User Defined Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39

5 - File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 Export Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 Export Solid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5

6 - Project Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - Component Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 7-1

Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 9 Ellipsoidal Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11 F & D Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12 Hemi Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13 Spherically Dished Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14 ASME B16.9 Pipe Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 Bolted Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 Welded Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20 Appendix 14 Flat Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23 Body Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25 Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35

8 - Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

Set Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Global Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46 PDF Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48 Long Seam Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51 Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55 Edit General Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58 Export General Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61

9 - Nozzle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1

Nozzle Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 Nozzle Quick Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14 Nozzle Calculation Option Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16 Nozzle Detail Dimension Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19 Nozzle WRC 537 and 107 Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 23 Nozzle FEA Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 31 Nozzle Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 39 Elbow Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 41

10 - Attach Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 1

Platform / Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Baffles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Packed Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Clip / Lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 Insulation / Lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 Rigging / Lift Lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14 Plate Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15 Ear Type Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19 Trunnions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21 Rigging Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23

11 - Support Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 - 1

Skirt Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 2 Skirt Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 5 Saddles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 7 Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 12 Anchor Bolt and Base Plate Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 23 Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 26 Skirt Base Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 28 Single Base Plate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 31 External Chairs Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 33 Double Base Plate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 34 Centered Bolt Chair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 35 Standard Base Plate Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 36

12 - Codes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 - 1

ASME Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2 Wind Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 4

Wind IBC Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 7 Wind ASCE Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8 Wind NBC Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 14 Wind UBC Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 18 Wind User Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 19 Seismic Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 22 IBC Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 27 ASCE 7-10, 7-05, 7-02, and 7-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 32 ASCE 7-95 and 7-93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 34 ASCE 7-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 37 NBC Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 38 UBC Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 44 Seismic User Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 47

13 - Loads Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1 Lateral Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 2 Vertical Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 3 Liquid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5

14 - Material Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 - 1

ASME Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 3 Full User Defined Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 6 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 13 Gasket Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15 Structural Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16 Standard Saddle Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 19 Studding Outlet Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 21

15 - Forms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 - 1

Form Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 5 Manage Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 7 Submit Forms Electronically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 11

16 - Windows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1 17 - Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1 18 - COMPRESS Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 1 Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 3 Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 5 HTRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 6 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 7 Solid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 8 Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 9

19 - Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 - 1

PDF Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 3 Report Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 6 Deficiencies Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 9 Nozzle Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 10 Nozzle Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 11 Pressure Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 12 Thickness Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 13 Hydrotest Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 14 Weight Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 15 Vacuum Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 17

20 - Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 - 1

Appendix A - Weight Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 1 Appendix B - Saddle Seismic Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 4 Appendix C - Lift Lug Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 16

21 - Vessel Wizard Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 - 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2

Create a New Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 3 Vw Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 4 Create Defaults File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 5 Select Active Defaults File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 6 SetDefaultsFromFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 7 Setting Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 9 Vessel General Info - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 10 General Info - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 11 Material - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 13 Nozzle - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 15 Legs - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 17 Support Skirt - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 19 Support Lugs - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 21 Wind Code - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 23 Seismic Code - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 24 Other - Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 26 General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 28 Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 33 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 37 Wind and Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 38

22 - COMPRESS Exchanger Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 - 1

22 - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 - 1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 3

23 - Heat Exchanger Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23 - 1

General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 1 Tube Side Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 9 Floating Tubesheet Channel Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 16 Shell Side Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 19

Tubesheet Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 23 Operating Temperature Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 27 Liquid Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 31 Kettle Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 32 Tubes and Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 34 Rear Shell Closure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 41 Expansion Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 45 Expansion Joint Bellows Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 51 Tubesheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 57 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 66 Tube-To-Tubesheet Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 74 Pass Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 78 Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 81 HTRI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 84 Set Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 90 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 91 Weight Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 91

24 - INSPECT Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 - 1

24 - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - API 510 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 - 1 25 - 1

How to use API 510 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 2 Inspection CMLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 5 API 510 Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 19 Data Collection Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 21 Projected Vessel State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 23 Inspection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 24 Vessel Data Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 26

26 - API 579 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26 - 1

How to use API 579 Flaw Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 1

Part 4 or Part 5, General or Local Metal Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 4 Part 6, Pitting Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 8 Part 3, Brittle Fracture Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 12 Supplemental Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 13

27 - ASME B31.3 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27 - 1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 - 1

28 - Tube Layout Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28 - 1

28 - Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28 - 1

Shell and Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 1 Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 5 Baffles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 7 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 9 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 13 Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 14

29 - Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29 - 1

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - 1 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - 3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - 4 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - 5 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - 6 Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - 7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - 9

30 - Layout Design Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30 - 1

Layout Design Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - 1

31 - Integration with COMPRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31 - 1

32 - Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32 - 1

33 - COMPRESS Help Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 - 1 34 - Vessel Wizard Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - 1 35 - Exchanger Help Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 - 1 36 - INSPECT Help Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 - 1 37 - Tube Layout Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 - 1

Introduction License Agreement The license agreement can be viewed and printed at any time from within COMPRESS. From the Help Menu select About COMPRESS and then click View License Agreement.

Installing COMPRESS Please visit the online Support Center, http://www.codeware.com/support for: Detailed system requirements Step-by-step Single User and Network installation instructions Instructions for repairing and uninstalling COMPRESS

Getting Started To help you begin, we suggest that you view the COMPRESS Vessel and Heat Exchanger Video Tutorials located under the COMPRESS Help menu. We also encourage you to take advantage of the resources available in the online Support Center (http://www.codeware.com/support). Here you can find a complete listing of software developments as well as technical papers, calculation verification documents, manuals and a selection of video tutorials. The knowledgebase search capability, together with an FAQ index, makes it easy to quickly locate the answers you need.

The COMPRESS Modeling Approach COMPRESS offers two approaches to modeling vessels: Wizards and free form design. For quick model creation, COMPRESS includes a Wizard interface which requires only basic information to model typical vessels and exchangers. For unparalleled flexibility, COMPRESS also offers a component by component free form design approach. This method is useful when designing equipment which does not fit typical parameters and when modifying equipment created by Wizards. Whether you are building new vessels and exchangers or rating existing equipment, you can build your model using a specially tailored input mode. In design mode, COMPRESS selects sizes, thicknesses and ratings to meet Code requirements. In rating mode, COMPRESS calculates the MAWP and minimum thickness while allowing you to input your existing geometry. In both modes, inputs are re-evaluated during the modeling process and updated as necessary to reflect

COMPRESS Help

Introduction < 2 - 1 >

applicable Code dependencies. In selected circumstances, warnings and good engineering practice reminders are presented.

Calculation Methods Used by COMPRESS Where appropriate, COMPRESS designs and rates pressure vessels and heat exchangers using industry standard methods and good engineering practices.

A Cautionary Note: COMPRESS is a very powerful and user-friendly program and a wonderful engineering tool. However, it is not a substitute for a knowledgeable and competent Engineer or Designer.

COMPRESS Help


How to Use this Manual This manual focuses on operations unique to COMPRESS. COMPRESS utilizes a standard Microsoft Windows user interface and this manual assumes the user is comfortable with performing basic Windows operations. For assistance with using Windows, please refer to your Windows documentation. The following icons appear throughout the COMPRESS manual to highlight important information:

- helpful advice and tips

- technical information - warnings

- mouse usage or mouse editing tips The following conventions are used throughout this manual: Specific keyboard keys are displayed as they appear on most keyboards (e.g. Esc, Del, Enter, F3). When simultaneous keystrokes are required the keystrokes are shown connected by a plus sign. Hold the first key down while simultaneously pressing the second key (for example, press Ctrl+O to open a file).

What is Covered in this Manual The standard functionality of COMPRESS is covered in this manual. The Division 2 and Heat Exchanger options are also covered in this manual. These options are available from within COMPRESS for an additional charge. When purchased, they are enabled on your security key and no further software installation is required. These options will be grayed out on the toolbar if they are not enabled. The COSTER and DRAFTER options are additional software packages. When purchased, they are enabled on your security key and require additional software installations. User Manuals for these options are available from Codeware's online Support Center (http://www.codeware.com/support).

COMPRESS Help

How to Use this Manual < 3 - 1 >

Tips on Designing a Vessel Please see the COMPRESS Quick Start Guide available from Codeware's Support Center (http://www.codeware.com/support) for a suggested vessel modeling sequence. Please note that this sequence is just one of many ways to model in COMPRESS. Components and loads may be modeled in any order and individual components designed without specifying the entire vessel. The next chapter, Sample COMPRESS Design Session, will give you a step-by-step, detailed example to model.

COMPRESS Help

How to Use this Manual < 3 - 2 >

Sample COMPRESS Design Session This chapter takes you through the design of an example vessel. This is a good way to become familiar with the program's capabilities and methods. Please note that this sequence is just one of many ways to model in COMPRESS. Components and loads may be modeled in virtually any order and individual components designed without specifying the entire vessel. To start COMPRESS click the shortcut on your desktop. If there is no shortcut, locate the Compwin.exe file in the installation directory. After the startup logo you should see a blank design screen with a menu bar and tool bar at the top.

The COMPRESS Main Screen

Toolbars and Docking Windows Menu Toobbar: All COMPRESS functions are grouped into menus by category. Only the title of the menu appears on the menu bar.

Status Toolbar: Displayed at the bottom of the COMPRESS main window. It displays information about the open file. The right side of the status bar displays the system of units being used and indicates which Division of the Code is being used.

COMPRESS Help

Sample COMPRESS Design Session < 4 - 1 >

File Window Tab: Shows the currently loaded files as tabs. You can select, close, and move tabs.

Dockable Panes: Adjustable windows that can dock, float, and hide. You can select which panes are displayed and which are hidden in the Toolbar configuration popup menu (Windows > Toolbars).

Project Pane: An optional dockable pane used by the Project feature. The Project feature allows users to organize, view and backup files of any type from within COMPRESS.

Toolbars: The toolbars can be moved and may not appear in exactly the same location on your screen as they do in this manual. You can select which toolbars are displayed and which are hidden in the Toolbar configuration popup menu (Windows | Toolbars).

Standard Toolbar: Provides quick access to many commonly performed COMPRESS operations.

Project Toolbar: A feature that allows users to organize, view and backup files of any type from within COMPRESS.

Report Toolbar: Used to easily navigate the COMPRESS report. The toolbar is not active unless the report window is open.

Camera Toolbar: Selects how the mouse movement will affect the vessel position and scale. Provides options for quick vessel viewing and isometric orientations. This toolbar is not active unless the design window is open.

HTRI Toolbar: A feature set allowing quick HTRI file handling and interface. Edit Toolbar: Used to edit the vessel in a controlled manner and to show a history of changes made to the vessel.

Solid Model Toolbar: A feature for enabling a solid model view of the vessel as well as exporting the 3D file to multiple types. Component Toolbar: A shortcut to options located on the Component, Nozzle, Attach, and Support menus. You can suppress display of the component toolbar by closing it.

Window Types Design Window: Displays the designed components on screen.

COMPRESS Help


Report Window: Minimized while you are working on a vessel design. When you maximize this window the COMPRESS report menu bar replaces the design menu bar.

General Arrangement Drawing Window: Displays a 2D drawing of the vessel with options to export to AutoCAD DXF/DWG and WMF files.

Sample Design Walk-through Follow the steps bellow to model this vessel in COMPRESS.

COMPRESS Help


Step 1: Begin a New Design We will begin our new design by selecting File > New Division 1 Vessel. Alternatively, you can begin this design by clicking on the Division 1 toolbar icon.

COMPRESS Help


Step 2: Set the Design Mode The set mode options dialog is used to specify general vessel properties as well as the methodology used to perform the analysis. From the Action menu, click Set Mode Option (or press F7), then click on the Calculation General page:

COMPRESS Help


Select Get Thickness from Pressure to alert COMPRESS that you are designing a new vessel and not rerate an existing vessel. All other options should be preset as shown above. Click OK to return to the blank design screen.

COMPRESS Help


Step 3: Select the ASME Edition / Addenda From the Codes menu, select ASME:

COMPRESS Help


From this dialog select the desired Edition / Addenda, then click OK. COMPRESS automatically uses the latest ASME Code Edition / Addenda when creating a new file.

COMPRESS Help


Step 4: Set the Datum From the Action menu, select Set Datum (or press F8). Our example is a vertical vessel that we are designing from bottom to top. Select 'Vertical Vessel' and 'Bottom Shell Seam' to specify the orientation of the reference line. For this example, we are also specifying to offset the datum line 6" from the seam of the bottom shell to head.

COMPRESS Help


Step 5: Save Your Work From the File menu, select Save As. Input Example1 as the name of the vessel and click Save. Your file can be saved at any time. It is recommended that you save your work often.

COMPRESS Help


Step 6: Design the Vessel (Add Components) Our example vessel consists of an ellipsoidal head, 4 cylinders, a transition, and a hemispherical head. For our vertical vessel we will be entering the components from top to bottom. If we were designing a horizontal vessel, the components would typically be entered from left to right. Components can be added to the model from the Component menu, from the Component toolbar or by pressing the 'Insert' key. Please see the following sections for more detailed information: Add a Head < 4 - 12 > Add Cylinders < 4 - 14 > Add a Transition < 4 - 16 > Add the Final Cylinder < 4 - 18 > Add a Hemispherical Head < 4 - 19 > Add Wind and Seismic Loading < 4 - 21 > Add Supports < 4 - 23 > Add Nozzles < 4 - 26 > Add Attachments < 4 - 29 >

COMPRESS Help


Add a Head From the Component Menu, select Ellipsoidal Head:

The component identifier is automatically defaulted to Ellipsoidal Head #1. Press Tab to advance to the material box. Accept the default material: SA 516-70. A “short” list of materials is available in the drop down box. To select materials not included in this preset “short” list, please refer to the ASME Materials page Tab to Internal Pressure and enter 250 psi. Note: All pressure inputs in COMPRESS are psig. We are using 450 degrees F for the design temperature in this example. Input 15 psi as full vacuum design and 450 degrees as the design pressure for external pressure. Input 0.0625 for internal corrosion allowance. External corrosion (referred to as “outer” in COMPRESS) is also known as "under the-insulation" corrosion. Notice you can input 0.0625 as a fraction by entering 1/16.

COMPRESS Help


Since this head is not inside the vessel, ignore the internal head switch. For MDMT input -25 degrees F. This user-defined Minimum Design Metal Temperature is the lowest temperature at which the vessel will operate under pressure. Accept the default 70 degrees for test temperature. Choose Impact Tested and PWHT performed in the metallurgical treatment box. For radiography accept the default Seamless No RT in the Longitudinal Seam RT box and select Spot UW-11(a)(5)(b) Type 1 for Circumferential Seam RT. The latter is chosen because it will yield 100% joint efficiency. Click Next to advance to the dimensions screen:

Select Inner Diameter. Input the head diameter as 60 inches and press Tab. Enter 1.5 inches for straight flange length and press Tab. Notice that the minimum thicknesses are shown in the box to the right. Now, select OK. The head is drawn in the design window.

COMPRESS Help


Add Cylinders Next you will add three cylinders. From the Component menu, select Cylinder:

Copy Last: Since our cylinders share many common inputs with the head designed previously, click Copy Last to copy the data from the head. Adjust the Longitudinal and Circumferential Seam RT to be Spot, Type 1. Click Next.

COMPRESS Help


Input all values as shown above. Note that the minimum required thicknesses are shown in the box at right. To adjust the right-hand side box size, use your mouse to “pull” the top border. Select OK to accept all values and draw the three cylinders on the vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Add a Transition From the Component menu, select Transition:

Click Copy Last and then click Next.

COMPRESS Help


Input all values as shown above and click OK.

COMPRESS Help


Add the Final Cylinder To add the final cylinder to the vessel, highlight the Component menu and select Cylinder. Click Copy Last and then Next. Input 120 inches for the Shell Diameter and 90” for the Length.

Click OK.

COMPRESS Help


Add a Hemispherical Head From the Component menu, select Hemi Head. Click Copy Last and then Next.

Input the values above and click OK.

COMPRESS Help


The vessel should now look like this:

COMPRESS Help


Add Wind and Seismic Loading Adding wind and seismic codes to our example causes COMPRESS to consider wind and earthquake induced forces and moments. Select Wind from the Codes menu. Set the code to ASCE 2010 and input values shown below, then click OK:

COMPRESS Help


Next, select Seismic from the Codes menu. Set the code to ASCE 2010 ground supported and input values shown below, then click OK.

COMPRESS Help


Add Supports There are two skirt options: Intermediate and Support. The Intermediate support option is intended to be used to attach two different pressure chambers. From the Support menu, select Skirt and then Support. Input 84 inches for the length and accept the other values.

Click Attach Base Ring.

COMPRESS Help


Select External Chairs, and then click Next.

COMPRESS Help


Click OK to finish.

COMPRESS Help


Add Nozzles From the Nozzle menu, select Detailed Design (or press F2):

Enter all values as shown above then click Add ASME B16.5/16.47 Flange. If you select Nozzle -> Quick Design, COMPRESS will select wall thicknesses and add pads automatically.

COMPRESS Help


Make the indicated selections. Select "Consider external loadings on flange MAWP rating" to have COMPRESS calculate an equivalent pressure due to external loads as specified in the WRC-107 screen. The equivalent pressure will be considered when determining the flange MAWP rating. Return to the nozzle screen by clicking OK. Click Next to proceed to the nozzle cross section screen.

COMPRESS Help


Input the indicated values. Note that minimum values appear to the right of the input screen. Available and required reinforcement areas are shown in the status bar. Click OK to accept the values.

COMPRESS Help


Attachments Add a Platform and Ladder From the Attach menu, select Platform/Ladder:

Uncheck Top head platform and input the values as shown. Click OK.

COMPRESS Help


Add a Top Head Platform and Ladder From the Attach menu, select Platform/Ladder:

Input the values as shown, click OK.

COMPRESS Help


Add Insulation From the Attach menu, select Insulation.

Select all components except the skirt and input the indicated insulation properties. This procedure can be repeated several times if you need to insulate components with insulation of different properties. Do this by selecting the appropriate components and changing the inputs. Click OK to continue.

COMPRESS Help


Add Trays From the Attach menu, select Trays:

Input all values as shown above and select OK.

COMPRESS Help


Trays are not initially visible inside the vessel, but can be viewed by mousing over the cylinders to turn them transparent temporarily, clicking on the Show Internals icon (Main toolbar), or by setting the cylinder display properties to partially transparent (Action -> Set Mode Options -> 3D Display).

COMPRESS Help


Add a Packed Bed At the top of the vessel is a mesh pad which COMPRESS models in the same manner as a packed bed. From the Attach menu, select Packed Bed:

Insert values as shown, placing the pad at the very top of the tower, and click OK

COMPRESS Help


Add Loads (Liquid Level) For this example an additional load due to static head will be added. From the Load menu, select Liquid Level. Specify a liquid level at 20 inches above the datum line with specific gravity 0.9 and click OK.

COMPRESS Help


Generate Report COMPRESS can generate both detailed and abbreviated reports, the former suitable for use as a calculation audit trail. A minimal report can be generated if you prefer a higher level presentation. Reports may be set up to include your company specific information. You can control how reports are displayed within the Report Defaults dialog (Action > Reports > Report Defaults). Reports may be generated in PDF format by activating the Display Report as PDF option in the PDF Reports dialog (Action > Reports > PDF Report Settings). Reports can be generated at any time during the operation of COMPRESS by pressing F3 or selecting Action > Perform Code Calculations. To enable quick report navigation and problem resolution, Code rules are linked to inputs and clicking on a calculated result will take you directly to the source calculation.

COMPRESS Help


Any errors detected by COMPRESS will be noted in the Deficiencies Dialog, a box presented before the report is displayed. The Deficiencies Dialog gives an opportunity to edit the components or accept the errors. All errors are listed in the Deficiencies Summary (in the report) for later viewing.

COMPRESS Help


Click Continue and the report will be displayed. Navigate to individual reports using the links in the left frame. If the option to generate the report as a PDF is active, the left pane is replaced by a set of PDF bookmarks.

COMPRESS Help


User Defined Material To bring up the User Defined Material dialog, add a component such as a cylinder and click on the User Defined button next to the Material field.

Material Name -- Use the drop-down menu to select a previously defined user material or click the New button to enter a new material.

Pipe Material -- Activate this option if the product form is pipe. If active, the pipe undertolerance per UG-16(d) will be considered. A tolerance of 12.5% is applied per UG-45 unless the options Cylindrical shells made from pipe are entered as minimum thickness or Nozzles made from pipe are entered as minimum thickness are active in the Set Mode Options and Nozzles 1 tabs respectively.

Density -- Enter the density of the material. The density is used for weight calculations. Vacuum Chart -- Select the appropriate vacuum chart for your material. This is used in external pressure and allowable compressive stress calculations.

Elasticity -- Select the appropriate material group used to determine the modulus of elasticity from ASME II-D.

Allowable Tensile Stresses -- Enter the allowable tensile stress values for the operating, test, and vacuum design temperatures specified in the current design.

COMPRESS Help


Edit All Stress Values

Select this option if you want to modify previous entries or enter stress values for temperatures other than the current design temperatures. Select Delete from List to delete a stress/temperature pair. Enter new values in the Temperature and Stress fields and click Update List to add the values to the list. Then click Save List to Database to save the new values for later use. Note that this option is not necessary for the current design. Also note that COMPRESS will not interpolate to find allowable stress values for temperatures not entered in the database, so it is necessary to input stress values through this dialog for any temperature used.

Carbon Steel Material -- Select if the material is carbon steel or low alloy material (Table UCS-23 material) and a UCS-66 minimum design metal temperature (MDMT) rating is desired. The impact test exemption curve, material PNo, and materal Group No are required in order to perform the MDMT rating..

Minimum Yield Strength -- Enter the minimum yield strength at room temperature. When OK is selected, a warning is presented if the current ASME safety factors are not met (see ASME IID Table 1-100). The allowable stress is typically the lesser of 2/3 yield or tensile divided by 3.5.

Minimum Tensile Strength -- Enter the minimum tensile strength at room temperature. Save this in the main database -- Select this option to save the user defined material to the user database when OK is selected. To utilize this material for other components or in other files, this option must be selected.

COMPRESS Help


File Menu Pull down the File menu by selecting 'File' from the menu bar at the top of the design window:

File Menu Items New Project This option opens up a new Project in the Project Toolbar , which is a feature that allows users to organize, view, and backup files of any type from within COMPRESS.

New Division 1 Vessel This option opens a document window where you can design a new

COMPRESS Help

File Menu < 5 - 1 >

ASME Division 1 vessel or heat exchanger.

New Division 2 Vessel This option opens a document window where you can design a new ASME Division 2 vessel or heat exchanger.

New Heat Exchanger This option opens a document window where you can design a new heat exchanger based on TEMA or ASME design rules. See the Heat Exchanger help file for more information.

Vessel Wizard This option starts the Vessel Wizard which can be used to quickly model a vessel with minimal inputs. See the Vessel Wizard help file for more information.

Open This option lets you open a previously saved COMPRESS file in a new window. Four file types may be opened: COMPRESS for Windows files (*.CW7), COMPRESS Project files (*.CWPROJ), COMPRESS for DOS files (*.VSL), and HTRI files (*.HTRI, if license is present). The "Files of Type" filter within this dialog may be set to show files of a specific COMPRESS-compatible type, all COMPRESS-compatible files, or files of any type.

Close This option closes the currently active document. Save Saves your file in the directory in which you are working. Save As Saves your file in a directory which you specify. Export Model Use this option to export the vessel data to an XML data file. HTRI Interface This item branches out to display all of the HTRI specific options. Open HTRI File This allows an HTRI Xchanger file (.htri) to be selected and imported into COMPRESS. Shell and tube heat exchangers created with HTRI software may be imported into COMPRESS.

Set HTRI Import Preferences This option will open the HTRI Import Preferences dialog, which is used to review and set the preference values that will be used when importing HTRI Xchanger files.

Display File Import Values This button will open the dialog that displays the HTRI File Import Values, which displays all of the values used to interface the HTRI file with COMPRESS. Note that this item is only available after an HTRI file has been imported.

Rate Heat Exchanger This button uses the HTRI Xchanger software to rate the current exchanger. The updates to the original HTRI file are displayed as well as thermal rating values. Note that this item is only available after an HTRI file has been imported.

Save as HTRI file This button will allow the current heat exchanger to be saved as an HTRI Xchanger file. The file saved is the original HTRI file with all of the updates that are listed when the thermal calculations are run. Note that this item is only available after an HTRI file

COMPRESS Help

File Menu < 5 - 2 >

has been imported.

Revisions Here you can keep a log of revisions made to your vessel design. When a new file is created an initial entry is automatically created stating the creation date and build number. COMPRESS automatically logs revision entries for Code year and Code Division changes. See Revision History for more information.

Print, Print Preview, Page Setup Use this option to control printing your vessel image. Options on this dialog control printing and use conventional Microsoft methods and terminology. This is for printing the vessel image only, not the vessel calculation report. For report printing, see the Reports section.

COMPRESS Help

File Menu < 5 - 3 >

Export Model When you select the "Export" entry under the file menu, a sub-menu appears: Export Model to XML Export Solid Model Export Project and Files Export Model to XML This option is used to create an XML file containing the vessel data. The XML format is unique in that it is human readable and machine readable. If you want access to your vessel data in custom software, this format is your best choice. Export Solid Model When this option is selected, a save dialog appears and you can export the vessel in many different industry standard formats like STEP and SAT. The vessel can then be loaded into programs like Solid Works and Autodesk Inventor. Export Project and Files This provides a way of exporting all parts of a project into either a zip file or a subdirectory on the disk drive.

COMPRESS Help

File Menu < 5 - 4 >

Export Solid Model When you select the "Export Solid Model" entry under the file menu, a file save dialog appears. In this you can enter a file name and select a format for the data export. The supported export formats include: ACIS (.sat) - This is readable by most CAD packages including Autodesk's AutoCAD and Inventor, DSS SolidWorks, and PTC's Creo Elements/Pro (formerly Pro/Engineer). Granite (.g) - This is readable by PTC's Creo Elements/Pro. IGES (.iges) - A platform-neutral data exchange file format readable by most CAD packages. STEP (.step) - Another platform-neutral data exchange file format. COMPRESS XML 3D (.xml3d) - A platform-neutral text file that includes all of the vessel data along with an embedded STEP file Note: The solid model export feature is available only when the solid model view is active.

COMPRESS Help

File Menu < 5 - 5 >

Project Pane The Project Pane is a feature that allows users to organize, view, and backup files of any type from within COMPRESS.

How to use the Project Pane

COMPRESS Help

Project Pane < 6 - 1 >

Create a New Project - in the Menu Toolbar select File | New | New Project .

Close the Project Pane - click the in the top right corner. Re-opened the Project Pane at any time from the Toolbars... menu: Windows | Toolbars... | Project .

Navigate the Project Pane tree by clicking the or buttons next to the folder icons in the tree view. Right clicking a folder icon gives the options to add a file , add a folder , rename the folder , or remove the folder from the project.

COMPRESS Help


Right clicking a file icon to add a file , add a folder , rename the file , open the file, open the file's containing folder , or remove the file from the project.

Open Project - This button opens file selection window that opens a COMPRESS Project file.

Save Project - This button saves the current project file. If the project is unsaved, a selection window opens providing an option to save the file with a designated name.

Save As... - This menu item saves the project file to another location.

COMPRESS Help


Export Project and Files to Zip File - This menu item exports the current project along with all of its files. This is useful for transferring a project and its included files to another computer via email. The zipped project file is linked with the zipped copies its files instead of the originals.

Export Project and Files to Folder - This menu item exports a the current Project and all of its files a folder. This can be used as a means for backing up projects and files or for transferring projects to another computer. Like projects that are exported to a zip file, exported project file is linked with the exported copies its files instead of the originals.

Add File - This button brings up a file selection dialog to choose files to add to the project. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple files. Add Folder - This button inserts a folder into the project. Folders may contain multiple files, folders, or even other COMPRESS Project files.

Add Current File - This button adds any open COMPRESS file to the project. Open Containing Folder - This button launches a Windows Explorer and opens the folder that contains the selected file.

Remove - This button removes the currently selected file or folder from the project. Note that this does not delete the actual file, it only removes that file from the Project Tree.

Backup Project - This button launches the "Project Backup" dialog shown below. This feature makes a backup copy of every file that the project and its sub-projects contain in the specified directory. This is useful for keeping snapshots relevant files as a project progresses towards completion.

COMPRESS Help


Note: if files are moved from the original location at the time they were added to the project, they can not be backed up because they can not be found. COMPRESS Project files found in the backup directory still reference the original copies of the files that they contain, not the backup copies.

Vessel Data Chart (Available for INSPECT only) - This button launches the Vessel Data Chart for the current Project. The Vessel Data Chart makes management of multiple vessels easier by adding the capability to view important inspection related data for multiple files all at once in a customizable grid.

Help Contents - This button launches this help page.

COMPRESS Help


Component Menu The Component menu allows you to add various pressure boundary components to a vessel. In this chapter, we discuss each component in the order of appearance on the Component menu. To pull down the Component menu, select Component from the menu bar at the top of the design window.

Cylinder < 7 - 2 > Transition < 7 - 9 > Ellipsoidal Head < 7 - 11 > F & D Head < 7 - 12 > Hemi Head < 7 - 13 > Spherically Dished Cover < 7 - 14 > Bolted Cover < 7 - 17 > Welded Cover < 7 - 20 > Appendix 14 Flat Head < 7 - 23 > Body Flange < 7 - 25 > Rings < 7 - 35 > Heat Exchanger < 22 - 1 >

COMPRESS Help

Component Menu < 7 - 1 >

Cylinder

Identifier-- The identifier is simply your name for the component you are designing. Features such as table of contents, global change, editing, deleting, adding insulation, etc., require that you select one component from a listing of all components of a vessel. The identifier allows you to easily select the component in which you are interested. COMPRESS supplies a default name, which you can override.

Material -- A default material (specified in Action/Set Mode/Defaults) is presented. To change the material, click on the down arrow button to the right of the material field to display a drop down box containing a "short list" of ASME materials. This short list is provided so you do not have to sort through the entire ASME database every time you specify a material. You can add or remove materials from this short list, thereby achieving a personalized database from which to work (see Sec. 13 to add/remove materials by accessing the main material database). Highlight a material from the list, then click on it or press Enter.

COMPRESS Help


Material Properties -- A dialog that displays the details for the currently selected material such as nominal composition and density.

User Defined -- An option to specify a user defined material which is useful for situations where the desired material is not in ASME Section II Part D. Full user defined materials are comparable to ASME materials and contain the material properties and data required to complete Code checks currently performed. Simple user defined materials are basic material definitions with the minimum material properties used to run basic calculations. They can be defined when selecting Simple User Defined after clicking on the User Defined button.

Use Code Case 2290 values -- Check this box to use allowable stress values specified by this code case. This option occurs only for the Code Editions and Addenda for which the code case applies. If the material you want to use is not displayed in the current short list described above, you will need to add it to the short list by clicking on the material as presented in the full Materials screen.

Internal Pressure/External Pressure -- The pressures entered are the design differential pressures across the component at the design temperatures. The ASME Code refers to this as "design pressure". Internal pressure acts on the concave surfaces (normally inner surface) of formed heads and on the inside of cylinders. External pressure acts on the convex surface of formed heads and on the outside of cylinders.

Internal Temperature/External Temperature -- Enter values for internal and external design or rerating temperatures. All materials have a maximum permissible temperature as specified by the ASME code. If you enter a temperature higher than the maximum allowed, COMPRESS displays a warning message and the maximum temperature permitted. The temperatures may be limited by either: Tensile Stress (Materials Part D) Vacuum Charts (Materials Part D)

Corrosion, Inner and Outer -- The corrosion values entered are applied to the inside and/or outside of the vessel as specified. For internal heads the outer surface is defined as being the convex surface, and the inner surface is the concave surface.

MDMT -- The minimum design metal temperature, the lowest operating temperature coincident with the design pressure. COMPRESS rates the MDMT for each component that is constructed from a UCS material per the rules in UCS-66. If the rated MDMT of the component is warmer than the MDMT entered a deficiency is reported for that component.

Test -- The MAP (maximum allowable pressure - new and cold) is calculated at the test temperature entered.

Impact Tested -- Click here if the material is impact tested. When you click here another box

COMPRESS Help


appears with the temperature at which the test will be performed. Click on the box to change the temperature. COMPRESS may require impact testing if it is required by Code rules.

Material Normalized-- If a UCS material is normalized, the temperature at which impact testing is required is lower than when the material is not normalized (a different impact test exemption curve - see Figure UCS-66 - will be used). COMPRESS will require normalization if required by Code rules.

Produced to Fine Grain Practice -- Check if material is produced to fine grain practice. Materials covered by the Curve B impact test exemption curve of Figure UCS-66 may use Curve C if they are normalized and produced to fine grain practice. Files created in early versions of COMPRESS for Windows will have this switch automatically activated if the "Material Normalized" switch is also activated.

PWHT Performed -- PWHT is normally a global setting. Users will have the option of specifying this as a local or global parameter. For a UCS-66 material, if PWHT (post weld heat treatment) is checked when not required by the ASME code, COMPRESS applies a 30° F reduction in impact testing exemption temperature to the minimum permissible temperature from Figure UCS-66 for P-No. 1 materials. Note that UW-2 requires PWHT to be performed for carbon steel and low alloy steel welded vessels if the vessel is to contain a lethal substance. If you check lethal service in the Design Mode screen COMPRESS enforces this provision of UW-2.

Maximize MDMT/No MAWP -- This will cause COMPRESS to find the lowest MDMT possible for this component. This is done at the expense of the MAWP rating for the component, by taking the coincident stress ratio at design pressure.

Longitudinal Seam X-Ray -- Longitudinal Seam X-Ray -- This refers to the radiography on longitudinal joints. The options are based on UW-11. A limited subset of options are available for pipe material. If a seamless pipe material is selected, the longitudinal seam RT choices are Seamless No RT and User Defined. If a welded pipe material is selected, the longitudinal seam RT choices are Welded pipe, Full UW-11(a) Type 1, and User Defined. The full radiography option is available for the case where full radiography is performed on a welded pipe seam as may be required by paragraphs UCS-57, UNF-57, UHA-33, or UHT-57. For most applications, the Welded pipe option should be specified. If the material selection is a welded and seamless pipe specification, such as SA-333 6 Wld & smls pipe, the longitudinal seam RT choices are Welded pipe, Seamless No RT, Full UW-11(a) Type 1, and User Defined. These options allow the explicit selection of either welded or seamless pipe. If the Welded pipe option is selected, then an additional option switch is provided to indicate whether the longitudinal seam is made with or without filler metal. If filler metal is not used, then the Welded pipe option is the correct selection. If filler metal is used in the longitudinal seam weld, then the complete list of UW-11 radiography options are available. The options provided ensure the correct joint efficiency in the component's UG-27 calculations, the

COMPRESS Help


correct UG-37 joint efficiency E1 for any attached nozzles, and the correct consideration of the joint in the UG-116(e) radiography marking reported in the Setting Summary.

Circumferential Seam X-Ray -- This refers to the radiography on the circumferential joint. The joint efficiencies used are determined by the values entered for Longitudinal Seam X-Ray and Circumferential Seam X-Ray unless defined by the user. If you would like to use a joint efficiency not covered by the standard options, use the User-Defined option at the bottom of the X-Ray list.

Copy Last-- This pushbutton appears in the bottom left corner of the Cylinder screen only if a component has already been created. The Copy Last pushbutton automatically duplicates all information from the last similar component (to the left). If there are no similar components to the left, COMPRESS will copy the next similar component to the right, if one exists. If a similar component has not yet been added to the vessel, COMPRESS will copy all information from the last component added. You can make copy last a default condition in Action/Set Mode/Environment.

Component Commentary -- Anything you type in here will be reported in the Component Commentary section of the report for this component. As examples: a cylinder was made thicker than required because the thicker material was in the shop; a more stringent requirement was met than that required by Code; be sure to inspect the top head extra carefully for this vessel, etc. Select Next or press F3 to accept all values and move to the Cylinder Dimensions screen:

COMPRESS Help


Inner/Outer Diameter -- Select one. Shell Diameter --Input the diameter. Length -- input the length.

Thickness-- Minimum required thicknesses for internal and external pressures are shown in the details box to the right. COMPRESS presents a nominal thickness equal to the next commercial thickness equal to or greater than the minimum thickness.

- The design mode does not permit an entry for thickness less than that required by code rules. If you want to input a thickness less than required for the design, change to rating mode (Action/Set Mode/Calculation).

Trial Length Le -- This input applies when designing for external pressure and is available if you check the Consider Trial Length box. If you input a trial length, COMPRESS designs the cylinder in question for external pressure using this value as the unsupported length value for vacuum design. Using trial length you can quickly try different designs and get a reasonable

COMPRESS Help


spacing for vacuum /reinforcement rings. This is required because when first designing the cylinder, the nominal thickness and the ring spacing are both unknown, but interrelated. Reset trial length to zero when you are finished determining unsupported length, and add the rings after you are finished defining the pressure envelope. The method to use is this: Adjust trial length until it is just smaller than the trial length which would produce a nominal plate thickness equal to that required by the internal pressure. If you are purchasing standard plate thicknesses then this will be the optimum stiffener ring spacing for vacuum design. Note that after you add rings COMPRESS changes the minimum required thickness but not the nominal thickness unless you have clicked the box Find minimum thickness for cylinders.

Number to Add -- You can add any number of identical cylinders to a vessel using this entry. Exempt from minimum thickness requirements per UG-16(b)(2) -- The Division 1 A09 Addenda provides for an exemption to the 1/16" (1.5mm) minimum thickness of pipes and tubes provided they are protected from mechanical damage by some sort of external housing.

Select Pipe or Coupling -- This pushbutton is displayed if the cylinder is made from pipe material. Access it if you want to have COMPRESS look up a particular pipe size and fill in the diameter and nominal thickness. When you select Pipe, the following screen appears:

COMPRESS Help


Choose the pipe or coupling diameter and schedule.

Designing a Cylindrical Shell from a Pipe Material When using pipe materials, COMPRESS will automatically divide all stress values by 0.85 per the notes in Materials Section II, Part D. Longitudinal bending stress calculations for cylinders or trn calculations from UG-37 for nozzle reinforcements will use the stress in the database divided by 0.85. When you use a pipe material, the special rules for fabricating cylinders from pipe will be used by COMPRESS. COMPRESS automatically multiplies the nominal thickness by 0.875 for cylindrical shell design or nozzle neck thickness calculations per UG-45. COMPRESS lists all the pipe sizes indicated in ASME B36.10M-2000 which includes nonstandard schedule sizes. Select the "Standard Schedules Only" button to reduce the list to the standard schedule sizes. Note, for vessels in non-U.S. Customary units the pipe size will include a 'DN' designation.

COMPRESS Help


Transition For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page. The dimensions screen is shown below:

Eccentricity Concentric, Eccentric Up, Eccentric Down for horizontal vessels -- If you want to design an eccentric transition, tag eccentric up or down. The up and down options are identical from a design point of view, but the sketch on the screen reflects your choice. COMPRESS considers eccentric transitions to be one side sloped, the other side parallel to the adjacent cylinder. Eccentric transitions are permitted only for horizontal vessels.

Large End Diameter -- Enter the diameter at the large end.

COMPRESS Help


Overall Length -- Enter the overall axial length of the transition, weld seam to weld seam.

Per ASME Appendix 1-5(g), if the cone half-apex angle is > 30°, a special juncture discontinuity analysis is required. COMPRESS uses the discontinuity analysis presented in Bednar (Ref. 18-2). When this analysis is performed, the following minimum cone axial length (Lmin) is required to eliminate any interaction between the discontinuity stresses: L >= 2*sqrt(Rn*t*cos(alpha)) where t = shell thickness n = cone thickness / cylinder thickness

Has Flare/Has Knuckle -- If the transition has a knuckle or flare, click these boxes to open the appropriate data screens.

Per UG-32(j), the inside knuckle radius (ikr) has the following limitations: ikr greater than or equal to (0.06Do) and ikr greater than or equal to (3*ThkKnuckle).

COMPRESS Help


Ellipsoidal Head For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page. Differences are described below.

Internal Head -- An internal head is enclosed entirely within the vessel and separates two distinct pressure chambers. When an internal head is present in the pressure vessel the Pressure Summary report will contain a separate table for each pressure chamber. Multiple internal heads may be entered.

Minimum Head Thickness -- Minimum required thicknesses for internal and external pressures are shown in the details box to the right. In the input field COMPRESS presents a default value equal to the required thickness of the head determined by the design information and ASME Code rules, and includes the specified total corrosion allowance. Heads are typically manufactured from plate stock with a nominal thickness greater than the minimum thickness (required thickness). Also, head manufacturing processes generally result with some thinning of the material in the knuckle area or in the dished portion of the head, depending upon the manufacturing process used. Thinning or forming allowance is not considered by COMPRESS. The designer should determine what, if any, allowance is necessary. Typically, it is best to let the head manufacturer determine these values based upon their internal practices. COMPRESS performs all calculations for the formed portion of the head based upon the value entered for minimum head thickness. This includes MDMT rating, pressure ratings, and reinforcing area and strength calculations for nozzles located in the head. In general, these calculations should be based on the minimum thickness of the head after forming. Consequently, the designer should enter the expected minimum thickness of the head after forming, as based on the expected original nominal thickness of the plate. Entering the Code required thickness as the "minimum" may result in an overly conservative design.

Straight Flange Length/Nominal Straight Flange Thickness -- COMPRESS calculates the straight flange as a separate object from the head.

Head Ratio (D/2h) -- Refers to the ratio of head diameter to head depth. For an ASME standard ellipsoidal head this ratio is 2.

Details -- Click this to display a box showing the required minimum thickness based on internal and external pressure and the rated MDMT. In rating mode this box displays the MAP and MAWP for the head.

COMPRESS Help


F & D Head For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page. This component is similar to the ellipsoidal head design. , with two additional entries:

Crown Inner Radius -- This always refers to the head inside radius regardless of the inner/outer diameter switch setting. Enter the crown radius in the uncorroded condition. If this input is 0, COMPRESS assumes an inside crown radius = head outer diameter minus 6 inches.

Knuckle Inner Radius-- This always refers to the head inside radius regardless of the inner/outer diameter switch setting. Enter the inside crown radius in the uncorroded condition. If this input is 0, COMPRESS assumes the knuckle radius = 6% of the inside crown radius.

If the head diameter is entered as inner diameter, enter zero for the crown inside radius and knuckle inside radius after the thickness of the head is determined. This allows COMPRESS to recalculate the outer diameter of the head using the correct thickness. After this is done, the assumed knuckle and crown radii will meet UG-32(j).

COMPRESS Help


Hemi Head Design of hemispherical heads is similar to that of ellipsoidal heads. For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page.

Internal Head -- An internal head is enclosed entirely within the vessel and separates two distinct pressure chambers. When an internal head is present in the pressure vessel the Pressure Summary report will contain a separate table for each pressure chamber. Multiple internal heads may be entered.

Details -- Click this to display a box showing the required minimum thickness based on internal and external pressure and the rated MDMT. In rating mode this box displays the MAP and MAWP for the head.

COMPRESS Help


Spherically Dished Cover This component is designed in accordance to ASME Section VIII Division 1 Appendix 1-6 and are only permitted on Division 1 vessels. There are four (4) types of spherically dished covers available. They are designated as types 'a' (a1 or a2), 'b', 'c' and 'd' which correspond to the sketches in appendix 1-6. Type 'a' are a combination of an F&D head and an appendix 2 flange. Currently this type of dished cover must be created by using the F&D head and appendix 2 components. There are three (3) input dialog screens for spherically dished covers.

General Inputs This dialog allows for the specification of the type of dished cover, the design parameters of pressure, temperature, corrosion and radiography as well as the material specification for both the head and flange material. The inputs are similar to inputs for other components.

Flange Data Inputs The second dialog allows for the specification of specific data for the flange portion of the head. This is the same as the Flange Type selection for a body flange.

Spherically Dished Cover Dimensions This dialog has sections for head dimension inputs and flange dimension inputs. The 'Details' button will show or hide a details box with the required flange thickness, required head thickness, rated MDMT, MAWP, MAP and MAEP for the dished cover.

Head Dimension Inputs Crown Inner Radius -- This always refers to the head inside radius regardless of the inner/outer diameter switch setting. Enter the crown radius in the uncorroded condition.

Minimum Head Thickness Minimum thickness for internal and external pressures. COMPRESS presents the minimum required thickness. In design mode the input value must not be less than the required thickness. If the details box is shown the required thicknesses due to internal and external pressure are shown.

COMPRESS Help


Flange Dimension Inputs The flange dimension inputs are similar to the Body Flange Dimension Inputs. The 'live' sketch shows a cross section of the spherically dished cover based on the current inputs. Any dimensional change will be shown in the sketch. Geometry errors will be trapped by the dialog and indicated by a red "Errors" button.

COMPRESS Help


ASME B16.9 Pipe Cap For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page. B16.9 Pipe Caps are a special type of ellipsoidal head. Differences are described below.

Select Pipe Cap (NPS) -- Pipe caps are specified by nominal pipe size, and their internal pressure ratings are that of straight seamless pipe of the same size. Clicking this button will open the Pipe Look-Up dialog. You may select a pipe size and thickness within this dialog, or you may specify these settings manually with the Head Diameter and Nominal Thickness inputs.

Pipe Cap Overall Length, E -- For NPS of 24 and under, the pipe cap overall length, E, is automatically set as specified in ASME B16.9 Table 10, based upon the Limiting Wall Thickness for Length E.

Override automatic lookup of E from Table I-10 -- A user-defined E1 may be entered for NPS greater than 24 per Note 2 of ASME B16.9 Table 10. Note -- When a nozzle is attached to a pipe cap, calculations for this 'modified' pipe cap are done as for an ellipsoidal head.

COMPRESS Help


Bolted Cover For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page. The bolted cover option is not accessed in the same way as other components in COMPRESS. If you select Bolted Cover from the Component menu, the following message appears:

This screen displays the procedure for adding a flat bolted head to a vessel. Since flat bolted covers are not independent components like cylinders, transitions, etc., a different method is used. When designed per UG-34, bolted covers are dependent on the attached flange with respect to bolt circle, gasketing, etc. In COMPRESS, a bolted cover can be designed only in conjunction with an Appendix 2 flange. To add a bolted cover to a flange, the Cover Also option on the Flange screen must be checked. Then COMPRESS presents the Bolted Cover screen:

COMPRESS Help


Input all values in the above screen and click Next>>:

COMPRESS Help


Factor C -- Factor C is the factor from UG-34 and is dependent upon the method of attachment of the head and other items as listed in the appropriate code paragraph. For flanges having full face gaskets, you should select C = .25 (sketch for Figure UG-34).

COMPRESS Help


Welded Cover For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page. The second dialog is shown below:

The welded cover type is selected from the Head sketch type input. In Division 1:

COMPRESS Help


In Division 2:

Various inputs will appear depending on which sketch is selected:

Factor C -- The item selected from this listing corresponds to the appropriate construction as illustrated in ASME code Fig. UG-34.

COMPRESS Help


Increase t for reinforcement per UG-39(d) -- The code allows reinforcement of openings in flat heads to be calculated per the alternative rules in UG-39. If you want to rein-force openings in the flat welded head by an increased thickness (and the opening meets the criteria of UG-34), then check this box.

Head Diameter -- Enter the head diameter (d) as illustrated in UG-34 for the appropriate sketch.

Thickness (t)-- Enter a value for the inner corner radius of the flat head, if applicable. This radius contributes to the overall length of the head as well.

Inner Corner Radius (r) -- Enter a value for the thickness of the flat head. Flange Length (Y) -- Enter a value for the length of the welded cover straight flange, if applicable. No straight flange is added if Y is zero. Minimum length to achieve a 3:1 taper is shown to the right of the box and in the details dialog. If a Sketch (a) or Division 2 Detail (1) type welded cover is selected, the space to the right of the input box instead displays the minimum Y to achieve C = 0.10.

Flange Thickness (tf) -- Enter a value for the thickness of the straight flange. This input is applicable only to UG-34 Sketch (b-1) and Division 2 Table 4.6.1 Detail (2) welded covers.

Head Inset (e) -- The distance that the head is set into the parent cylinder. This input is applicable only to UG-34 Sketch (f) welded covers. The Head corner joint input is available to better detail the weld joint when specifying a UG-34 Sketch (h) or UG-34 Sketch (i) (Division 2 Table 4.6.1 Details 5 and 6). In Division 1:

In Division 2:

COMPRESS Help


Appendix 14 Flat Head When a central opening in a flat head exceeds one-half of the head diameter, use the Component > Appendix 14 Flat Head menu option (Component -> 4.6.4 Flat head with large opening in Division 2) to add the head and central opening. Appendix 14 heads must be located on a cylinder or nozzle in order to complete the calculations. Note that the specific choice to use Appendix 14 is up to the designer and is not automatically done by COMPRESS. For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page. The second dialog is shown below:

COMPRESS Help


Head sketch type -- Figure UG-34 sketches (a), (b-1), (b-2), (d), (g), (h), and (i) weld configurations are available.

Head corner joint -- When Figure UG-34 sketch (h) or (i) are selected, Figure UW-13.2 corner joint corner joint sketches (a) through (f) are available.

Head includes centrally located nozzle -- Deactivate this option to design a flat integral head without an attached nozzle.

Groove Welds are Full Penetration -- The design rules for an opening without an attached nozzle or hub are used when the central nozzle is attached with partial penetration welds .

Nozzle Connection -- Select this option to attach or edit an ASME B16.5/B16.47 flange or Appendix 2 flange to the end of the large central nozzle.

Increase t for reinforcement per UG-39(c)(2) -- As an alternative to the area replacement rules for rim openings, the flat integral head thickness may be increased to provide reinforcement by activating this option switch. For multiple rim openings when the spacing between adjacent openings is less than twice but equal to or greater than 1.25 the average diameter of the pair, the ligament rules of UG-39(e)(2) are used.

User defined inputs -- Selecting this option brings up the dialog shown below, which includes further inputs for nozzle and shell values.

Rim openings may be added after the integral flat is created using the Nozzle menu option. Rim opening spacing checks per UG-39(b)(2) and (b)(3) are automatically performed.

COMPRESS Help


Body Flange Select Body Flange from the Component menu to display a submenu. If you select ASME B16.5/16.47 Flange from the Flange submenu, the following screen appears:

See the Nozzle Dialog section for more information on ASME B16.5/16.47 flanges. If you select Appendix 2 from the Flange submenu, the following screen appears:

COMPRESS Help


For the common definitions located on the first dialog, see the cylinder page.

Corrosion: bore -- This is the corrosion allowance on the inside of the flange. For an integral type this means that the "B" dimension entered is increased by two times the bore corrosion allowance.

Corrosion: flange -- This corrosion allowance is applied to the flange thickness (t) dimension as shown on the weld neck integral sketch. The flange thickness is reduced by the flange corrosion allowance on the flange.

User Defined Moment on Flange / Radial Load on Flange -- If the flange is attached to a cylinder or cone COMPRESS considers any bending moments and/or weights supported by the flange. COMPRESS calculates the local bending moment and overhead weight and determines an equivalent pressure to use for designing (per Modern Flange Design). If you select "use these values", COMPRESS uses these user inputs instead. A positive force / weight is taken as compressive, a negative force / weight is taken as tensile. A

COMPRESS Help


negative (-) radial load on the flange is additive to the internal pressure. A positive (+) radial load on the flange is additive to external pressure. When attaching flanges to a conical section without a knuckle or flare radius, the superposition of the discontinuity stresses is unknown. COMPRESS calculates the discontinuity stresses as if the cone were attached directly to the adjacent cylinder. Whether these calculations are conservative depends on the geometry of the attached flange. If you select Next the following screen appears:

Flange Types -- At the top left of this screen is a drop down box listing the types of flanges available in COMPRESS, shown in the following table. Note that Appendix 2 deals only with flanges having gasket contact entirely within inside the bolt circle. For all full face gasketed flanges, COMPRESS uses the modified ASME Appendix 2 analysis listed in Modern Flange Design.

COMPRESS Help


Flange Types

If your flange construction matches one of the sketches listed below, use the COMPRESS listing opposite.

Ring type integral

Sketches (7), (8), (9), (10)

Ring type full face gasket Sketches (3a), (4a), (4b) - (Ref. 17) Ring type loose

Sketches (3a), (4a), (4b)

Weld neck integral

Sketches (5), (6), (6a), (6b)

Slip on full face gasket

Sketches (3), (4), (4c) - (Ref. 17)

Slip on loose

Sketches (3), (4), (4c)

Slip on integral

Sketches (8a), (9a), (10a)

Lap joint loose

Sketches (1), (1a), (2a)

Split loose

Sketches (1), (1a), (2a)

Reverse loose

ASME code Fig 2-13

Gasket Facing Sketches -- At the top of the Flange screen is a second drop down box listing the available gasket facings, corresponding to ASME Table 2-5.2. Select the desired gasket facing sketch. Note that the icon at the upper right corner displays the gasket facing sketch selected.

Attached To -- Specify the component to which the flanged is attached. If you attach the flange to a cylindrical shell or transition, then COMPRESS considers this "body" flange to be a line of support (bulkhead) for external pressure calculations. COMPRESS considers a body flange to be like a head, that is, it provides support, but no further calculations to verify the moment of inertia of the flange itself are performed.

Cover Also -- Check this box if a bolted cover plate is required. COMPRESS will present further design windows to design a bolted cover.

Gasket Data -- Gasket Description - select a gasket description from the drop down list or type in a user specified description. If a predefined gasket is selected then the 'm' and 'y' values will be set based on the selection. The gasket factors 'm' and 'y' can be overridden by the user. Select the 'ASME Gasket Details' button to open a help screen which contains suggested 'm' and 'y' factors and other data for a variety of gasket types. This data is from ASME Div 1, Appendix 2, Table 2-5.1. Select the 'Edit Gasket List' button to open the Gasket dialog. This screen provides a list of predefined standard gaskets and allows the user to input user defined gaskets. Selecting a gasket from this list and clicking 'OK' will update the gasket data on the flange type dialog. The gasket thickness can also be specified in the 'Gasket Thickness T' input and is

COMPRESS Help


syncronized between mating flanges.

No Rigidity Calculations for Seismic load cases -- This switch will suppress the Appendix 2 flange rigidity calculations for the seismic load case. Enforcing flange rigidity requirements in conjuction with seismic loading may be overly conservative. This switch allows the user to suppress these calculations.

Rigidity Factor -- Rigidity calculations are useful for those cases where leakage is a concern. Suggested values for the rigidity factor are listed in the 2004 edition Appendix S2(c) and are 0.2 for loose type flanges and 0.3 for integral or optional flange types. For the A05 & A06 addenda and 2007 editions of the ASME code the rigidity calculations are mandatory and no option switch is provided. For the A08 addenda an option switch is provided to omit the rigidity calculations based on Appendix 2, para. 2-14(a). This exemption is limited by service restrictions given in 2-14(a). It is recommended that a rigidity analysis be performed when using materials where the "high stress" values have been selected. These materials are typically identified in the COMPESS materials database by including "high stress" in the material specification. This indicates that a note in II-D warns that small material deformations are possible at the allowable stress levels listed. Using these higher allowable stresses maybe a cause of flange leakage. As a general rule of thumb it is also a good idea to apply a rigidity analysis when designing "large" (say 48" and over diameter) flanges. If rigidity calculations are performed in design mode COMPRESS calculates the rigidity index. If the rigidity index J>1, COMPRESS increases the flange thickness until the index value, J, is less than 1.

No Rigidity calculations per App. 2-14(a) -- For designs using the 2008 edition this optional checkbox is available. If you mark this checkbox, COMPRESS will not perform flange rigidity calcs per ASME Appendix 2-14 if the design conditions meet the service restrictions given in 2-14(a).

Apply Appendix S-2 Rigidity Calculations -- For designs using the 2004 edition this optional checkbox is available. If you mark this checkbox, COMPRESS will perform flange rigidity calcs per ASME Appendix S-2. Appendix S-2 calculations are optional per code rules and are used to control flange leakage by limiting flange rotation.

Apply Appendix 2-14 Rigidity Calculations -- This optional checkbox is available when a loose-type flange is selected for designs using the 2008 edition or later. Activate this option to apply Appendix 2-14 Rigidity Calculations.

Bolt Material -- Click the down arrow to access a help screen listing all bolts in the materials stresses database. Only bolt specifications are listed in this help screen.

User Defined Bolt Material -- Click this button to specify user defined material data. Bolt Type -- Select which type is to be used. These types correspond to the types in the

COMPRESS Help


bolts database. Metric bolts may be used even if the U.S. Customary system of units is being used by COMPRESS.

Bolt Corrosion -- Input any corrosion allowance for the bolting. Note the corrosion applies to the radius, total bolt corrosion is twice the input value. For most pressure vessel applications this will be zero, for some heat exchanger applications where there are internal flanges an appropriate value should be input.

Flange Dimension Inputs The title and inputs displayed on the next screen vary according to the flange type selected. For example, if you had selected Ring Type Integral:

COMPRESS Help


Flange Wizard

The Flange Wizard provides the user with several options to optimize the flange design.

Maximum bolt count -- designs the flange with a bolt count not to exceed the value specified.

Minimum bolt diameter -- designs the flange with a bolt diameter greater than or equal to the value specified.

Optimize design - allow gasket / bolt hole clearance changes -- This option automatically designs the flange with an optimal flange thickness, bolt size, and number of bolts. The gasket OD location is initially set based on COMPRESS's recommended gasket / bolt hole clearance but may be repositioned to provide the optimal design. This option behaves the same as the flange wizard functionality in previous Builds.

Maintain gasket / bolt hole clearance -- This option allows the designer to either use COMPRESS's recommended gasket / bolt hole clearance or to specify a user defined gasket / bolt hole clearance. With this option, the flange is automatically optimized but with a fixed gasket OD location relative to the bolt hole edge.

Look Up ASME B16.5/16.47 Dimensions

COMPRESS Help


This button will allow the user to select a standard ASME flange which will be used to set the applicable dimensions for the current appendix 2 flange. The graphic on this dialog corresponds to the flange type chosen. The icon in the lower right corner shows the gasket facing sketch you have selected. The inputs are:

Flange OD, A -- Enter the outside diameter of the flange. If slotted bolt holes are used, A would be entered as the diameter to the bottom of the slots.

Flange ID, B, new -- This dimension is fixed and not changeable for this flange type. Bolt Circle, C -- Enter the bolt circle diameter. Gasket OD -- Enter the outside diameter of the gasket ring. Gasket ID -- Enter the inside diameter of the gasket ring. Hub thickness g0, new -- This dimension fixed for this flange. Hub thickness g1, new -- This dimension fixed for this flange. Upper Fillet Weld, h1 -- Enter the fillet weld leg size. This is used as the hub length h. In design mode COMPRESS does not allow a fillet weld size less than that required in ASME Appendix 2, Figure 2-4.

Groove Weld, w -- Because this flange is an integral type a groove weld is required. Lower Fillet Weld H -- Enter the weld size. Length e -- Input the length of the flange as indicated on the graphic. In design mode COMPRESS does not allow a fillet weld size less than that required in ASME Appendix 2, Figure 2-4.

Number of Bolts -- Enter the total number of bolts on this flange. Normally they are entered in multiples of 4. The overall length of the flange assumed by COMPRESS does not consider the type of gasket selected. If you are using a raised face or ring-type gasket, add the necessary height to the overall length. For example, if you are using a standard raised face flange, add 1/16" to the overall length.

Flange Thickness, t -- Enter the flange thickness as indicated on the graphic. In design mode COMPRESS does not permit an entry that is not adequate for the design conditions.

Bolt diameter -- In design mode COMPRESS will not permit an inadequate bolt size to be entered.

COMPRESS Help


Appendix 2-5(e) Full Available Bolt Load -- Activate this option to use the full available bolt load for the flange design in order to protect against abuse from overbolting. Note that when checked, this option will apply to the mating flange as well.

Other Flange Types If you choose a flange type other than Ring Type Integral, the graphic illustration changes to reflect your choice. A dimensional lookup is provided for weld neck, slip-on loose, and lap joint type flanges. In addition to the graphics differing, the following additional inputs appear as the various flange types are selected:

Dimension G -- For a lap joint or split loose flange, the diameter G is taken to be the midpoint of contact between the flange ring and the lap, regardless of the gasket location. See ASME Fig. 2-4, Sketch (1).

Contact OD -- This input appears for weld neck flanges. Hub Length, h -- This input appears (instead of fillet weld, h) when weld neck integral, slip-on full face gasket, slip-on loose, slip-on integral, or reverse flanges are selected.

Lap Thickness, tl -- The thickness of the lap part of the flange. This only appears for a lap or split loose flange.

Shell Thickness -- The shell thickness. This may be automatically supplied by COMPRESS depending on flange type.

Flange ID, B' -- This input appears when a reverse flange is selected. B' refers to the inside diameter of the opening in the reverse flange. See ASME Fig. 2-13.

Slotted design -- When the Slotted Design option is selected, COMPRESS will calculate the A dimension to the base of the slot. The entry for Flange OD should reflect the actual outside diameter of the flange. Applicable for Ring Type Integral, Ring Type Loose, Weld Neck Integral, Slip On Loose, Slip On Integral and Lap Joint Loose flange types.

Type of Flange per Fig.2-4 -- Use this selction to indicate the flange attachment configuration.

Raised Face OD, Rf -- Sets the raised face diameter for a flange with an inner raised face. This input is available when a facing sketch of Sketch 1a Right, Sketch 1a Left, or Confined Gasket-Raised Face is selected.

Raised Face ID, Rf -- Sets the raised face diameter for a flange with a confined raised face. This input is available when a facing sketch of Confined Gasket-Confined Face is

COMPRESS Help


selected.

Raised Face Height, trf -- Sets the raised face height. This input is available when a facing sketch of Sketch 1a Right, Sketch 1a Left, or Confined Gasket is selected.

Single Split Ring/Pair of Split Rings This switch appears when a split loose flange is selected. If the flange is a single split flange, select single split ring. This corresponds to the description of a single split flange in ASME Appendix 2-9(a). If the flange consists of two split rings, select pair of split rings. This corresponds to the construction described in ASME Appendix 2-9(b).

COMPRESS Help


Rings Select Rings from the Component menu:

This screen allows you to position vacuum/reinforcement rings on the vessel. COMPRESS automatically calculates the unsupported lengths for cylinders and transitions based on positioning of the rings. Note vacuum rings will not be considered as saddle stiffener rings. Saddle stiffener rings must be added through the saddle dialog .

Identifier -- Enter a name for this group of rings. Material -- Enter the material for the vacuum/reinforcement rings in the field provided or select a material from those listed in the drop down box.

Number of Rings in this Group -- Enter the number of rings in the group. All rings in this group will be identical.

Location of Rightmost Ring -- The neutral axis of the first in this ring group is positioned at the specified distance from the datum line. If a ring in a group is near a cone to cylinder juncture it is considered to act as a juncture reinforcement ring. Such a ring is used to satisfy the juncture reinforcement requirements of Appendix 1-5 and 1-8. COMPRESS also considers this ring to act as a vacuum stiffener ring regardless of the status of this checkbox. Per Appendix 1-5 and 1-8 a ring is considered to be near the juncture if its

COMPRESS Help


centroid is located within 0.25* sqrt(Rt) of the juncture.

Ring Spacing -- This is the distance between rings (neutral axis to neutral axis). Corrosion Allowance -- The corrosion allowance is applied individually to each exposed ring surface. A ring surface in contact with the vessel is considered to be exposed to corrosion if it is attached by intermittent welding. COMPRESS will determine the corroded ring cross sectional area and moment of inertia and use these corroded values for all required ring calculations.

Ring Inside Vessel -- Specify internal rings here. Find Minimum Thickness for Cylinders -- This option will automatically reduce cylinder thickness to the minimum nominal size based on UG-28 for cases where placement of the rings governs.

Max Depth to Thickness Ratio -- In design mode COMPRESS will select a ring from the structures database that provides sufficient inertia per UG-29(a). In addition the ring may be subject to lateral buckling. Limiting the maximum depth to thickness of the ring selected is the means provided by COMPRESS to prevent lateral buckling. Typical values for this input can be found in "Design of Weldments", Blodgett 2.12-4 table 4.

Weld Size -- This is the stiffener ring to shell fillet weld leg size in the new condition. COMPRESS calculates the minimum required weld size per the rules in UG-30.

Weld Spacing -- Enter the distance between toes of welds. This applies for noncontinuous welding only. See the ASME Code Figure UG-30.

Weld Length -- These inputs apply to rings attached by intermittant welding. Weld spacing is the distance between adjacent weld segments. See dimension S in FIG UG-30 for more details. Weld length is the length of each of the individual weld segments.

In-Line Intermittant/Staggered Intermittant/Continuous one side, Intermittant other side/Continuous Both Sides -- Specifies how the ring is welded to the vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Select Next to accept all values and proceed to the ring selection dialog.

Vacuum / Reinforcement Ring Types -- An icon shows the ring type being considered. The minimum size for each type is highlighted in the table. In design mode COMPRESS calculates the ring sizes required based on a composite, corroded ring/shell section. These available sizes are taken from Materials Structures Database. This initial selection can be overridden with a larger size by selecting one from the list. In rating mode, COMPRESS takes the section specified and rates it for external pressure. The pressure summary is a convenient way to view vacuum ratings of stiffener rings.

User Defined -- If the message 'No User Defined' appears in the vertical list box when the User Defined type is chosen, it means that there are no user defined sections in the structures database. User defined structures allow the use of structures other than the types listed.

COMPRESS Help


Action Menu The Action menu allows you to perform various operations as well as set generic vessel design parameters:

Undo This option allows you to undo your last change to the vessel. This may also be done by using the hotkey "Ctrl + Z".

Redo This option allows you to redo any change that has been undone with the Undo function. This may also be done by using the hotkey "Ctrl + Y".

Edit History Drop-Down Box

COMPRESS Help

Action Menu < 8 - 1 >

The Edit History Drop-Down Box is available on the Edit Toolbar. Changes made to the model are logged in this drop-down box. Selecting a particular item will bring the model back to the state it was in when the selected change was made. This feature makes it easier to undo or redo changes to the model.

Edit The Edit option allows you to modify any existing component, nozzle, attachment, support, code, or loading.

Delete The Delete option allows you to remove any component, nozzle, attachment, support, code, or loading. Simply choose the component and click delete. You can also delete components by pressing the delete key and choosing from the menu presented. For heat exchangers, the Delete Component dialog only lists the components that may be safely deleted without corrupting the heat exchanger file. Note that the Tree View will list all components, but only the components that may be safely deleted are selectable.

Insert Option The Insert option is used to insert a component between existing vessel components. Selecting this option lets you change a design already started. A shortcut to this option is to press the insert key.

Set Datum Option The datum line is also called the "work line". COMPRESS references the datum line when you add components to the vessel. The datum line is typically set by fabricators offset about 6 inches from either the top or bottom seam in a vessel. (It's offset from the seam so that it will not be welded over). Sometimes it is located at the tangent line or at the base of the vessel. You can change the location of the datum line after the vessel is designed.

Perform Code Calcs To generate a report either click this option or press F3. See the report section for more detail.

Set Mode

COMPRESS Help


This pulldown controls much of the way COMPRESS operates. Each tab controls an aspect of program operation. See the set mode page for more detail.

Global Change Use this option to edit the vessel as a whole, or globally. For example, you could change the design pressure for all vessel components at once. After making a global change, COMPRESS considers the new information and recalculates the entire model, reconciling all inputs. See the global change page for more detail.

Camera Settings The Camera Settings submenu controls COMPRESS' interactive move modes and other camera controls for moving and viewing your vessel model in two and three dimensional space. See the camera settings page for more detail.

Rendering Style The Rendering Style submenu controls how the vessel is drawn in the design window: whether in monochrome or color, as a simple geometric shape or an intricately defined and shaded vessel.

Min/Max --Select this option to draw only a min/max box: Points -- Select this option to draw only the vertices: Wire Frame -- Select this option to render only a wire frame: Unshaded -- Select this option to render a flat and unshaded surface. Mark this menu option with a check mark if you want to draw the backface of the polygon.

Display Tags Use the sub-menu to set which tags are displayed on the vessel. Options are 'Nozzle', 'Component' and 'Dimension' tags. Component tags include overall vessel dimensions. Dimensions tags show overall vessel dimensions and end elevation dimensions for main vessel components. The main tool bar includes buttons for toggling these dimensions.

Network Key Usage This will displays the number of available licenses for the various Codeware products.

COMPRESS Help


Create Vessel Wizard Defaults file This option will use the settings from the currently active vessel to create a new vessel wizard defaults file. This is useful for saving vessel defaults from existing vessels. The file should have a 'cwd' extension. See the Vessel Wizard help file for more information.

General Arrangement Drawing COMPRESS can generate a two dimensional view of the current vessel or heat exchanger file, referred to as the "General Arrangement Drawing." The sub-menu under this option becomes available when general arrangement view is the current view. To generate the general arrangement drawing and switch to its view, press F10 or select the icon from the toolbar.

Export --Select this option to export general arrangement drawing to ACAD dxf/dwg or wmf image format.

Zoom In --Select this option to zoom in general arrangement drawing. . Zoom Out --Select this option to zoom out general arrangement drawing. Zoom All --Select this option to reset general arrangement drawing to full screen. Refresh--Select this option to redraw general arrangement drawing with current design data. Display --Select this option to turn on or off design data, dimensions, nozzle tags or center-lines in general arrangement drawing.

Edit--Select this option to edit general arrangement drawing. This option is useful when an automatically generated drawing needs minor manual changes like moving some dimensions to reduce clutter. This option should be used only after a design is completed. COMPRESS does not merge manual changes with auto-generated general arrangement. See the Edit General Arrangement for more information.

Save sketch -- Select this option to save the general arrangement drawing as a .skt file. This option is useful when there manual changes done on a drawing. When COMPRESS .cw7 file is saved, general arrangement drawing is not saved with it. As a result any manual changes done on

COMPRESS Help


a drawing cannot be retrieved when COMPRESS file is loaded.

Load sketch -- Select this option to load a general arrangement drawing that was saved as a .skt file. This is option is useful to print or export a general arrangement drawing that was changed manually after design was completed. You can zoom in and out of drawing by pressing the CTRL key and scrolling the wheel mouse, right clicking the mouse changes the cursor to a hand which enables panning the drawing.

COMPRESS Help


Set Mode Select the Set Mode dialog from the 'Action' menu or by pressing F7. This dialog has the following pages accesible through the tree menu on its left side: Calculation -General 1 -General 2 -Nozzles Defaults -General -Flanges -Exchanger Design -Long Seams -Nozzles -Elbow Connections -Platform and Ladder -Testing -Welding -Units Environment General Arrangement Options -3D Display -Updates API 510 (Available for INSPECT only) -Calculations -Display -Automatic CML Population Reporting -General -PDF Reports Solid Model Each page controls an aspect of program operation.

COMPRESS Help


Calculation - General 1 The calculation page sets calculational defaults:

Vessel Design Mode -- Get Thickness From Pressure (Design Mode) -- In design mode COMPRESS calculates required thicknesses to satisfy Code requirements. In Design Mode: If you enter a thickness smaller than the required value COMPRESS selects a nominal thickness equal to or greater than the required thickness. The values available for nominal plate thicknesses are dependent on the design units selected. In U.S. Customary units, the available thicknesses are: 1/16, 1/8, 3/16, 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 7/16, 1/2, 9/16, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, 1, 1 1/8, 1 1/4, 1 3/8, 1 1/2, 1 5/8, 1 3/4, 1 7/8, 2, 2 1/4, 2 1/2,...

COMPRESS Help


In SI and MKS units the increment is 1 mm. User defined thickness increment for plate - Under the Vessel Options page, users can specify the incremental value for nominal plate thicknesses. If you enter a thickness larger than the required value COMPRESS accepts the value entered.

Some materials, depending on thickness, may require full radiography. When doing a new design the thickness is initially undefined and it is not possible for you to know whether or not the radiography specified is in compliance with Table UCS-57/UNF-57. After the thicknesses have been selected COMPRESS checks to see if the radiography complies with Code requirements. If not, file input will be updated.

Vessel Design Mode -- Get Pressure Rating -- In rating mode, you may enter any component thickness; COMPRESS will not override your inputs. The pressure rating for the component being input is generally shown in the details box. When all inputs are complete, COMPRESS calculates the pressure rating according to all requirements of the ASME code. To see the vessel rating, view the pressure summary from the report screen. COMPRESS also determines the rated MDMT for the vessel. Required thickness values based on the input design conditions are reported.

In rating mode, COMPRESS automatically forces impact testing on UCS-66 materials for material thicknesses greater than 4".

Cone-Shell Juncture Calculations U-2(g) stress calculations for cone half apex >30o only -- When this option is selected COMPRESS performs a Boardman analysis only when the cone half-apex angle is greater than 30°.

U-2(g) stress calculations for all cones -- this option causes COMPRESS to perform a Boardman analysis of cone to shell junctures for all cones present in the design. Junctures having knuckles or flares are not affected by this setting.

Junctures act as lines of support -- Click this box and COMPRESS will treat cone to cylinder junctures as lines of support in vacuum calculations. The larger the value of alpha, the more effective is the cone as a line of support. This method is the traditional assumption in the ASME Code.

Limit MAWP -- These inputs allow you to put a ceiling on the MAWP used when calculating vessels for the worst case of MAWP. These inputs allow equipment that is "external" to the cur-

COMPRESS Help


rent design to control the MAWP. Also, certain geometries that are not supported by COMPRESS can be broken into two separate files, and using this option one model can govern the MAWP of the other. In rating mode these numbers must be greater than design pressure for this feature to have any effect. Entering a MAWP limit 'for all chambers' applies to all chambers of any vessel that is not a heat exchanger. To limit MAWP for a heat exchanger, enter separate MAWP limits for the tube side and shell side chambers. The default for these entries is zero, in which case COMPRESS calculates MAWP in the normal way.

Do not investigate hot shut down (cold shut down only) -- COMPRESS automatically considers the case in which a vessel is depressurized while being subjected to the maximum external loading (such as wind or earthquake). This check applies to vertical vessels designed for internal pressure. Click this box to turn off consideration of hot shut down. If the hot shut-down condition is not considered, the operating procedure for the vessel must be such that the vessel is never de-pressurized while subject to the governing loading. (Such a vessel would not be shut down in the middle of a hurricane, for example).

Do Not Consider Additional ASCE Load Combinations 7 and 8 -- See section 2.4.1 of ASCE 7-98, 7-02, and 7-05 for list of Load Combinations. This checkbox indicates if load combinations 7 (wind) and 8 (seismic) are to be investigated in addition to the always considered case 5. Combinations 7 and 8 specifically apply to the tensile side of the vessel where the uplift forces oppose the vessel weight. This option affects only ASCE Building Codes 7-98, 7-02, and 7-05, and IBC Codes 2000 and 2003. Section 12.4.2.3 of ASCE 7-05 describes Load Combinations 5 and 8 in greater detail than 2.4.1. Please note that Load Combinations 3, 4, and 5 in ASCE 7-98 are renumbered to 5, 7, and 8, respectively, in later codes.

Do Not perfrom Appendix 2 flange rigidity calculations for seismic load case -- This switch will suppress the Appendix 2 flange rigidity calculations for the seismic load case. Enforcing flange rigidity requirements in conjuction with seismic loading may be overly conservative. This switch sets the default value for this setting. The flange dialog includes a switch for setting this value on an individual flange basis.

Perform Appendix 2 flange rigidity calculations for the MAP condition -- This switch will cause Appendix 2 flange rigidity calculations to be performed for the MAP condition.

Use ASME B30.20 for lift lug allowable stresses -- This option sets the allowable tensile stress value for lift lug calculations to be 1/3 of the yield strength. Other allowable stresses are ratioed from this value. This option permits setting this as the default for lift lug allowable stresses.

COMPRESS Help


Consider strut in tail lug/base ring calculation -- This option provides the ability to specify details for a strut in the skirt base ring stress calculation for tail lugs attached to base rings. This provides the user with the ability to specify if a strut should be considered when the base ring is overstressed. The cross-sectional will have to be specified when detailing the tailing lug.

Consider brace plate weld in weld stress calculations -- This option will include the weld from the brace plate for the weld stress calculations. The brace plate weld will be included when calculating the radius of Centroid Location(r) and the Polar Moment of Area (J).

Calculation - General 2 This page is used to specify various calculation options:

COMPRESS Help


Cylindrical shells made from pipe are entered as minimum thickness -- Use this setting to prevent COMPRESS from automatically deducting 12.5% from pipe thickness for mill under tolerance. This setting applies to cylinder components only. Nozzles made from pipe are affected in the Nozzle Calculation page.

ASME B16.9 Fittings are entered as minimum thickness -- Use this setting to prevent COMPRESS from automatically deducting 12.5% from pipe thickness for mill under tolerance.

User defined thickness increment for plate -- Users can specify their own incremental value for nominal plate thicknesses.

Corrosion weight loss -- Users can specify effect of corrosion loss on vessel weight on a percentage basis.

Round stress values per ASME II-D Table 1A Note (b) 2007 Edition forward -- Use this setting to use the rounding rules for interpolated stress values per ASME II-D Table 1A Note (b) 2007 Edition for full user defined materials. If the control is not activated, the rounding rules prior to 2007 are used to permit a direct interpolation of stress values.

Force 2:1 heads to use UG-32 formulas -- Use this setting to use UG-32 preferentially over App. 1-4(c) formulas for ellipsoidal heads with D/2h ratio of 2:1 and diameter based on inner surface.

Force F&D heads to use UG-32 formulas -- Use this setting to use UG-32 preferentially over App. 1-4(d) formulas for torispherical heads in which the knuckle radius is 6% of the inside crown radius and the inside crown radius equals outside diameter of the skirt.

Force Appendix 1-2 formulas for cylinder calculations (2009 Addenda) -- Use this setting to force cylinder calculations to use Appendix 1-2 equations in lieu of those in UG-27(c).

Force Appendix 1-3 formulas for spherical shell calculations (2009 Addenda) -- Use this setting to force hemispherical head calculations to use Appendix 1-3 equations in lieu of those in UG-27(d).

Nozzles use PVP-399 for WRC stress intensity factor and hydrotest stress -- The nozzle hydrotest PL stress calculation now uses Division 2 Part 4.5. This option switch allows the selection of either Division 2 Part 4.5 or PVP 399 as the calculation method. Note that the Division 2 Part 4.5 method is not permissible for Code Editions previous to the 2007 Edition.

Limit allowable compressive stress to vacuum chart limit -- Use this setting to ensure the allowable axial compressive stress value does not exceed the limiting value from the vacuum chart. If the design temperature exceeds the vacuum chart limit the allowable axial compressive stress is determined from the minimum of the allowable tensile stress and the allowable axial compressive stress calculated from Jawad & Farr GUIDEBOOK 1998 (Eq. 2.25). The value determined from Jawad & Farr may exceed the vacuum chart limit. Selecting this option will also limit the axial compressive stress to the vacuum chart's limiting value.

COMPRESS Help


Use ASME B30.20 for lift lug allowable stresses -- Use this setting to use the allowable stress values per ASME B30.20.

Consider strut in tail lug / base ring calculation -- Use this setting to include a strut in the tail lug / base ring calculation in addition to the standard tail lug / base ring calculation.

Consider brace plate weld in weld stress calculations -- Use this setting to consider a brace plate weld in the weld stress calculations.

Local Stress Calculation method - nozzles, clips and lugs -- The option to use WRC 537 or WRC 107 is set on a per vessel basis. Select the Save Defaults button to retain the selection for new files.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Calculation Design Nozzles For -- There are four optional bases for nozzle design in design mode (in rating mode different options are presented):

COMPRESS Help


Design Nozzles for -- The pressure and temperature basis for nozzle calculations is set here. Note that nozzle calculations will behave differently depending on whether the vessel is in Design Mode or Rating Mode. In Design Mode (Get Thickness from Pressure), nozzles, welds and reinforcement areas will be sized based on the selected basis for pressure and temperature. In Rating Mode (Get Pressure Rating), the nozzles, welds and reinforcement areas will NOT be re-sized and calculations will be performed at the specified dimensions. If the pressure is too high, a deficiency will be reported.

The nozzle MAWP, MAP and MAEP are calculated based on the option switches selected in the Maximum Pressure section of the Calculation - General 1 page. You may choose to report the nozzle calculations at design pressure, maximum pressure, or both by using the options in the Conditions(s) Included in the Nozzle Reports section of the Reporting page.

Design P Only -- The design pressure and temperature are used as the basis for nozzle calculations and the corroded condition is used to calculate nozzle welds and reinforcement areas. By default, the design pressure and temperature for the component to which the nozzle is attached are used as the initial basis for the nozzle calculation. If user defined pressure values are entered, those values will be used instead.

Chamber MAWP -- COMPRESS first determines the MAWP for the vessel, then uses it as the pressure and temperature basis while performing nozzle calculations. The corroded condition is used to size nozzle welds and reinforcement areas.

Larger of MAWP or MAP -- COMPRESS first determines the MAWP (hot and corroded) and MAP (new and cold) of the vessel and then calculates the nozzles for both conditions. The worst case is used as the pressure and temperature basis.

Nozzle wall inputs are minimum thickness -- With this option the nozzle wall thickness entered is the value used in calculation without reduction for mill tolerance. This option is used when an actual, measured, nozzle thickness is available, as with existing vessels.

Nozzles are entered as outer diameter -- For existing vessels it is usually more convenient to specify this dimension, since the inside diameter may have changed due to corrosion.

Show limits of reinforcement in report sketch -- The limits of reinforcement will be shown

COMPRESS Help


in the sketch of the nozzle in the report with this option.

Remove trailing zeros from dimensions on nozzle sketches -- Trailing zeros for dimensions found in nozzle dialog and report sketches will not be shown.

Large opening reinforcement calculations-- Beginning with the 2007 edition of ASME section VIII division I, large openings in cylinders and cones can be calculated using either the rules from Appendix 1-7 or Appendix 1-10. Use this option to set the default calculation method for large openings. Note that this is a general default setting and that each nozzle can be set to use either calculation option. See the Nozzle Calculation Option dialog for more information.

Use code case 2236 if opening fails 1-7(b) -- This option will cause COMPRESS to use Code Case 2236 if a large opening does not meet the requirements of Appendix 1-7(b). When Code Case 2236 is used COMPRESS will display a message in the deficiencies summary as well as in the appropriate nozzle report. The use of Code Case 2236 in lieu of the rules in Appendix 1-7(b) requires that the user of COMPRESS verify that the large opening is adequate by either having had successful experience with the specific design or by performing an analysis conforming to the requirements of U-2(g). Note: Code Case 2236 expired on December 6, 1999. Use only if considering older vessels.

Full nozzle area replacement -- This option causes all area removed to be replaced; in other words excess thickness in the shell will not be credited towards reinforcement of the opening. Internally it sets the required thickness tr from UG-37 equal to the nominal thickness of the vessel wall t when performing nozzle calculations. This option is above and beyond the requirements of the ASME Code.

Consider longitudinal stress in UG-37(1) shell 'tr' calculation (vertical vessels) -- This option causes COMPRESS to consider windward and leeward longitudinal loadings in the determination of shell required thickness tr per UG-37(a). The largest calculated tr value from circumferential stress or longitudinal loading will be used in the area calculations. This option applies to vertical vessels only.

Use Appendix 1-9 in lieu of UG-37-- This option causes COMPRESS to use the Appendix 19 rules in lieu the internal pressure requirements in UG-37 as stated in UG-36(c)2(c), provided that the nozzle meets the requirements.

Draw Lower Groove Weld Bevel Out -- Check this option if groove welds should be drawn bevel out (welded from outside of vessel) in the nozzle cross-section screen. Default setting is bevel in if unchecked. This setting also affects how groove welds are drawn in VDP. Selecting the "Update All" button will affect the change for current design.

Groove Welds are Full Penetration -- Checking this switch directs COMPRESS to specify full penetration nozzle-to-shell and nozzle-to-pad groove welds as applicable when creating nozzles. Selecting the "Update All" button will affect the change for current design.

COMPRESS Help


General Defaults This page is used to set default values for many common inputs. New components will default to these values as applicable unless a feature such as 'Copy Last' is enabled.

ASME Division -- COMPRESS includes an option to select the ASME division for new documents created when COMPRESS starts. This allows users who have both Division 1 and Division 2 licences to select their preferred default ASME division.

Design Data -- This area includes default values for internal/external pressure, inner/outer corrosion, and material inputs, which are common to most pressure chamber components.

Vessel -- This area includes common component options such as diameter, inner- or outerdiameter design, horizontal or vertical vessel orientation, MDMT, the specific gravity of the operating liquid, and vessel ambient temperature.

Cylinders and Transitions, and Heads Defaults -- The remaining two areas include component-specific default values. For a more detailed explanation of how each of these inputs specifically applies to the various components available within COMPRESS, refer to the Component section of this document.

COMPRESS Help


Flange Defaults

Flange Defaults -- Set default values relating to flange type and gasket specification in this area. For a more detailed explanation of how each of these inputs specifically applies to the design of flanges within COMPRESS, refer to the Flange section of this document.

Disable ASME B16.5 para 5.4.3 warning for Class 150 flanges -- This option disables the warning which appears in the Deficiencies Report for all ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanges and states "For Class 150 flanges, ASME B16.5 para. 5.4.3 recommends gaskets to be in accordance with Annex C, Table C1, Group No. I."

Flange Wizard Defaults -- You may set default values for maximum bolt count, minimum bolt

COMPRESS Help


diameter, and gasket / bolt clearance options in this area. For a description of Flange Wizard inputs, see the Flange Wizard section of this document

Bolt Defaults -- Set default bolt material, bolt corrosion, and bolt type in this area of the dialog.

Exchanger Design Defaults This page is used to reduce the amount of data entry required when creating a heat exchanger by directing COMPRESS to make design assumptions for various corrosion allowances, MDMTs and design temperatures and to remove the selected inputs from the appropriate dialogs. The inputs removed during the design process will be available to view or edit after the design process is complete.

COMPRESS Help


Tube Design Temperature -- The tube design temperature will be set equal to the higher of the shell side and tube side design temperatures.

Tubesheet Design Temperature -- The tubesheet design temperature will be set equal to the higher of the shell side and tube side design temperatures.

Floating Channel Assembly Design Temperature -- The floating tubesheet channel design temperature will be set equal to the higher of the shell side and tube side design temperatures.

Tube side operating pressure-- The tube side operating pressure will be set equal to the tube side design pressure.

Shell side operating pressure-- The shell side operating pressure will be set equal to the shell side design pressure.

Shell Side MDMT -- The MDMT of shell side components will be set equal to the MDMT of the shell. This includes kettle cones, kettle port cylinders, and rear shell closures.

Tubesheet MDMT -- The front and rear tubesheet MDMTs will be set equal to the specified shell MDMT.

Channel MDMT -- The MDMT of all channels will be set equal to the MDMT of the shell. Shell Side Corrosion -- The corrosion allowance of shell side components will be set equal to the corrosion allowance of the shell. This includes expansion joints, shell bands, kettle cones, kettle port cylinders, and rear shell closures.

Tube Side Corrosion -- The corrosion allowance of tube side components will be set equal to the corrosion allowance of the front channel. This includes all channel closures (heads, flanges, bolted covers) as well as the rear channel.

Tubesheet Shell Side Corrosion -- The shell side tubesheet corrosion allowance will be set equal to the shell inner corrosion allowance.

Tubesheet Tube Side Corrosion -- The tube side tubesheet corrosion allowance will be set equal to the front channel inner corrosion allowance.

Nozzle Corrosion -- Inner corrosion for all nozzles, vents and drains will be set equal to the corrosion of the shell or channel where they are attached.

No Tube Corrosion -- Do not prompt for tube corrosion allowance. It will be assumed that the heat exchanger tubes are not subject to corrosion.

Floating Tubesheet Assembly Corrosion -- The floating tubesheet assembly inner corrosion allowance will be set equal to the channel inner corrosion allowance. The floating tubesheet assembly outer corrosion allowance will be set equal to the shell inner corrosion allowance.

COMPRESS Help


Pass Partition Corrosion -- The pass partition total corrosion allowance will be set equal to twice the channel inner corrosion allowance.

Tubesheet Flange Defaults -- Default values for tubesheet flanges can be specified here. Further information regarding each of the inputs can be found on the Appendix 2 flange page.

Long Seams This page is used to specify the default seam locations for long seams. If long seams are active, these values will be applied as a vessel is created. If they are not initially active, then activated for an existing vessel, these values will be used to determine seam locations. But, the starting angles will be automatically adjusted to avoid attachments and the long seams of adjacent components.

Default Long Seam Placement Values Show longitudinal seams on cylinders, transitions, skirts and hemi heads -- This option activates the long seams feature. No long seams will be shown and no long seams locations will be checked for errors if this option is not checked.

Starting Angle -- This sets the default long seam angle for the top shell course. Stagger Angle -- This is the default angle that the starting angle of adjacent shell courses will be offset by.

Number of Long Seams per Shell -- Choose the default method of determining how many long seams will be placed on each shell.

Based on Plate Length -- If this method is chosen, as many long seams as necessary will be placed on each shell course using the specified plate length.

Set Number of Seams-- If this method is chosen, each shell will have the specified number of seams, which will be spaced evenly apart.

COMPRESS Help


Reference North Angle -- Enter the angle that will represent North on the vessel. This will only effect where North is located the 2D drawing shown in the Long Seam Wizard and in the report.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Defaults This page is used to specify how the Nozzle\Quick Design option proceeds. The Nozzle\Quick Design option allows a nozzle to be added to the vessel with a minimum of input. Nozzle wall thickness, weld sizes and reinforcement pad sizes are all automatically provided by COMPRESS when this option is selected. Nozzle\Quick Design satisfies UG-37 reinforcement requirements by first increasing nozzle wall thickness, then by increasing nozzle internal projection, and, if all else fails, by adding a pad.

Nozzle Design Preferences Nozzle Material -- Enter a default material from the pull down list.

COMPRESS Help


Pad Material -- Specify the materials to be used when creating nozzles here. Forgings Material -- Specify the forging material used. Inner corrosion -- Specify the nozzle wall corrosion allowance. Nozzle corrosion allowance same as parent -- Check this box in order to automatically set the corrosion allowance of each nozzle equal to that of its parent component.

Minimum Nozzle Projection -- This specifies the default minimum nozzle projection from the outside surface of the vessel to the end of the nozzle or flange face if present. COMPRESS will not allow a nozzle projection to be input below the minimum. If you enter a number here you will not need to supply the r variable in the first nozzle design screen

Default Nozzle Size -- Here you can specify a default nozzle size and wall thickness. A pipe size lookup table is available.

Quick Nozzle Design Preference Show design trail dialog when complete-- COMPRESS uses a trial and error approach when selecting nozzle wall thickness, pad size and so on. This switch will cause a screen to appear that documents the trials made by COMPRESS when designing the nozzle.

Allow internal projection -- this switch directs COMPRESS to use an internal nozzle projection in preference to adding a reinforcement pad when attempting to satisfy the reinforcement requirements of UG-37.

Design as an access -- Nozzles created using Nozzle\Quick Design will be designated as access openings when this switch has been set. Access openings are exempt from the wall thickness provisions of UG- 45.

Schedule A&B, Schedule C (Stainless) -- The pipe schedules available to COMPRESS are specified by checking the desired schedules from these lists. Unless "Design with integral forgings" has been selected COMPRESS will use one of the selected schedules when satisfying the reinforcement requirements of UG-45 and the wall thickness requirements of UG-45. COMPRESS always begins with the thinnest schedule on the list. The schedule classifications of A, B and C are from Mark's Standard Handbook for Mechanical Engineers (8th Ed). A is for number designated schedules ( 10, 40, 80, etc.), B is for letter designates schedules (Std., XS, XXS, etc.) and C is for schedules with an "s" suffix (10s, 40s, 80s, etc.).

Add a blind to the flange -- A blind will be added to all ASME B16.5/B16.47 flanges on nozzles created by using Nozzle\Quick Design when this switch has been set.

Design with integral forgings -- Integral forgings such as long weld necks will be used instead of pipe when this switch has been set.

Minimum / Maximum -- The range of ASME B16.5/B16.47 flange classes available to

COMPRESS Help


COMPRESS is specified by selecting a minumum and maximum from these two lists. The actual ASME B16.5/B16.47 flange selected by COMPRESS depends on the design requirement as wells as the selected range.

Dimension Limits-- Specify the limits for the maximum nozzle thickness, pad width, and pad thickness that COMPRESS may use while performing a Quick Nozzle Design. These factors may be reset to the default recommended values by clicking Reset to recommended values.

Save Defaults -- Press the button if you want COMPRESS to retain the current shortcut design preferences for future use.

Elbow Connections This page is used to specify the default options for elbow connections on nozzles.

Material -- Enter a default material to be used for ASME B16.9 elbows. The available material list is limited to the materials listed in ASME 16.9.

Corrosion -- Specify the inner and outer corrosion allowance to be applied to elbows and attached piping.

Pipe corrosion allowance same as parent nozzle-- Check this box to automatically set the corrosion allowance of each component in the elbow connection assembly to be equal to that of its parent nozzle.

Length-- Specify the default length for piping components used in the elbow connection assembly.

Longitudinal RT-- The default longitudinal RT setting applies to the ASME B16.9 elbow. The

COMPRESS Help


default longitudinal RT setting for pipe spool components is taken from the set mode general cylinder - Longitudinal RT setting.

Circumferential RT-- The default circumferential RT setting applies to all the circumferential joints in the elbow connection assembly.

Vessel scope beyond first seam -- The switch Include elbow connections past the first seam defined in VIII-1 paragraph U-1(e)(1) in the vessel scope will cause all the elbow connection components to be included in the vessel scope. This can affect the maximum chamber pressures reported in the Pressure Summary as well as the vessel RT marking reported in the Radiography Summary. If this switch is not active the vessel scope is determined based on the first flanged joint (U-1(e)(1)(c)) or if no flange joint exists then the first circumferential seam (U-1(e)(1)(a)). For ASME Division 2 vessels the paragraph reference is 1.2.3(a).

Platform and Ladder Defaults Set default values for platform design parameters common to both circular and top head platforms. See the Platform and Ladder section for a description of these inputs.

COMPRESS Help


Testing Defaults This page specifies tests performed on the vessel.

Hydro/Pneumatic Test -- This dialog lets you specify which hydrostatic or pneumatic tests are to be performed on the vessel. The pressure to use during the test is selected from the lists provided. It is important to note that the pressure stamped on the vessel name plate must be used as the basis for the hydrostatic test unless UG-99(c) is used. In all cases the static liquid head of the test fluid in the test orientation selected is considered when calculating hydrostatic test stresses. In design mode COMPRESS requires that at least one of Shop test new, horizontal or Field test new, erected be selected. The erected condition refers to the final installed position of the vessel and is determined by COMPRESS based on the method of support. For example vessels supported by skirts, legs and lugs are considered by COMPRESS to be vertical when erected. Selecting "Hydrotest @ 1.3 calculated test pressure per UG-99(c)" will cause COMPRESS to perform the extra calculations required to determine the calculated test pressure. Shop Test New, Horizontal or Vertical

COMPRESS Help


Field Test New, Erected Check these boxes to specify the indicated tests. Pull down options allow you to specify hydro or pneumatic test on design pressure, MAWP, or calculated test pressure. Alternatively a user defined test pressure can be specified by selecting "User defined test pressure (gauge, top)". This selection causes COMPRESS to use the Test pressure input as the basis for the vessel hydrotest instead of the hydrotest pressure calculated by COMPRESS. If this is done COMPRESS does not check to see that the test meets Code requirements. COMPRESS calculates the vessel hydrotest pressure and presents the results in the pressure summary report. The stress ratios per UG-99(b) are calculated by COMPRESS and used when determining the hydrotest pressure.

Calculate hydrotest stress When this box is checked COMPRESS will calculate stresses during hydrostatic test.

Field Test Corroded, Erected Check this box to perform a Hydro/Pneumatic test in the corroded state. A separate Corroded Hydrotest report will be generated. This is not yet available for ASME section VIII division II vessels or heat exchangers. Save a Copy of the Vessel in the Fully Corroded State for Calculation Verification This button will save a copy of the current vessel in rating mode with the geometries of each component adjusted for the corrosion allowances that were input. The purpose of this feature is to provide a basis model to verify and check values in the Corroded Hydrotest report. Calculate corroded hydrotest stress When this box is checked COMPRESS will calculate stresses during the corroded hydrostatic test.

Test Liquid Specific Gravity -- Enter the default value for specific gravity of the hydrotest fluid. If a pneumatic test is desired, enter a number equal to the test gas specific gravity, based on water=1.0, at test pressure. Wind Load @ test, % -- This is the hydrotest wind load. A suggested value is 33% of design wind (force). This is done since it is very unlikely that the hydrotest conditions coincide with a maximum wind load. Yield Stress Allowed @ Test, %

COMPRESS Help


-- COMPRESS will present a warning message if the stress developed during test (perhaps a field test in the vertical condition) exceeds this percentage of the yield stress. 90% is suggested. Impact Test Temperature -- This is the impact test temperature as specified by UG-84(b)(2). When a material is marked as impact tested in one of the COMPRESS dialogs the impact test temperature entered here is used as the MDMT rating for that component.

Welding Defaults This page sets welding options:

Butt Welds -- Choose whether butt welds are tapered per Table UCS-66.3(a), or if they are deposited weld metal only.

No weld preheat below 1.5" -- Ignore the PWHT requirement of UCS-56 P-No 1 (2)(b) for PNo 1 materials with less than 1.5" nominal thickness.

Vaccum Ring Welding Defaults -- Set the default vacuum ring weld type and weld dimensions with these inputs.

COMPRESS Help


Default Units

Choose among U.S. Customary, SI and MKS units. It is permissible to change units settings, as with all other settings in COMPRESS, at any time during the design.

Symbols -- Some symbols may not display properly under some Windows locale settings and can be switched to simple text equivalents with these options.

COMPRESS Help


Environment Defaults This page is used to specify defaults that affect the loading, display/viewing and saving of vessel files, as well as mouse operating parameters. The options in this page are as follows:

Start with an empty document -- COMPRESS will open a blank document window at startup, ready to open an existing vessel or begin designing a new one. All main menu bar options will be displayed.

Automatically copy last -- COMPRESS can automatically copy all inputs from the first component designed. This saves a lot of input time if most of the components in the vessel are very similar with respect to material, internal/external pressure, corrosion, etc.

COMPRESS Help


Open vessels maximized -- Start up with the design window opened to full screen size or a reduced sized window.

Automatically resize vessel -- COMPRESS will automatically resize the 3-D model so that the entire vessel is centered and fits on the screen after a pan/zoom operation followed by exiting an input dialog.

Show elapsed time dialog -- Toggles the "elapsed time" clock at the end of a design session. Automatically display details -- Automatically displays the details box in the dimension screen of each major component.

Suppress warnings from deficiencies list -- Advisory warnings (non-critical errors) in the Deficiencies pop-up dialog and the Deficiencies report will be suppressed. Only consider selecting this option after careful review that warnings are resolved or not applicable.

Disable vessel snapshot -- This will disable the function that automatically provides a snapshot of the 3-D vessel image for use on the report cover page. Disable this feature if COMPRESS crashes after performing code calculations/generating report/hitting F3 function key.

File format for report bitmaps -- Select different image file formats to troubleshoot display problems.

Export to XML -- Select this option to have COMPRESS output the XML data file. Export to Coster -- Check this option to output the required data file(s) for the Vessel Coster program. For Coster builds of 964 or earlier the data files are the .inp and .cw5 files. For Coster builds of 965 or later the data file is the XML. If you are using Coster build 965 or later then all that is required is the XML file which can be obtained by only selecting the 'Export to XML' option.

Export to Drafter -- Select this option to have COMPRESS output the required data file for the Vessel Drafter program. This is the .dpf file.

Export to XML when Codecalcs are run (F3) -- Check this option to have COMPRESS output the file data to an XML file everytime the code calculations are run. The XML file will have the same file name as the vessel, with an 'xml' extenstion. This ensures that the data in the XML file always reflects the current state of the vessel. This may cause the program to run slower.

Mouse behavior -- This adjusts mouse behavior. Invert Mouse Wheel Zoom -- This option reverses the zoom direction triggered by rolling the mouse wheel while viewing the 3D model.

Use Last File's Position for Next File -- Specifies that the next file opened or saved will be opened/saved in the last directory used, not necessarily the COMPRESS directory.

COMPRESS Help


Temporary Files Directory -- Click on the button "Default dir:" to specify the temporary directory where report HTML files will be stored. Unless the report is saved, these temporary files will be automatically deleted upon normal COMPRESS shutdown.

Display tabs when working with multiple files -- When working with multiple files, this option will cause a small tab to be shown at the bottom of the COMPRESS window for each open file. Clicking on a tab will activate the 3D model view of its corresponding file.

Show "Tip of the Day" on Startup -- COMPRESS displays informative tips when the program is started. Use this option to toggle the feature on or off.

Reset Avoidable Warning Messages -- COMPRESS displays certain dialogs that have a switch that reads "don't show me this message again". This button is a way to globally force these messages back on once again.

Backup Options -- Save a backup copy of the vessel file. This feature creates a temporary backup file that can be used to restore work in the event of abnormal COMPRESS shutdown (i.e., program crash, power outage, etc.). Note: The backup file is automatically deleted every time COMPRESS is shutdown normally. Click the "Erase all backup files" to manually delete the files.

Camera Preferences -- Here specify camera angle settings. These settings control how vessels are depicted on screen:

Plan Angle -- This is the angle of the camera from the target measured from the front view counter-clockwise when viewed in plan. This is also referred to as the azimuth angle.

Elevation -- This is the elevation angle of the camera above or below the ground plane. Roll Angle -- When the roll angle is set to 0.0, the camera up vector is perpendicular to the ground plane.

COMPRESS Help


General Arrangement

Design Condition -- The design condition selected here is used to list design pressures and temperature for shell and tube side in design data block of the general arrangement drawing. In case of a pressure vessel, the design pressure and temperature and vacuum and test pressure listed are the maximum input values. If there is more than one pressure chamber, these values are listed for each pressure chamber.

Radiography -- This is the type of radigraphy for shell side and tube side that will be displayed in design data block of general arrangement drawing.

Heat Treatment Required -- This is the type of heat treatment required for shell side and tube

COMPRESS Help


side that will be displayed in the design data block of the general arrangement drawing.

Title Block -- The information entered here is displayed in title block of general arrangement drawing. The values for ASME design code, TEMA Type, TEMA Size and TEMA Class parameters are automatically determined from Heat Exchanger design data. The fields for ASME Code, TEMA Type, TEMA Size and TEMA Class can be replaced by any other text by entering it in the field.

Revision Block -- The information entered here is displayed in the revision block of the general arrangement drawing.

Nozzle Schedule -- The information entered here is displayed in the nozzle schedule of the general arrangement drawing. The row heading for revision block and nozzle schedule can also be changed. This is useful when a drawing is generated in a different language other than English.

View Options -- The general arrangement drawing can be configured to show as little and as much data as desired. By default, the design data, dimensions, nozzle tags and center-lines are always turned on, to be displayed in the general arrangement drawing.

COMPRESS Help


3D Display Options This page defines default visual parameters for the various vessel parts.

Vessel Components List -- Choose the component type from this list for which the specifications on this page will apply.

Transparent/Opaque -- Hold down the left mouse button and drag the slider to the right if you want the color to be more opaque, to the left if you want the color more transparent.

Color Selector -- Click on this button to access the Color Selector screen, if it has been tagged. Tag one of the following options:

COMPRESS Help


RGB -- This option creates colors by mixing the specified amounts of each primary color (red, green, blue). To adjust the color, hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer on the red, green, and blue scales as desired. Or, click the mouse in the area of the color(s) that you want. The resulting color mix is displayed in the box found just above the Color Selector button on the 3D Display page.

HSV -- With this option you select a color (hue), than adjust the lightness (shade) or darkness (value) of that color. To select the hue, hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer on the H scale. To add more/less white to that hue, drag the pointer on the S scale. To add more/less black to the hue, drag the pointer on the V scale. The resulting color mix is displayed in the box found just above the Color Selector button on the 3D Display page. Or, click the mouse in the area of the color that you want.

HSV Slice -- This option works the same as the HSV option (discussed previously), except that the V scale is now arranged vertically.

Rendering Engine -- Select this button to access the render device selection screen. The rendering engine is the software that actually draws the vessel. Examples of rendering engines are OpenGL and DirectX. The only device of interest is the "Screen Window Rendering Device." The preferred engine is "Direct3D (draw primitive)." However, "Native OpenGL (MS)" can be used in certain cases if DirectX is not functioning.

Draw Axes/Label Axes -- With this option you control how axes are presented. Load/Save Scheme -- These options let you save and load custom color "sets" you have previously saved. You might, for example, develop separate sets of colors for stainless steel and carbon steel vessels.

Update Options

Automatic Program Update Settings -- When COMPRESS is started and an internet connnection is available, COMPRESS will automatically check the Codeware website for any new updates to the program if this switch is set.

COMPRESS Help


If there is a new program update available, a non-intrusive alert message pops up in an information bubble from the system tray (similar to Windows Update).

Check for Key Updates on startup -- When this option is active and COMPRESS requires the key to be updated, COMPRESS will check for pending key updates at launch.

Do not show Key Update Reminder -- The Codeware Hardware key needs to be updated every year in order to run the latest version of the program. Ensure this switch is off to have COMPRESS automatically notifiy the user within 2 weeks of the support and update service (SUS) contract expiry date (for red and white key users only). The alert message appears in a non-intrusive pop up information bubble from the system tray (similar to Windows Update).

If you are leasing COMPRESS, the remaining time in your lease is reported in this bubble at the launch of the program.

COMPRESS Help


API 510 Calculation Options (Available for INSPECT only)

Remaining Life Basis Select the type of corrosion rate for the Remaining Life Basis. This will be used for all of the remaining life calculations.

Start iteration at the previously calculated retirement date When the Remaining Life Calculation is run. This option will cause the iteration to begin at the previously calculated retirement date. This is useful for speeding up the Remaining Life Calculation by reducing the number of iterations, but not in all cases. The retirement date may change if measured CML thickness have changed after the last time the Remaining Life Calculation was run.

Stop iteration when: These values determine how precise the Remaining Life Calculation is. Higher threshold values

COMPRESS Help


will result in a faster Remaining Life Calculation with fewer iterations, but a less accurate Projected Retirement date.

User Defined Corrosion Rate When a the option to use a User Defined Corrosion Rate is active, the Remaining Life Calculation will use the specified corrosion rate only when a corrosion rate can not be determined via maintenance inspections. This is applicable when there is only one maintenance inspection with thickness measurements, or after a service change is indicated on the Inspection Details Page.

Calculate required thickness for all nozzles when calcs are run (F3) When this option is active, the required thickness for each nozzle with sufficient thickness measurements will be calculated when the Remaining Life Calculation is performed. The required thickness values will be reported in the Inspection report. The required thickness of a nozzle is calculated by using the nozzle’s corrosion rate along with the parent component’s corrosion rate and determining when the Nozzle’s MAWP is equal to the target MAWP.

Report Vessel Calculations in the Projected State on: When the Remaining Life Calculation is performed, the component reports will be in the projected state of the vessel on either the Calculated Retirement Date or the Date of the Selected Inspection. If the Calculated Retirement Date option is selected and the a retirement date could not be found, the component reports will be in the projected state of the vessel at the selected inspection date.

COMPRESS Help


API 510 Display Defaults (Available for INSPECT only)

Enable Data Checking CMLs will be flagged in the Data Grid when their thickness or corrosion rate is off by the specified factors. This is a useful tool for making sure that no typos or decimal place errors occurred while entering measured thickness data and for identifying areas that may have experienced a sudden increase in corrosion rate. When the thickness of a CML differs from the average measured thickness on a particular component by at least the specified factor, that CML is flagged red. When a CMLs short term corrosion rate differs previously measured short term corrosion rate at that location, the CML is flagged blue.

Highlight Points Based on Remaining Life Setting these options will cause the background color in the Data Grid to change based on that CMLs remaining life.

Reference North Angle

COMPRESS Help


Specify what angle is North for vertical vessels. This is synced with the reference angle specified in the Long Seams dialog and is primarily used for the 2-D rollout drawing.

Automatic CML Population Defaults (Available for INSPECT only) The Automatic CML Population Dialog will automatically place CMLs on the vessel. The CMLs are located in relation to other vessel components. This is useful to ensure that common highly corroded areas are inspected.

Cylinders, Transitions, and Skirts Specify the number of CMLs at Each Elevation and the Starting Angle. CMLs will be spread evenly at each elevation, starting at the specified Starting Angle. Specify the Spacing Increment and the Starting Elevation. CMLs will be placed at elevations starting with the specified starting elevation for the entire shell length of the vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Place CMLs near Circumferential Seams: Adds CMLs at elevations above and below circumferential seams at the specified distance. In many cases Joint Efficiency for the required thickness calculations is lower close to the circumferential seams. This option is not active if the vessel does not have any long seams.

Place CMLs near Longitudinal Seams: Adds CMLs on both sides of longitudinal seams at the specified distance. In many cases Joint Efficiency for the required thickness calculations is lower close to the longitudinal seams. The calculated required thickness for points that are not close to circumferential or longitudinal seams use a Joint Efficiency of 1. However, long seams must be active in order to take credit for this.

Heads CMLs will be spread evenly at each radial distance from the center of the head, starting at the specified Starting Angle. They will be placed on heads at equal radial distances, starting at the specified Starting Radius from Center and moving away from the center of the head by factors of the Radial Spacing Increment.

Nozzles CMLs will be placed on every nozzle, starting at 0° and spaced evenly, depending on how many CMLs per Nozzle are specified.

CMLs on Shell at Nozzle Base: CMLs will automatically be placed around the base of every nozzle at the specified Distance from Nozzle Base, which is measured from the shell to nozzle OD intersection. In some cases, this can make the CML Data Grid difficult to read.

COMPRESS Help


Report Defaults

Minimum Reports -- Indicate which reports to minimize on a per-component basis. Generally the minimal reports retain summary tables but omit lengthy calculation sections. No information is lost in this process: simply deactivate the minimal report option to generate the full report again.

Report Options -- Additional report formatting options are found in this box. The last option, "Disable Scripts in HTML Reports," disables collapsible tables and is useful when a printer's configuration does not allow printing of HTML documents with scripts.

Condition(s) Included in the Nozzle Reports -- These options control whether the internal

COMPRESS Help


and external design conditions and the maximum rated pressure conditions are included in the nozzle reports. Note that if the Maximum Pressure options to calculate MAWP, MAP, or MAEP are active on the Calculation - General 1 page, the values will be visible in the Pressure Summary report, but the calculations may be omitted from the individual nozzle reports by un-checking the Maximum Pressure switch. At least one of these options switches is required to be active.

Radiographic marking -- COMPRESS will automatically determine the UG-116(e) RT marking for a vessel. The RT marking value can be overridden by using the "User defined UG116(e) RT marking" option. The RT marking is reported on the Settings Summary.

PDF Reports The options in this page are the same as those found in the PDF Report Options dialog.

Solid Model

Enable Solid Model - When this option is selected, a new view containing a rendering of the solid model will become active. It is very similar to the older 3D view but is easily distinguished by the gradient background color. This view has an accurate representation of the underlying solid model and includes nozzle openings, nozzle pads, and actual bolt holes in flanges and tube holes in tubesheets. The solid model can be exported by selecting File / Export / Export Solid Model and can then be imported into most major CAD and plant management software packages.

COMPRESS Help


Level of Detail - Because of the available accuracy of the vessel model, the solid model can end up being very large and complex. The more complex the model, the longer it takes to build. The level of detail drop down lets you select the vessel accuracy that bests suits you. The options include: Low: Standard settings for a low resolution model that generates and updates very quickly. Cloud: Standard settings for an instance of COMPRESS running on a remote computer over a high-bandwidth connection. High: Standard settings for a high resolution model that normally generates and updates quickly but can be bogged down by very complex heat exchangers. Heat exchangers are challenging to model because they often have thousands of tubes and thus have tubesheets with thousands of holes. Custom: This option pops up a dialog with all of the level of detail options that are configurable. These settings are for advanced users only and incorrect settings may result in a model that does not fit in memory or cannot be generated because the tolerances are not in a suitable range for COMPRESS. We recommend using only the High or Low settings unless instructed by Codeware technical support staff to use the Custom settings.

COMPRESS Help


Global Change Use this option to edit the vessel as a whole, or globally. For example, you could change the design pressure for all vessel components at once. After making a global change, COMPRESS considers the new information and recalculates the entire model, reconciling all inputs.

COMPRESS does not adjust nominal thicknesses downward if design requirements are reduced. To generate a fresh set of recommended thicknesses, set all thicknesses to 0 and force a new calculation.

Attribute -- Click on the down arrow button to the right of this field to pull down a box listing attributes of the vessel available for editing: Thickness Internal Pressure Temperature @ Internal Pressure External Pressure Temperature @ External Pressure Corrosion: Inner Corrosion: Outer MDMT Test Temperature Material Inner Diameter Outer Diameter ASME B16.5/16.47 Flange Rating ASME B16.5/16.47 Flange Nominal Size ASME B16.5/16.47 Flange Material Longitudinal Seam X-Ray

COMPRESS Help


Circumferential Seam X-Ray Click on the attribute to edit. Values are displayed for the selected attribute for all components. The status bar message indicates which component of the vessel is being edited. You can edit one or many components for the selected characteristic in this way. When the chosen attribute is thickness, the status bar message displays a tr value which corresponds with the highlighted component. The required thickness due to worst case of longitudinal pressure plus bending stress, or the circumferential pressure stress is displayed. All tr values include allowance for corrosion. In addition, the governing condition is indicated on the status bar.

Available Components/Selected Components Add/Add All/Remove/Remove All -- With these controls you specify which components will be changed.

New Value -- This will be the new value of the attribute. When in design mode, this feature is extremely helpful when a vessel's design conditions are relaxed. Since the required thicknesses of the vessel components decrease when the design conditions are relaxed, this feature enables you to zero out all of the thickness entries to all of your vessel components forcing COMPRESS to reselect the nominal thickness of each component for the new design conditions. To illustrate: You have submitted a vessel design for approval, and it has been decided that the inner corrosion allowance should be changed from 0.0625 to 0.125 throughout the vessel. Tag Corrosion: Inner from the listing at the top of the Global Change screen. The existing values for corrosion for each component on the vessel are displayed. Click on the "add all" pushbutton. Enter 0.125 in the Change to: field and click on OK to change the inner corrosion allowance. Select OK to accept these new corrosion values. COMPRESS recalculates the entire vessel, reconciling all inputs.

COMPRESS Help


PDF Report Options Reports are available in PDF format and include a number of formatting options. These options only apply the reports in PDF format and do not affect the reports in HTML format. In order to view PDF reports from within COMPRESS, Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed.

A copy of any PDF report may be saved via the options in Adobe Acrobat Reader or by using the Save Report As... option under the file menu.

Open the PDF Report Options dialog to specify the formatting options.

COMPRESS Help


Report Display - Choose the format to display reports in. Report format can always be changed on the fly by clicking the "PDF format" button on the main toolbar.

Include Table of Contents with Page Numbers - Option to include or exclude the Table of Contents in rendered PDF reports.

Font Type - Specify type of font for the report text. Font Size - Specify the size of the font for the report text. Line Spacing - This is the vertical line spacing factor for the reports. A value of one makes the line spacing equal to one character height.

Margins - Set the printing margins for the report. Header - Select the type and location of the headers. Footer - Select the type and location of the footers.

COMPRESS Help


Use Logo Image - Check this box to use a logo image, which is specified in the edit box to the right. A logo image that is too large may affect your report spacing.

Header / Footer Font Size - Specify the size of the header and footer font. Horizontal Resolution - Use this to set the horizontal resolution of the pages in the PDF report. This does not affect the size of text, but will change the amount of space images take up in the report.

COMPRESS Help


Long Seam Wizard Longitudinal seams may be specified for cylinders, transitions, skirts, and hemispherical heads.

Activating Long Seams

Longitudinal seams may be activated on the Defaults > Long Seams page of the Set Mode Options dialog. The Set Mode Options dialog may be opened by pressing . If long seams are active, these values will be applied as the vessel is created. If they are not initially active, then activated for an existing vessel, these values will be used to determine seam locations. But, the starting angles will be automatically adjusted to avoid attachments and the long seams of adjacent components. Once Long Seams are activated, they will be shown in the 3D model and a Long Seam Summary will be generated in the report.

COMPRESS Help


The Long Seam Wizard

Longitudinal seams are added and edited via the Long Seam Wizard dialog, which may be opened by clicking the menu item under the Action menu.

The Long Seam Wizard dialog may also be opened by clicking the button displayed at the top of the 3D model view.

The Long Seam Wizard has a 2D shell rollout, which shows long seams and attachments as if the shell walls were unrolled and laid flat. Transitions and some skirts are not to scale. If desired, the North angle may be set for geographic reference.

COMPRESS Help


The Data Grid

Values for individual plates or long seam angles may be edited directly through the data grid. The 2D drawing and the data grid are interactive. Clicking a cell in the data grid will highlight the corresponding plate or seam in the 2D drawing.

The 2D drawing The 2D drawing shows the shell rollout and references North, South, East, and West for vertical vessels. The angle that corresponds to North may be edited on the Defaults > Long Seams page of the Set Mode Options dialog. The 2D drawing also displays all shell attachments to make placing long seams easier.

Edit Seams Based on Plate Length When editing longitudinal seams based on plate length, enter the desired plate length, starting angle, and stagger angle. Then click the Reset Seam Locations based on Seam Placement Values button. This will add as many long seams as necessary to create the shell sections using the specified plate length while using the specified starting angle and stagger angle.

Clicking Adjust Starting Angle of each Shell Course to avoid Attachments and Adjacent Seams will change the starting angle of each shell section in order to avoid attachments and the long seams of adjoining shell sections. The plate lengths and starting angles of individual shell sections may be edited directly in the data grid. Clicking a plate length in the data grid will highlight this plate section in the 2D shell rollout. Clicking a starting angle will highlight the corresponding long seam in the 2D shell rollout.

Edit Seams Based on Equal Spacing

COMPRESS Help


When editing long seams based on equal spacing, enter the number of long seams per shell section, the starting angle, and the angle at which to stagger seams between shell courses, then click Reset Seam Locations based on Seam Placement Values . Clicking Adjust Starting Angle to avoid Attachments and Adjacent Seams will adjust the starting angle in order to avoid attachments.

Edit Seams Based on Angular Position When editing longitudinal seams based on angular position; enter the angular position of each longitudinal seam in the data grid. The 2D grid will highlight the selected angle in red.

Editing Seams on Hemi Heads

The 2D view displays seams and attachments on hemi heads as if they were being viewed from the above for a vertical vessel, or from the left side of a horizontal vessel. Choose a head in the "Components" list on the left. Keep in mind that seamless hemi heads will not appear in this list. Clicking a cell in the grid will cause that particular seam or section to be highlighted in the 2D drawing. Enter a Circ Seam Diameter, Long Seam Starting Angle, and Number of Long Seams for each section. An unlimited number of sections may be entered.

COMPRESS Help


Camera Settings The Camera Settings submenu controls COMPRESS' interactive move modes and other camera controls for moving and viewing your vessel model in two and three dimensional space.

For the following discussion, if your mouse does not have a middle button, make sure the On Left Mouse option is marked with a check mark. This enables your left mouse button to be used instead of the middle button for COMPRESS' interactive move modes.

Translate Use this option to set the move mode to translate. The translate mode changes the view center or aiming point for the camera without changing the orientation of the camera. The effect is to scroll the image (vessel) within the window. Camera translation can be used in one of two ways:

COMPRESS Help


Position the cursor over a point on the image, depress the middle mouse button, drag the point in the image to a new location, and release the mouse button. Depress the middle mouse button and the Ctrl key. The image moves in the direction the cursor is offset from the center of the window until the button is released. The further from the center, the faster the move.

Zoom Use this option to set the move mode to zoom. The zoom mode changes the field-of-view for the camera without changing the orientation of the camera. The effect is to zoom in or out. Camera zoom can be used in one of three ways: Depress the middle mouse button, drag in an upward direction (anywhere in the window) and the vessel zooms out (shrinks). Depress the middle button, drag in a downward direction (anywhere in the window) and the vessel zooms in (gets larger). Depress the middle button, drag in a sideways direction and the vessel stays the same size. Hold the CTRL key down at the same time that you depress the middle mouse button. If you then drag the mouse cursor in any direction in the top half of the window, the vessel zooms out (shrinks). Similarly, if you drag the mouse cursor in any direction in the bottom half of the window the vessel zooms in (gets larger). Hold the SHIFT key down at the same time that you depress the middle mouse button. If you click somewhere on the vessel and drag, a zoom in box appears centered at that point. If you want to zoom out again, double click on the vessel. The vessel is recentered and zooms out by a factor of two.

Orbit Use this option to set the move mode to orbit. This mode is analogous to holding the object in your hand and rotating it. Camera orbit can be used in one of two ways: Depress the middle mouse button. If you then drag the cursor in a right to left motion the vessels spins in a clockwise direction. If you drag in a left to right motion, the vessel spins in a counterclockwise direction. If you drag in a top to bottom motion, the vessel spins towards you with the bottom of the vessel rotating upwards. If you drag in a bottom to top motion, the vessel spins away from you with the bottom of the vessel rotating upwards. Described another way, with the middle mouse button depressed, the center window is the current object position, the top of the window is looking at the bottom of the object, the bottom of the window is looking at the top of the object, and the right and left edges correspond to

COMPRESS Help


turning the object around so you are looking at the back. Hold down the CTRL key and at the same time click the middle mouse button once. Try clicking in various parts of the window to see how the vessel rotates (for example top, bottom, left, right). COMPRESS uses the mouse position to control the rate at which the object is rotated around the current target position.

Highlight Components on Mouseover Selecting this option will cause components to be highlighted while the mouse cursor is hovering over them in the 3D model. Highlighted main shell components become transparent as well.

Update Rate Use this option to set the update rate targets for interactive redraw speed.

min -- Enter a value for minimum frame per second update rate. If the update rate falls below this threshold, then the display of the vessel in the design window is simplified in an attempt to achieve this target. The minimum can be no greater than half the maximum target.

max -- Enter a value for maximum frame per second update rate that should be achieved before more detail is added to the display. The maximum can be no less than half the minimum.

Preferences Use the Preferences option to specify default camera angle settings.

COMPRESS Help


Edit General Arrangement The Edit General Arrangement menu allows you to manually edit the general arrangement drawing.

Select This option sets the edit mode to select. While in select mode, to select a single object, click the left mouse button on an object. The selection of all other objects will be dropped. For multiple selection hold down the SHIFT key while clicking each of the objects you want to select. To select several objects at the same time, click the left mouse button outside any object, then drag the mouse to create a rectangle enclosing all the objects you want to select. All objects that are completely placed inside this rectangle become selected. To include objects only partially inside the selection rectangle, hold down the CTRL key before releasing the left mouse button. You may also begin the selection rectangle anywhere (even over the other objects) by holding down the SHIFT key before pressing the left mouse button and dragging the mouse. To cancel the selection of objects, do one of the following: To cancel the selection of some of the selected objects, hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button on the object(s) you want to deselect. To cancel the selection of all selected objects, click the left mouse button outside any objects or click the left mouse button on an unselected object twice.

COMPRESS Help


This option can also be used to move and resize objects.

Move -- Select the object(s) you want to move, click the left mouse button on one of the selected objects and drag the object(s) to the new location. While dragging object(s), you can hold down the CTRL key to disable/enable alignment to grid.

Resize -- Select the object you want to resize (click the left mouse button on it), then click the left mouse button on one of the special markers and drag it. During dragging marker you can hold down the CTRL key to disable/enable alignment to grid. To keep the object's aspect ratio while resizing hold down the SHIFT key when you are dragging a marker.

Line, Dimension Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, Arc The line, dimension line, rectangle, ellipse and arc objects can be drawn by selecting respective menu. The mouse cursor's appearance will change to show the selected object. Then press left mouse button and drag the mouse to draw the object.

Text A text object can be added by selecting the text menu. The mouse cursor's appearance changes to show a text object selection. A single mouse click will add a text object. After the left mouse button is released the cursor caret will appear, ready to accept characters from the keyboard. Press ESC key after the text entry is completed.

Copy In order to copy objects, select (see "Select" above) the objects you want to copy and then select the "Copy" menu. The objects are copied to clipboard which can then be pasted to the drawing or any other document.

Paste Select this option to paste objects from clipboard to current drawing. After pasting the new objects appear to be overlapping with existing ones. Just drag the newly added objects with mouse to a new location.

Delete Select this option to delete objects that are currently selected.

COMPRESS Help


Keyboard Options While Drawing -- During mouse dragging, you can hold down the following keys:

SHIFT - Equal Sided Objects / Angle of Text / Perpendicular Lines The SHIFT key allows you to add an object with equal sides. Hold down this key if you want to create a circle or a square or prevent the change of an aspect ratio of image. Holding down the SHIFT key also allows you to determine orientation of the text string (a rotation angle). The SHIFT key may also be used to restrict Lines and Dimension Lines to horizontal and vertical sections.

CTRL - Snap To Grid During mouse dragging, you can hold down the CTRL key, which toggles Snap-to-Grid effect. The current mouse coordinates will be pulled into alignment with the nearest intersection of grid lines during the drawing of an object.

COMPRESS Help


Export General Arrangement The Export General Arrangement dialog allows you to export general arrangement drawing to ACAD dxf/dwg and wmf image format.

Format This option sets format of exported file to DXF, DWG or WMF (Windows Meta File) image format.

File Name Click on browse button to select folder and file name for exported file. If a file name is entered without any path, the exported file is saved in COMPRESS executable folder (by default, C:\Codeware\COMPRESS).

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Menu The nozzle menu is not active until there is another component (cylinder, head, etc.) already designed (to which the nozzle attaches). The Nozzle menu allows you to add nozzles by either a detailed procedure or by a quick nozzle design option.

To design a nozzle with full control of all detail inputs, select the Detail Design option, or press F2. To quickly add a nozzle using default settings and minimal inputs, select the Quick Design option or press Shift-F2.

COMPRESS Help

Nozzle Menu < 9 - 1 >

Nozzle Dialog Nozzle Design The nozzle menu is not active until there is another component (cylinder, head, etc.) already designed (to which the nozzle attaches). From the Nozzle menu select either the "Detail Design" or Quick Design option .

This displays the detail nozzle design dialog.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Type -- Select type desired. Numerous nozzle types are available. A nozzle sketch is displayed for each type showing the attachment configuration: Implant Nozzle (Figure UW-16.1, sketches (c), (d), & (e)): • no reinforcing pad • no inside projection • inserted into vessel wall (implant)

COMPRESS Help


Implant Nozzle (Figure UW-16.1, sketch (q)): • has reinforcing pad • no inside projection • inserted into vessel wall (implant) Implant Nozzle (Figure UW-16.1, sketches (i) & (l)): • no reinforcing pad • has inside projection • inserted through vessel wall (implant) Implant Nozzle (Figure UW-16.1, sketches (h), (q), & (s)): • has reinforcing pad • has inside projection • inserted through vessel wall (implant) Small Fitting or Coupling Welded from Outside Only: • UW-16(f)(3)(a) limitations apply • no inside projection • abutted to vessel wall (set-on) Nozzle with Integral Reinforcement (Figure UW16.1, sketch (n)): • has integral reinforcement • no inside projection • abutted to vessel wall (set-on) Abutting Nozzle (Figure UW-16.1, sketches (a) & (b)): • no reinforcing pad • no inside projection • abutted to vessel wall (set-on) Abutting Nozzle (Figure UW-16.1, sketch (a-1)): • has reinforcing pad • no inside projection • abutted to vessel wall (set-on) Integral Reinforcement Nozzle (Figure UW-16.1, sketch (g)): • has integral reinforcement • no inside projection • inserted into vessel wall (implant)

COMPRESS Help


Integral Reinforcement Nozzle: • has integral reinforcement • has inside projection • inserted through vessel wall (implant) Studding Outlet (Figure UW-16.1, sketch (p)): • no reinforcing pad • no inside projection • abutted to vessel wall (set-on) Studding Outlet: • no reinforcing pad • no inside projection • inserted into vessel wall (implant)

Nozzle/Access -- Choose whether the nozzle will be designed as a nozzle or as an access opening. The minimum nozzle neck thickness is determined per UG-45. If the access selection is tagged, the minimum nozzle neck thickness calculation is exempt from the calculation of tb . Nozzle and sump calculations are identical.

Elliptical Manway -- When the Elliptical Manway option is checked, the nozzle input section of the dialog is refreshed with new inputs:

Elliptical manways are located on the vessel in the same manner as a radial nozzle. An additional option switch allows the manway major axis to be set either parallel or perpendicular to the vessel long axis, or for manways on heads, parallel or perpendicular to the head radial axis.

Radial/Perpendicular/Hillside -- On heads, nozzles may be radial, perpendicular or hillside. A radial nozzle is one perpendicular to the head or cylinder surface. The axis of a perpendicular nozzle is perpendicular to the vessel axis; the axis of a hillside nozzle is parallel to the vessel axis. On cylinders, nozzles may be radial, tilted or offset. A radial nozzle is perpendicular to the cylinder surface. The axis of a tilted nozzle makes a specified angle with a plane perpendicular to the vessel axis, and the nozzle axis intersects the vessel axis. The maximum tilt angle is 60°. An offset nozzle is also commonly referred to as a tangential nozzle where the CL to CL offset is

COMPRESS Help


specified in the second nozzle dialog. On transitions, nozzles may be normal, perpendicular or parallel. A normal nozzle is one perpendicular to the cone surface. The axis of a perpendicular nozzle is perpendicular to the vessel axis; while, the axis of a parallel nozzle is parallel to the vessel axis. For hillside nozzles, COMPRESS calculates the largest chord length opening at the intersection of the inside nozzle diameter to the head or cylinder mean radius (see ASME Appendix L-7.7). The large chord opening is then used in the nozzle reinforcement calculations per UG-37.

Drawing Mark -- This number will be shown on screen. Identifier -- Enter a name for the nozzle. Material -- Enter the nozzle material you wish to use or click the down arrow button for a list of available materials.

Pad Material -- This input field appears when you have selected a type 2 or type 4 nozzle. Enter the pad material you wish to use or click the down arrow button for a list of available materials. Press F1 for the materials database help option.

Add Appendix 2 Flange -- With this option you can add an ASME Appendix 2 flange to a nozzle. Operation is similar to adding an Appendix 2 body flange to a vessel. See Components, Body Flange for details.

COMPRESS Help


Appendix 2-14 (flange rigidity) calculations are optional for full face gasket flange designs as they are not in the scope of Appendix 2, and are therefore considered to be a U-2(g) analysis. Because of this, the option, found in the ASME Codes dialog, is not automatically enforced for full face gasket designs. It is left to the discretion of the designer whether to perform the calculations or not.

Add ASME B16.5/B16.47 Flange -- ASME B16.5 and ASME B16.47 flanges are attached to nozzles by selecting this option. Flanges "inherit" the design temperature of the shell to which they are attached. The flange selection dialog is displayed for specifying the details of the flange.

COMPRESS Help


The ASME B16.5 flange rating is based on the design temperature (internal pressure) of the component to which the nozzle is attached. COMPRESS allows ASME rated flanges to be made from any material in ASME B16.5 and ASME B16.47. To get a listing of the available flange materials, click the down arrow button in the material selection box. The ASME B16.5 material database consists of the materials listed in the appropriate edition of ASME B16.5. For example, when the A06 Addenda is active, the flange material database is taken from ASME B16.5-2003. This database is separate from the ASME materials databases. The ASME material database can not be modified. For integral forging nozzles, an option switch Select the associated ASME material is available that allows the designer to designate the equivalent ASME material used in the mandatory ASME Division 1 nozzle calculations. For ASME B16.5/B16.47 materials that do not have an exact ASME Section II Part D material match, the option switch is automatically activated and the designer must select the desired equivalent ASME material. Optionally, a different ASME B16.5/B16.47 material or user defined ASME material may be specified. When the option switch is not active, the equivalent ASME material, if one is available, is automatically synchronized with the selected ASME B16.5/B16.47 material specified. COMPRESS rates all ASME flanges attached to the vessel. The pressure ratings are based on the material, class, and temperature as required by ASME B16.5 or ASME B16.47. Tag the desired

COMPRESS Help


class from the list presented at the left of the screen.

Lower Fillet Leg / Upper Fillet Leg -- These inputs are used to specify the size of the flange attachment fillet welds. The Lower Fillet Leg input is available for Slip On and Socket Welded flange types, and the Upper Fillet Leg input is available only for the Slip On flange type. Minimum fillet weld sizing for Slip On flanges is performed in accordance with section UW21(b) of Division 1: The external (lower) fillet leg, xmin is equivalent to the lesser of 1.4tn or the hub thickness. The internal (upper) fillet leg is equivalent to the lesser of tn or 1/4 in. (6 mm).

Blind Also (Bolted Cover) -- A blind flange if selected here has no impact on the design calculations. The class of the blind flange is matched to the adjoining flange; thus, the pressure rating is identical. This input is necessary for use in conjunction with the Vessel Drafter and Vessel Coster programs. Flange types beginning with “FVC” are forged connections whose geometries are assumed to match those given in the Forged Vessel Connections, Inc. catalog (See Ref 17). COMPRESS automatically provides the ID and the wall thickness for FVC connections when you select the class, type and specify the nominal size. If 0 is input for the nominal size, COMPRESS chooses the flange size based on the nozzle diameter. By selecting a nominal size other than 0, you can force any nominal size for the flange. Note that for FVC types a nominal size must be entered. Input the nominal flange size you want to avoid any possibility of an incorrect selection.

Consider external loadings on flange MAWP rating -- This option will determine an equivalent pressure for the specified nozzle loads (from WRC Local Stress dialog) and reduce the published ASME B16.5/B16.47 flange pressure rating by this value to determine the available working pressure.

Pipe Size Lookup When you click on Pipe the Pipe Look-Up screen appears:

COMPRESS Help


Pipe Size -- Click on the desired pipe size from the vertical list on the left side of this screen. Pipe Schedule -- Click on the desired pipe schedule from the vertical list on the right side of this screen. When entering the nozzle dimensions, we recommend using the Pipe Look-up table so that COMPRESS can correctly identify the nominal pipe size.

Inner (or Outer) Diameter -- A value for diameter is automatically entered in this field when you select a pipe size from the Pipe Look-up screen.

Nominal Thickness -- A value for nominal thickness is automatically entered in this field when you select a pipe size from the Pipe Look-up screen. If a pipe material is used the mill tolerance is automatically subtracted from the nominal thickness unless otherwise specified in Action/Set Mode/Nozzles 1.

Choose manway from list -- When you click this button the Manways dialog appears:

COMPRESS Help


This allows you to enter and save a list of various elliptical manway configurations. Click an entry in the list and then OK to have the values automatically populated into the Nozzle dialog inputs.

Inner Corrosion -- Enter the nozzle corrosion allowance. Nozzle/Pad Impact Test/Normalized -- MDMT and exemption from impact testing are considered for UCS and UHA materials. Switches for normalized and fine grain practice materials have effect only if a UCS-66 material is being used for the pad or nozzle. Note that only Nozzle types 2 and 4 have pads.

Offset (L) -- The nozzle location value will vary depending on the starting reference point. If starting "From the datum line" as indicated in the drop down box below Offset (L) and if the nozzle is located on a cylinder or transition, L is the measurement from the datum line to the center line of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located on a head, L is measured to the face of the nozzle/flange. If "From seam of component" is selected, the "Attached to" field will appear which will allow the user to specify L relative to a component's seam instead of the datum line. (Note: Top heads have bottom seams and vice-versa, left heads have right seams and vice-versa, and cylinders/transitions have both.) When the cursor is on this entry, the lower left icon illustrates this measurement L. For the case of a child nozzle located on a parent nozzle, select "From end of nozzle" from the drop down box below Offset (L), choose the correct parent nozzle from the "Attached to" field, and enter the distance from the face of the parent nozzle to the center of the child nozzle (positive L is towards shell). To place a child nozzle on the head of a parent nozzle, select the parent

COMPRESS Help


nozzle's head from the "Attached to" field and use a negative L value.

Angle (Theta) -- This angle refers to the plan view position from the top/left hand side of the nozzle on the vessel. In the COMPRESS scheme, 0o is at 12 o'clock, 90o is at 3 o'clock, 180o is at 6 o'clock, and 270o is at 9 o'clock. Note: For heads, the clocking convention assumes the head is laid concave side toward the floor. So, top/left heads follow the above-mentioned convention, while bottom heads would be the relative opposite. For example, consider a nozzle on the top head located at 90o. A second nozzle on the bottom head located at -90o would share the same plane.

Distance r (Nozzle on Cylinder) -- This is the measurement from the vessel longitudinal axis to the center of the flange or nozzle face(plan view). When the cursor is on this entry, the lower left icon displays how r is measured.

Distance r (Nozzle on Head) -- This is the measurement from the longitudinal center line of the head to the intersection of the center line of the nozzle longitudinal axis with the head outside surface (plan view). When the cursor is on this entry, the lower left icon illustrates how r is measured.

Through a Category A Joint -- If the nozzle opening passes through a category A weld seam (see Figure UW-3), tag this box. Then COMPRESS will per UG-37 use the joint efficiency obtained from Table UW-12 for E1 in the calculation of the area available in the shell (A1). Otherwise, COMPRESS sets E1=1.0. The options affecting the nozzle reinforcement can be controlled by using the calculation option dialog . Press Next to advance to the nozzle detail dimension dialog . which shows the nozzle cross section. This will be specific to the type of nozzle selected.

How COMPRESS Ensures Adequate Reinforcement in Design Mode When at the Nozzle cross-section screen, the area required and area available are shown at the bottom of the data box and in the details box. Minimum weld sizes are displayed to the right of the input boxes. If a weld size entered is smaller than the minimum displayed, COMPRESS overrides the entry and inserts the minimum standard size (design mode). Entries that are larger than the minimum values shown will be accepted as entered. The nozzle cross-section shown is a scaled drawing of the nozzle to vessel attachment. Each time a change is made, the graphic figure reflects the change instantaneously. COMPRESS automatically recalculates the reinforcement requirements each time a new entry is made.

How COMPRESS Rates Nozzles in Rating Mode

COMPRESS Help


Any of the following situations may limit a nozzle: Area reinforcement per UG-37 for internal or external pressure. Minimum nominal nozzle neck thickness per UG-45. Weld failure path analysis per UG-41. The ASME B16.5/B16.47 pressure rating of the attached flange. Attachment weld sizing per UW-16. Stress due to external loads + internal pressure per UG-22 (WRC 107 / 537). COMPRESS iterates to find the highest pressure allowed for each nozzle where conditions 1 through 4 are satisfied. Only calculations at the final pressure selected by COMPRESS are displayed in the output report. In essence, COMPRESS "back solves" all the ASME requirements for reinforced openings and finds the limiting pressure. COMPRESS allows you to input any nozzle geometry in the rerating mode. All weld deficiencies entered while in the rating mode are listed in the Deficiencies Report. COMPRESS checks the nozzle wall minimum thickness per UG-45. All nozzle deficiencies entered while in the rerating mode are listed in the Deficiency Report.

COMPRESS Help


Quick Nozzle Dialog Quick Nozzle Design The Nozzle Quick Design, or shortcut, method allows the designer to concentrate on placing the nozzles on the vessel without being hindered by the details of the actual nozzle design. With this method COMPRESS assures that all Code requirements are met for reinforcing area, minimum thicknesses, etc, based on preferences previously established by the designer. The designer is required to specify only the nozzle location and size. Only radial nozzles may be designed using the Quick Design. Nozzles that are non-radial, hillside, tilted, etc, must be designed using the detailed nozzle design. To open the shortcut nozzle design dialog select the Nozzles menu and select “Quick Design”. The Shortcut Nozzle Design dialog will be displayed as shown below:

It's seen that the only inputs required from the user are the nozzle identifier, nominal pipe size, and the location of the nozzle. Click the Preferences button to open the dialog on which the assumptions used by the Quick Design process are specified. Note that there are two pages (tabs) on the dialog: “Nozzles 1” and “Nozzles 2”; these are the two pages from the Set Mode Options dialog and they can be accessed directly from Set Mode Options as well. The nozzle location is specified by three properties: 1. Offset L: a measure of the position along the vessel axis 2. Angle (theta): the nozzle's location around the vessel's perimeter 3. Distance (r): the distance from the vessel axis to the end of the nozzle or face of the flange The most important dimension is the Offset L. This input establishes which component the nozzle will be placed on. The meaning of dimensions L and Distance will vary slightly between

COMPRESS Help


when the nozzle is attached to a cylinder (or transition) or a head. The blue icon graphic will change to show the dimension based on the context; refer to the icon graphic. The status bar at the bottom of the nozzle dialog shows important information on the nozzle location: it shows the name of the component to which the nozzle will be attached based on the current value of Offset L. Change the value of Offset L to change the component to which the nozzle is to be attached. The component can also be selected directly by selecting a different mode from the list (in snapshot above the mode is “locate from datum line”), several modes are available to select the component directly. The blue icon graphic will change as each input field is selected in turn (ie: click the mouse cursor in the desired field to activate the field, the blue icon graphic then changes to illustrate the input). The icon graphic will change depending if current offset L location will place the nozzle on a head, a cylinder, or a transition.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Calculation Option Dialog Areas The Areas section controls which areas will not contribute to the nozzle reinforcement.

All openings on the vessel are checked by COMPRESS for compliance with the reinforcement rules of UG-37. Marked areas (Shell Area A1, Outward Nozzle A2, etc.) are ignored by COMPRESS in calculating the available nozzle reinforcement, allowing for a more conservative nozzle reinforcement design than the ASME code requires.

User specified limit of reinforcement: Radial Limit of Reinforcement -- Per UG-40, the radial limit of reinforcement is the greater of the following: The nozzle inside diameter (d) in the corroded condition. The nozzle inside radius (Rn) in the corroded condition plus the nozzle nominal thickness (tn)+ vessel nominal thickness (t). If the opening is too close to the end of the vessel or if the nozzle is close to another nozzle, the assumed limit of reinforcement may not be valid. COMPRESS automat-

COMPRESS Help


ically checks for overlapping limits of reinforcement between adjacent nozzles and presents warnings in the deficiencies dialog if interferences are detected. When this situation is encountered the radial limits of reinforcement of the offending nozzle must be reduced by clicking on the "User Specified Limit of Reinforcement" and entering a new value in the "Radial limit of reinforcement" input. If the limits of reinforcement per UG-41 fall outside of the spherical portion of an F&D head, COMPRESS will not use an M factor equal to one in calculating the required thickness of the head (tr) for nozzle reinforcement calculations per UG-37. If a M=1 is desired, reduce the limit of reinforcement until it is within the spherical portion of the head.

Nozzle Joint Efficiency -- This input affects the calculation of required nozzle wall thickness per UG-45. It is used for those cases where a nozzle is made from rolled plate and spot or no radiography is performed on the nozzle wall. In these cases, a value of 0.85 or 0.7 would be entered for the nozzle wall joint efficiency. A joint efficiency value input here will not change the nozzle required thickness calculation per UG-37. A joint efficiency input here will be used in the UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness check.

No UG-36(c)(3)(a) Exemption -- By default, COMPRESS allows the exemptions in UG36(c)(3)(a) for nozzle reinforcement calculations. This assumes that the vessel is not subject to rapid pressure fluctuations, and that any two openings are not too close together (see UG36(c)(3)(c) and UG-36(c)(3)(d)). If these assumptions are not valid, the exemptions listed in UG36(c)(3)(a) should not be applied per code rules. No UG-36(c)(3)(a) exemption is permitted by COMPRESS if you check this option.

Tapped Hole Area Loss-- This entry is for designing pad flanges, or studded outlets. View the nozzle cross section formed by intersecting with a plane parallel to the nozzle axis. The area loss is that area of two tapped holes viewed in this plane. Do not include area occupied by the bolt which is outside the limit of reinforcement for the pad flange, either in the direction along the vessel surface or the direction perpendicular to the vessel surface.

Design Conditions Use parent component's Design P -- By default, this option is set to automatically use the parent component's design pressure as the nozzle design pressure. If a different internal or external pressure is desired, deselect the option, which allows manual input of nozzle design pressure.

Calculation Method

COMPRESS Help


Large opening reinforcement calculations -- Beginning with the 2007 edition of ASME section VIII division I, large openings in cylinders and cones can be calculated using either the rules from Appendix 1-7 or Appendix 1-10. Use this option to set the calculation method for the specific nozzle under consideration. Note that this value is initially set to the general default setting from the set mode -> nozzle page.

Appendix 1-9 calculations -- Beginning with the 2008 edition of ASME section VIII division I, Appendix 1-9 can be used as an alternative for reinforcement calculations for openings under internal pressure. Note that the Appendix 1-9 rules list a set of specific conditions for the range of applicable nozzles. For example, the rules are only applicable for radial nozzles in cylindrical and conical shells subjected to internal pressure. If any of the conditions of applicability are not met, COMPRESS will revert back to the UG-37 reinforcement rules and issue a warning in the Deficiencies Summary.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Detail Dimension Dialog Nozzle Detail Dimensions In this dialog, COMPRESS provides minimum required values adjacent to input fields. Also, The details box provides area reinforcement and UG-45 thickness data.

Only Show Dimensions of Limits of Reinforcement -- The limits of reinforcement are indicated by the red dashed box drawn around the opening. Material outside of the red outline will not contribute to the reinforcing area. If you mark this box with a check mark only the dimensions for the limits of reinforcement are displayed.

Draw Lower Groove Weld Bevel Out -- Check this option if groove welds should be drawn bevel out (welded from outside of vessel) in the nozzle cross-section screen. Default condition is in accordance with setting specified in the Nozzles 1 Set Mode Options screen. This setting also affects how groove welds are drawn in VDP.

Groove Welds are Full Penetration -- Checking this switch directs COMPRESS to specify full penetration nozzle-to-shell and nozzle-to-pad groove welds as applicable when creating

COMPRESS Help


nozzles. Default condition is in accordance with setting specified in the Nozzles 1 Set Mode Options screen.

Pad Is Split -- Checking this option directs COMPRESS to treat the reinforcement pad as a split reinforcement pad. Splitting the reinforcement pad affects the nozzle's reinforcement calculations. This option is in accordance to ABSA's Information Bulletins IB-05-004 and IB-05005.

Pad Joint Efficiency --Enter the pad joint efficiency. This input is only active if the pad is split. Pad Width -- Enter the reinforcing pad width. For hillside nozzles, see Appendix L for COMPRESS' interpretation of the nozzle dimension Dp.

Pad Thickness -- Enter the reinforcing pad thickness (te). Inner Fillet -- Enter the inner fillet weld leg size (Leg41). Outer Fillet -- Enter the pad to shell weld leg size (Leg42). Upper Groove Weld -- Enter the pad to nozzle groove weld size. This weld is optional depending on the other welds used.

Lower Groove Weld -- Enter the nozzle to shell groove weld size. This weld is optional depending on the other welds used.

Lower Fillet, New -- Enter the uncorroded inside nozzle weld leg size (Leg43). This weld is optional depending on the other welds used. If not optional, the minimum required weld size is displayed in yellow to the immediate right.

Shell Thickness -- COMPRESS will use the thickness of the component to which the nozzle is attached unless you choose to supply a different thickness (such as the measured thickness of an existing vessel).

Projection, New -- Enter the nozzle inside projection in the uncorroded condition.

COMPRESS defines the nozzle inside projection to be the distance from the inner end of the nozzle to the inner shell surface as shown in the image above.

COMPRESS Help


Quantity for Coster -- This will designate the number of identical nozzles in the file passed on to Vessel Coster.

Offset CL to CL, Lo -- This input is used for nozzles attached to cylindrical components in a hillside manner. This box will appear only for non-radial nozzles. The status bar at the bottom of the nozzle cross section screen displays the area available for reinforcement and also the area required.

WRC Local Stress -- The WRC Local Stress feature is available from the Nozzle cross-section screen for all nozzles covered by the WRC 537 / WRC 107 paper. See the WRC Loads dialog for details on WRC Local Stress inputs.

FEA Details -- The FEA feature is available from the Nozzle cross-section screen for all nozzles. See the nozzle FEA dialog . for details on inputs.

Plan View -- The plan view option is available from the nozzles cross-section screen for nozzles on heads. See the nozzle plan view dialog . for details.

How COMPRESS Ensures Adequate Reinforcement in Design Mode When at the Nozzle cross-section screen, the area required and area available are shown at the bottom of the data box and in the details box. Minimum weld sizes are displayed to the right of the input boxes. If a weld size entered is smaller than the minimum displayed, COMPRESS overrides the entry and inserts the minimum standard size (design mode). Entries that are larger than the minimum values shown will be accepted as entered. The nozzle cross-section shown is a scaled drawing of the nozzle to vessel attachment. Each time a change is made, the graphic figure reflects the change instantaneously. COMPRESS automatically recalculates the reinforcement requirements each time a new entry is made.

COMPRESS Help


How COMPRESS Rates Nozzles in Rating Mode Any of the following situations may limit a nozzle: Area reinforcement per UG-37 for internal or external pressure. Minimum nominal nozzle neck thickness per UG-45. Weld failure path analysis per UG-41. The ASME B16.5/B16.47 pressure rating of the attached flange. Attachment weld sizing per UW-16. Stress due to external loads + internal pressure per UG-22 (WRC-107). COMPRESS iterates to find the highest pressure allowed for each nozzle where conditions 1 through 4 are satisfied. Only calculations at the final pressure selected by COMPRESS are displayed in the output report. In essence, COMPRESS "back solves" all the ASME requirements for reinforced openings and finds the limiting pressure. COMPRESS allows you to input any nozzle geometry in the rerating mode. All weld deficiencies entered while in the rating mode are listed in the Deficiencies Report. COMPRESS checks the nozzle wall minimum thickness per UG-45. All nozzle deficiencies entered while in the rerating mode are listed in the Deficiency Report.

COMPRESS Help


WRC 537 and WRC 107 Nozzle Loadings Dialogs WRC 537 and WRC 107 Loadings WRC 107 is the Welding Research Council paper 107. This paper describes a method to calculate local stresses in the vessel resulting from forces and moments applied to an attached nozzle. You should read the paper before you use this feature in design or rerating. WRC Bulletin 537 is the 2010 printing of WRC 107 and provides the same content in an updated format. WRC 537 provides equations to determine the dimensionless parameters for the figures in the 1979 version of WRC 107; calculated results within COMPRESS can slightly differ between the two options. The option to use WRC 537 or WRC 107 is set on a per vessel basis in Set Mode -> Calculation -> General 2 . Select the Save Defaults button to retain the selection for new files.

The following dialog appears when you select the WRC Local Stress button in the case of a nozzle on a cylinder. Note that that the WRC 537 and WRC 107 dialogs are functionally identical.

COMPRESS Help


This dialog allows multiple load cases on the nozzle (or clip) to be defined simultaneously. Each load case includes the option to check the hot shutdown and the reverse Pr loading.

COMPRESS Help


As noted in the dialog, the loads specified are local loads applied to the nozzle (or clip) and are only used in determining local stresses. If the effect of these loads needs to be considered in the global vessel analysis, then separate vertical and lateral loads must be added from the Loads menu.

User defined SIF - Activate this switch to input a user defined pressure stress intensity factor (SIF) at the nozzle outer diameter and pad outer diameter if present. The values input will be used in lieu of the SIF values automatically calculated per PVP-Vol. 339, p. 77-82. The user defined SIF is applied to all load cases.

Report governing load case(s) only -- Activate this switch to only report governing load case(s) to help reduce the size of the report. Note that it deactivates the ability to toggle the Report Load Case switch(es) which is reflected with grey highlighted cell(s).

Right mouse button menu -- Right clicking in the top left region of the grid area will display a sub-menu to easily change settings for all load cases.

Right clicking in the data region of the grid will display a sub-menu to add, copy, clear or remove load cases.

Active -- Switch to activate or deactivate a load case. Deactivating will also deactivate the

COMPRESS Help


Report Load Case, Check Hot Shutdown Case, and Check Reverse Pr Case switches for that particular load case.

Report Load Case -- Switch that allows the user to include or exclude a load case in the report. Check Hot Shutdown Case -- Switch to check the hot shutdown for a load case. Check Reverse Pr Case -- Switch to check the reverse Pr for a load case. Solve For Load No Solving -- Uses the loadings as entered and performs the WRC 537 analysis. Solve for Pr -- Solves for the maximum inward radial load permitted in conjunction with the loadings entered for Mc, Vc, ML, VL, and Mt for the given nozzle configuration. A value in the Pr field is automatically entered.

Solve for -Pr -- Solves for the maximum outward radial load permitted in conjunction with the loadings entered for Mc, Vc, ML, VL, and Mt for the given nozzle configuration. When you select this option, a value in the Pr field is automatically entered.

Solve for Mc -- Solves for the maximum circumferential moment permitted in conjunction with the loadings entered for Pr, Vc, ML, VL, and Mt for the given nozzle configuration. A value in the M2 field is automatically entered.

Solve for ML -- Solves for the maximum longitudinal moment permitted in conjunction with the loadings entered for Pr, Mc, V, VL, and Mt for the given nozzle configuration. A value in the M1 field is automatically entered.

Loadings follow the WRC 537 sign convention. Forces acting in the direction displayed on the graphic are entered as positive (+) values, and forces acting opposite to those displayed on the graphic are entered as negative (-) values. All forces are entered at the point of attachment of the nozzle to the vessel (face of the vessel wall).

Pr -- The radial loading on the nozzle, shown on the sketch as a magenta arrow. Mc -- The circumferential moment on the nozzle, shown on the sketch as a yellow arrow. Vc -- The circumferential shear force on the nozzle, shown on the sketch as a green arrow. ML -- The longitudinal bending moment on the nozzle, shown on the sketch as a white arrow. VL -- The longitudinal shear force on the nozzle, shown on the sketch as a cyan arrow.

COMPRESS Help


Mt -- The torsion, shown on the sketch as a red arrow. Design Factor -- The design factor is used as a multiplier against the ASME II-D allowable stress to determine the maximum combined stress allowed. The maximum combined stress is the same as the stress referred to as PL + Q in ASME VIII-2. Using "elastic shakedown" (see Note 1 below) as the criterion for limiting primary local membrane (PL) + secondary membrane + secondary bending stresses (Q) would then mean that twice yield stress is acceptable in this case. Since the ASME II-D allowable stresses are usually not greater than two thirds of the material yield stress a design factor of 3.0 is generally recommended. Note that certain materials (some stainless steels, for instance) listed in ASME-II-D have allowable stresses that are based on 90% of their yield strength. Using a design factor of 3.0 for these materials is acceptable because of the strain hardening characteristics of these materials. Note that the design factor DOES NOT deal with the issue of stress concentrations at notches and fatigue. The design factor can be specified for each load case. The COMPRESS FEA-Nozzles module can be used to design nozzles for cyclic loads (fatigue service). (1) Note: Very high stresses are often initially present at geometric discontinuities in pressure vessels. Elastic shakedown occurs when these high (secondary) stresses cause small localized plastic deformations to occur. This relieves the local tensile stress and leaves behind a local compressive stress after the load has been removed. Subsequent load applications are now resisted by the residual compressive stress that was introduced by the initial load application; thus, the calculated stress can now be up to twice yield before further plastic deformation occurs. Such a discontinuity is said to "shake down" to elastic action.

Maximum Stresses due to the Applied Loads - The developed stresses, primary circumferential, primary longitudinal and combined, are displayed in the yellow cells at the bottom of each load case column.

Copy load cases -- This button will provide the option to copy an existing load defined on a different nozzle.

WRC 537 for Nozzles on Heads -- The following dialog appears when you click on the WRC Local Stress button in the case of a nozzle on a head:

COMPRESS Help


The available inputs and options are similar to that of the Nozzle on Cylinder version of the

COMPRESS Help


dialog, with one exception.

Attachment type -- For WRC 537 only, the option to use the hollow attachment analysis is available for nozzles on hemispherical or formed heads. This option is hidden for WRC 107. Under WRC 107, COMPRESS assumes the nozzle-head attachment to be a rigid (solid) attachment when performing the analysis. If the nozzle nominal thickness is less than half of the vessel nominal thickness, the warning "Rigid insert assumption questionable" is reported in the Deficiencies Summary. This warning means the rigid (solid) assumption is not being met, and the results may not be conservative.

WRC 107 (Single Load Case) for Division 2 A06 and older For vessels designed for Division 2 A06 Addenda and older, the following dialog appears when you select the WRC Local Stress button in the case of a nozzle on a cylinder.

COMPRESS Help


Options and nomenclature are similar to the multiple load case WRC dialog described in this section, except that only one load case may be considered at a time.

COMPRESS Help


WRC 107 / 537 Nozzle FEA Details Dialog FEA Details Here you can specify applied loads and other information needed for finite analysis using the FEA-Nozzles module. FEA-Nozzles is actually the program Nozzle Pro from Paulin Research operated using an interface to COMPRESS. Data on applied loads can be entered directly for weight, operating, occasional, and thermal cases or can be copied over from previously-input values from the WRC Local Stress screen. To specify details for the FEA Nozzles program, it is necessary to input information into the Details for Finite Element Analysis that can be found on the second dialog of the Nozzle input.

COMPRESS Help


COMPRESS Help


The FEA Nozzles program has the capabilities of taking into consideration loadings for:

Weight -- The weight inputs should be any constant type loads acting in the installed case. Operating -- The operating loads are similar to the weight inputs. The difference between the operating and weight inputs is used to define the range case for fatigue analysis.

Occasional -- Occasional loads are usually wind, seismic, and other cases not defined as part of the typical operating conditions. Occasional loads should not include any portion of the weight or operating load cases.

Thermal -- This takes into consideration forces generated from material expansion and contraction. All four categories have the same inputs except for the additional fatigue input for the Operating, and Occasional inputs. If you wish to perform a fatigue analysis, then check the box Perform a fatigue Analysis. You will then have to specify the number of cycles.

COMPRESS Help


Get Values from WRC 107 / 537 screen -- This button will provide a dialog to allow copying of the values from one of the WRC load cases which are defined on the second dialog of the nozzle input. It is not necessary to input the WRC 107 / 537 loadings on that dialog; the user may input them on the Details for Finite Element Analysis dialog.

WRC 107 / 537 Convention -- COMPRESS uses the WRC 107 / 537 paper conventions for inputs. It then translates them into a global coordinate system. You may specify the loads in the WRC-107 dialog box located on the second screen of the Nozzle dialog and then copy them into the FEA details by clicking Get values from WRC 107 / 537 screen. If no values are set in the FEA details, then COMPRESS will use the internal pressure as the primary load when running the analysis.

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion -- Currently, COMPRESS only uses the Nozzle coefficient and the Vessel coefficient for reporting purposes. This is because COMPRESS does not support thermal gradients.

Stress Concentrations -- The stress concentration factor for the nozzle, pad, and the vessel are the notch effect multiplication factors for peak stresses as defined in ASME section VIII Div. 2 Appendix 4. They only affect the fatigue failure stress case.

Show Stresses outside of the Nozzle Discontinuity -- Check this box to calculate the stress in the entire model for the dynamic 3D plots. The tabular results will also be changed. A stress region removed from the discontinuity will be added to the report, and the highest stresses in this area reported. If a stress artifact exists at a boundary, it will be included in the report as well.

Set Manual Merge Nodes Tolerance -- In some instances, the space between nodes in the mesh may be too large or too small, use this option to set the tolerance manually. For more information see the NozzlePRO manual, which is available under the main Help menu.

COMPRESS Help


Pressure Condition -- Pressure condition can be specified as Internal, External, or Chamber MAWP.

Load Location -- The load location can be specified at the End of the Nozzle, or at the Nozzlesurface intersection. Please note that pressure thrust is automatically included in the analysis; there is no need for the user to check this or indicate it. In order to perform FEA on a nozzle (or multiple), under the action menu select Perform FEA Calcs.

You may either select an individual nozzle or multiple nozzles to run. By selecting the Options button you can view and edit current settings for the FEA run.

COMPRESS Help


WRC 297 -- For the WRC Analysis, you have the option to specify none or to have the WRC 297 run. The WRC 297 is a different method of analysis than the WRC 107 / 537. WRC 297 considers flexibility of the nozzle neck where WRC 107 / 537 does not.

Calculations Options -- For the calculations options, the user has the choice to compute stress is welds, Compute SIF's (Stress Intensification Factors) in cylinders for header, Deactivate smoothing, Use unstructured mesh for nozzles on heads, and do not average stresses which is recommended by Paulin Research Group. Much of these options are used to customize your specific needs.

Execution Options -- The execution options are personal preference. If you wish to not see the calculation window, than check Run silently. FEA-Nozzle report in separate window will open a

COMPRESS Help


small window and will show the calculations being performed. The last option is to erase FEANozzle results on exit. Typically it is better to have the third option checked so that you will know when the FEA is completed. *Please note that to avoid problems with the FEA run, it is best to not perform any computer operations while performing FEA. This will ensure that the FEA program is allocated the most memory on your computer.

Mesh Densities -- For the mesh densities there are three options available. They are course, normal, and dense. Depending on how accurate you wish the results to be will depend on the mesh density. The Denser the mesh will typically yield the most accurate results, however it will also take the longest to perform and will require the most memory from your computer.

Path to FEA-Nozzle Installation -- This is where the FEA program is installed on your system.

Path to FEA-Nozzle Output -- This is where the output files will be saved once the FEA run has completed. *Please note that the path to FEA-Nozzle Installation and the Path to FEA-Nozzle Output requires the two Path files be located in the same folder (i.e. as illustrated in the figure above).

Save -- Click the save button to save current settings as default. Please note that these settings can be applied to numerous nozzles at once. If you experience problems with the FEA program, try investigating the options you have selected. Often there is an option checked that is compromising the results. The output file will be located in the HTML report generated when the calculations are run (F3). The FEA results can be located directly below the calculations for the nozzle.

COMPRESS Help


For details on the FEA Nozzles report refer to the NozzlePRO manual, located under the Help menu in COMPRESS.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Plan View Dialog Plan View (Nozzle on Head) A plan view option is offered on the nozzle cross section screen for nozzles on heads. Click Plan View to display a graphical view of the nozzles on the head.

This head plan view enables you to quickly assess whether the areas of reinforcement overlap, or whether a nozzle location has been input incorrectly. COMPRESS will add an error message to the deficiencies list for every overlapping limit of reinforcement that is detected between any two adjacent nozzles. A legend at the upper left corner of the Plan View screen indicates the following:

Limits -- The teal circle around each opening indicates the radial limit of reinforcement used to determine the available area of reinforcement. All reinforcement within the teal

COMPRESS Help


circle is credited as available reinforcement. If two teal circles intersect, it means that area in the head is being counted by both nozzles and corrective action must be taken. Possible solutions are: Relocate the nozzle. Reduce the radial limit(s) of reinforcement for the nozzles with overlapping areas of available head reinforcement so that they do not overlap (see Nozzles Menu/Areas).

Nozzle OD-- The green circle indicates the nozzle outer diameter. Pad OD-- The dark blue circle indicates the current pad outer diameter (input as pad width). If the reinforcing pads of any two nozzles overlap, corrective action must be taken. COMPRESS does not compensate for overlapping pads. Possible solutions are: Relocate the nozzle. Reduce the pad width(s) so that they do not overlap.

Dish Radius (80%)-- The green circle indicates approximately where the knuckle region begins on a head. For a 2:1 head, the white circle is called the 80% radius. For an F&D head, the white circle is called the dish radius. Since the knuckle region typically has the highest stress in the head, more reinforcement is required if the nozzle limits of reinforcement are located within this area. Per UG-37, the calculation of the required head thickness (tr) is more conservative when the limit of reinforcement extends beyond the perimeter of the knuckle region on a head (green circle). The result is a larger area required (A) and less area available in the shell (A1).

COMPRESS Help


Elbow Connections The Elbow Connections dialog can be used to add elbows and pipe spools with attached flanges to a nozzle. The elbow connection dialog can be accessed from the Nozzle Menu or Ctrl-F2 or from the "Elbow Connections" button on the nozzle dimension dialog.

Design Conditions -- The design conditions section is used to define the common inputs that are applied to all the elbow connection assembly components. The design pressures and temperatures should normally be set from the nozzle by selecting the Use Nozzle Design Conditions switch but can be specified independently by turning off the switch.

Corrosion - Both an inner and outer corrosion value can be specified for the connecting components. The corrosion value can be synchronized with the parent nozzle's corrosion by setting the set mode Pipe corrosion allowance same as parent nozzle switch. Note that outer corrosion can not be specified for nozzles.

Unsupported Length of Piping - The total unsupported length of the elbow connection assembly is determined based on the actual lengths of the individual components. Any flanges included in the assembly are considered as lines of support. By selecting the Total Unsupported Length of Piping switch, a user defined value for the total unsupported length of piping can be input. This can be used to account for any additional piping that will be connected to the vessel. The unsupported length is used in the nozzle, elbow and pipe component calculations.

Radiography / NDE Settings -- Use the Radiography / NDE Settings button to specify the

COMPRESS Help


longitudinal and circumferential radiography / NDE examination for the elbow and pipe components. The circumferential seam examination will apply to all the circumferential seams in the assembly. Separate inputs are provided for the elbow and the pipe spool longitudinal seams.

Use Set Mode Default Values - Use this button to set the seam examination settings to the default values from the set mode options . Pipe Default Values - Use this button to open the Set Mode Elbow Connections dialog to review or change the default values.

Nozzle Connection -- The connection to the nozzle can be a single pipe or an elbow or a pipe with an elbow attached. Depending on the selection, appropriate inputs are available to define the material and geometry inputs. If the nozzle includes an ASME B16.5 flange then a matching flange will be added to the new elbow connection assembly.

Pipe End Connection -- If an elbow is included in the assembly then the piping end connection section includes various pipe / flange options. If a flange is included in the pipe end connection it must be specified from the Pipe End Flange Details button. Although multiple pipe end flanges can be included in the assembly, all pipe end flanges are the same.

ASME B16.9 Elbow Inputs -- If an elbow is included in the assembly then the ASME 16.9 Elbow Inputs section is available to define the required inputs. Available elbow types are from ASME 16.9 and include i) Long Radius 90 degree, ii) Short Radius 90 degree iii) Long Radius 45 degree iv) Long Radius variable diameter types. Elbow Material - The available material list is limited to the materials listed in ASME 16.9. The

COMPRESS Help


User Defined Material option can be used for other materials. The material switches for impact testing, normalized material, fine grain material and PWHT apply to the elbow material. Elbow Dimensions - The diameter and thickness are shown but can not be input directly. These values should match the main nozzle and the Match Nozzle Dimensions button can be used to reset the diameter and thickness values. Different diameter and thickness values can be set by using the Elbow Size Look-Up button to choose from standard NPS sizes.

Pipe Inputs -- If a pipe component is included on either the nozzle end or pipe end the required inputs are available in this section. If a pipe is included on both the nozzle end and pipe end, separate length inputs are available for each pipe. All other pipe inputs are common for both pipes. Piping has the same options for selecting diameter and thickness values as are provided for elbows (see above). Pipe Material - The available material list for pipe components is full ASME II-D materials list. The User Defined Material option can be used for other materials. The material switches for impact testing, normalized material, fine grain material and PWHT apply to the pipe material.

Details -- The Details button at the bottom right of the dialog will show or hide the Details dialog. The Details dialog shows a summary of size and radiography / NDE settings for the various components in the connection assembly. This allows the radiography / NDE settings to be reviewed without having to open the Radiography / NDE dialog.

COMPRESS Help


Attach Menu Use the Attach menu to add external and internal attachments to the vessel.

See the detail page for information on adding or editing the following items: Platform / Ladders < 10 - 2 > Trays < 10 - 7 > Packed Bed < 10 - 9 > Clip / Lug < 10 - 11 > - This option uses the WRC 107 / 537 analysis to design rectangular clips and support lugs. Its operation is similar to the WRC Local Stress operation as described for nozzles. Baffles < 10 - 6 > Piping < 10 - 12 > Insulation / Lining < 10 - 13 > Rigging / Lift Lug < 10 - 14 >

COMPRESS Help

Attach Menu < 10 - 1 >

Platform / Ladder

COMPRESS calculates the center of gravity of the platform and the platform weight, then calculates the eccentric overturning bending moment on the vessel. If you specify a 360° platform, then the eccentric bending moment is zero. COMPRESS calculates the shear and moments resulting from wind forces acting on the platform if "Calculate & Apply Wind Load" has been selected. As with all eccentric weights, COMPRESS determines the contribution of the platform weight to the vessel overturning moment by taking the vector sum of all overhead platform and other eccentric weights. COMPRESS assumes a worst case scenario when combining eccentric overturning with the moments resulting from wind and seismic forces. Wind and seismic forces are taken to attack the vessel from the direction that coincides with that of the net overturning moment due to overhead eccentric weights. The mass of all platforms, railings, and ladders affects the weight of the vessel and therefore the

COMPRESS Help


period of vibration, overturning moments, etc.

Copy Existing Platform Click this button to display a list of existing platform / ladders on the vessel. Select the platform to copy data from and select 'OK' to update the current platform data. Note that the platform elevation will not be updated if copying to or from a top head platform. After copying data from an existing platform, the datum elevations and platform angles should be reviewed in order to prevent interference. The following parameters are needed for platform design. Note that defaults may be saved for those inputs common to both circular and top head platforms in the Set Mode dialog.

Identifier-- A descriptive name for the platform and ladder. Platform Start Angle, End Angle -- These inputs specify the angular position in degrees of the platform around the circumference of the vessel. Looking at the plan view (top of vessel), 0° is at 12 o'clock, 90° is at 3 o'clock, etc.

Ladder Angle -- The angular position of the ladder coming up from below. Platform Width -- The width of the platform from the inside radius to the outside radius. Platform To Datum -- The distance from the bottom of the platform to the datum line. Shell Clearance-- The distance from the outer diameter of the cylinder (cylinder dimension before insulation) to the inner edge of the platform.

Grating Weight -- The weight per square foot of the grating (the area of the platform that is walked on).

Ladder Start to Datum -- The distance from the start of the ladder attached to this platform to the datum line. COMPRESS calculates the length of this ladder as the difference between the platform to datum and the ladder to datum distances.

Ladder Weight -- The weight per linear foot of ladder. The ladder weight is considered to be spread equally over the length of the ladder across the appropriate shell courses.

Railing Height -- The railing height is used when calculating the projected platform area in the wind shear analysis.

COMPRESS Help


Railing Weight -- The weight of a 1 foot length of railing. Calculate & Apply Wind Load/Do Not Apply Wind Load -- This tells COMPRESS whether to calculate the wind shear on the platform and add it to the wind calculations. Platform wind loadings may also be considered by using an increase in effective outer diameter.

Wind Force Coefficient -- The wind force coefficient (Cf) for calculating the platform wind shear. Refer to Wind Dialog for further details.

Railing Effective Height -- The effective height of the railing, used to find the projected area of the handrail for wind shear calculations. Table 4.1 from the ASCE publication Wind Loads and Anchor Bolt Design for Petrochemical Facilities recommends a value of 0.8 square feet per linear foot, which equates to an effective height of 9.6 inches.

Platform Depth-- The assumed depth of the platform structural framing, used to find the projected area of the platform for wind shear calculations.

Present When Vessel is Empty Present During Test Include in Lift Weight -- These boxes specify when to consider effects of the platform.

Top Platform/Ladder The inputs on this screen are the same as those used to add a platform and ladder, with the following exceptions:

Top Head Platform -- Notice how the graphic changes when you select this option. Top Head Start / Top Head End These locked fields indicate the elevations at the head weld seam ("Start") and at the top of the head ("End"). This information is provided for reference to assist in determining the proper platform location.

Platform Width, Length -- The actual width of the platform, followed by the length of the platform (in/mm).

Platform Angle -- Specifies the angular position in degrees from 0° to the top header

COMPRESS Help


platform centerline. Looking at the plan view (top or left of vessel), 0° is at 12 o'clock, 90° is at 3 o'clock, etc.

Offset -- The dimension as measured from the platform end to the vessel center line.

COMPRESS Help


Baffles

The baffles are a series of perforated plates, located between the front and rear tubesheets. They are used to direct shell side fluid flow and support the tubes. Use this dialog to specify the location of individual baffles.

Identifier - Select a baffle to edit its location. Distance From Front Tubesheet - Enter the distance from the shell side face of the front tubesheet to the centerline of the selected baffle.

Edit Baffle Group - Use this button to edit the properties of the baffle group. Note: Baffles are only available for heat exchangers. Additional information on creating baffles is available in the Heat Exchanger help file.

COMPRESS Help


Trays

Trays are input in groups. A tray group consists of one or more uniformly spaced trays having the same weight and liquid attributes. Trays spaced irregularly must be input as separate groups.

Identifier -- A name for this group of trays. # of Trays in This Group -- The number of identical trays to be added as a group. Location of Bottom Tray -- The location of the lowest tray. Tray Spacing -- The constant spacing between the trays in this group. Enter the desired spacing.

Tray Diameter -- The actual diameter of the tray, which may be less than the vessel ID. Tray Weight -- The weight per square foot of each individual tray in the group. COMPRESS assumes the trays are circular. The area and weight of the group of trays are calculated accordingly.

Support & Misc Weight -- The weight of an individual support plus any other weight associated with the tray.

Liquid Depth on Tray -- The depth of liquid held up on a tray when the vessel is in the operating condition.

COMPRESS Help


Liquid Specific Gravity -- The specific gravity of the liquid held up on a tray in the operating condition. From the depth and the specific gravity of the liquid, COMPRESS calculates the weight of the liquid on the trays in the operating condition. The weight of liquid on the trays is added to the weight of the vessel only in the operating condition, which in turn affects the period of vibration, the overturning moment, etc.

Present When Vessel is Empty Present During Hydrotest Include in Lift Weight -- These specify when the trays are installed. One Pass/Two Pass -- This input controls how the trays are depicted in Vessel Drafting Program.

COMPRESS Help


Packed Bed

Identifier -- A name for the packed/catalyst bed. Bottom of Bed -- Distance from the datum to the bottom of the bed. Bed Depth -- The height from the bed bottom to the bed top. Bed Diameter -- The outside diameter of the bed. Bed Density -- The average density of the bed without any entrained liquid. Liquid Hold-up -- The percentage of liquid hold-up. This input will account for any liquid that collects in the packing or catalyst during operating conditions. It is expressed as a percentage of the dry packing weight. For example, if the liquid hold up weight is expected to equal the dry packing weight, then enter 100.

Present When Vessel is Empty Present During Test Include in Lift Weight -- These specify when the bed is installed. Note: The weight of the packed bed is applied to the vessel component corresponding to the bottom elevation of the bed and to all shell components below that elevation, including the vessel support. The mass of the packed bed is included in the seismic analysis (if applicable). However, COMPRESS does not consider the effect (if any) of the packed bed

COMPRESS Help


on the circumferential stress of the shell components.

COMPRESS Help


Clips / Lugs

Use this dialog to specify geometry and attachment location details for the clip. WRC 537 or WRC 107 loads can be specified for the clip. See the nozzle WRC Loads dialog for more information on WRC loads.

COMPRESS Help


Piping

COMPRESS accounts for piping attached to a vessel using this option. The weight of the piping and the weight of the liquid contained by the piping is considered in piping weight calculations. Piping wind loads are considered by changing vessel effective OD in Codes Menu/Wind. You can add piping details to cylinders, transitions, skirts, and legs using different weights of piping and/or liquid for the individual components. There are two dialog boxes for making data input for piping: User Defined and Detailed Geometry . If you want to enter piping weights directly use the User Defined dialog box: Enter the piping parameters as requested. The piping axis is assumed to be parallel to the vessel axis. The other option, Detailed Geometry, offers help with pipe lookup tables and the ability to specify a pipe as being connected to one of the vessel nozzles.

COMPRESS Help


Insulation / Linings Insulation and Lining are specified in a very similar manner. The following describes the insulation dialog.

This screen accounts for the distribution and the mass of insulation added to a vessel. Each head, cylinder, transition, or skirt can be insulated using a different insulation thickness and/or insulation density. Unique insulation support spacing and support weight can be assigned to each cylinder and/ or transition. COMPRESS assumes that insulation is always added to the outside of a component.

Components -- All vessel components that can be insulated are arranged vertically under the heading Component Name. Click on a component in this list to highlight its row. If no numbers appear in the highlighted row, it means that this component has no insulation. You can highlight one component at a time, enabling each component to have different insulation properties, or you can highlight several/all components at once to assign insulation properties globally. Once highlighted, click on the component row again to deselect it.

COMPRESS Help


Rigging / Lift Lugs COMPRESS includes numerous types of lift lug options. Standard plate type lugs are typically used for lifting horizontal vessesls and as tailing lugs for horizontal to vertitcal rotational lifts. Ear type lugs and trunnion type lugs are only applicable to vertical vessels and almost always involve a rotational lift. Common input data is described on the plate / tailing lug page. Specific inputs for ear and trunnion type lugs are described on the respective pages. See Appendix C for detailed information on the lift lug procedure.

COMPRESS Help


Plate / Tailing Lift Lugs

Use this dialog to specify geometry and attachment location details for standard and tailing lift lugs.

Identifier -- Enter a name for the lift lug. Lug Material -- Enter the lug material identifier. This input is for reference only. Allowable stress values for lift lug material are entered separately.

Lug Plate Length (L) -- Enter the overall length of the lug plate. Lug Height (H) -- Enter the height of the lug plate.

COMPRESS Help


Hole Diameter (d) -- Enter the hole diameter for the lift pin. Typically there should be very little clearance between the lift pin and the hole diameter. If the Standard Shackle Size Lookup is used then this value is updated to provide 0.0625" (1.6 mm) clearance for the pin.

Lug Thickness (t) -- Enter the thickness of the lift lug plate. Typically there should be very little clearance between the lift lug plate and the shackle. If collars are used then collar dimensions are input separately, see below.

Hole offset from Lug center line (a1) -- Enter any hole offset from the center line of the lug. This will affect the moment arm and bending stresses. To locate the hole in the center of the lug use a value of zero (0).

Height of hole from base (a2) -- Enter the height of the lug hole from the base of the lug. It is important that the hole be far enough from the lug edge to prevent shear tear out but must also provide sufficient clearance for the lift shackle. This dimension in taken from the bottom of the lug plate to the center of the hole and does not include any pad thickness.

Lug Weld Size (tw) -- Enter the fillet lug weld size. It is assumed that the lug is attached to the vessel using a continuous fillet all around.

Maximum Load Angle (Beta) -- Enter the maximum angle between the lift load (cable or chain) and the perpendicular to the lug. This angle will affect the bending moment applied to the lift lug. The load angle is shown on the dialog sketch as well as on the 3-D model. This can be used to verify that the correct angle has been specified. This is not applicable if the vessel will undergo a rotational lift. For vessels that are not vertically symmetric (i.e. vessels with transitions) the value of F will be calculated twice due to the different angle inputs from the lugs.

Lug Angular Position -- This angle refers to the plan view position of the lug on the vessel. In the COMPRESS scheme, 0° is at 12 o'clock, 90° is at 3 o'clock, 180° is at 6 o'clock, and 270° is at 9 o'clock.

Impact Load Factor -- This is a multiplication factor applied to the vessel weight. The typical range for this value is 1.25 to 2.0 with a value of 1.5 being common. The value input must be at least 1.0 and a warning is displayed for values greater than 2.5.

Local Stress procedure -- The local stresses on the vessel at the lug location can be analyzed using either the WRC 107 / 537 procedure or a procedure for line loads as detailed in the European standard EN13445. If a WRC 107 / 537 procedure is used then the user can input a design factor. Typically a value of 3 is used for this design factor. WRC Local Stress analysis is only available for lugs on cylinders.

Lug Orientation -- Plate type lift lugs can be oriented either longitudinally (lug length parallel with vessel axis) or circumferentially (lug length perpendicular to the vessel axis). Most lugs will have a longitudinal orientation. Lugs with a circumferential orientation may be utilized on a horizontal vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Collar Dimensions -- All lift lug types have the option of specifying an additional reinforcing collar around the lug hole. The collar can either be made from 'doubler plates' on each side of the lug or can be a hollow bar inserted through the main lug plate. If a collar is used the thickness, diameter and weld size must be specified. Collar weld shear calculations are performed for doubler plate stype collars.

Attachment to Vessel -- Specifying the location of a lift lug is similar to locating other attachments. The user can select the component to attach the lug to and the offset from the component seam or in some cases an offset from the datum line or the center of gravity can be specified. The offset value is measured from the reference point to the hole centerline.

Has Pad -- Use this switch to include a pad between the lift lug and the vessel. If a pad is selected then the dimensional inputs for the pad are available. The pad dimensional inputs are self explanatory.

Allowable Stress Values -- Select this button to open a dialog to allow the specification of the required lift lug allowable stresses. The lift lug analysis requires allowable stresses for tensile, shear, bearing, bending and weld shear loading. COMPRESS will initially set the allowable stresses to reasonable default values for carbon steel lift lugs. This dialog will allow the user to input values for the required allowable stresses. As well there is an option to reset all the allowable stress values based on the vessel material yield stress of the component to which the lift lug is attached. This is useful if the lug material is the same as the vessel component material. Default stress values are tensile = 0.6*Sy, bearing = 0.9*Sy, bending = 0.67*Sy, shear = 0.4*Sy. COMPRESS also offers an option to set allowable stress values based on ASME B30.20 which requires maximum stress to be limited to (1/3)*Sy. COMPRESS applies this limitation on the allowable tensile stress value and ratios the other allowable stress values based on the limits listed above.

User Defined Lift Lugs Look-Up -- Select this button to open a dialog to allow the selection or definition of a user defined lift lug. Select the desired lug from the list of user defined lift lugs and click OK to update the lift lug dialog with the selected lift lug. The user defined lift lug dialog also allows the user to Add, Edit and Delete lift lugs from their list. One lug in the user list can be specified as being the default. This default lug will automatically be selected when the User Defined Lift Lug dialog is opened. To save a current lift lug to the user list use the Load Current Lug button from the User Defined Lift Lug dialog and then click the Save button.

Standard Shackle Size Look-Up -- Select this button to open a dialog to allow the selection of a standard size lift shackle. COMPRESS will initially select the correct size lift shackle based on the vessel lift weight and the current number of lugs specified. Selecting a lift shackle from this dialog will result in the lug hole diameter being updated with a 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) clearance. The lug plate thickness and hole height from base will also be adjusted if necessary to

COMPRESS Help


ensure the shackle will fit on the lug.

Copy Existing Lug -- This button is only available if there are multiple lugs defined on the vessel. Use this button to copy the dimensional values from an existing lug. This feature is helpful when one lug has been added to a vessel and a second lug is being specified. Selecting this button will allow the user to choose which lug to copy values from. Note that this will not copy location or load angle as these typically will need to be different for the new lug.

Add matching lug for a balanced lift -- Select this switch to have COMPRESS automatically add a second lug to the vessel. This is typically used for a horizontal vessel which will require two lift lugs.

COMPRESS Help


Ear Type Lift Lugs

The input dialog for ear type lugs is similar to the standard dialog with the following exceptions.

Lug Diameter (D) -- Ear type lugs are assumed to have a top semi-circle profile. This input specifies the diameter of this section of the lug. This diameter should exceed 3 times the hole diameter.

Lug Projection (L) -- Lug projection is the distance from the top of the lug weld to the lug hole centerline.

Brace Plate To Head -- Ear type lugs can include a brace plate from the lug to the top head of the vessel. The plate increases the total weld area and the weld polar moment of inertia. It also reduces the moment arm for weak axis bending of the lug. The brace plate weld can be excluded

COMPRESS Help


from the total weld area by using the "Consider brace plate weld in weld stress calculations" switch on the Set Mode -> Calculation page. No analysis is done for the brace plate itself and it is recommended that this brace plate be removed before the vessel is put in service.

Lug Welds -- Ear type lugs are typically used for rotational lifts and the weld must resist torsional loading. The ear lug weld to the vessel is made up of either 3, 4, 6 or 7 individual line welds. The simplest weld configuration is made up of 2 vertical welds of length L3 and a horizontal weld of length B. In order to increase the weld area without increasing the lug size the 'Extended Weld Area' option can be selected which results in 6 line welds, 2 vertical of length L3 , 2 vertical of length 'd2' and 3 horizontal welds of total length 'B' as shown in the above figure. If a brace plate is included the weld between the brace plate and the lug can be included as a seventh line weld (Set Mode -> Calculation -> Consider brace plate weld in weld stress calculations). The ear lug report gives properties for all of these individual line welds as well as the resultant weld group properties including the polar moment of inertia.

WRC 107 / 537 -- The local stresses on the vessel at the lug location are analyzed using the WRC 107 / 537 procedure. The user can input a design factor between 1.5 and 3.0, typically a value of 3 is used for this design factor. For rotational lift calculations the WRC 107 / 537 analysis is done for all angles from 0 degrees to 90 degrees and the worst case (maximum combined stress) is reported.

Select Parent -- Typically ear type lugs are located at the top cylinder just below the top head. However there are configurations that use ear type lugs at lower elevations. The 'Select Parent Component' button provides an option to select the attachment location for the ear lugs. Only cylinders and head straight flanges which are above the vessel center of gravity can be selected. This feature may be utilized when a vessel has a transition and the top cylinder may be adequate enough to support the lifting load.

COMPRESS Help


Trunnion Type Lift Lugs

The input dialog for trunnion type lugs is similar to the ear and standard dialogs with the following exceptions.

Pipe Outer Diameter (Dp) -- Trunnion type lugs use pipe as an extension from the vessel. This is the outer diameter of the trunnion pipe. Standard pipe sizes can be selected from the 'Select Pipe' button. This will populate the pipe dimension inputs with the pipe nominal dimensions.

Minimum Pipe Thickness (tp) -- Input the minimum trunnion pipe thickness. COMPRESS does not take any pipe tolerance into account when calculating stresses in the trunnion pipe.

Lug Diameter (D) -- Trunnion type lugs are assumed to have a top semi-circle profile. This input specifies the diameter of this section of the lug. This diameter should exceed 3 times the

COMPRESS Help


hole diameter.

Eccentricity (E) -- Trunnion type lugs extend outward from the vessel to provide clearance, this is specified as an eccentricity value. Eccentricity is measured from the vessel to the centerline of the lug plate. The larger the eccentricity the greater the bending moment on the trunnion / vessel connection.

Centerline distance (L) -- Distance between the trunnion pipe centerline and the lift hole centerline.

Trunnion Type -- COMPRESS provides the option of 'fixed plate' or 'turning plate' type trunnions. The fixed plate type has a lug plate welded to the trunnion pipe. This results in torsional stresses being induced in the lug plate and the trunnion pipe. The 'turning plate' type permits the lug plate to rotate about the trunnion pipe. This prevents torsional stresses in the lug plate and trunnion pipe but requires guide plates for the lug plate.

Pad Width -- Pads for trunnion lugs are assumed to be circular. As such only pad width is specified, pad length is not required.

COMPRESS Help


Rigging Analysis The Rigging Analysis is a feature which creates shear, moment, and bending stress diagrams to describe the vessel during horizontal lift using two support points.

Adding Rigging Analysis To add Rigging Analysis to a vessel, select the option under the Attach -> Rigging / Lift Lug menu.

This brings up the Rigging Analysis Preview dialog, in which you may specify lift points and view simplified versions of the shear, moment, and bending stress diagrams which are present in the report:

COMPRESS Help


You will find the following options in the dialog:

Distance to CG -- Lift points are specified by entering distances to the left and right of the center of gravity of the vessel. For vertical vessels, the left ends of the diagrams always correspond to the top end of the vessel, and the right to the bottom end of the vessel.

User defined lift point elevations -- Lift points are automatically synchronized with lift lug locations when a valid lift lug configuration is present, but this may be overridden by checking the "User defined lift point elevations" switch in the Rigging Analysis Preview dialog. Rigging analysis may still be added to vessels without Lift Lugs.

Reset Lift Points -- This button is only available when valid lift lugs are present and the "User-

COMPRESS Help


defined lift point elevations" option is checked. Click this button to reset the rigging lift points to match the lug locations.

Edit Lift Lugs -- While in the Rigging Analysis Preview dialog, Lift Lugs, if present, may be directly edited through the Edit Lift Lugs button:

Report -- The Rigging Analysis report includes a table summarizing shear, moment, and stress values at different elevations. Entries include main vessel components, platforms, lift points, shear/moment/stress maximums, the vessel center of gravity, and, if a support skirt is present, the skirt / vessel juncture. Entries are marked on the diagrams as well. Notes: -Rigging Analysis is not available for vessels with intermediate skirts or internal heads. -Lift points may not be positioned on ballerina-type skirts, which are defined as single- or multipart skirts which both start and end within the extents of the main vessel. -For vessels with leg supports, the Rigging Analysis treats the legs as point loads acting at the elevation of the center of the leg attachment weld. The bending stress in the legs and local stress at the attachment to the vessel are not calculated.

COMPRESS Help


Support Menu The Support menu is used to add or edit support structures such as: skirts, saddles, legs, lugs, and skirt base rings.

See the detail page for information on adding or editing the following items: Skirt Support < 11 - 2 > Saddles < 11 - 7 > Legs < 11 - 12 > Lugs < 11 - 26 > Skirt Base Ring < 11 - 28 >

COMPRESS Help

Support Menu < 11 - 1 >

Skirt Support This is the design screen for a skirt at the base of a vessel

COMPRESS calculates the required thickness at the bottom and top of the skirt on both the windward (tensile) and leeward (compressive) sides of the vessel. The following conditions are considered: Wind and/or seismic - operating and corroded Wind and/or seismic - empty and corroded Wind - hydrotest in new condition Vortex shedding - operating and corroded (if specified) Vortex shedding - empty and corroded (if specified) External pressure - operating and corroded (if specified)

COMPRESS Help


External pressure - empty and corroded (if specified)

Material -- Enter a material specification for the skirt or click the down arrow button to display the short list of materials. Although a skirt is not a pressurized component, it is necessary to use a material from the ASME stress database so COMPRESS can do a compressive buckling check. COMPRESS uses the vacuum tables from ASME Section II, Part D, Subpart 3 to determine the allowable compressive stress on the skirt.

Top Diameter/Bottom Diameter -- Enter the desired value for the diameter at the top and bottom of the skirt. Both diameters are equal for a straight skirt. The bottom diameter is larger than the top diameter for a tapered skirt.

Overall Length-- Enter the total length (L) of the skirt section from the base of the skirt to the top of the skirt. If a baseplate is attached, the overall length is taken to the bottom of the baseplate:

Corrosion Inside / Outside -- Enter the desired value for the corrosion allowance. Joint Efficiency, Top / Bottom -- Enter the joint efficiency for the weld at the top and bottom junctures of the skirt and the vessel.

Nominal Thickness -- Enter the uncorroded thickness of the skirt. The required thickness of the skirt due to the governing loading is displayed to the right of this data field.

Design Temperature-- Enter the temperature for the operating condition. All materials have a maximum permissible temperature as specified by ASME, Section II, Part D. If you enter a temperature higher than the maximum allowed, COMPRESS displays a warning message and changes the input value to the maximum temperature allowed. The maximum temperatures may be limited by either: Tensile stress (ASME, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1) -- Enter the allowable stress. Compressive stress - Vacuum Charts (ASME, Section II, Part D, Subpart 3) -- Enter the allowable stress.

Attached to-- Select the component that the skirt will be attached to from the available list. Attachment Offset-- The attachment offset is the distance from the attached end of the skirt to the weld seam (where the head/cone welds onto the shell). This input is independent of the datum position selected and is used to fix the attachment point of the skirt on the vessel. If the skirt is attached to a head, select the "Automatic calculate" option to have COMPRESS determine the offset based on the skirt top diameter.

Attach Base Ring-- Select this button to add a base ring to the skirt. Note the base ring can also be added / edited from the Base Ring menu option.

COMPRESS Help


Add Skirt Opening-- Use this to add a skirt opening to the skirt. Edit Skirt Opening-- Click this to edit an existing skirt opening already specified on this skirt. COMPRESS allows multiple skirt openings on each support skirt. If there is more than one opening specified, the select component dialog appears:

COMPRESS Help


Skirt Opening COMPRESS includes the ability to specify skirt openings. A skirt opening can be added by selecting the menu option Support -> Skirt -> Skirt Opening or from the Add Skirt Opening button on the support skirt dialog. The skirt opening is analyzed for required reinforcing area in a cylindrical shell subjected to longitudinal tensile stress as per ASME Section VIII Division 1, UG-37, and subjected to longitudinal compressive stress as per ASME Section VIII Division 2, Part 4.5.17. The restrictions and limitations of these analyses apply to this analysis of the skirt opening.

Opening Type -- Four skirt opening types are available. Each includes a circular sleeve and may also include an internal projection and/or a reinforcing pad. Type 1 -- No pad, no internal projection. Type 2 -- With pad, no internal projection. Type 3 -- No pad, with internal projection. Type 4 -- With pad and internal projection.

COMPRESS Help


Opening for Nozzle -- If a nozzle is present on the bottom head of the vessel, inside the skirt, this combo box is used to associate the current opening with that nozzle in the report. COMPRESS will offer to automatically adjust the opening to match the nozzle, including an allowance for mating flanges and the pipe elbow.

General inputs -- The inputs used to specify the position of a skirt opening are much like those used when placing a nozzle on a cylinder.

Tilt Angle -- For openings on non-sloped skirts a tilt angle can be specified. Click Next in the Skirt Opening dialog to bring up the Skirt Opening Dimensions dialog:

User Specified Limit of Reinforcement -- If overlapping limits of reinforcement exist between two skirt openings, an error deficiency is reported. For overlapping limits, the limit(s) should be reduced utilizing the User Specified Limit of Reinforcement option

COMPRESS Help


Saddles COMPRESS considers the weight of the vessel, the weight of the vessel's contents, and any seismic or wind loading in the saddle analysis.

Saddle Material -- This input is for your reference only. COMPRESS does not access the ASME stress database for saddle allowable stress, instead using the Saddle Allowable Stress you input in the field directly below the material specification.

Saddle Allowable Stress -- You must enter a positive value for allowable stress.

COMPRESS Help


Saddle Yield Stress -- You must enter a positive value for yield stress. Saddle Distance from Datum (L) -- This dimension locates the saddles on the vessel with respect to the datum line. Enter the dimension from the datum line to the center line of the closest saddle support.

Distance Between Saddles (G) -- Enter the distance between the saddle supports from center line to center line.

Saddle Width (B) -- The saddle width is taken as the width of the stiffening ribs viewed from the side.

Saddle Height (H) -- This is the distance between the axial center line of the vessel and the underside of the base plate.

Saddle Contact Angle (Theta) -- The saddle contact angle is taken as the included angle of the saddle. The wear plate is considered separately (see Wear plate contact angle, below).

Wear Plate Thickness (tp) -- Enter the thickness of the wear plate, if used. It is recommended that the wear plate thickness not exceed the shell plate thickness.

Wear Plate Width (Wp) -- Enter the width of the wear plate. The wear plate is considered by the Zick analysis (used by COMPRESS) to reduce some of the calculated saddle stresses when certain criteria are met: (1) The circumferential stress at the horn of the saddle (S4 ) will be reduced by using a wear plate if the wear plate contact angle exceeds the saddle contact angle by at least 11.46 degrees and the width of the wear plate is at least B + sqrt(R0tc). (2) The ring compression over the saddle (S5) will be reduced by using a wear plate if the wear plate width is at least tw + sqrt(R0tc). Where B = saddle (outside rib) width tw = web plate thickness R0 = shell outside radius at the saddle tc = shell thickness (corroded) at the saddle (3) The tangential shear stress in the shell (S 3 ) will be reduced by using a wear plate if the wear plate contact angle exceeds the saddle contact angle by at least 11.46 degrees.

Wear plate contact angle -- Enter the angle (in degrees) of the arc where the wear plate contacts the vessel outer surface.

Standard Saddle Details-- This popup box shows the default dimensions for saddles provided

COMPRESS Help


by COMPRESS according to vessel diameter. These are the same dimensions as in the PIP (Process Industry Practices) Standard. You may change these dimensions to suit your own company standards. Standard saddles may also be defined in metric units.

Steel Foundation -- Select this switch if the saddles are mounted to a steel foundation. This will remove the "Foundation Allowable Stress" input and the foundation bearing check will not be performed.

Centered Web/Web at Edge of Rib -- This switch allows you to specify the construction of the saddle with respect to the web plate and saddle rib placements. The following sketches illustrate the two saddle types:

COMPRESS Help


Web Thickness, tw -- A recommended minimum web thickness is 1/2". Base Length (E) -- This is the length of the base plate as viewed from the end of the vessel. Base Width (F) -- This is the width of the base plate as viewed from the side of the vessel. Number of Ribs -- Enter the total number of ribs including the two outside ribs. For example, an input of 2 ribs is a saddle configuration that only has end ribs and no intermediate ribs. The outside ribs are always included unless the number of ribs is set to 0. A saddle configuration with no ribs is recommended only for small vessels. Note that it is not permissible to specify a single (1) rib saddle configuration where only a single rib with no end ribs exists at the vessel center line. The sketches above show examples of saddles with four ribs.

Rib Spacing -- This is the distance from center line to center line between two adjacent stiffener ribs and does not apply to the end ribs. The end ribs are always located at the ends of the saddle base plate with an end distance "X" from the end of the base plate (see sketch on saddle dialog). If only 2 ribs are specified, then the rib spacing used in the calculations is the base plate length (E) minus two times the base plate extension (X) minus the rib thickness.

Rib Thickness -- Enter a value for rib thickness. Bolt Material -- This input is for your reference only. Bolt Allowable Shear Stress -- COMPRESS does not access the ASME stress database for anchor bolt allowable stresses. Enter the desired anchor bolt allowable shear stress.

Coefficient of Friction -- Enter the coefficient of friction between the saddle base plate and the foundation. Some typical values for coefficient of friction are shown in the table below:

COMPRESS Help


Surface

Friction Factor µ

Lubricated steel to concrete

0.45

Steel to steel

0.40

Lubrite to steel over 500 º F

0.15

Lubrite to steel less than 500 º F 0.10

Bolt Size -- Enter the size of the nominal diameter of the anchor bolt. Number of Bolts -- Enter the number of bolts used per saddle. Bolt Corrosion Allowance -- Enter the corrosion allowance. Anchor Bolt Types -- Tag one of the three options on the next group of radio buttons to identify the type of anchor bolt to be used. These types correspond to the types established in the bolts database.

Bolt Look Up-- Click this button to display a list of available bolts. This list will be based on the anchor bolt type. Select the desired bolt size from the list to update the "Bolt Size" input. Metric bolts may be used even if the U.S. Customary system of units is being used by COMPRESS.

Use MAWP -- Some of the stresses in the Zick paper combine the effect of stresses due to earthquake and weight with stresses due to internal pressure. If the Use MAWP switch is not tagged, then the pressure stress calculation will be based on the design pressure. If the Use MAWP switch is tagged, then the pressure stress will be based on the vessel maximum allowable working pressure.

Add Stiffener Rings-- Click this button to add stiffener rings to the saddles. A stiffener ring dialog will be displayed allowing the user to define the ring structure, material, location and number of rings. There is also an option to have these rings act as vacuum rings for the vessel. Note, regular vacuum rings will not be considered as saddle stiffener rings. The only way to have saddle stiffener rings is to add them with this procedure.

COMPRESS Help


Legs COMPRESS designs support legs according to the rules found in the AISC manual. Select Legs from the Support menu. The Support Legs screen appears.

Identifier -- Enter a name for the legs. Material -- Enter the leg material specification. This input is for reference only; COMPRESS determines the leg allowable stresses based on AISC rules.

Legs Attached to -- Select the component to which the legs will be attached from the drop down list by clicking on the down arrow button or clicking in the field.

Effective Length Coefficient (K) -- The K factor depends on the rotational restraint at the ends of the unbraced leg. See AISC Ninth Edition page 5-135 Table C-C2.1 for recommended design K values.

COMPRESS Help


According to Bednar Chapter 5, the support leg can be approximated by a column with conditions between one end guided, one end fixed (K=1), and one end guided, the other end hinged (K=2). In the above table, this is shown in sketch (a) and sketch (d). A recommended value to use for K is 1.2. COMPRESS will not allow a value for K smaller than 1.0.

Stress Coefficient (Cm) -- Cm is taken from AISC, Chapter H page 5-55. COMPRESS defaults at a Cm value of 0.85. Other values from the AISC manual may be chosen if desired.

Yield Stress (Fy) -- Enter the yield stress of the leg material. COMPRESS defaults at 36,000 psi, a typical value for steel.

Elastic Modulus (E) -- Enter the modulus of elasticity for the leg material. COMPRESS defaults at 29x106 psi, a typical value for steel.

Braced Leg Support -- Activate this option to add bracing to the legs. Use MAWP -- Activate this option to use the vessel chamber MAWP in lieu of the vessel design pressure in the calculation of the local stresses in the shell at the leg attachment point. The operating liquid static pressure at the bottom of the component to which the legs are attached is added to the pressure considered.

Number of Legs (3 to 42) -- Enter the number of legs desired on the vessel from a minimum of 3 to a maximum of 42.

Angular Position -- Enter the angular location of the first leg. Overall Leg Length -- Enter the leg length from the bottom of the base plate to top of the leg (shown as L in the figure below).

Leg Base to Girth Seam Length -- Enter the distance from the bottom of the base plate to the head to shell seam (shown as L1 in the figure below).

COMPRESS Help


Reduce Leg Eccentricity to

COMPRESS assumes the axial load on the leg is supported at the outside fiber of the leg see below. If this is the case, do not mark the checkbox. If the leg is not supported at the outside fiber of the leg, check this box and enter the actual eccentricity in the field provided. The case shown in Figure (b), below, has an eccentricity equal to zero. The center line of the leg is tangent with the outer diameter of the vessel. COMPRESS will not accept a negative input. Figure (a) shows eccentricity for an I beam leg with the flange welded directly to the shell. Figure (b) shows the minimum eccentricity. By eliminating the eccentric end moment the vessel considered in Figure (b) imparts a smaller bending stress to the supporting leg than a vessel constructed as shown in Figure (a).

COMPRESS Help


Anchor Bolts

Anchor Bolt Types -- Select one of the four anchor bolt types: Series 8 Threads, Coarse Bolts, Metric Bolts, or AISC Bolt Areas. These types correspond to the types established in the bolts database. If the AISC bolt areas switch is selected, then the bolt root tensile area will be calculated using the method outlined in the AISC Ninth edition page 4-147. Metric bolts may be used even if the U.S. Customary system of units is being used by COMPRESS.

Bolt Material -- Enter the bolt material specification. This input is for reference only. COMPRESS does not access the ASME stress database for anchor bolt allowable stresses but uses the Bolt allowable stress input (below) instead.

Bolt Circle -- Enter the diameter of the anchor bolt circle. # Bolts/Leg -- Enter the number of anchor bolts per leg. Bolt Allowable Stress -- COMPRESS does not access the ASME stress database for anchor bolt allowable stresses. Enter the desired anchor bolt allowable stress. Some typical bolt allowable stresses are listed below. If you enter 0 here, a warning message is displayed when the OK button is clicked.

Bolt material Bolt Allowable Stress (psi) A307

20,000

A325

44,000

A449

40,000 (dia = 1.0 inch)

A490

54,000

Anchor Bolt Size -- Enter the nominal anchor bolt size. Bolt Corrosion Allowance -- Enter the corrosion allowance to be applied on the bolt. Corrosion on bolts is applied to the root radius of the bolt. For example, if you specify a corrosion of 0.0625, that means that the root radius of the bolt is corroded by 0.0625".

COMPRESS Help


Bolt Clearance -- This is the distance between the outside diameter of the bolt and the inside diameter of the bolt hole. Enter the clearance required between the bolt diameter and the holes in the base and compression plates. If you enter 0 here, COMPRESS will default to 0.375" (9.53mm).

Leg Bracing

Identifier -- Enter a name for the bracing. Material -- Enter the bracing material specification. This input is for reference only. COMPRESS determines the leg allowable stresses based on AISC rules.

Yield Stress (Fy) -- Enter the yield stress of the brace material. COMPRESS defaults at 36,000 psi, a typical value for steel.

Elastic Modulus (E) -- Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bracing material. COMPRESS defaults at 29x106 , a typical value for steel.

COMPRESS Help


Structure

Select the leg brace structure type and size. The available brace sizes listed are taken from the Materials Structure Database. In the design mode, the minimum brace structure is automatically selected from the available structures in the list. A larger structure may be selected if desired.

Bracing Height (h')

Enter the vertical distance between the centers of gravity of the connection points of the bracing to the brackets.

Brace Chord Length (C'1 )

Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of gravity of the connection points of the bracing to the brackets between a pair of adjacent legs.

COMPRESS Help


Vertical Offset Distance (y')

Enter the vertical distance from the bottom of the baseplate to the center of gravity of the lower bracing connection point to the bracket.

Pinned at Center

Activate this option to pin the braces at the center intersection. Pinning the braces at the center reduces the effective buckling length of the brace. Per AISC, Ninth Edition, paragraph B7 (page 5-37), the slenderness ratio (Kl/r) preferably should not exceed 200. The Pressure Vessel Design Manual, Second Edition by Dennis Moss recommends that cross-bracing should be pinned at center when the slenderness ration exceeds 120.

End Connection Select the method of connection of the brace to the bracket.

Bracing Bolts

Bolt Type -- Select one of the four anchor bolt types: Series 8 Threads, Coarse Bolts, Metric Bolts, or AISC Bolt Areas. These types correspond to the types established in the bolts database. If the AISC bolt areas switch is selected, then the bolt root tensile area will be calculated using

COMPRESS Help


the method outlined in the AISC Ninth edition page 4-147.

Bolt Lookup -- Click this option to select a nominal anchor bolt size from a listing of all available sizes in the Bolts Database of the bolt type specified.

Bolt Diameter -- Enter the nominal anchor bolt size. Bolt Ultimate Strength -- Enter the ultimate tensile strength for the bolt material. # Bolts / Connection -- Enter the number of bolts at each brace to bracket connection point. Bolt Corrosion Allowance -- Enter the corrosion allowance to be applied on the bolt. Corrosion on bolts is applied to the root radius of the bolt. For example, if you specify a corrosion of 0.0625, that means that the root radius of the bolt is corroded by 0.0625".

Bracing Weld

Weld Length -- Enter the length of the weld along one side of the brace to bracket connection. The total weld length resisting the load is calculated as 2 times the weld length plus the weld width.

Weld Width -- Enter the width of the weld along the end edge of the brace to bracket connection.

Weld Leg Size -- Enter the fillet weld leg size of the brace to bracket weld. Weld Allowable Stress -- Enter the allowable tensile stress of the weld. The allowable tensile input is reduced by a joint efficiency of 55% per UW-18(d) in determining the minimum fillet weld leg size.

COMPRESS Help


Support Legs

Leg Types -- An icon in the upper right corner gives a graphic depiction of the structure type being considered. Below the icon, the six available leg types are listed. When you select a type from the list, the picture in the icon box changes to correspond with the selected type. These are the six structural types available when adding legs:

COMPRESS Help


Structure Size Available -- The available leg sizes, taken from the Materials Structures Database, are displayed in the vertical list box on the left side of this screen. COMPRESS automatically determines the minimum leg size required and highlights it. Any structure which is larger in size than the minimum leg size may be selected. In the rerating mode (get pressure rating), COMPRESS will take the section specified and determine if the selected leg is adequate for the vessel loadings specified.

User Defined -- If the message No user defined appears in the vertical list box when the User Defined type is selected, then no user defined sections are currently available in the Structures database.

Leg Reinforcing Pads

Legs have reinforcing pads -- Activate this option switch to add a reinforcing pad between the leg to shell attachement.

Pad Length -- Enter the length of the reinforcing pad. This dimension is used to determine C2 in the WRC107 calculation.

Pad Width -- Enter the width of the reinforcing pad. This dimension is used to determine C1 in the WRC107 calculation.

Pad Thickness -- Enter the thickness of the leg to shell reinforcing pad.

WRC-107 Design Factor -- Enter the design factor used to determine the allowable stress for the maximum combined stress at the leg attachment area. The default is 3. This means that the allowable combined stress will be three times the shell allowable tensile stress.

Leg Fillet -- Enter the fillet leg size for the weld attaching the leg structure to the shell or to the reinforcing pad if present. A recommended value is the smaller of 0.25" or the shell thickness.

COMPRESS Help


Base Plates Leg base plates are sized per the column base plate design procedure listed on page 3-106 of the Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design Ninth Edition.

Length -- Enter the length of the base plate where the orientation is parallel with the leg structure section depth.

Width -- Enter the width of the base plate where the orientation is parallel with the leg structure section width.

Thickness -- Enter the thickness of the base plate. Allowable Stress -- Enter the allowable stress in bending for the base plate material. The default value is 24,000 psi.

Foundation Bearing Stress -- Enter the allowable foundation bearing stress. The default value is 1658 psi. This is for a concrete foundation and is per the Process Industry Practices (PIP) standard.

COMPRESS Help


Anchor Bolt and Base Plate Design COMPRESS generally follows the method for anchor bolt design and base plate design outlined in Jawad and Farr, which is founded on the analysis from Brownell and Young, Chapter 10. However, the Brownell and Young method does not consider initial anchor bolt tension. To overcome this, we have programmed a modified Brownell and Young analysis which includes consideration of the initial bolt tension. The method COMPRESS uses is as follows:

Sizing the Anchor Bolts COMPRESS uses equation 12.3 (below) from Jawad and Farr, when determining the load per bolt and therefore the required anchor bolt size. Jawad & Farr, eq. 12.3: = D * -W/N + 2* M / NR where; P = load/bolt (lbf) W = vessel weight (lbf) N = number of bolts R = radius of bolt circle (in) M = bending moment at base (lbf-in) Using the bolt circle (BC) in inches and the moment (M) in lbf-ft, the load per bolt is: = D * -W/N + 48 * M / NBC

The above formula is the same as the anchor bolt sizing formula for the Initial Preload in Bolts Considered method in Bednar, Chapter 4.4.

Base Plate Calculations Once the anchor bolt size has been established, COMPRESS uses equations 12.4 through 12.11 as presented in Jawad and Farr to calculate the actual stresses in the anchor bolts, compressive bearing stress in the concrete, etc. The total force T of the "tensile area" of the bolts is found by summing all the forces on the tensile side of the neutral axis giving: T = f sts(d/2)*K1

COMPRESS Help


where: f s = the actual stress in the bolting steel t s = the width of a continuous ring on which the bolts on the tension side act (Jawad and Farr, equation 12.4) d = average base plate diameter (Jawad and Farr, Fig. 12.2) K 1 = geometric constant (Jawad and Farr) As the overturning moment increases, so does the tension in the steel. At some point, the overturning moment exceeds the weight and initial tension in the anchor bolt, and the base would theoretically lose contact with the foundation. To account for the initial bolt preload, COMPRESS takes fs to be the larger of either the initial bolt preload stress or the calculated stress fs from the above equation. Essentially, COMPRESS sets a "floor" stress in the bolt steel equal to the initial bolt stress specified: fs = larger of initial bolt stress or T/ ts K 1 (d/2) To complete the modifications to the method presented in Jawad & Farr, the additional compressive loading (Cb ) on the compression side of the neutral axis induced by the initial bolt preload is included in the following equation: C=T+W where; C = compressive force on concrete foundation T = tensile force on concrete foundation W = weight The compressive force (Cb) component due to the initial anchor bolt tensioning is: C b = S bts(d/2)K2 where S b = stress induced by initially tightening the bolts K 2 = geometric factor (Jawad and Farr)

COMPRESS Help


Therefore, the total force compressive force on the concrete foundation (C) is: C = T + W + Cb The iteration is then performed as outlined in Jawad & Farr to arrive at the actual compressive bearing stress and anchor bolt stress.

COMPRESS Help


Lugs The Lugs option calculates local stresses due to externally applied loads on rectangular/square attachments attached to cylinders per the WRC Bulletins 107 or 537. The minimum required lug plate size and the minimum attachment fillet weld size are also determined. With the vessel in the design window, select Lugs from the Support menu:

Identifier -- Enter a name for the legs. Lug Material -- Enter the lug material identifier. This input is for reference only. Lug Allowable Stress -- COMPRESS does not access the stress database for lug allowable stresses. Enter the desired lug allowable stress. If you enter 0 here, COMPRESS will default to 24,000 psi. This allowable stress is used when sizing the base plate gussets and top plate. The allowable local shell stress is based on ASME code rules.

COMPRESS Help


Lug Stiffness Ratio --The ratio of the stiffness of the lug in the radial direction to that in the circumferential direction.

Top Plate Width (Wp) -- Enter the top plate width. Base Plate Width (b) -- Enter the base plate width. Top Plate Thickness (ta) -- The top plate required thickness is determined by the equations in Bednar Chapter 5.2. The minimum required thickness is displayed to the right.

Base Plate Thickness (tb) -- The base plate thickness is determined by using Table 10.3 and Equation 10.32b found in Brownell and Young. The minimum required thickness is displayed to the right.

Lug Length (Lt) -- Enter the lug length. Length is the distance from the side closest to the vessel to the side farthest from the vessel.

Gusset Height (h) -- Enter the gusset height. Gusset Thickness (tg) -- The required gusset thickness is calculated using the formula found in Bednar, Chapter 5.2. The minimum required thickness is displayed to the right

Gusset Separation (Lg) -- The inside to inside distance between gussets. Attachment Weld Size -- Enter the fillet lug weld size. The minimum attachment weld size is displayed to the right. The attachment weld is sized using the method shown in Bednar, Table 10.3, Case 4. This method assumes the lug is attached to the vessel using a continuous fillet all around.

Distance to Load (d) -- Enter the distance to the center of action of the load (F) supported by the lug.

Force Bearing Width -- Enter the width of support in direct contact with the lug base plate. Number of Lugs -- Enter the total number of lugs on the vessel. Angular Position -- Enter the angular position of the lug nearest 0° in plan view.

COMPRESS Help


Skirt Base Ring The Skirt Base Ring option enables you to anchor a vessel to a foundation. The vessel must already have a skirt as one of its components to use this option. Select Skirt Base Ring from the Support menu. This advances you to the Anchor Bolts/Base screen:

Support Configuration -- Tag the desired configuration from the list at the upper left corner of the Anchor Bolts/Base screen.

Single base plate - In this style of base plate there are two gussets for each anchor bolt. External Chairs - There is one bolting chair for every anchor bolt. The nut rests on the top of the compression plate.

Double Base Plate - There are two vertical gussets for every anchor bolt. The nut rests on the top of the compression ring.

COMPRESS Help


Centered Bolt Chair Single Plate No Gussets - In this style of base plate, no stiffening gussets are used. Options -- Tag one of the options on the next group of radio buttons to identify the type of anchor bolt to be used. These types correspond to the types established in the bolts database. Metric bolts may be used even if the U.S. Customary system of units is being used by COMPRESS.

Steel Foundation-- If you do not check the steel foundation switch, COMPRESS assumes a concrete foundation. If you check the steel foundation switch, COMPRESS uses a modulus of elasticity for the foundation of 29 x 10 6 psi. This value is used when determining the neutral axis location between the base and the foundation.

Identifier -- Enter a name for the supports. Foundation Compressive Strength and Concrete Ult. 28-day Strength -- Enter the concrete properties for the foundation. The default values are assgined per Process Industry Practices (PIP) VESV1002 February 2007 paragraph 5.12.5. The default values are 1658 psi (11.4 MPa) for foundation compressive strength and 3000 psi for ultimate 28-day strength.

Bolt Material -- Enter the bolt material specification. This input is for your reference only. COMPRESS does not access the ASME stress database for anchor bolt allowable stresses but uses the Bolt allowable stress input (below) instead.

Min. Anchor Bolt Spacing -- When anchor bolts get too close together, they do not develop their full strength. A recommended minimum anchor bolt spacing is about 18". When in the design mode and the available bolt area is insufficient for the loading specified, this input limits the number of bolts in the automatic routine that selects an acceptable bolt size and number of bolts combination. Additionally , an error message is reported in the Deficiencies Summary if the actual anchor bolt spacing is less than the minimum spacing specified.

Bolt Circle Diameter -- Enter the diameter of the anchor bolt circle. Bolt Allowable Stress-- COMPRESS does not access the ASME stress database for anchor bolt allowable stresses. Enter the desired anchor bolt allowable stress. Some typical bolt allowable stresses are listed below. If you enter 0 here, COMPRESS defaults to 20,000 psi. Bolt material Bolt Allowable Stress (psi) A307

20,000

A325

44,000

A449

40,000 (dia = 1.0 inch)

A490

54,000

Bolt Corrosion Allowance -- Enter the corrosion allowance to be applied on the bolt.

COMPRESS Help


Corrosion on bolts is applied to the root radius of the bolt. For example, if you specify a corrosion of 0.0625, that means that the root radius of the bolt is corroded by 0.0625".

Bolt Clearance -- This is the distance between the outside diameter of the bolt and the inside diameter of the bolt hole. Enter the clearance required between the bolt diameter and the holes in the base and compression plates. If you enter 0 here, COMPRESS will default to 0.375".

Base Yield Stress -- Enter the value. Base Modulus -- Enter the value.

COMPRESS Help


Single Base Plate Dialog

Base Plate Material -- For reference only. COMPRESS does not access the ASME stress database for base plate allowable stresses but uses the Plate allowable stress input (below) instead. A base plate material other than steel can be considered by COMPRESS by specifying the material elastic modulus as part of the base ring material specification. For example, to specify a base ring made from aluminum enter Aluminum 6061 E=9800000. To use a material other than aluminum enter a different number after E =.

Plate Allowable Stress-- COMPRESS does not access the stress database for base plate allowable stresses. Enter the desired base plate allowable stress.

Base Plate ID Base Plate OD -- The base plate is the part of the support that rests directly on the foundation.

Base Plate Thickness (tb) -- COMPRESS displays the minimum required base plate thickness on the status bar.

Gusset Separation (w) -- The wider the gusset separation, the higher the bending stress in the base plate due to the anchor bolt loading.

COMPRESS Help


Gusset Height (h) -- The gusset function is to transfer the bolt loading to the skirt. COMPRESS displays the minimum required gusset height on the status bar.

Gusset Thickness (tg) -- COMPRESS displays the minimum thickness required for the vertical gusset on the status bar.

Initial Bolt Preload-- According to Bednar, the initial tightening of the bolt is required to reduce the variable stress range on the bolt or any other impact effect on the nut under operating conditions. The initial tightening of the nuts is considered in COMPRESS by entering a value for initial bolt preload. This preload is input as a percentage of the allowable bolt stress. For example, if the allowable bolt stress is 20,000 psi and you entered an initial bolt preload of 50%, COMPRESS takes this to mean that the initial bolt tightening induces an initial stress in the anchor bolts of 10,000 psi. We recommend that the bolts be initially tightened from 50 to 75%.

Number of Bolts -- Enter the number of anchor bolts to be used. Bolt Size -- This is the nominal anchor bolt size used. The bolt size selected must be in the bolts database, or the value will be automatically corrected, and an error message will be displayed: Invalid bolt size. Value has been corrected. A new bolt size may be specified in Materials -> Bolts In design mode, COMPRESS will select an anchor bolt size automatically.

Standard Base Plate Details-- Clicking this button will bring up a list of standard base plate dimensions from which you may choose.

COMPRESS Help


External Chairs Dialog

All inputs for this screen should be entered as described above for the Single Base Plate screen except for the following inputs:

Compression Plate Width -- Enter the width of the compression plate as measured from the skirt outer diameter to the outside of the plate.

Compression Plate Thickness (tc) -- Enter the thickness of the compression plate. When you are at this prompt, COMPRESS displays the minimum required compression plate thickness on the status bar.

Compression Plate Length -- Enter the length of the plate, at least equal to w + 2*tg. Pipe Sleeve ID / Pipe Sleeve Wall Thickness -- Sometimes pipe sleeves are used to guide the anchor bolt through the chair during erection. The pipe sleeve does not affect the design calculations performed by COMPRESS. If pipe sleeves are specified, they will be drawn by the Vessel Drafter program. If you are not using a pipe sleeve, enter 0.

COMPRESS Help


Double Base Plate Dialog All inputs for this screen should be entered as described previously for the External Chairs screen.

COMPRESS Help


Centered Bolt Chair Dialog All inputs for this screen should be entered as described previously for the External Chairs screen.

COMPRESS Help


Standard Base Plate Details Dialog The Standard Base Plate Details Dialog enables you to select a predefined base plate for your support skirt. The dialog stores base plates in both Metric and U.S. Customary units.

Copy -- This button brings up the Edit Standard Base Plate Details dialog with the specifications of the selected base plate pre-loaded into the text boxes. You may not create an exact duplicate of a standard base plate with this dialog; at least one value must be different or an error message will be displayed and the Copy operation will fail.

Delete -- This button allows you to delete the selected base plate. The Delete operation cannot be undone.

Edit -- This button allows you to edit the selected base plate through the Edit Standard Base Plate Details dialog.

New --With this button you may define a new standard base plate and store it for later use. Again, the Edit dialog is brought up.

Edit Standard Base Plate Details Dialog --

COMPRESS Help


Enter or modify the specifications of a standard base plate with this dialog. The dialog will change slightly depending on the type of base plate you previously selected, but the overall function is the same. Dimensions may be entered in either U.S. Customary or Metric units. To enable Metric entry, simply check the box labeled "Metric." Note that when editing a record, changing the state of the Metric checkbox will change only the system of units for that particular record. For example, if the record has a thickness dimension of 2", when the Metric box is checked, that value will be 2mm.

COMPRESS Help


Codes Menu The Codes menu is where you specify wind and seismic loadings on the vessel and assign the basic code used for design.

Wind Code < 12 - 4 > Seismic Code < 12 - 22 > ASME Code < 12 - 2 >

COMPRESS Help

Codes Menu < 12 - 1 >

ASME Code

This dialog allows you to set which ASME Code Division and Addenda will be used for the vessel. Options for selecting which ASME Code Interpretations to apply, lethal service, and setting the minimum vessel thickness permitted are also presented here. Use the 'Save Defaults'

COMPRESS Help


button to save the currently selected options as the defaults for new vessels.

Use Code Case 2547 (flange rigidity) This option is available only for A05 and A06 Addendas. Checking the option will deactivate Appendix 2-14 calculations.

No UCS-66.1 MDMT Reduction Use this option to deactivate consideration of the UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction.

No UCS-68(c) MDMT Reduction Use this option to deactivate consideration of the UCS68(c) MDMT reduction.

Apply Interpretation VIII-1-01-150 (ignore ERW pipe seam) When this option is selected the longitudinal seam on a component made from an ERW pipe material is not considered in the UG-116 RT marking determination. If the interpretation is selected the Radiography Summary report shows the seam category as N/A and the radiography as “Welded pipe”. If interpretation VIII-1-01-150 is not selected then the results are in agreement with interpretation VIII-1-07-10 and the seam is reported as category A and the radiography is reported as Spot UW-11(b) / Type 1. The setting summary indicates if interpretation VIII-1-01-150 has been applied.

Use Code Case 2695 (Use Div 2 rules) Use this option to apply the Code Case to the entire existing vessel or just for the components added after the switch is activated. This option is only available for A11 and later.

Section VIII, Division 2 If a license is available for the ASME Section VIII, Division 2 module then this dialog can be used to select this code division. Changing code divisions for an existing vessel is permitted however there may be some conversion issues due to different division rules. The user should always review the vessel carefuly after changing divisions.

COMPRESS Help


Wind Codes If wind loading is activated COMPRESS generates a wind pressure profile using the selected building code or user specified wind pressure zones. These wind pressures are then used by COMPRESS to determine the wind shears and bending moments acting on the various vessel components. COMPRESS allows wind loading to be specified in accordance with the following codes: IBC Codes (2015, 2012, 2009, 2006, 2003, 2000) ASCE Codes (7-10, 7-05, 7-02, 7-98, 7-95, 7-93, 7-88) NBC Canada Codes (2010, 2005, 1995, 1990) UBC Codes (1994, 1991) User Defined Codes

Wind Shear on Top Head COMPRESS uses the projected area method when calculating the wind shear along the vessel. The projected area of the top head is calculated by the following formula: Aprojected = π / 2 * Ro*h + Lsf*Do

The projected area of the top head is lumped with the projected area of the attached cylinder. COMPRESS uses the combined area to calculate the bending moment and shear force at the base of the top cylinder.

Conditions Analyzed COMPRESS analyzes the following wind and seismic loading conditions: operating hot & corroded (internal and external pressure) empty corroded & cold test new & cold empty new and cold

COMPRESS Help


vortex shedding - operating and corroded (if specified) vortex shedding - empty and corroded (if specified) hot shut down condition, corroded , no internal pressure (unless disabled) For the case of combined stresses under test conditions, COMPRESS by default uses 33% of the specified wind loading. This is done since it is very unlikely that the hydrotest conditions will coincide with a maximum wind load. To change the default setting for the percentage of wind load applied during hydrotest, see the "Testing" page in the Options dialog.

Platform Wind Shear Platform wind shear is calculated using the method outlined in ASCE's "Wind Loads and Anchor Bold Design for Petrochemical Facilities," published in 1997. After finding the projected area using the ASCE method, the wind shear on the platform is calculated by the following formula: Vp = Pw * Cf * (Aprojected) where: Aprojected projected area of platform see report for calculations Cf

wind force coefficient for see platform dialog platform

Pw

local wind pressure

Vp

platform wind shear

( G * qz ) for ASCE codes, (q*Ce*Cg) for NBC codes and (Ce*qs*Iw) for IBC codes

How to Turn Off Wind Loading If one of the wind loading options has been activated COMPRESS will continue to apply the specified load until the load is changed or deleted. To eliminate the loading due to wind: With the vessel in the design window, select Delete from the Action menu. The Delete Component screen appears. Tag Loadings/Building Codes from the component categories listed. All loadings currently on the vessel will be shown in the components list.

COMPRESS Help


Highlight the loading you want to delete from the components list and select Delete. Answer Yes when you are asked if you are sure you want to delete the wind loading. The wind is eliminated and the vessel redrawn in the design window.

COMPRESS Help


IBC Wind Code The IBC 2015 Section 1609.1.1 references the ASCE 7-10 Code for wind analysis. The IBC 2012 Section 1609.1.1 references the ASCE 7-10 Code for wind analysis. The IBC 2009 Section 1609.1.1 references the ASCE 7-05 Code for wind analysis. The IBC 2006 Section 1609.1.1 references the ASCE 7-05 Code for wind analysis. The IBC 2003 Section 1609.1.1 references the ASCE 7-02 Code for wind analysis. The IBC 2000 Section 1609.1.1 references the ASCE 7-98 Code for wind analysis.

COMPRESS Help


ASCE Wind Code

For the code selected, COMPRESS generates a wind pressure zone using ASCE procedures for all the heights listed in Table 6 of the ASCE code.

Elevation of Base Above Grade -- This is the vertical distance from ground level (grade) to the bottom of the support object (support skirt, legs, or lugs). Vessels located above grade will experience higher wind loads because they are higher in the wind profile.

Increase Effective OD -- This is an adjustment to account for the wind resistance area of various components attached to the vessel, such as piping, ladders, etc. This input will increase the projected area of the vessel used by COMPRESS when calculating wind loadings. Note that

COMPRESS Help


platform wind loads can be calculated separately by COMPRESS (see Add a Platform & Ladder screen). The thickness of insulation on the exterior of the vessel is automatically included by COMPRESS when calculating the projected area of the vessel. If an increase in effective outer diameter is specified, it will be added to the insulated outside diameter of the vessel

Wind Force Coefficient (Cf) -- All wind pressures calculated by the program are multiplied by the wind force coefficient to account for the lesser resultant force on a cylinder versus a flat surface. The wind force coefficient for a smooth cylinder is 0.60, while the coefficient for a vessel is normally taken as 0.80. Table 29.5 (ASCE 7-10), Tables 6-20 through 6-23 (ASCE 705), Tables 6-6 through 6-10 (ASCE 7-95) and Table 11-15 (ASCE 7-93, 7-88) lists shape factors for various geometries, surface roughnesses, etc. To calculate a Cf coefficient based on Figure 6-19 of ASCE 7-02 (Figure 29.5-1 in 7-10), click the 'Calc. Cf' button.

Basic Wind Speed -- Each geographic location has a basic wind speed as shown on the basic wind speed map. (See ASCE Figure 1). In ASCE 7-10, wind speed maps found in Figures 26.51A through 26.5-1C account for the degree of hazard associated with the occupancy/use of structures (see Section 26.5).

Importance Factor -- The importance factor is related to the type of structure being designed. When using the ASCE 7-95 code, refer to Table 6-2. When using the ASCE 7-93 and 7-88 codes, refer to Table 5. The Importance Factor is not applicable to ASCE 7-10.

Risk Category -- This input is for reporting only but is included for the designer's reference. Risk Category determines which map is used to look up the Basic Wind Speed for a site.

Exposure A,B,C,D -- See Section 26.7 in 7-10 (Section 6.5.6.3 in 7-05 and older). Exposure A -- Large city centers with a least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess of 70 feet. Use of this exposure category should be limited to those areas for which terrain representative of Exposure A prevails in the upwind direction for a distance of at least one-half mile or 10 times the height of the building or structure, whichever is greater. Possible channeling effects or increased velocity pressures due to the building or structure being located in the wake of adjacent buildings shall be taken into account.

Exposure B -- Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of single-family dwellings or larger. Use of this exposure category shall be limited to those areas for which terrain representative of Exposure B prevails in the upwind direction for a distance of at least 1500 feet or 10 times the height of the building or structure, whichever is greater.

Exposure C -- Open terrain with scattered obstructions having height generally less than 30 feet. This category includes flat open country and grasslands.

COMPRESS Help


Exposure D -- Flat, unobstructed areas exposed to wind flowing over large bodies of water. This exposure shall apply only to those building and other structures exposed to the wind coming from over the water. Exposure D extends inland from the shoreline a distance of 1500 feet or 10 times the height of the building or structure, whichever is greater.

Wind Directionality Factor (Kd) -- Select a Kd factor from Table 26.6-1 (7-10) or Table 6.4 (7-05 and older). For pressure vessels, a value of 0.95 is recommended.

Topographic Factor (Kzt) -- The wind speed-up effect is included in the calculation of wind loads by using the Kzt factor. See Figure 26.-1 (7-10) or Figure 6.4 (7-05 and older).

Enforce Minimum Design Wind Loading of 10 psf -- When this box is checked, COMPRESS will enforce the requirement. In ASCE 7-10 (Section 29.8), the minimum design loading is 16 psf.

No wind shears below support -- When this box is checked, COMPRESS will apply wind shears only to the parts of the vessel above and including the vessel section (cylinder) including the vessel support.

Limit top deflection -- When this box is checked, COMPRESS will change the shell thickness in order to meet the specified deflection.

Effective OD increments for individual components - Click the Effective OD increments for individual components button to increase the effective outer diameter for individual components.

Damping/Vortex Shedding -- Click the Damping/Vortex Shedding box to tell COMPRESS to perform vortex shedding calculations.

COMPRESS Help


Effective OD Increments

Similar to the Increase Effective OD input found on the Wind Code dialog, this dialog allows users to modify the projected area for individual or multiple components (cylinder, head, transition, skirt, etc.). To increase the effective OD of a component, select a component by first clicking on the component identifier in the white box.

Use Default Increment set for entire Vessel - To use the default input value found in the Wind Code dialog, select this radio button after selecting a component or multiple components.

Use: - To use a user-specified increased OD, select this radio button after selecting the component(s) and enter in a user-specified increased OD.

Enter Changes for Selected Components - After you've elected to use either a default increased effective OD or a user-specified increased effective OD click on this button to modify the component(s).

COMPRESS Help


Vortex Shedding Calculations

The effect of vortex shedding is determined using the formulae found in the NBC 1995 Building Code, Structural Commentaries (Part 4), beginning on page 17. The effect of vortex shedding is approximated by a static force acting over the top third of the vessel length, acting perpendicular to the wind direction. Vortex shedding results are reported in the wind output section. You may either enter your own critical damping coefficients (Beta) for operating, empty, and test conditions or instruct COMPRESS to calculate them. Damping coefficients vary with metallurgy, metal temperature, foundation soil conditions, vessel contents, presence of lining and/or insulation, etc. Both the ASCE gust response calculation and vortex shedding analysis are quite sensitive to the damping coefficient used. The damping coefficient assigned can have a very significant impact on the wind loadings calculated by the ASCE code. If you leave any of the critical damping coefficient inputs as zero, COMPRESS calculates the critical damping coefficient to be applied.

Material Damping -- Damping due to material in the shell has been shown by Sachs to be a linear function of modulus of elasticity. The procedure used by COMPRESS to determine the damping coefficient due to material is as follows:

COMPRESS Help


β m= 0.01*(E / ES) where: E = modulus of elasticity of the material at design temperature E s = modulus of elasticity of the material at ambient temperature

Insulation Damping -- Insulation applied to the tower increases the damping coefficient. COMPRESS estimates the additional damping due to insulation using the following formula: β i = 0.001*(# of shell courses insulated / # of shell courses)

Soil Foundation Damping -- COMPRESS uses a conservative value to allow for the contribution of foundation damping. The paper "Evaluation of Percent Critical Damping of Process Towers" sets this value at 0.02. To be on the safe side, COMPRESS uses a value of 0.01: β S= 0.01

Lining Damping -- Vessel lining also increases the damping coefficient. COMPRESS estimates the additional damping due to lining using the following formula: β L = 0.003 * (# of shell course lined / # of shell courses)

Damping from Liquid Sloshing -- If operating liquid is present in the tank, COMPRESS uses the following formula: β

liq

= 0.005

Total Damping of Tower -- The total damping in operating condition is calculated as follows: β = βm + βi + βS + βL + βliq The total damping in empty condition is calculated as follows: β = βm + βi + βS + βL The total damping in test condition is calculated as follows (no liquid sloshing because the vessel is full): β = β m + βi + βS + βL

COMPRESS Help


NBC Wind Code NBC Canada 2010 -National Building Code of Canada, 2005 Edition. NBC Canada 2005 -National Building Code of Canada, 2005 Edition. NBC Canada 1995 -National Building Code of Canada, 1995 Edition. NBC Canada 1990 -National Building Code of Canada, 1990 Edition (programmed to the January 1991 revision). COMPRESS evaluates the NBC formulae to generate a different wind pressure zone every 3 meters above ground level.

Definitions and references are taken from: NBC Canada 2005: Volume 1, and NBC 2005 Structural Commentaries (Part 4 of Division B); 1995: Structural Commentaries (Part 4); 1990: Supplement Commentary B .

COMPRESS Help


Elevation of Base Above Grade -- See ASCE Wind code . Increase Effective OD. -- See ASCE Wind code . Pressure Coefficient (Cp) -- External pressure coefficient Cp, See User's Guide - NBC 1995 Structural Commentaries (Part 4) Figure B-18 for cylinders, chimneys and tanks.

Reference Wind Pressure -- The Reference Wind Pressure is input when using the NBC code. See Appendix C (1995); Chapter 1 of Supplement (1990).

NBC Look Up -- Click this button to select a location in Canada. The dialog will automatically look up the Reference Wind Pressure and enter it into the main dialog.

COMPRESS Help


Note that starting with NBC 2005, the reference wind pressure, q, is based on a 50 year return period, while in NBC 1990 and 1995, it may be taken as q10, q30, or q100.

The NBC is a metric code, and the values read form this code are kPa. Reference wind

COMPRESS Help


pressures entered here are always taken by COMPRESS as kPa regardless of the system of units specified for the vessel as a whole.

Importance Factor -- See ASCE Wind code . Exposure A,B,C -Exposure A - (open or standard exposure): open level terrain with only scattered building, trees, or other obstructions, open water, or shorelines thereof. This is the exposure on which the reference wind speeds are based. Ce is calculated as follows: Ce = (Z / 10 )0.28, Ce = 1.0

Exposure B - suburban and urban areas, wooded terrain, or centers of large towns. Ce = 0.5*(Z / 12.7 )0.5, Ce = 0.5

Exposure C - centers of large cities with heavy concentrations of tall buildings. At least 50 percent of the buildings should exceed 4 stories. Ce = 0.4*(Z /30 )0.72, Ce = 0.4 In these equations, Z is the height above ground in meters.

Exposures B or C should not be used unless the appropriate terrain roughness persists in the upwind direction for at least 1.5 km, and the exposure factor should be varied according to the terrain if the roughness differs from one direction to another. Exposure C was removed for the 2010 Edition.

COMPRESS Help


UBC Wind Code UBC 1994 - Uniform Building Code, 1994 Edition. COMPRESS generates a wind pressure zone using UBC procedures for all the heights listed in Table 16-G.

UBC 1991 - Uniform Building Code, 1991 Edition. COMPRESS generates a wind pressure zone using UBC procedures for all the heights listed in Table 23-G.



Elevation of Base Above Grade -- See ASCE Wind code Increase Effective OD. -- See ASCE Wind code Wind Force Coefficient (Cq) -- Enter the desired coefficient. Table 16-H (1994) and Table 23-H (1991) list this coefficient as factor Cq = .80.

Basic Wind Speed -- See UBC Figures 16-1 (1994) and 23-1 (1991). Importance Factor -- When using the UBC 1994 code, refer to Table 16-K. When using the UBC 1991 code, refer to Table 23-L.

Exposure B,C,D -- See definitions in Section 1614 (1994); Section 2312 (1991). Exposure B - has terrain with buildings, forest, or surface irregularities, covering at least 20 percent of the ground level area extending 1 mile (1.61 km) or more from the site.

Exposure C - has terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile (0.81 km) or more from the site in any full quadrant.

Exposure D - represents the most severe exposure in areas with basic wind speeds of 80 miles per hour (mph) (129 km/h) or greater and has terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over 1 mile (1.61km) or more in width relative to any quadrant of the building site. Exposure D extends inland from the shoreline 1/4 mile (0.40 km) or 10 times the building height, whichever is greater.

Damping/Vortex Shedding -- See ASCE Wind code

COMPRESS Help


User Defined Wind Code

User Defined - allows you to specify your own wind pressure zones or program in another code not offered. COMPRESS allows you to specify the wind pressures directly if this option is selected. Be sure to fully define the wind zones over the entire height of the vessel. Start with defining the wind zone with the lowest elevation in zone #1. Then define the following zones as they increase in elevation, as shown above. Note: All pressures entered here will be multiplied by the wind force coefficient to get the wind force that acts on the vessel. The following are the same as for ASCE Wind code

COMPRESS Help


Elevation of Base Above Grade -Increase Effective OD -Wind Force Coefficient -Damping/Vortex Shedding --

Wind Shear on Top Head COMPRESS uses the projected area method when calculating the wind shear along the vessel. The projected area of the top head is calculated by the following formula: Aprojected = π R0h + LsfD0

The projected area of the top head is lumped with the projected area of the attached cylinder. COMPRESS uses the combined area to calculate the bending moment and shear force at the base of the top cylinder.

Conditions Analyzed COMPRESS analyzes the following wind and seismic loading conditions: operating hot & corroded (internal and external pressure) empty corroded & cold test new & cold empty new and cold vortex shedding - operating and corroded (if specified) vortex shedding - empty and corroded (if specified) hot shut down condition, corroded , no internal pressure (unless disabled) For the case of combined stresses under test conditions, COMPRESS by default uses 33% of the specified wind loading. This is done since it is very unlikely that the hydrotest conditions will coincide with a maximum wind load. To change the default setting for the percentage of wind load applied during hydrotest, see the "Testing" page in the Options dialog.

COMPRESS Help


Platform Wind Shear Platform wind shear is calculated by the following procedure: If the platform included angle = 120 °, Aprojected = (w + c) h If the platform included angle > 120 °, Aprojected = 2(w + c) h The wind shear on the platform is then calculated by the following formula: Vp = C f Aprojected Pw where; Aprojected = projected area of platform Cf = wind force coefficient c = shell to platform clearance h = platform height Pw = local wind pressure w = platform width Vp = platform wind shear

COMPRESS Help


Seismic Code This option allows you to consider the effect of earthquake forces on a vessel. With a vessel in the design window, select Seismic from the Codes menu to advance to the Seismic Loading dialog.

To select a code for seismic loading, choose one of the following codes from the combo box at the top of the dialog. Based on the code selection the required input parameters will be displayed. COMPRESS allows seismic loading to be specified in accordance with the following codes: IBC Codes (2000, 2003, 2006, 2009, 2012, 2015)

COMPRESS Help


IBC 2000, 2003, 2006, 2009, 2012, 2015 Ground Supported - International Building Code. Use this selection for all equipment mounted on the ground. IBC 2000, 2003, 2006, 2009, 2012, 2015 Building Mounted - International Building Code. Use this selection for all equipment mounted on a floor above grade in a building. ASCE Codes (7-10, 7-05, 7-02, 7-98) ASCE 7-10, 7-05, 7-02, 7-98 Ground Supported - American Society of Civil Engineers. Use this selection for all equipment mounted on the ground. ASCE 7-10, 7-05, 7-02, 7-98 Building Mounted - American Society of Civil Engineers. Use this selection for all equipment mounted on a floor above grade in a building. ASCE Codes (7-95, 7-93) ASCE 7-95, 7-93 Ground Supported - American Society of Civil Engineers, 1995 Edition. Use this selection for all equipment mounted on the ground. ASCE 7-95, 7-93 Building Mounted - American Society of Civil Engineers, 1995 Edition. Use this selection for all equipment mounted on a floor above grade in a building. This method requires the input of the fundamental period of vibration of the building or structure where the vessel is located. ASCE Codes (7-88) ASCE 7-88 - American Society of Civil Engineers, 1988 Edition (formerly ANSI A58.1). NBC Canada Codes (2010, 2005, 1995, 1990) NBC Canada 2010 - National Building Code of Canada, 2010 Edition NBC Canada 2005 - National Building Code of Canada, 2005 Edition NBC Canada 1995 - National Building Code of Canada, 1995 Edition NBC Canada 1990 - National Building Code of Canada, 1990 Edition (programmed to the January 1991 revision). UBC Codes (1997, 1994, 1991) UBC 1994 - Uniform Building Code, Volume 2, 1994 Edition. UBC 1991 - Uniform Building Code, 1991 Edition. User Defined Seismic Loading User Defined - The user defined seismic loadings option may be considered as a general purpose building code. It is useful for those cases where COMPRESS does not offer the

COMPRESS Help


desired building code (BOCA, Southern Building Code, Overseas, etc.) or a building code does not apply but acceleration based reactions are present (wave motions on drilling platforms, vessels mounted on moving vehicles, etc.).

How to Turn Off Seismic Loading COMPRESS automatically defaults to the Seismic Not Considered option, which means that COMPRESS will not consider seismic loading when calculating required thicknesses, etc. If seismic loading has been applied to a vessel it can be removed by the following procedure: Select Seismic from the Codes menu. The Seismic Loading screen appears. Select None from the combo box to turn off any existing seismic loading. You also can delete the seismic loading as if it were a component: 1) Press the Delete (Del) key on your keyboard. The Delete Component screen appears. 2) Tag Loadings/Building Codes from the component categories listed. All loadings currently on the vessel are shown in the components list. 3) Click on the seismic loading you want to delete, then click Delete. When the message “Are you sure you want to delete Seismic Code?” appears, click Yes. The seismic loading is eliminated and the vessel redrawn in the design window.

Calculation of Horizontal Base Shear COMPRESS finds the horizontal base shear (V) by applying the appropriate base shear formulae from the selected code. The base shear is distributed over the length of the vessel using the base shear distribution formula given below. The fundamental period of vibration of the vessel (T) is also calculated for the following conditions: Internal pressure and corroded External pressure -- operation Empty and corroded

Base Shear Distribution Formulae (All Codes Except ASCE 7-93) V is the total horizontal base shear calculated by the appropriate formula. The force concentrated at the vessel top (Ft) is the lesser of the following: Ft = 0.07*T*V == or == Ft = 0.25*T*V If T < 0.7 seconds, Ft = 0. The base shear is then distributed over the length of the vessel according to this formula:

COMPRESS Help


where: w i , w x = Weight assigned to the shell course at level i or x respectively. h i ,hx = Height above the base to the center of level i or x respectively. n = Total number of sections in the vessel. COMPRESS assigns one section to each shell, transition, skirt, or group of legs. k = An exponent related to the structure period. If T = 0.5 seconds, k = 1. If T = 2.5 seconds, k = 2. If the period is between 0.5 and 2.5 seconds, k is to be linearly interpolated between 1 and 2. This formula produces a shear distribution proportional to the mass distribution along the vessel. The location of the mass with respect to the base is considered. For example, a mass located 100 ft. above the base will “attract” more shear than an equivalent mass located 10 ft. above the base.

Consider Vertical Accelerations -- This option activates consideration of the effects of vertical seismic accelerations on vertical vessels when the selected building code does not require it. Vertical seismic accelerations are always considered for saddle supported vessels regardless of the setting specified here. This option cannot be deactivated for building codes UBC 1997, ASCE 7-93, and ASCE 7-95, as they require consideration of vertical accelerations. The method that follows below is outdated for ASCE 7-98, 7-02, and 7-05, and IBC 2000, 2003, and 2006, but is still accessible by activating this option, redesignated "Consider User Defined Vertical Accelerations." Should one of those codes be selected, the corresponding ASCE rules for Vertical Accelerations will only be considered when this option is unchecked. See the ASCE Seismic Code (7-05, 7-02, and 7-98) topic for more information. In combined loading checks in the longitudinal direction, the weight (dead load) is increased by the Vertical Acceleration factor (VAccel). VAccel is calculated as the greater of (Force Multiplier * Base Shear / Vessel Weight) or (Minimum Weight Multiplier) For example, if the Minimum Weight Multiplier governs and is set as 0.2, the weight is multiplied by 1.2. When the Consider Vertical Accelerations option is enabled, the Seismic Report displays a table summarizing the VAccel values for each of the seven cases that the value is used to investigate.

Force Multiplier -- The force multiplier input will set the magnitude of the vertical acceleration used by COMPRESS. It is expressed as a multiple of the horizontal acceleration calculated by

COMPRESS Help


COMPRESS. For example, if the vertical acceleration is to be 30% of the horizontal acceleration then a value of 0.3 would be input here.

Minimum Weight Multiplier -- This number can optionally be used to specify a lower limit on the vertical acceleration used by COMPRESS. For example, if you wanted to ensure that the vessel acceleration used was not less than 0.1 G a value of 0.1 would be input here.

COMPRESS Help


IBC 2012, 2009, 2006, 2003, and 2000 Seismic Code IBC 2015 Ground and Building Supported. - The ASCE 7-10 Code is used for IBC 2015 building or ground supported selections, as specified in IBC Section 1613.1. Please see that section of the help file for definitions and references.

IBC 2012 Ground and Building Supported. - The ASCE 7-10 Code is used for IBC 2012 building or ground supported selections, as specified in IBC Section 1613.1. Please see that section of the help file for definitions and references.

IBC 2006 and 2009 Ground and Building Supported. - The ASCE 7-05 Code is used for IBC 2006 and 2009 building or ground supported selections, as specified in IBC Section 1613.1. Please see that section of the help file for definitions and references.

IBC 2003 Ground and Building Supported. - For IBC 2003 building or ground supported selections, the ASCE 7-02 Code is used as permitted by IBC Section 1614.1 Exception 1.

COMPRESS Help


IBC 2000 Ground Supported - Select IBC 2000 Ground Supported to display the following input screen:

Paragraph numbers below refer to IBC 2000 edition, unless otherwise noted.

Consider User Defined Vertical Accelerations-- See ASCE Codes (7-05, 7-02, 7-98). Site Class -- See Section 1615.1.5. Importance Factor (I) -- From Table 1604.5 for buildings and other structures: - that represent a low hazard to human life in the the event of a failure (Category I and IV). I

COMPRESS Help


= 1.0 - that represent a substantial hazard to human life in the event of failure (Category II), I = 1.25 - designated as essential facilities (Category III), I = 1.5

Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (Ss) -- SS is the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short periods as determined from Figures 1615(1) through (10). Where a site is between contours, straight line interpolation or the higher value may be used.

Spectral Response Acceleration at 1 Second Period (S1) -- S1 is the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at 1-second period as determined from Figures 1615(1) through (10). Where a site is between contours, straight line interpolation or the higher value may be used.

Response Modification Coefficient, R, (Table 1622.2.5(1))-- See Table 1622.2.5(1) Seismic Coefficients for Nonbuilding Structures for further guidance.

Reliability Factor (ρ)--See Section 1617.2.

COMPRESS Help


IBC 2000 Building Mounted Code

See ground mounted section for common definitions.

Importance Factor (Ip) -- Component importance factor is either 1.0 or 1.5 as determined in Section 1621.1.6.

Response Modification Coefficient (Rp) -- Component repsonse modification factore that varies from 1.0 to 5.0. Select appropriate value from Table 1621.2 or 1621.3. For most vessels, a value 2.5 is recommended.

COMPRESS Help


z/h Ratio -- This is the height in structure of point of attachment of component over the average roof height of structure with respect to the base (see Section 1621.1.4).

Amplification Factor (ap) -- Component amplification factor that varies from 1.0 to 2.5. Select appropriate value from Table 1621.2 or 1621.3. For most vessels, a value 2.5 is recommended

COMPRESS Help


ASCE 7-10, 7-05, 7-02, 7-98 Seismic Code ASCE 7-10, 7-05, 7-02, and 7-98 Ground Supported. Using the combo box to select ASCE 7-10 Ground Supported will display the following input screen:

Definitions and references are taken from Section 9.2.2 in 7-02, and Section 11.3 in 7-

COMPRESS Help


05. ASCE 7-10 references are the same as in 7-05.

Consider User Defined Vertical Accelerations-- Leave this box unchecked to find the Vertical Acceleration term using the ASCE method described in section 12.4.2.3 of ASCE 7-05, or section 9.5.2.7 of 7-02. Activate this control to consider User Defined Vertical Accelerations

Site Class -- See Section 9.4.1.2 in 7-02, or Section 11.4.2 in 7-05 Importance Factor (I) -- See Section 9.1.4 in 7-02, or Section 11.5 in 7-05 Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (Ss) -- See Section 9.4.1.2 in 7-02, or Section 11.4 in 7-05.

Spectral Response Acceleration at 1 Second Period (S1) -- See Section 9.4.1.2 in 702, or Section 11.4 in 7-05.

Response Mod. Coeff. (R) --See Table 9.14.5.1.1 in 7-02, or Table 15.4-2 in 7-05. (for ASCE 7-98 See Table 9.14.2.1.)

Redundancy Factor (ρ)--See Section 9.5.2.4 in 7-02, or 12.3.4 in 7-05. Codes other than 7-05 refer to this as the Reliability Factor.

Long-period transition period (TL)-- Applicable to 7-05 only. See Section 11.4.5. Use ASCE 7-05 Supplement No. 2 rules for Cs min.-- This option is used with ground supported ASCE 7-05 and IBC 2006 only. Supplement No. 2 to ASCE 7-05 modifies the rules for determination of minimum Cs values. IBC 2009 incorporated these changes at its release. Check with your local jurisdiction regarding its adoption of this revision if you use ASCE 7-05 and/or IBC 2006.

ASCE 7-05, 7-02, and 7-98 Building Mounted Code See ground mounted section for common definitions.

Importance Factor (Ip) --See Section 9.6.1.5 in 7-02, or Section 13.1.3 in 7-05. Response Mod. Coeff. (Rp) --See Section 9.6.1.3 in 7-02, or Section 13.3.1 in 7-05. z/h Ratio -- This is the height in structure of point of attachment of component over the average roof height of structure with respect to the base. See Section 9.6.1.3 in 7-02, or Section 13.3.1 in 7-05.

Amplification Factor (ap) -- See Section 9.6.1.3 in 7-02, or Section 13.3.1 in 7-05.

COMPRESS Help


ASCE 7-95, 7-93 Seismic Code ASCE 7-95 Ground Supported Code

Definitions and references are taken from Section 9.1.8.

Velocity Related Coefficient (Av) --See Section 9.1.4.1. Acceleration Coefficient (Aa) -- See Section 9.1.4.1. Soil Profile (A, B, C, D, E) -- See Section 9.1.4.2. Response Mod. Coeff. (R) -- See Table 9.2.2.2. Consider Vertical Accelerations Force Multiplier Minimum Weight Multiplier --

ASCE 7-95 Building Mounted Code Velocity Related Coefficient (Av) -- Refer to 9.1.4.1. Importance Factor (Ip) -- Refer to 9.3.1.5. Acceleration Coefficient (Aa) -- Refer to 9.1.4.1. Soil Profile (A, B, C, D, E) -- Refer to 9.1.4.2. Building Period of Vibration (T) -- Refer to 9.2.3.2.1. Response Mod. Factor (Rp) -- Refer to 9.3.2.2 and 9.3.3.2. x/h Ratio (see page 91) -- This is the elevation from grade to the vessel center of gravity over the structure elevation from grade.

Seismic Coefficient ap (pg 97) -- Refer to 9.3.1.3. Consider Vertical Accelerations Force Multiplier Minimum Weight Multiplier -- .

COMPRESS Help


ASCE 7-93 Ground Supported Code

Definitions and references are taken from Section 9.2.2.

Velocity Related Coefficient (Av) -- The effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient (Av) is determined by referencing Figure (Map) 9-2, page 36. Refer to 9.4.1.1.

Acceleration Coefficient (Aa) -- The effective peak acceleration coefficient (Aa) is determined by referencing Figure (Map) 9-1, pages 34 - 35. Refer to 9.1.4.1.

Soil Profile (S1, S2, S3, S4) -- Refer to 9.3-2. Enter one of the following soil profile types as defined in the ASCE 7-93 code, Table 9.3-1, page 44:

S1 - is a profile with either: rock of any characteristic, either shale-like or crystalline in nature, that has a shear wave velocity greater than 2,500 feet per second. -or stiff soil conditions where the soil depth is less than 200 feet and the soil types over-lying the rock are stable deposits of sands, gravels, or stiff clays.

S2 - A soil profile with deep cohesionless or stiff clay conditions where the soil depth exceeds 200 feet and the soil types overlying rock are stable deposits of sands, gravels, or stiff clays.

S3 - A soil profile containing 20 to 40 feet in thickness of soft to medium-stiff clays with or without intervening layers of cohesionless soils.

S4 - A soil profile characterized by a shear wave velocity of less than 500 feet per second containing more than 40 feet of soft clays or silts. In situations where the soil profile does not fit any of the four types or is unknown, S4 should be used.

Site Coefficient (S) -- Enter the site coefficient from Table 9.3-1, page 44. Response Mod. Coeff. (R) -- Enter the response modification coefficient from Table 9.3-2, pages 45 and 36. Although vessels are not specifically listed on this table, some typical values are listed below:

Consider Vertical Accelerations Force Multiplier

COMPRESS Help


Minimum Weight Multiplier -- See 11-25.

ASCE 7-93 Building Mounted Code -Velocity Related Coefficient (Av) -- The effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient (Av) is determined by referencing Figure (Map) 9-2, pages 36-37. Refer to 9.1.4.1.

Seismic Coefficient (Cc) -- Enter the seismic coefficient from Table 9.8-2, page 63. Typically, this value is 2.0 for vessels. Refer to 9.8-1 and 9.8-2.

Performance Criteria Factor (P) -- Enter the performance criteria factor from Table 9.8-2, page 63. Typically, this value is 1.0 for vessels. Refer to 9.8.

Amplification Factor (Ac) -- Enter the amplification factor from Table 9.8-3, page 64. Unfortunately, to access this table, the designer needs to know the fundamental period of vibration of the building (T) in seconds. Refer to 9.8.3.2.

COMPRESS Help


ASCE 7-88 Seismic Code ASCE 7-88 Code

Definitions and references are taken from Section 9.3.

Zone (0,1,2,3,4) -- Enter the appropriate zone from Figure 14 - Map for Seismic Zones from the ASCE 7-88 code. COMPRESS will then look up the correct seismic zone coefficient (Z) from Table 21. Refer to Figures 14 and 15.

Importance Factor (I) -- Enter the importance factor from Table 22 - Occupancy Importance Factor, I. Typically, a vessel is a category 1 occupancy, therefore enter 1.0. If you enter 0 here, COMPRESS automatically enters an importance factor of 1.0.

Force Factor (K) -- Enter the force factor from Table 23 - Horizontal Force Factor (K). Typically, you would consider a vessel to be a structure other than a building (an input of 2.0 is recommended). If you enter 0 here, COMPRESS automatically enters 2.0.

Soil Profile (S1, S2, S3) -- See Section 9.4.2. -- Enter one of the following soil profile types as defined in the ASCE 7-88 code:

S1 - is a profile with: rock of any characteristic, either shalelike or crystalline in nature. Such material may be characterized by a shear wave velocity greater than 2500 ft/s. -or -stiff soil conditions where the soil depth is less than 200 feet and the soil types overlying rock are stable deposits of sands, gravels, or stiff clays.

S2 - is a profile with deep cohesionless deposits or stiff clay conditions, including sites where the soil depth exceeds 200 feet and the soil types overlying rock are stable deposits of sands, gravels, or stiff clays.

S3 - is a profile with soft to medium-stiff clays and sands, characterized by 30 feet or more of soft to medium stiff clays without intervening layers of sand or other cohesionless soils. In locations where the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the soil profile type or where the profile does not fit any of the three types, soil profile S2 or S3 should be used whichever gives the larger value for the seismic coefficient (Cs).

Soil Coefficient (S) -- Enter the soil coefficient from ASCE Table 24, or press F1 to access a help screen. If you enter 0 here, COMPRESS automatically looks up S from Table 24 based on the soil profile entered.

COMPRESS Help


NBC Seismic Code NBC 1990 - 1995 Code

Definitions and references are taken from NBC Canada 1995, Structural Commentaries (Part 4), Commentary J.

Zonal Velocity Ratio -- Enter the zonal velocity ratio from Table J-1; Design Data for Selected Locations in Canada (page 13 of the Supplement to the NBC.) Look up the zonal velocity (v) under Seismic Data for the location in question and enter the listed ratio.

COMPRESS Help


Importance Factor (I) -- Enter the importance factor here (normally 1). If you enter 0, COMPRESS will automatically enter a value of 1.

Coefficient Za -- Enter the value for coefficient Za from the Table J-1; Design Data for Selected Locations in Canada (page 13 of the Supplement to the NBC). Look up the acceleration-related seismic zone (Za) under Seismic Data.

Coefficient Zv -- Enter the coefficient Zv from the Table J-1; Design Data for Selected Locations in Canada (page 13 of the Supplement to the NBC). Look up the velocity-related seismic zone (Zv) under Seismic Data.

Foundation Factor (F) -- This is similar to the soil profile coefficient input in the ASCE and UBC codes. Enter the foundation factor from Table 4.1.9.C. Select the appropriate soil properties category and enter Factor F. If you enter 0, COMPRESS defaults to F=1.5 (category 3).

Force Modification Factor (R) -- This is similar to Rw in the UBC code. Enter the force modification factor from Table 4.1.9.B. We suggest a value of R = 3.

NBC Look Up -- Click this button to select a location in Canada. The dialog will automatically look up the Zonal Velocity Ratio, Zv, and Za values and enter them into the main dialog.

NBC 2005 - 2010 Code

Definitions and references are taken from NBC Canada 2005, Volume 1, and NBC 2005 Structural Commentaries (Part 4 of Division B).

COMPRESS Help


While NBC 2005 has phased out the use of allowable (working) stress design in favor of limit states design, ASME Section VIII remains an ASD code. As such, the LSD Load Combinations given in Table 4.1.3.2. are incompatible with Section VIII pressure vessel design. NBC 2005 A4.1.1.5.(2) allows for the use of "alternative solutions" provided they are proven to be of equivalent safety and performance. COMPRESS continues to use the NBC 1995 ASD Load Combinations from section 4.1.4.1.(1).

5% damped spectral response accelerations (Sa(x)) -- These values are taken at periods of T = 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 come from Table C-2, and are automatically filled in when a location is set in the NBC Look Up Dialog.

Importance Factor (IE) -- defined in 4.1.8.5.

COMPRESS Help


Site Classification -- This input is similar to the like-named input in ASCE seismic codes, and is found in Table 4.1.8.4.A.

Velocity- and Acceleration-based site coefficients (Fv and Fa) -- These inputs are automatically filled in with the appropriate values from Tables 4.1.8.4.B. and 4.1.8.4.C for Site Classes A through E. Fv and Fa must be manually entered for Site Class F.

Ductility- and Overstrength-related force modification factors (Rd and Ro) -- These inputs are found in table 4.1.8.9.

Consider Sentence 4.1.8.1.(1) design requirements exception -- Toggle consideration of Sentence 4.1.8.1.(1) which provides an exemption from seismic requirements if S(0.2) from Sentence 4.1.8.4.(7) is less than or equal to 0.12.

Calculate Vessel as Equipment -- Activate this switch to use the alternate calculation method for "Elements of structures, Non-sturctural Components and Equipment" as found in NBC 2005 Section 4.1.8.17 and NBC 2010 Section 4.1.8.18. This is the same base shear calculation that is used for horizontal vessels, and in a horizontal vessel file these same inputs are visible without needing to activate a switch.

COMPRESS Help


Response Modification Factor (Rp) -- Specified in Table 4.1.8.17 in NBC 2005, and Table 4.1.8.18 in NBC 2010.

Force Amplification Factor (Ar) -- Specified in Table 4.1.8.17 in NBC 2005, and Table 4.1.8.18 in NBC 2010.

Component Factor (Cp) -- Specified in Table 4.1.8.17 in NBC 2005, and Table 4.1.8.18 in NBC 2010. This value must be 1.5 when the Lethal Service option in the ASME Codes dialog is active.

Vessel Elevation (hx) and Structure Overall Height (hn) -- These inputs are used to calculate the height factor from (Ax = (1 + 2 hx / hn)) from NBC 2005 Section 4.1.8.17 and NBC

COMPRESS Help


2010 Section 4.1.8.18.

NBC Look Up -- Click this button to select a location in Canada. The dialog will automatically look up data from Table C-2 and enter it into the Sa(x) inputs.

In NBC 2005, the vessel fundamental lateral period, Ta is now calculated only by the Rayleigh method, an "established method" as required by 4.1.8.11.(3). NBC 1995 used either the Rayleigh period or a diameter-based equation; the latter was removed from the 2005 edition. The Higher Mode factor, Mv, is taken from Table 4.1.8.11, and is based on values of Sa(0.2), Sa(2.0), and Ta. A pressure vessel's Lateral Resisting System is assumed to be similar to the "walls, other systems" entry in the Table. Seismic base shear, V, is calculated according to the Equivalent Static Force Procedure in section 4.1.8.11, and is subject to the minimum and maximum value constraints found in that section. A probability-based factor of 2/3 is applied to all seismic base shear values according to the NBC 1995 Load Combinations. Note that the Vmax equation also includes a separate experience-based 2/3 factor; for more information see Commentaries page J-45.

COMPRESS Help


UBC 1991 - 1997 Seismic Code UBC Code

Definitions and references are taken from UBC 1994, Volume 2, Chapter 16, Division III, List in Section 1626 unless otherwise noted.

Zone (1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4) -- Enter the zone from the Seismic Zone Map for the United States. For all others, see UBC Appendix, Chapter 16, Division II, page 2-1214.

Importance Factor (I) -- Enter the importance factor from the applicable table. If you enter 0 for this input, COMPRESS will default to a value of 1.0.

Soil Profile (S1, S2, S3, S4) -- Enter one of the following soil profile types as defined by the UBC 1991 and 1994 code (not applicable to UBC 1997).

S1 - A soil profile with either: A rock-like material characterized by a shear-wave velocity greater than 2,500 feet per second (762 m/s) or by other suitable means of classification. -or Medium- dense to dense or medium-stiff to stiff soil conditions where soil depth is less than 200 feet (60960 mm).

S2 - A soil profile with predominantly medium-dense to dense or medium-stiff to stiff soil conditions where the soil depth exceeds 200 feet (60960 mm).

S3 - A soil profile containing more than 20 feet (6096 mm) of soft to medium-stiff clay but not more than 40 feet (12192 mm) of soft clay.

S4 - A soil profile containing more than 40 feet (12192 mm) of soft clay characterized by a shear wave velocity less than 500 feet per second (152.4 m/s).

Site Coefficient (S) -- Enter the site coefficient from the table (not applicable to UBC 1997) Coefficient Rw (Table 23-Q) -- Enter coefficient Rw from Table (Rw Factors for Nonbuilding Structures). We recommend that you enter the value 3 here for vessels on legs or 4 if the vessel is skirt-supported. See Tables 16-N and 16-P UBC 1994 (not applicable to UBC 1997).

COMPRESS Help


COMPRESS uses Provision 1632.5 from the UBC 1994 code. Because a vessel is a non-building structure, the ratio C/Rw used for design shall not be less than 0.4. COMPRESS will not use a value for the ratio C/Rw less than 0.4. For the 1991 code, COMPRESS uses Provision 2338(d) and the ratio C/Rw used for design shall not be less than 0.5. COMPRESS will not use a value for the ratio C/Rw less than 0.5.

The following inputs apply to UBC 1997 Seismic Codes only: Soil Profile (SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF) -- Enter one of the following soil profile types as defined by the UBC 1997 Section 1636.2 and Table 16-J.

SA - A soil profile with hard rock characterized by a shear-wave velocity greater than 5,000 feet per second (1500 m/s).

SB - A soil profile with rock characterized by a shear wave velocity greater than 2,500 ft/s (760 m/s) but not greater than 5,000 ft/s (1500 ft/s).

SC - A soil profile with very dense soil and soft rock characterized by a shear wave velocity greater than 1,200 ft/s (360 m/s) but not greater than 2,500 ft/s (760 ft/s), or with a standard penetration test of N greater than 50, or an undrained shear strength of greater than or equal to 2,000 spf (100 kPa).

SD - A soil profile with stiff soil characterized by a shear wave velocity of not less than 600 ft/s (180 m/s) and not greater than 1,200 ft/s (360 m/s), or with a standard penetration test with N between 15 and 50, inclusive, or an undrained shear strength between 1,000 psf (50 kPa) and 2,000 psf (100 kPa), inclusive.

SE - A soil profile with soft soil characterized by a shear wave velocity of under 600 ft/s (180 m/s), or more than 10 feet (3048 mm) of soft clay, as defined in 1636.2.4.

SF - A soil profile which requires site-specific evaluation. Coefficient Rp / R (Table 16-O / Table 16-P) -- Enter coefficient Rp from Table 16-O for UBC 1997 Building Mounted, for which we recommend a value of 3. With UBC 1997 Ground Supported, this input is for R, taken from Table 16-P, for which we recommend a value of 2.2.

hx / h r (Eqn. 32.2) -- Enter h x / hr ratio for use in Equation 32-2, as defined in Section 1632.2. This input is used in UBC 1997 Building Mounted only.

Amplification factor ap (Table 16-O) -- Enter the in-structure Component Amplification Factor ap from UBC 1997 Table 16-O and Section 1632.2. This input is used for UBC 1997

COMPRESS Help


Building Mounted only.

COMPRESS Help


User Defined Seismic Code User Defined Code All building codes compute the shear (horizontal force) at the base of a structure which is experienced during an earthquake and which the vessel must be able to withstand. The building codes also specify how the shear is distributed, that is, what the horizontal force will be at any height on the structure. Tagging User Defined lets you specify what the weight of the vessel gets multiplied by to determine the base shear (Base Shear Multiplier, see below), and what that base shear in turn gets multiplied by to determine the shear at the top of the vessel (Portion at Top, see below). A standard algorithm is then used to determine the shears at all intermediate heights. These shears, once determined, can be used to compute the bending moments at various heights on the structure. The user defined seismic works as follows: 1) The user defines the total base shear to use in the calculations by entering the base shear multiplier. This factor is actually the acceleration induced by the seismic "event" expressed in G's. For example if the HORIZONTAL acceleration expected during the earthquake is 0.3 G then enter 0.3 - this would produce a seismic base shear V = 0.3*M where M = the mass of the vessel in the condition considered. 2) Many building codes have historically taken a portion of the base shear and applied it to the top of the structure. COMPRESS allows the user to do something similar using the "Portion at top" input. If you wanted 7% of the base shear calculated in 1) above to be applied at the top of the vessel you would enter 0.07 here. Note that this entry is optional; an entry of 0 is permitted. 3) Once the seismic accelerations have been defined by 1) and 2), COMPRESS uses the method of vertical base shear distribution along the height of the vessel common to all the other building code methods programmed. See 9.2.3.4 in ASCE 7-95 (9.5.3.4 in 7-98, 9.5.5.4 in 7-02, or 12.8.3 in 7-05) for one such reference. Essentially the vessel is modeled as a lumped mass system with the seismic base shear distributed in proportion to the distance of the mass from the point of support. That is, the farther the lump of mass is from the base the greater will be the portion of the base shear applied to it. 4) Overturning moments etc. can now be determined for the vessel under consideration. Consider Vertical Accelerations Force Multiplier Minimum Weight Multiplier

COMPRESS Help


Base Shear Multiplier -- See explanation in 1) above. Portion at Top -- See the explanation in 2) above.

COMPRESS Help


Loads Menu The Loads menu offers the ability to specify several different loadings on a vessel:

Lateral Force < 13 - 2 > Vertical Force < 13 - 3 > Liquid Level < 13 - 5 >

COMPRESS Help

Loads Menu < 13 - 1 >

Lateral Force The lateral force input option adds forces algebraically to the wind and/or seismic shear that act on the vessel. This results in a change in the overturning moment, bending stresses, etc. Select Lateral Force from the Loads menu to advance to the Add a Lateral Force screen:

Identifier -- Enter the force that acts on the vessel. Magnitude of Force -- Enter the force that acts on the vessel. Position from Datum -- Enter the distance from the datum to the point of application of the load. The force multiplied by the lateral distance from the seam of the component under consideration will produce the moment acting on that component due to the lateral force.

Direction (angle) -- Specify the angular location of the force. Conditions when force is present -- This listing allows you to design for different construction stages, where you may or may not want the force included. For example, choosing the Empty condition means the force is considered to be present for the empty condition only. Tag the desired condition(s) in the list.

COMPRESS Help


Vertical Force Vertical loads are considered to be masses. Adding a vertical load to a vessel affects the vessel weight and period of vibration. The load may be attached to the outside or the inside of a vessel. If eccentrically positioned, the vertical load induces a bending moment. An example of a vertical load would bean overhead condenser. When you select Vertical Load from the Loads menu the Add a Vertical Load screen appears:

Identifier -- Give the load a name. Vertical Load -- Enter the weight of the added equipment. Eccentricity -- Enter the moment arm length from the axial center line of the vessel to the center of gravity of the load. This input has meaning only for a vertical vessel supported on a skirt, legs, or lugs.

Position from Datum -- Enter the distance from the datum to the point of application of the load.

Angle (Theta) -- This is the orientation angle viewed from the top of the vessel at which an eccentric load is applied. COMPRESS adds the vector moment sum of all eccentric loads to find an overall moment. Platforms, nozzles, and flanges all contribute to this overall moment.

COMPRESS Help


Conditions when load is present -- This listing allows you to design for different construction stages, where you may or may not want the load included. For example, choosing the Empty condition means the loading is considered to be present for the empty condition only. Tag the desired condition(s) in the Apply to list. The vertical load is drawn on screen as a yellow block with an arrow pointing downward (to the right of the screen).

COMPRESS Help


Liquid Level To set the liquid level in a vessel, select Liquid Level from the Loads menu. A vertical vessel will display this screen:

The liquid level is the normal level of operating liquid in the vessel. It is NOT the same as hydrotest condition (vessel completely full of water or air). How the operating liquid acts in the vessel is dependent on the Horizontal/Vertical switch setting in the Set Datum Line dialog. The liquid static head acting on the various shells, heads, nozzles and other components is automatically determined and included in the Code calculations as required. For vertical vessels the liquid level is referenced from the datum line as a positive or negative measurement. If the vessel is supported on saddles, then the switch in the Set Datum Line dialog should be set to acts horizontally.

Identifier -- Enter an identifier for the liquid level. Use Identifier in 3D Sketch-- Select this option if you want the identifier to be used as the label for the liquid level in the 3D sketch. If this is not selected COMPRESS will use NLL to indicate the nominal liquid level.

Fill to Top of Chamber-- Click this button to have COMPRESS determine the liquid level elevation that will fill the vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Liquid Level from Datum -- Specify the operating liquid level as measured from the datum (could be + or - ).

Specific Gravity (Operating Liquid) -- Enter the specific gravity of the operating liquid (the specific gravity of water = 1).

Specific Gravity (Test Liquid) -- Enter the specific gravity of the test liquid.

Liquid Level for Horizontal Vessels

Enter all values as before, except that the liquid level is specified as a distance referenced from the centerline of the vessel instead of the datum line.

COMPRESS Help


Material Menu If no vessel document is open (including an empty document), the application material menu is shown:

The application Material Menu provides options for managing the user materials database. The user materials database contains all of the user defined materials, gaskets, structural sections, etc... Export User Database Import User Database Merge User Database

If a vessel document is open, the vessel material menu is shown:

The vessel Material Menu provides options to review / edit: ASME Materials Full User Defined Materials

COMPRESS Help

Material Menu < 14 - 1 >

Bolts < 14 - 13 > Standard Saddle Details < 14 - 19 > Structural Sections < 14 - 16 > Studding Outlet Details < 14 - 21 > Gasket Details < 14 - 15 >

COMPRESS Help


ASME Materials

All materials properties required to perform vessel calculations are contained in a central database (Asme.mdb) maintained by COMPRESS. The entire collection of ASME II-D materials is available for use without the need to manually enter any material information. The following material properties are present: ASME II-D Tables 1A, 1B, and 3 -- Allowable stresses vs temperature (1995 Edition onwards) Code Case 2290 -- Allowable stresses vs temperature ASME II-D -- External pressure charts (all) ASME II-D Table Y-1 -- Yield stresses vs temperature ASME II-D Table TM-1 --> TM-5 -- Elastic modulus vs temperature ASME II-D Material notes -- The notes appear at the bottom of the dialog by selecting a material and then clicking on the Notes button. To avoid having to search through a long list of seldom used materials COMPRESS uses the

COMPRESS Help


concept of a user specified "short list". Only materials that have been selected from the full database listing are displayed in the short list. This short list is available in COMPRESS whenever a material selection is required. To add or remove materials from the short list select the Materials menu then ASME Division 1 Materials to display the ASME Materials dialog. A green check mark in the Use column on the far left indicates that the selected material is available for use and will be displayed in the short list. Toggle this check mark on and off by left clicking on the desired material with your mouse. COMPRESS also provides the option of specifying User defined materials at the time the component is designed. This is useful for situations where the desired material is not in ASME IID as would be the case for a Code Case material, for example. User defined materials are not specified from the ASME Materials dialog. User defined material properties entered are saved in the user maintained database file User.mdb. All dimensional properties of structural sections (angles, wide flange beams, etc.) and bolting required to perform vessel calculations are contained in the user maintained database file User.mdb.

Stresses (Material Allowable Stresses Database) COMPRESS automatically supplies allowable stress values when you enter the material specification and design temperature for a component. The allowable stress values supplied with COMPRESS have been taken from ASME, Section II, Part D. COMPRESS automatically selects the correct stress for cases where the allowable stress varies with material thickness. For example, SB 209 5083 has three listings in ASME, Section II, Part D for three thickness ranges. Each of these listings have an unique allowable stress range with respect to temperature. Allowable stresses for structural components, such as legs, lugs, and saddles, are input manually. COMPRESS does not supply the allowable stress for such components. For structural components, the material specification input is included for reference only.

Temperature Temperature also affects the allowable stress used. When you enter the design temperature for internal pressure while designing, COMPRESS looks up the appropriate allowable stress automatically. COMPRESS interpolates for intermediate temperatures as required. If you enter a temperature that is higher than the maximum allowed, COMPRESS displays a warning message and the maximum temperature permitted. At this point, the program will not proceed until you enter an acceptable temperature. COMPRESS checks that the temperatures entered are within the allowable ranges for the given material. The maximum temperatures may be limited by either:

COMPRESS Help


Tensile Stress (Subsection C/Materials Part D) Vacuum Charts (Appendix 5/Materials Part D)

COMPRESS Help


Full User Defined Materials

The Full User Defined Materials Manager dialog is used to add, edit, delete or view full user defined materials. Users can manage materials irrespective of the current open file's division and unit settings by toggling the Division and Units radio buttons. Properties of the material can be viewed by scrolling or resizing the dialog. Adding a new material or editing an existing material allows users to add or edit material properties in the Create/Edit User Defined Material dialog.

COMPRESS Help


Users can input the material properties found in ASME Section II Part D or have the option of copying the material properties of existing materials by clicking on the Copy From Material button. Full material definitions are treated the same as ASME materials and contain all of the material properties and data required to complete all of the Code checks currently performed by COMPRESS. They may be added to the subset of materials shown in the component material drop downs and also appear in the ASME materials dialog. Full user defined materials may be used to create material definitions from older Codes or for materials approved by ASME Code Cases. The COMPRESS material database has been extended to include external pressure charts for Code Case specific vacuum charts. Separate material definitions are maintained for U.S. Customary and metric designs. When switching a file that uses a full user defined material from U.S. Customary to metric units, or vice versa, the metric or U.S. Customary definition is automatically created if an existing definition with the same name does not already exist. When loading files with full user defined materials that do not exist in the current user's database, COMPRESS will ask whether to add the full user defined material to the current user database. The Create/Edit User Defined Material dialog includes a tabbed control that provides the ability to toggle between a US Customary and metric definition of the material. Common material properties are defined along the upper part of the dialog and are synced between the unit definitions. Unit specific property inputs are located towards the bottom of the dialog, enclosed in the tabs. If only one unit definition exists, an option to convert the current material's units to the corresponding units is available when activating the corresponding tab.

COMPRESS Help


Accessing the Full User Defined Materials Manager dialog There are several ways to access the Full User Defined Materials Manager dialog:

Materials Menu - From the Materials menu, select Full User Defined Materials .

User Defined Button or Material Drop Down List - Click on the User defined button which will bring up the option to select from Full User Defined or Simple User Defined . Clicking on the User Defined selection in the Material combo box also brings up the option to select between the two user defined material options. When the Full User Defined Materials option is selected, a material can be selected from the list of materials. To modify or add a new material, go to the main design screen and from the Materials menu, select the Full User Defined Materials option.

COMPRESS Help


Convert to Full User Defined Material button from the Simple User Defined Material dialog - A full user defined material can be created with the existing info from an existing simple user defined material. Edit the simple user defined material and click on the Convert to Full User Defined Material button. The material data from the simple user defined material will be populated in the Full User Defined Material dialog, however additional data will need to be added in order to create a valid full user defined material.

Distinguishing Full User Defined Materials from ASME Materials Full user defined materials are distinguished from ASME materials in the COMPRESS dialogs and reports with "(Full User Defined)" after the material name as shown below:

COMPRESS Help


Material Combo Box :

COMPRESS Help


Cylinder Report :

COMPRESS Help


Full user defined materials are also included in the ASME Materials dialog and can be sorted by the User Defined Identifier :

COMPRESS Help


Bolts Database

Use this screen to add, edit or delete user defined bolts. Select one of the 3 categories of bolts, arranged by thread type: English series 8 English coarse thread Metric Tag the kind of bolt you want to add to the database.

Description -- Enter the size of the bolt, for example, 5/16". Nominal Size-- Enter the actual size of the bolt (this should match the size given for Description, above).

Bolt Root Area-- Enter the cross-sectional area at the root of the thread (the area of the minor diameter).

Minimum Bolt Spacing -- Enter the smallest distance between bolt centers allowed.

COMPRESS Help


Minimum Radial Distance (R) -- Enter the minimum distance required to allow sufficient clearance for a box end wrench.

Minimum Edge Distance (E) -- Enter the minimum distance from the center of bolt (located on the bolt circle) to the edge of the flange. This input should be large enough so that washers, etc. do not project outside the edge of the flange.

Nut Dimension -- Enter the minimum nut dimension across the flats. This dimension is used by COMPRESS during base ring sizing calculations.

COMPRESS Help


Gasket Details Select Gasket Details from the Materials menu. The database screen appears:

The database comes complete with many Flexitallic catalog gaskets. Users may add their own by selecting the "Add" button and then the "Save" button after completely filling in the necessary values. After submitting a new user defined gasket, you may edit the gasket by selecting the "Edit" button or delete by selecting the "Delete" button. The "Next" and "Previous" buttons will move one item forward or backward in the list. The standard gaskets included with COMPRESS are not user editable. To view only the user defined studding outlets, click the "Only Show User Defined" button. All of these entries are editable. Any gaskets listed in this dialog will be available for selection in the flange dialogs.

COMPRESS Help


Structural Sections Select Structures from the Materials menu. The Structural Sections Database screen appears:

While designing vacuum stiffeners, support legs, etc., it is customary to select commercially available shapes. COMPRESS includes all the shapes listed in AISC Manual of Steel Construction 9th Ed. and also allows the user to specify structures according to their individual requirements by customizing the structures database. Select New, Edit, or Delete from this screen to add, edit, or delete structures from the existing entries in the structures database. Select Close to return to the design window without making changes to the structures database. When a new structure is added to the database, COMPRESS automatically inserts it in the correct order in the list. COMPRESS sorts the items by area, starting with the smallest and ending with the largest. When selecting an appropriate size to use while designing, COMPRESS will scan the database starting with the smallest size until it finds an acceptable size. If there is more than one suitable entry in the database, COMPRESS will always choose the least weight selection. If all selections are too small, an error message is given. In this way, the minimum weight section (typically the most economical one) is selected by COMPRESS. The items are organized by type in the following order: flat bars, equal leg angles, un-equal leg angles, wide flanges, structural tees, pipes and user defined. To make additions to the structures database, select New from the Structural Sections screen. The above information, for example, inertia, radius of gyration, etc. follows the AISC Manual of Steel Construction format.

COMPRESS Help


Structural Types The preceding sketches show the seven categories of structures available. These structural possibilities are listed in the bottom left corner of the Add screen. The categories are: Flat Bar Equal Leg Angle Un-equal Leg Angle I Beam / Wide Flange Structural Tee User Defined Pipe for Legs COMPRESS' user defined option lets you insert metric shapes in addition to standard Imperial

COMPRESS Help


sections. Tag a structure type to be added from the seven listed.

Section Description -- Enter a name for the structure being added to the database. Area -- The cross sectional area of the section being added to the database (in2 ). Inertia Ix-x -- The moment of inertia about the x-x axis for the section (in4 ). NA Distance y Axis X-X -- See figures above. Inertia Iy-y -- The moment of inertia for the section about the y-y axis (in4 ). NA Distance x Axis Y-Y Radius of Gyration Rz-z Section Depth Section Width -See the figures.

UCS-66 Governing Thickness -- The rules of UCS-66 require that every component on the vessel be considered. Enter the thickness to be used when determining the governing thickness for UCS-66. For example, if the part of the structure to be welded to a shell is 0.5" thick, then the governing thickness per UCS-66 would be 0.5" (even though another part of the structure may be thicker than 0.5"). For leg designing using equal angle sections, this input is also used as the t dimension for the AISC local buckling analysis per AISC Appendix B.

Save or Cancel -- Select Save to add the structure to the structural sections database. You are returned to the Add screen to continue adding structures to the database. Select Cancel to return to the design window without adding the structure to the database. If you create a new structural shape and assign it to structural tee, the entry for "NA Distance of Axis XX" always is interpreted as being from back of flange to the NA. You can specify D-y, and the picture will not be correct, but the calculations (section properties) will be.

Show All Structures Virtually all of the AISC structures are included in the COMPRESS structures database. Only a select number is included in the standard subset that will appear during design. To view all the structures, select the Show All Structures button. To add structures to the standard subset (displayed in the left list), select the desired structure from the right list and click on the Update Subset button.

COMPRESS Help


Standard Saddle Details

COMPRESS uses these standard saddle details to determine default values when a saddle is first created. There should only be one standard saddle detail for a specific diameter. Use this screen to add, edit or delete standard saddle details. Select the saddle type, either "Web At Center" or "Web At Edge" and then click either the new, copy or edit button. This will display a second dialog where detail data can be input. The sketch on the dialog shows the meaning of the inputs.

COMPRESS Help


Saddles may be defined in either English or Metric units. To use Metric units, click the checkbox labeled "Uses Metric Units." To delete an data for an existing saddle, highlight the correct item on the list and click the "Delete" button. Note that when editing a record, changing the state of the Metric checkbox will change only the system of units for that particular record. For example, if the record has a thickness dimension of 2", when the Metric box is checked, that value will be 2mm.

COMPRESS Help


Studding Outlet Dialog Select Studding Outlet Details from the Materials menu (or from within the Standard Size Lookup dialog of the Nozzles design screen). The database screen appears:

The database comes complete with all FVC catalog standard studding outlets. Users may add their own by selecting the "Add" button and then the "Save" button after completely filling in the necessary values. After submitting a new user defined pad flange, you may edit the flange by selecting the "Edit" button or delete by selecting the "Delete" button. The "Next" and "Previous" buttons will move one item forward or backward in the list. The standard studding outlets included with COMPRESS are not user editable. To view only the user defined studding outlets, click the "Only Show User Defined" button. All of these entries are editable. This dialog is also available from the Pipe Look Up dialog using the "Studding Outlet Details" button.

COMPRESS Help


ASME and NBIC Forms

COMPRESS has the capability of automatically generating and filling out ASME U-1, U-1A, U2, U-2A, U-3A, U-4, and U-5 forms. NBIC R-1 and R-2 forms (repair and alteration) are also included. This feature supports the National Board's EDT (Electronic Data Transmission) facility allowing you to submit forms to the National Board electronically saving both time and money. Additionally, COMPRESS generated ASME and NBIC forms may be archived using the built in forms database management utility. The COMPRESS forms management utility supports network access and can be used to store all forms and necessary support files as well as generate a National Board Log.

Manage Forms - This will open up the Manage Forms dialog, which is the interface for the database management utility. Here, forms and files may be archived and shared through a network in an easy to use grid format. The National Board Log and option to submit forms to the National Board via their Electronic Data Transfer system are also available here.

Default Form Values - This will display the Form Defaults dialog, which allows a set of default values to be set for both U-Forms and R-Forms in order to minimize data input.

NBIC R-Forms - Multiple NBIC R-1 and R-2 forms may be created for each vessel here. Expand this menu option in order to add a new R-1 or R-2 form to the vessel, or to select a previously generated one.

ASME U-Forms - ASME U-1, U-1A, U-2, U-2A, U-3A, U-4, and U-5 forms are created here. Expand this menu option in order to add a new U-Form to the vessel, or to select a previously generated one.

Check for Form Updates - Checks for any updated forms online. Updated forms may now be

COMPRESS Help

Forms Menu < 15 - 1 >

distributed at any time, rather than only upon the release of a new COMPRESS build. If the Check for program updates on startup option in Set Mode is active, COMPRESS will automatically check for the latest version of the forms on startup.

Creating a form: The COMPRESS forms capability is accessed from the new Forms option located on the COMPRESS Main Menu . In order to create a form, click the Forms menu item, then select the type of form that you would like to create. This will bring up the form editing page for that specific type of form. Only one of each type of U-Form may be saved with each vessel file. Multiple R-forms may be generated for each vessel file.

Fields on the form editing page will automatically be filled with data for the vessel that is currently open.

COMPRESS Help


Note: The data on this form will not be saved until the form is generated in PDF format. This may be done by clicking the Finished button is clicked at the bottom of the page, clicking the PDF button on the main toolbar or by pressing enter while editing a field.

While the form is being viewed, the following functions are available.

Edit Form - This is only available when the form is in PDF format. It returns you to the form editing page for the form that you are currently viewing.

Refresh Form - Selecting this item will refresh values pertaining to the vessel's geometry and calculations while retaining all of the other information on the form. This should be used in the case that changes were made to the vessel after the form was initially generated.

Reset Form - Selecting this item will reset all values on the form. Delete Form - Selecting this item will delete the form permanently. Use Values as Defaults - Select this item to save all of the default values currently entered on the form. Setting default values with this option may be easier than using the Form Defaults dialog.

Load Defaults into Form - This option will fill the current form with all of the default values specified in the Form Defaults dialog.

Submit Electronically - This is only available when the form is in PDF format. Use this

COMPRESS Help


feature to submit forms to the National Board electronically. For instructions on submitting forms electronically, click here .

COMPRESS Help


Form Defaults Dialog

The Form Defaults dialog may be accessed by clicking Form Defaults on the Forms menu. This dialog allows you to set all of the default values on any of the forms. All U-Forms use a common set of default values. To Set the R-Form default values, click the R Form Defaults button at the top of the dialog.

National Board Manufacturer ID - This is the Manufacturer ID assigned to companies by the National Board either through accounting or when registered for the Electronic Data Transfer system. This number is used only for submitting forms to the National Board electronically. If you will not be submitting forms electronically, this value may be left blank.

Fill blank fields with "N/A" - This will cause all blank fields on the form with the text "N/A". Group identical Shell and Nozzle table entries - When this option is selected, table entries of shells and nozzles with identical geometries and materials are grouped together. The number of shells or nozzles that are grouped in a particular row is indicated in the No. field in the table. When nozzles of identical geometries are grouped together, the Identifier for this row is filled out by using the first word of each nozzle names. For example, if two nozzles are grouped together named "Manway 1" and "Manway 2", the Identifier field will be filled with "Manway". If there is no continuity between the nozzle identifiers, this field will be left blank.

Maintain a Backup of the "Manage Forms" Database and Files - This will maintain a backup directory of the Manage Forms database and files. This feature will be of use incase of

COMPRESS Help


any unforeseen problems occur with the database in use. If this option is left "on", COMPRESS will store up to seven copies of the database and it's required files in the Backup Directory . The Manage Forms dialog may be used to restore a database to a previously backed up version.

Backup Directory - Click this button to choose a directory that will be used to store backups of the "Manage Forms" database and files.

Save Defaults - This will save the values on this dialog so that every new file will already have these values set.

COMPRESS Help


Manage Forms Dialog

A built in file management utility may be accessed by clicking Forms on the main menu, then clicking Manage Forms . This utility eases maintenance of forms and files by archiving everything in a central database. When a form is added to the archive, a new row is added to the Archived Forms table and all users connected to this database will be able to view the archived form, view the archived file, and submit the form to the national board.

Setting up the file management utility over a network: If a central database for the network has not already been created, choose a location in a shared folder on a computer that users will have access to. This folder must be accessed through a mapped network drive if it is accessed through another computer on your network. For instructions on mapping a network drive, click here . Click Move Forms Database and navigate to the desired folder. If a central database has already been created, connect to the database by clicking Select Forms Database and navigate to the containing folder. This folder must be accessed through a mapped network drive if it is accessed through another computer on your network. For instructions on mapping a network drive, click here .

Form Status: Forms may be marked Submitted by clicking the checkbox in the Status column in that form's row. Once a form is marked Submitted , it's data and files may not be changed or deleted from the database. Forms should only be marked Submitted once they have been submitted to the National Board and their data has been verified.

COMPRESS Help


If an archived form has not yet been marked Submitted and changes need to be made, it should be deleted then added back into the archive.

Dates and Comments: The Date Signed , Date Submitted , and Comments fields appear in the National Board Log may be edited inside the database. To edit one of these fields, double click it and enter the desired value. To delete the data in a date field, select a different row, left click, then right click the date's data box, then press delete.

Select Forms Database - This will bring up a folder navigation dialog. Choose the folder that contains the database that COMPRESS should connect to.

Move Forms Database - This will bring up a folder navigation dialog. Choose the folder that the current database should be moved to. Using this method of moving the database will ensure that all necessary files are copied as well. Moving the database manually may result in missing files.

National Board Log - This button will generate a National Board Log in PDF format from all of the forms that are marked as Submitted . This log will display the National Board No., Serial No., Vessel Type, Comments, Customer, Date Signed, and Date Submitted.

Submit Electronically - Use this feature to submit forms to the National Board electronically. For instructions on submitting forms electronically, click here .

Database Directory - The directory that the "Manage Forms" database and files are stored in is displayed here.

How to Restore the Database to a Backed Up Version: This is possible if the Maintain a Backup of the "Manage Forms" Database and Files option has been turned on from the Form Defaults dialog. 1. First, open the Form Defaults dialog by clicking the Forms menu, then clicking Form Defaults . 2. Make note of the Backup Directory displayed at the bottom of the dialog. You will use this path in a following step. 3. Close the Form Defaults dialog and open the Manage Forms dialog by clicking the Forms menu, then clicking Manage Forms . 4. Make note of the Database Directory displayed at the bottom of the dialog. You will use this path in a following step. 5.

COMPRESS Help


4.

5. Click Select Forms Database and navigate to a folder named Forms_Database_Backup in the Backup Directory noted in step 2. 6. Click "No" if asked if you would like to append your forms to this database. 7. Depending on how long you have been maintaining a backup of the database, there should be up to seven folders labeled by the date they were created. Choose one of these folders and verify that it is the version that you would like to restore. If it is not the correct version, go back to step 5. 8. Delete the existing database. Open up an instance of Windows Explorer and navigate to the Database Directory noted in step 4. Click the folder named ArchivedFormsDatabase , and press delete then enter. 9. Click the Move Forms Database button and navigate to the Database Directory noted in step 4.

How to Map a network drive: Open an instance of Windows Explorer. This may be done by clicking the Start button and selecting "My Computer" or by holding down the "Windows Key" and pressing "E" . Click the Tools menu item and select Map Network Drive...

Choose a Drive letter from the Drive list box. Click the Browse button and navigate to the desired shared folder.

COMPRESS Help


Click Finish. The selected drive letter should now be available in Windows Explorer.

COMPRESS Help


Submit Forms Electronically

To submit forms electronically, the form must have a National Board No. and a valid Manufacturer ID (this is provided by the National Board) must be entered on the Form Defaults dialog. This feature may be accessed while viewing the form in PDF format by clicking Form on the main menu and selecting Select Form Electronically or by opening the Manage Forms dialog, choosing the form, and clicking the Submit electronically button . A prompt to save a text (.TXT) file will appear. Save this file to a location on the hard drive and log into the National Board's EDT website at http://edtnationalboard.org/ . The following operations are performed on the National Board's website: Use the menu commands shown below on the National Board's website to import your form data. Click the Import Reports link.

On the Import Data Reports into Draft Status... page, click Browse and navigate to the text (.TXT) file that was saved by COMPRESS in a previous step.

After an Import Confirmation is shown, click EDT Home to return to the homepage.

COMPRESS Help


Click the appropriate Draft link to view the imported data reports.

As an alternative, the Data Reports and Repair Reports selection boxes may be used.

COMPRESS Help


Select the form by it's National Board No. from the list to load and review it.

From this point, the form may be printed, revised, or electronically signed and sent to your authorized inspector to continue the submission process.

COMPRESS Help


Windows Menu

Pull down the Window menu by selecting Window from the Menu Toolbar at the top of the design window. The Window menu lets you customize your visual working environment. You can specify how multiple windows are to be arranged for viewing, and which of COMPRESS’ toolbars you want displayed or hidden. You can also switch between open windows or view the report text for the vessel.

Windows Menu Options Cascade - This option is used if you have multiple windows open and you want them to overlap. Tile - This option is used if you have multiple windows open and you want them arranged so they do not overlap.

Revert to Default Docking - This options returns all toolbars and docking windows to their default positions.

Toolbars.. - This pop-up menu displays/hides the toolbars and docking windows. Background Color - This pop-up menu allows you to switch the color theme. The options are: Default, Blue, Black, Silver, and Aqua. Status Bar - This option displays/hides the status bar located at the bottom of the window. When you navigate around COMPRESS using shortcut keys or the arrow keys, the left side of the

COMPRESS Help

Windows Menu < 16 - 1 >

status bar shows the cursor position. Informative captions are also displayed when you point at toolbar buttons using the mouse. The right side of the status bar tells you what units are selected.

Report - Use this option to toggle from the Design Window to the Report text window. Form - Use this option to toggle from the Design Window to the Form text window. General Arrangement Use this option to toggle from the Design Window to General Arrangement Drawing window. Solid Model - Use this option to toggle from the Design Window to Solid Model window. 1, 2 ... - Look at the bottom of the Window menu for a list of vessel files and reports that are currently open. Switch between the open windows by clicking on one of the listed filenames. A check mark appears in front of the filename you have selected as the active window.

COMPRESS Help

Windows Menu < 16 - 2 >

Help Menu

This menu provides access to additional help resources.

COMPRESS Manual: The manual can be viewed by chapters and is searchable. COMPRESS Manual (PDF): This opens the User Manual in PDF format. Vessel Wizard Help: This displays the help file for the Vessel Wizard feature. Heat Exchanger Help: This displays the help file for the Heat Exchanger module. NozzlePRO Manual: This opens the NozzlePRO User Manual in PDF format. This manual provides help with using the FEA Nozzle feature within COMPRESS.

Verification Manual: This displays the Verification Manual which provides a validation of calculations performed by COMPRESS against published example problems.

Support Center: This opens a web browser to Codeware's online Support Center. Internet connection is required. Here you can find a complete listing of software developments as well as technical papers, calculation verification documents, manuals and a selection of video tutorials. The knowledgebase search capability, together with an FAQ index, makes it easy to quickly locate the answers you need.

COMPRESS Help

Help Menu < 17 - 1 >

COMPRESS Video Tutorial Selecting this will open the COMPRESS video tutorial in your web browser. Internet connection is required for this.

Exchanger Video Tutorial Selecting this will open the Exchanger video tutorial in your web browser. Internet connection is required for this.

Submit Support Request: This opens a web browser to the online support request form in the Support Center. This is the fastest way to receive support.

Contact Information: This opens a dialog that provides contact phone numbers and email addresses for Sales and Support.

Check for Key Updates: Use this button to check with Codeware's server for any pending license information updates. An Internet connection is required.

Key Information: This displays your key number, computer name and Support and Update Service (SUS) renewal date.

Renew Support: This opens a web browser to the Codeware Support and Update Service renewal page.

Get Updates This command checks for availability of a COMPRESS program update from the Codeware online update server. The user's computer must be connected to the internet for this option to work. This can also be accessed by the updates button on the toolbar.

View History This will open the COMPRESS history document in your web browser. The history document displays previous builds of COMPRESS and the changes that were made with these builds.

About COMPRESS: This displays your build number and license agreement as well as copyright and trademark information.

COMPRESS Help

Help Menu < 17 - 2 >

COMPRESS Toolbars COMPRESS toolbars: Standard - Provides quick access to many commonly performed COMPRESS operations. Camera - Selects how the mouse movement will affect the vessel position and scale. Provides options for quick vessel viewing and isometric orientations. This toolbar is not active unless the design window is open. Report - Used to easily navigate the COMPRESS report. The toolbar is not active unless the report window is open. HTRI - A feature set allowing quick HTRI file handling and interface. Edit - Used to edit the vessel in a controlled manner and to show a history of changes made to the vessel. Solid Model - A feature for enabling a solid model view of the vessel as well as exporting the 3D file to multiple types. Component - A shortcut to options located on the Component, Nozzle, Attach, and Support menus. You can suppress display of the component toolbar by closing it. COMPRESS toolbars are dockable to any side of the COMPRESS window. You can also float these toolbars anywhere on screen. The position of these toolbars is automatically saved when the application exits. In the event that you want to revert the toolbars back to their original position, select Window | Revert to Default Docking.

COMPRESS Help

COMPRESS Toolbars < 18 - 1 >

Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar contains the following options:

New Project - Creates a new project. New Division 1 Document - Creates a new Division 1 document. New Division 2 Document - Creates a new Division 2 document. New Vessel Wizard Document - Creates a new document using the Vessel Wizard project.

New Division 1 Heat Exchanger - Creates a Division 1 heat exchanger document. Open - Opens an existing document. Save - Saves the active document. Save All - Saves all active documents. Print Report - Prints the active report. Report - Activates the report view for the active document. Minimal Reports - Opens the Report Defaults dialog for report customization. Cover Page Settings - Opens the Cover Page Settings dialog for customizing the coverpage.

PDF Report - Activates the PDF report view for the active document. Customize PDF Reports - Opens the Customize PDF Report dialog for customizing PDF reports.

Form - Activates the forms view for the active document. General Arrangement Drawing - Activates the General Arrangement Drawing for the active document.

Code Calculations- Performs the code calculations on the active document and activates the report view.

COMPRESS Help


Camera Toolbar The Camera toolbar contains the following options:

Pan - Sets the mouse click and hold to move the vessel in a translational manner. This option disables Zoom and Rotate. Zoom - Sets the mouse click and hold to zoom into and out of the vessel about the origin. This option disables Pan and Rotate. Rotate - Sets the mouse click and hold to rotate the vessel about the origin. This option disables Pan and Zoom. Highlight Components on Mouseover - Shades the components that are hovered over by the cursor.

Reset Camera - Sets the current Pan Angle, Elevation, and Roll Angle to the defaults. You can select your own defaults by editing the parameters in the Horizontal/Vertical Camera Settings dialog from the main menu at Action | Camera Settings | Preferences. Auto Resize - Resets the camera position to the default view angles and to the default zoom. The view angles defined in the Horizontal/Vertical Camera Settings dialog control the view angles while the zoom is automatic. You can edit the view angles from the menu at Action | Camera Settings | Preferences. View Orientation - Sets the current vessel view to one of the following: Isometric - Changes the view orientation to isometric. Switching the datum position from left to right changes the viewing direction.

Front - Changes the view orientation to front. Left - Changes the view orientation to left. Right - Changes the view orientation to right. Top - Changes the view orientation to top. Bottom - Changes the view orientation to bottom. Back - Changes the view orientation to back. The zoom of the vessel is automatic and positions the view such that the entire vessel is visible.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Tags - Shows the nozzle tags. Display Dimensions - Shows the vessel dimensions. Show Component Names and Overall Dimensions - Shows the component names and dimensions of the active vessel.

Show Internals - Shows the internals of the current vessel by hiding the cylinders.

COMPRESS Help


Report Toolbar The Report toolbar contains the following options:

Back - Changes the current report view to the previous report view. Forward - Changes the current report view to the next report view. Refresh - Updates the current report view. This option works exactly like a browser refresh. Home - Returns the report view to the Cover Page. Evaluate Expression - Calculates the result of a selected expression within the report view.

COMPRESS Help


HTRI Toolbar The HTRI toolbar contains the following options:

Open an HTRI file - Opens an HTRI file in COMPRESS. HTRI Import Preferences - Opens the HTRI Interface Preferences dialog for importing preferences from file.

Display HTRI Import Data - Opens the HTRI File Import Values dialog. Perform an HTRI Thermal Rating - Uses the HTRI Xchanger software to rate the current exchanger. The updates to the original HTRI file are displayed as well as thermal rating values.

Save the current heat exchanger as an HTRI file - Saves the current heat exchanger as an HTRI Xchanger file. The file saved is the original HTRI file with all of the updates listed when the thermal calculations are run.

COMPRESS Help


Edit Toolbar The Edit toolbar contains the following options:

Undo - Undoes the previous operation. Redo - Redoes the subsequent operation. History - Shows the history of current changes to the vessel. These changes are not saved with the vessel.

Edit Existing Component - Shows the Select Component dialog with vessel tree. Edit Last Selected Component - Shows a dialog of the last selected component and allows you to exit the component's properties.

Delete Component - Opens the Delete Component dialog where you can delete selected components.

Insert Component - Opens the Select Component dialog where you can select which components to insert the next component after.

COMPRESS Help


Solid Model Toolbar The Solid Model toolbar contains the following options:

Solid Model - View the solid model of the active vessel. Solid Model Export - Export the solid model to various file types.

COMPRESS Help


Component Toolbar The Component toolbar contains the following options:

Cylinder- Adds a cylinder to the vessel. Transition - Adds a transition to the vessel. Ellipsoidal Head - Adds an ellipsoidal head to the vessel. FD Head - Adds an FD head to the vessel. Hemispherical Head - Adds an hemispherical head to the vessel. Spherically Dished Cover - Adds a spherically dished cover to the vessel. ASME B16.9 Pipe Cap - Adds an ASME B16.8 pipe cap to the vessel. Bolted Cover - Adds a bolted cover to the vessel. Welded Cover - Adds a welded cover to the vessel. Div. 1 Appendix 14 or Div. 2 4.6.4 Cover - If Division 1 vessel, adds a Division 1 Appendix 14 cover to the vessel. If Division 2 vessel, adds a Division 2 2.6.4 cover to the vessel.

Div. 1 Appendix 2 or Div 2 4.16 Flange - If Division 1 vessel, addes a Division 1 Appendix 2 flange to the vessel. If Division 2 vessel, adds a Division 2 4.16 flange to the vessel.

ASME B16.5/16.47 Flange - Adds an ASME B16.5/16.47 flange to the vessel. Rings - Adds rings to the vessel. Nozzle - Adds a nozzle to the vessel. Perform Nozzle FEA Calculations - Performs a finite element analysis nozzles. Ladder and Platform - Adds platforms and ladders to the vessel. Packed Bed - Adds packed bed to the vessel. Support Skirt - Adds a support skirt to the vessel. Support Saddle - Adds a support saddle to the vessel. Support Legs - Adds support legs to the vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Support Lugs - Adds support lugs to the vessel. Heat Exchanger - Opens the Heat Exchagner Dialog.

COMPRESS Help


REPORTS This section discusses how COMPRESS takes all the data inputs and generates a report. This report acts as an audit trail to show how COMPRESS arrived at its answers and the internal calculations involved. The report may be only a few pages long or hundreds of pages long, depending on the complexity of the vessel being considered. With the finalized vessel in the design window, press F3 to generate the report text. The cursor will change to an hour glass, and a few moments the report cover sheet and contents column will appear.

The cover sheet contains a picture of your vessel and basic vessel information. You can edit the cover page by selecting Cover Page Settings in the Report menu of the report screen. The contents column to the left shows the individual reports available. These are all in blue and underlined, meaning that they are hot linked to the actual reports. Click the underlined report name to go to the report. There are ten summary reports: Deficiencies Summary Nozzle Schedule Nozzle Summary Pressure Summary

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 1 >

Revision History Settings Summary Thickness Summary Weight Summary Hydrostatic Test Vacuum Summary Notice that the components in each summary are underlined. If you are viewing the pressure summary and want, for example, to see how the MAWP for cylinder #1 was obtained, just click on cylinder #1 and you are taken to the detailed calculations for that cylinder. You can return to the summary report by clicking on the left hand "return" button at the top of the screen. The right hand button and "home" button take you forward in a report and back to the starting page. Hot linking also is present in detailed calculations. In the nozzle report, for example, the value reported for reinforcement area A1 is underlined. Click on that value to see how it is calculated. Click on the back arrow to return to the table.

Component Reports Each vessel component has its own report where detailed calculations are presented. COMPRESS will report as much information as is needed so that the user can see how the calculation was performed, but at the same time not so much information that the important results are buried and become inaccessible. The hot linking largely solves this dilemma. Most results are presented in tables. If you want to see details they are only a click away.

Minimal Reports It is possible to generate more concise reports by selecting Action/Reports/Report Defaults and indicating which reports to minimize on a per-component basis. Generally the minimal reports retain summary tables but omit lengthy calculation sections. No information is lost in this process: simply deactivate the minimal report option to generate the full report again.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 2 >

PDF Report Options Reports are available in PDF format and include a number of formatting options. These options only apply the reports in PDF format and do not affect the reports in HTML format. In order to view PDF reports from within COMPRESS, Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed.

A copy of any PDF report may be saved via the options in Adobe Acrobat Reader or by using the Save Report As... option under the file menu.

Open the PDF Report Options dialog to specify the formatting options.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 3 >

Report Display - Choose the format to display reports in. Report format can always be changed on the fly by clicking the "PDF format" button on the main toolbar.

Include Table of Contents with Page Numbers - Option to include or exclude the Table of Contents in rendered PDF reports.

Font Type - Specify type of font for the report text. Font Size - Specify the size of the font for the report text. Line Spacing - This is the vertical line spacing factor for the reports. A value of one makes the line spacing equal to one character height.

Margins - Set the printing margins for the report. Header - Select the type and location of the headers. Footer - Select the type and location of the footers.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 4 >

Use Logo Image - Check this box to use a logo image, which is specified in the edit box to the right. A logo image that is too large may affect your report spacing.

Header / Footer Font Size - Specify the size of the header and footer font. Horizontal Resolution - Use this to set the horizontal resolution of the pages in the PDF report. This does not affect the size of text, but will change the amount of space images take up in the report.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 5 >

Report Menu Once a vessel has been calculated (F3) the reports will be displayed in the main window and the toolbar will change to provide report related functions.

File Menu Save Report As This option allows the report to be saved as either an Adobe pdf file or as a self extracting executable file. These options are valuable for sharing vessel reports with other people.

Revisions This is the same option as on the file menu from the main screen. Print Page, Print Report, Page Setup These options are standard printing options common to most windows programs.

Edit Menu Evaluate This option will invoke a built in equation evaluator. In order to use this, first highlight a numeric equation on one of the report pages and then select this option. The evaluator will calculate the resultant value and display it in a pop-up message box.

Copy, Select All, Find These are standard windows functions allowing the user to select, copy or search for text in the reports.

View Menu Text Size This option provides the ability to change the text size used in the browser. This can also be done by holding the Control Key using the mouse scroll wheel if so equipped.

Report Menu Set Vessel Name As the name implies, here you can specify the name of the vessel as will be printed in the lower left hand corner of each page of your report.

Set Vessel General Info This option allows the user to input general information about the vessel. This information is for reporting only and has no affect on the design. This option is also available from the 'Reports' option on the 'Action' menu from the main screen. In addition this information can be input on the first screen of the Vessel Wizard.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 6 >

Engineering Notes This option allows for additional notes to be included with the file. This option is also available from the 'Reports' option on the 'Action' menu from the main screen. An input screen is displayed where basic text can be entered. Any text entered for the engineering notes will be displayed in the 'Engineering Notes' report listed in the report index.

Browser Properties This dialog allows you to adjust the Microsoft Internet Explorer Browser properties.

Cover Page Settings While viewing the report, click on Report/Cover Page Settings to bring up the following dialog:

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 7 >

This dialog allows the user to customize the report cover page. Fill in the optional data and selected the desired options. Use the 'Preview' button to review the settings. Select the 'Save Current Settings as Defaults' option and hit 'OK' to save the selected preferences.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 8 >

Deficiencies Summary

The Deficiencies Summary lists all errors and warnings detected by COMPRESS during Code calculation. Errors in the Deficiencies Summary are any instances where the design fails to meet Code requirements. Warnings are situations where the Code is silent but the design fails to meet suggested good engineering practice. COMPRESS will allow you to proceed with the vessel design when errors exist and will list these errors in the deficiencies summary. For example if COMPRESS detects that adjacent nozzles have overlapping limits of reinforcement an error message is entered into the Deficiencies Summary indicating which nozzles require corrective action.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 9 >

Nozzle Schedule

This is a conventional nozzle schedule showing nozzle design parameters.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 10 >

Nozzle Summary This report lists each nozzle with new and required thicknesses, reinforcing areas available and required, and shows whether areas A1 and A2 are considered in nozzle reinforcement.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 11 >

Pressure Summary This report, partially shown in the image, displays MAP, MAWP and Pe, the maximum allowable external pressure for each major component. One summary table is produced for each pressure chamber in the vessel. The nameplate rating for each pressure chamber is shown below the table and may include the chamber maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP), maximum allowable pressure (MAP), minimum design metal temperature (MDMT), and maximum allowable external pressure (MAEP). Note that the pressure shown here is used when producing the vessel hydrotest summary.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 12 >

Thickness Summary This very important summary shows minimum thickness required for each vessel component as well as material, diameter, length and the governing load condition.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 13 >

Hydrostatic / Pneumatic Test Report This section reports the test pressures and stresses.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 14 >

Weight Summary The weight summary provides information on weight, center of gravity, capacity and external surface area. Weight values are reported for the new and corroded condition for all the major vessel components. The weight of attachments is summarized on a component basis in the attachment table. The external surface area is also reported for each major component and a total surface area for attachments is included in the attachments table. The total external surface area is reported below the vessel weight values. This surface area should represent the external vessel surface that may required painting. For support skirts both the inner and outer surface area are included. Reporting of the surface area can be selected on the Report Defaults dialog.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 15 >

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 16 >

Vacuum Summary This report displays a list of all the main components, lines of support and their corresponding elevation and length used for external pressure calculation.

COMPRESS Help

Reports < 19 - 17 >

APPENDIX A CALCULATING THE WEIGHT The weights are calculated as follows:

Fabrication Weight - Weights of items supplied by the vessel fabricator include: 1) Weight calculated by the program for heads, shell, skirt, legs, saddles, supports 2) Packing or catalyst if shop installed 3) Tray supports 4) Trays if shop installed 5) Weight of insulation clips 6) Vacuum rings 7) Nozzles, pads, flanges, blinds

Empty Weight - Components which contribute to the vessel dead load not supplied by the vessel fabricator which are permanently attached to the vessel. Empty weights include: 1) Weight calculated by the program for heads, shell, skirt, legs, saddles, supports 2) Tray supports 3) Trays 4) Weight of insulation clips and insulation 5) Vacuum rings 6) Nozzles, pads, flanges, blinds 7) Platforms and ladders 8) Piping 9) Packing or catalyst beds 10) Linings or refractory 11) All special vertical loads specified to act in the empty condition

COMPRESS Help

Appendices < 20 - 1 >

Operating Weight - Items that contribute to the operating weight of the vessel including: 1) Weight calculated by the program for heads, shell, skirt, legs, saddles, supports 2) Packing or catalyst 3) Liquid held up in catalyst or packing 4) Tray supports 5) Trays 6) Liquid on the trays 7) Weight of insulation clips and insulation 8) Vacuum rings 9) Nozzles, pads, flanges, blinds 10) Operating liquid 11) Piping 12) Operating liquid in the piping 13) Platforms and ladders 14) Linings or refractory 15) All special vertical loads specified to act in the operating condition

Test Weight - Items that contribute to the test weight of the vessel only. Test weights include: 1) The empty weight 2) Test liquid in the piping - assumed to be equal to the empty pipe weight 3) Weight of water to fill the vessel 4) All special vertical loads specified to act in the test condition

Period of Vibration The period of vibration of the vessel is calculated using the method outlined in the ASME pet 13 paper by C.E. Freese. This approach uses the Rayleigh method of approximation to find the first period of vibration by numerical integration of the following formula:

COMPRESS Help


T = 2*π*sqrt(ΣW*y2 / (g*ΣW*y)) where; ΣW*y2 = Sum of all of the section weights times the deflection of the center of the respective section squared. ΣW*y = Sum of all the section weights times the deflection of the center of the respective section g = acceleration due to gravity. The method involves dividing up the vessel into sections and calculating the weight of each section. The deflection at the center of each section is then calculated by assuming the vessel is a uniformly loaded cantilever beam deflecting under its own weight. It in then necessary to find for every section (except for the last one at the free end): 1) the deflection at the center 2) the deflection at the end 3) the end slope due to the shear load 4) the end slope due to the uniformly distributed weight 5) the end slope due to the end moment Note that for the purposes of deflection analysis COMPRESS will divide the vessel up into one section for each shell course or cone. The supports will also be considered to be one section. The weights of the heads are added to the nearest shell course of support below the head. Any weight that happens to fall into a section is assumed to be evenly distributed along the length of that section. Liquid is considered to act as mass in the section holding it: liquid held up by trays or catalyst/packing beds will be considered to act on the appropriate section under operating conditions. Calculations 1 - 5 are performed using the standard deflection equations listed in the ASME pet 13 paper by C.E. Freese.

COMPRESS Help


APPENDIX B SADDLE REACTION FORCES DUE TO SEISMIC Longitudinal Reaction

where: F = Total force due to seismic shear acting on vessel Q A & Q B = the individual saddle reactions due to the weight of the vessel plus contents The sum of the moments about A equals zero: ΣMA = 0 F*h = R*Ls R = F*h / Ls So the longitudinal reaction including weight is: Q1 = QA + R Qw = QB + R During an earthquake the vessel experiences both horizontal and vertical acceleration. The magnitude of the vertical force imposed on the saddle by seismic vertical accelerations is based on the (vertical) force multiplier input in the Codes/Seismic dialog. The total saddle seismic longitudinal load used by COMPESS is: QTA = Q1 + Xv * WA QTB = Q2 + Xv * WB where:

COMPRESS Help


Xv = seismic vertical force multiplier WA, WB = weights supported by saddles A and B respectively.

Transverse Reaction

where: Fe = Force on this saddle due to seismic shear Qe = Equivalent force due to overturning moment Θ = saddle included angle Fa, Fb = Force transmitted to anchor bolts Σ MB = 0 Therefore: (Qe*E) / 2 - Fe*h = 0 Qe = 2*Fe*h / E E depends on saddle contact angle Θ: E = 2*r*sin(Θ/2) So: Qe = Fe*h / (r*sin(Θ/2) During an earthquake the vessel experiences both horizontal and vertical accelerations simultaneously. The magnitude of the vertical force imposed on the saddle by seismic vertical accelerations is based on the (vertical) force multiplier input in the Codes\Seismic dialog. The total saddle seismic transverse loads used by COMPRESS is:

COMPRESS Help


Q = Qw + Qe + Xv*Qw where: Q = Load used in Zick equations Qw = Load due to weight only Xv = seismic vertical force multiplier Qe = Equivalent load due to overturning moment Note: Load Q in the Zick analysis is based on a centrally acting force Q. The above analysis resolves the force Qe in the same plane so that the loads due to weight and external loading (Fe ) may be summed.

Tangential Shear Stress The Zick analysis is based on two basic assumptions: 1) The saddles are symmetrically located. 2) The weight of the vessel is uniformly distributed. In order to analyze the more general cased of asymmetrically spaced supports, the following extensions to the Zick equations for tangential shear are required: 1) COMPRESS finds the actual center of gravity of the vessel and then solves for the actual saddle reactions, Q1 and Q2. 2) The Zick equations for tangential shear for shell stiffened by rings or unstiffened are modified as follows: Let V = Shear force acting on the vessel (as shown below)

then: V = Q - w(A + 2*H/3)

COMPRESS Help


where: w = vessel weight / L H = head depth L = tangent length A = saddle distance to tangent line The Zick equation for tangential shear stress for the cases when A/R > 0.5 (unstiffened shell) and where stiffener rings are used becomes: S2 = K2/(r*t) * (Q - w(A + 2*H/3)) Equation (2) above is used by COMPRESS. For completeness, the standard Zick formula for tangential shear at the saddles is derived below. Note how the assumed loading w changes the result: Shear equation (1): V = Q - w(A + 2*H/3) but w is assumed to be: w = 2*Q / ( L + 4*H/3) so: V = Q - (2*Q(A + 2*H/3)) / ( L + 4*H/3) which gives: V = Q[ (L - 2*A) / (L + 4*H/3) ] so: S2 = K2*Q / r*t ( (L - 2*A)/(L + 4*H/3)) The constant K2 in the above equation is determined using the usual Zick equations.

COMPRESS Help


APPENDIX C LIFT LUGS COMPRESS includes the option for three (3) different types of lift lugs, i)) standard plate type / tailing lug, (ii) ear type lug and (iii) trunnion lugs. The ear and trunnion type lugs are used with a tailing lug on vertical vessels which will be subjected to a rotational lift. Standard plate type lugs can be used for horizontal vessels or as a tailing lug for vertical vessels.

Lift Load Determination: The first requirement in the lug analysis is to determine the lift load on the lug. When determining the lift load, the lift weight, W, will be the vessel weight multiplied by the load (or impact) factor. The load factor can be specified in the lift lug dialog, typically a value of 1.5 is used for this factor. The lug load is then determined from a static analysis based on the lug locations, the center of gravity location and the total lift weight.

Horizontal Lift For the case of a horizontal vessel with two lugs the force is determined from:

Where x1 is the distance between the lug and the center of gravity, x2 is the distance between the second lug and the center of gravity, φ is the angle between the lift force and the vertical.

A similar procedure is used for other lug arrangements.

COMPRESS Help


Vertical Lift For vertical lifts lugs can be attached to the upper cylinder or the top head. COMPRESS permits up to 4 lugs on a top head for a vertical lift. For the case of a 2 lug vertical lift the load distribution is analogous to the horizontal procedure above. For the case of a 3 lug vertical lift the load distribution per lug is determined as follows.

COMPRESS Help


W*L2 = F13*(L2 + L13) F13 = W*L2 / (L2 + L13) F2 = W*L13 / (L2 + L13) F13*L3 = F1*(L1 + L3) F1 = F13*L3 / (L1 + L3) F3 = F13*L1 / (L1 + L3) Where F1 , F2 and F3 are the vertical forces at lugs 1, 2 and 3. F13 is the vertical force at the intersection point of the lines from lug 2 and lugs 1 and 3. A similar procedure is used for the case of 4 lugs on a top head to find the vertical forces at each lug. Note that for a vertical lift any eccentricity of the center of gravity is also considered.

Rotational Lift For the case of a rotational lift from horizontal to vertical the top lug loads and the tail lug load are determined from:

Where; N = number of top lugs - typically 2 ear type l1 = distance from top lug hole to center of gravity l2 = distance from tail lug hole to center of gravity l3 = distance from tail lug hole to vessel center line α = lift angle from horizontal

COMPRESS Help


Lug Calculations: Failure Modes: 1. Lug Pin shear stress - this value is calculated at the maximum resultant force. Shear stress

The shear stress value used in this equation is the allowable shear stress value input for the lug. 2. Lug plate thickness - use the effective width of the plate at the pin. This value is calculated at the maximum resultant force.

The tensile stress value used in this equation is the allowable tensile stress value input for the lug. 3. COMPRESS Help


3. Lug plate stress - the combined stress due to tensile and bending loads in determined at the base of the lug. For rotational lift calculations the combined stress is calculated at all angles from 0° to 90° and the maximum value is reported. For non-rotational lifts the bending and tensile stresses are calculated based on the input load angle β.

4. Weld Stress - the combined weld shear stress is calculated at the lug to shell (or lug to pad) location as well as at the pad to shell location if a pad exists. The combined shear stress is determined from the tensile, bending and direct shear stress values. The combined shear stress is compared to the allowable weld shear stress. For rotational lift calculations the combined stress is calculated at all angles from 0° to 90° and the maximum value is reported. For non-rotational lifts the bending and tensile stresses are calculated based on the input load angle β.

COMPRESS Help


Tailing Lugs In addition to the standard lug calculations described above, if a tailing lug is included at a skirt base ring then additional calculations are performed to determine the loading and deflection on the base ring. This procedure is based on "Roark's Formulas for Stress and Strain - 6th Edition, Table 17, case 20". Vertical deflection and bending stress is determined for the base ring at all lift angles and the maximum case is reported.

Base ring loading calculation If the base ring is overstressed the user has an option to consider additional base ring calculations with a single strut to reinforce the base ring. This option can be turned on from the Set Mode dialog (F7) => Calculation page by selecting the "Consider strut in tail lug / base ring calculation" option in the Lift Lug section.

The lift force on the tail lug acts at the top of the base ring. When a strut is included the loading is broken down into 3 separate analyses and the net loading and deflection is determined by superposition. Deflection of the base ring with net loading at top; Dy_top = -0.0744(Wtail - Ws)*R3 / (E*I) Deflection of the bottom of base ring with net loading Ws; Dy_bot = -0.0744(Ws)*R3 / (E*I) Elongation of strut due to loading Ws; ∆L = 2*Ws*R / (A*E) = Dy_top - Dy_bot Substituting and solving for the strut load Ws gives; Ws = (0.0372*Wtail*R2) / ( (Iring / Abeam) + 0.0744*R2)

Local Stresses Local stress in the vessel shell is checked by either a WRC 107 / 537 analysis or by a procedure given in the European pressure vessel code EN13445. The analysis type can be selected by the user in the lift lug dialog. For Ear Type and Trunnion lugs, only the WRC 107 / 537 analysis is available.

COMPRESS Help


Lug Angles The lug analysis uses various angles to determine the loading on the lug. β = angle between lift force and the perpendicular to the lug φ = angle between lift force and the vertical θ = shell angle from horizontal

COMPRESS Help


COMPRESS Help


REFERENCES REFERENCES The following is a selected list of references used by COMPRESS. Reference # Reference 1)

Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design Ninth Edition American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 1 East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 Chicago, Illinois 60601

2)

API RP 510, Ninth Edition "Pressure Vessel Inspection Code: In-Service Inspection, Rating, Repair, and Alteration" American Petroleum Institute API Publishing Services 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20005 June 2006

3)

ASCE 7-88 (Formerly ANSI A58.1) "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017-2398

4)

ASCE 7-93 (Revision of ANSI/ASCE 7-88) "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017-2398

5)

ASCE 7-95 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017-2398 1996

6)

ASCE 7-98 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" American Society of Civil Engineers

COMPRESS Help


1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-4400 2000 7)

ASCE 7-02 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-4400 2003

8)

ASCE 7-05 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-4400 2006 Revised with Supplement No. 2

9)

ASCE 7-10 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-4400 2010 Revised with Supplement No. 1, 2013

10)

The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016-5990

11)

ASME B16.47 - 2011 Large Diameter Steel Flanges The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016-5990 2011

12)

ASME B16.5-2009 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016-5990 2009

13)

ASME B16.9-2012 (Revision of ASME B16.9-2007) Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

COMPRESS Help


Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016 February 2013 14)

ASME B36.10M-2004 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016-5990 2004

15)

Henry H. Bednar, P.E. Pressure Vessel Design Handbook, Second Edition Van Nostrand Reinhold Company Inc. 115 Fifth Avenue New York, NY COMPRESS uses the method presented in Bednar, Chapter 8.6 for calculating the discontinuity stress at cone to cylinder junctures. This method is based on Ref. 17-3 (below).

16)

E.O. Bergman "The Design of Vertical Pressure Vessels Subjected to Applied Forces" Paper No. 54 - A-104 ASME Transactions, 1955 Alhambra, California

17)

H.C. Boardman Pressure Vessel and Piping Design, Collected Papers "Stresses at Junction of Cone and Cylinder in Tanks with Cone Bottoms or Ends" ASME, New York, NY, 1960

18)

L.E. Brownell and E.H. Young Process Equipment Design John Wiley & Sons 605 Third Avenue New York, NY 10158-0012 Chapter 10 of Brownell & Young is used as the basis for designing vessel base rings, anchor bolts etc.

19)

Escoe, A. Keith Mechanical Design of Process Systems, Volume 1 Gulf Publishing Co. Houston 1986

20)

Farr, J. R. and Jawad, M. H. Guidebook for the Design of ASME Section VIII Pressure Vessels ASME Press 345 East 47th St.

COMPRESS Help


New York, NY 10017 1998 21)

C.E. Freese Transactions of the ASME "Vibration of Vertical Pressure Vessels" February, 1959 This paper by C.E. Freese provides the basis for calculating the deflection and fundamental period of vibration for vertical vessels and towers.

22)

Bulletin 502, Edition VII "Modern Flange Design" G+W Taylor-Bonney Division P.O. Box 999 Southfield, Michigan 48037

23)

2000 International Building Code International Code Council 5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 708 Falls Church, VA 22041-3401 March 2000 (First Printing)

24)

2003 International Building Code International Code Council, Inc. 4051 West Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60478-5795 March 2004 (Fourth Printing)

25)

2006 International Building Code International Code Council, Inc. 4051 West Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60478-5795 January 2006 (First Printing)

26)

2009 International Building Code International Code Council, Inc. 4051 West Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60478-5795 February 2009 (First Printing)

27)

2012 International Building Code Volumes I & II International Code Council, Inc. 4051 West Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60478-5795 September 2011 (First Printing)

28)

2015 International Building Code International Code Council, Inc.

COMPRESS Help


4051 West Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60478-5795 May 2014 (First Printing) 29)

Uniform Building Code 1991 International Conference of Building Officials 5360 South Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601

30)

Uniform Building Code 1994, Volume 2 "Structural Engineering Design Provisions" International Conference of Building Officials 5360 Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 - 2298

31)

Uniform Building Code 1997, Volume 2 "Structural Engineering Design Provisions" International Conference of Building Officials 5360 Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601-2298 April 1997

32)

Maan H. Jawad & James R. Farr Structural Analysis & Design Of Process Equipment, Second Edition John Wiley & Sons Inc. 605 Third Avenue New York, NY 10158-0012 The method used by COMPRESS to calculate the combined effect of external pressure plus bending moments is taken from Chapter 16.6 of this text. The COMPRESS calculation procedure for sizing anchor bolts and base rings is based on the method presented in Chapter 12.2 of this text.

33)

K. C. Karamchandani, N. K. Gupta, J. Pattabiraman "Evaluation of Percent Critical Damping of Process Towers" Hydrocarbon Processing, May 1982

34)

E. F. Megyesy Pressure Vessel Handbook Pressure Vessel Handbook Publishing Inc. P.O. Box 35365 Tulsa, OK 74153

35)

National Building Code of Canada 1990 First Revisions and Errata Associate Committee on the National Building Code National Research Council of Canada Ottawa January 1991

COMPRESS Help


36)

Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada 1990 Associate Committee on the National Building Code National Research Council of Canada Ottawa January 1991

37)

National Building Code of Canada 1995 National Research Council of Canada Ottawa 1995

38)

User’s Guide – NBC 1995 Structural Commentaries (Part 4) National Research Council of Canada Ottawa 1996

39)


40)

User’s Guide – NBC 2005 Structural Commentaries (Part 4 of Division B) National Research Council of Canada Ottawa 2006

41)


42)

User’s Guide – NBC 2010 Structural Commentaries (Part 4 of Division B) National Research Council of Canada Ottawa 2011

43)

P. Sachs "Wind Forces in Engineering " Pergamon Press New York, 1972

44)

Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association Seventh Edition Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 1988

COMPRESS Help


45)

Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association Eighth Edition Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 1999

46)

Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association Ninth Edition Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 2007

47)

K.R. Wichman, A.G. Hopper and J.L. Mershion Bulletin 107, March 1979 revision "Local Stresses in Spherical and Cylindrical Shells Due to External Loadings" Welding Research Council 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 The WRC Bulletin 107 paper is used to calculate the stresses due to external loadings on shell attachments. Note that the March 1979 revision is used. The March 1979 revision contains a number of changes which will generally produce a more conservative analysis when compared with previous WRC107 revisions.

48)

K.R. Wichman, A.G. Hopper, J.L. Mershion Bulletin 537 “Precision Equations and Enhanced Diagrams for Local Stresses in Spherical and Cylindrical Shells Due to External Loadings for Implementation of WRC Bulletin 107” Welding Research Council P.O. Box 1942 New York, NY 10156

49)

Dwight F. Windenburg and Charles Trilling "Collapse by Instability of Thin Cylindrical Shells Under External Pressure" Washington, D.C.

50)

L.P. Zick The Welding Research Supplement, 1971 "Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on two Saddle Supports"

COMPRESS Help


Vessel Wizard Introduction The Vessel Wizard is intended to be used as a tool for creating new pressure vessel files. The wizard provides a simple but comprehensive interface which allows for a minimum amount of data input from the user. Based on the user supplied data and user definable defaults, the wizard creates the file with all the specified components, supports and loadings.

COMPRESS Help

Vessel Wizard Help < 21 - 1 >

Vessel Wizard Basics The following are the basic steps to create a file using the Vessel Wizard; 1. Start the Vessel Wizard. 2. Select or create an appropriate defaults file. 3. Input the vessel specific information to the General Options page 4. Provide any further information on the optional pages Nozzles < 21 - 33 > Supports < 21 - 37 > Wind and Seismic < 21 - 38 > 5. Select 'Finish' A new COMPRESS file will be created.

COMPRESS Help


Create New Vessel To create a new vessel, start the wizard by using one of the following three (3) options; 1. Press 'Ctrl-W' 2. Click the Vessel Wizard button on the main tool bar.

3. Select 'Vessel Wizard' from the 'File' menu. This will display the Vessel Wizard General Options page. See VW Defaults for information on setting default values. It is recommended that a user defined defaults file be created before creating a vessel. It is recommended that the general program settings ('Set Mode' from Action menu) be reviewed before creating a vessel. This should be used to set numerous options such as 'Units', 'Calculation', 'Testing' etc.. For more detail on 'Set Mode' options, see the COMPRESS manual. For information on data input see General Options.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults File The Vessel Wizard uses default files to store user defined preferences. These preferences are used during the creation of the vessel. Before proceeding with the creation of a vessel, an appropriate defaults file should be selected (or created). See Selecting Active Defaults File

COMPRESS Help


Create Defaults File To create a new defaults file; 1. Click the 'Set Vessel Wizard Defaults' button on the General Options page. 2. Set all the applicable default values. See setting defaults 3. Click the 'OK' button on the 'Vessel Wizard Defaults' page. 4. Use the 'Save' dialog to set the defaults file name and folder location. See set defaults from file to create a new defaults file from an existing COMPRESS file.

COMPRESS Help


Select Active Defaults File To select the active defaults file to be used by the Vessel Wizard, click on the 'Select Defaults File' button on the General Options page.

Use the dialog to navigate to and select the correct file. Once selected, the file name should appear in the edit box, above the 'Select Defaults File' button. If no valid default files have been created, then Create a New Defaults File. To review or change the settings in the selected defaults file, click the 'Set Vessel Wizard Defaults' button on the General Options page.

COMPRESS Help


Set Defaults From Active File Vessel Wizard defaults can be set based on an active COMPRESS file (*.cw7). To extract defaults from an active file, 1. Ensure a valid COMPRESS file is loaded. 2. Select the 'Create a Vessel Wizard Defaults file' item from the 'Action' menu. 3. Select a name for the defaults file from the 'Save As' dialog. Type in a new file name to create a new defaults file, select an existing defaults file to update its values with values from this vessel. Click 'Save' to use the selected file name. Click 'Cancel' to abort the process.

Vessel Wizard default values can be reviewed by starting the vessel wizard, selecting the correct defaults file and clicking the 'Set Vessel Wizard Defaults' button from the General Options dialog.

COMPRESS Help


Determination of Default Values See the following topics for information regarding how default values are extracted from vessel files.

General Defaults When defaults are set from an active file, the vessel is checked from top/left to bottom/right. This results in the bottom head being used for the default head type, material and straight flange length. The last cylinder (excluding straight flanges) is used for most of the general settings, the shell material and radiography settings. Exceptions to this are if the last cylinder's pressure(s) is zero, in which case the last non-zero value from the previous cylinder will be used. Also, the default shell length will be set to the maximum cylinder length in the vessel.

Nozzles If the active file does not have any nozzles, the values from the previously active defaults file will be used. If there is only one nozzle on the active vessel, its values will be used for the nozzle defaults. If the active vessel has more than one nozzle, the user is prompted to select the nozzle to be used for setting the nozzle defaults.

Legs If the active vessel does not have legs, the values from the previously active defaults file will be used, otherwise the active vessel leg values will be used.

Skirt If the active vessel does not have a support skirt, the values from the previously active defaults file will be used, otherwise the active vessel support skirt values will be used.

Wind / Seismic Codes If the active vessel does not have wind and / or seismic loading, the values from the previously active defaults file will be used, otherwise the active vessel loading values will be used.

Other Other default values include stiffener rings, insulation and lining. If the active vessel does not have rings, insulation or lining, the values from the previously active defaults file will be used. If the current vessel has stiffener rings, the values from the ring group closest to the right/bottom of the vessel will be used. If the current vessel has insulation or lining, these values will be saved in the new defaults file.

COMPRESS Help


Setting Defaults The Vessel Wizard defaults are divided into the following main categories; 1. Vessel General Info - Defaults < 21 - 10 > 2. General Info - Defaults < 21 - 11 > 3. Material - Defaults < 21 - 13 > 4. Nozzle - Defaults < 21 - 15 > 5. Legs - Defaults < 21 - 17 > 6. Support Skirt - Defaults < 21 - 19 > 7. Support Lugs - Defaults < 21 - 21 > 8. Wind Code - Defaults < 21 - 23 > 9. Seismic Code - Defaults < 21 - 24 > 10. Other - Defaults < 21 - 26 > Each category has its own page within the 'Vessel Wizard Defaults' dialog. Note: The units for data input are determined by the setting on the 'Units' page of the 'Set Mode Options' (F7 from the main document window). Select the desired units from this page and use the 'Save Defaults' button to have them used for any new vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - General Vessel Information The inputs are this page are optional and can be displayed on the reports cover page if desired.

Location -- Enter the vessel's location. Purchaser -- Enter the purchaser. Vessel Name-- Enter the vessel name. Service -- Enter a description for the type of service the vessel is designed for. P. O. Number-- Enter the purchase order number information. Tag Number -- Enter a tag number for the vessel if appropriate.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - General Information The General Info page consists of three (3) sections of data input. Design Conditions Vessel Info Head Info

Design Conditions.

The design conditions consist of the Internal Pressure and Temperature, External Pressure and Temperature, and the Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT) and the Test temperature.

Vessel Info

Use these inputs to set the overall vessel dimensions;

Diameter: Enter the diameter to be used on all vessels created with this defaults file. Use the combo box to select an outer diameter (OD) or inner diameter (ID) design.

Tangent to Tangent Length: Enter the tangent to tangent length to be used for all vessels created with this defaults file. Note, the tangent to tangent length will include any straight flange length on the heads.

COMPRESS Help


Standard Shell Length: The standard shell length will be used to determine how many shell courses to create for the vessel. If an even number of shell lengths do not exactly fit into the vessel length, the odd size shell will be located at the bottom of the vessel.

Inner Corrosion: The inner corrosion value will be applied to all heads and shells. If outer corrosion is required, please use the 'Global Change' option from the 'Action' menu after the vessel has been created.

Liquid Specific Gravity: Enter the specific gravity to be applied to all vessels created with this defaults file.

Vessel Orientation: Select the default vessel orientation, vertical or horizontal. Support type for vertical vessels: Select the default support type for vertical vessels. The vessel wizard can create vertical vessels with Leg, Skirt, or Lug support.

Head Info

Use these inputs to set the default head type and the straight flange length. Note that straight flanges are only applied to Ellipsoidal and F&D heads.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Material Material Settings.

The Material page is used to set the default material for; Shells Heads Nozzles Nozzle Pads Flanges Use the combo box to select the appropriate material for each component type. The available materials are based on the currently selected ASME division / addendum.

Radiography.

Select the default radiography settings for longitudinal and circumferential joints. The available settings will be based on the ASME division selected on Vessel Wizard General Options page. The settings will be applied to both cylinders and heads.

COMPRESS Help


COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Nozzles The Nozzle page consists of two (2) sections of data input. Nozzle Data Flange Data

Nozzle Data.

Size / Type Select the nozzle size and type from the combo boxes. The nozzle size refers to Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). The nozzle type is restricted to the values in the combo box, the sketch displays a graphic representation of the nozzle type.

Projections Specify the minimum nozzle projections in the 'Internal projection' and 'External projection' inputs. The internal projection is only applied to nozzle types which have internal projection.

Pad Width Specify the minimum nozzle reinforcing pad width. This input is only applicable to nozzle types which include reinforcing pads. This value will override the nozzle pad width setting in the 'Set Mode - Nozzles 2' page.

COMPRESS Help


Flange Data.

Select whether or not nozzles should include flanges and if so, specify the flange type, class rating and inclusion of a blind flange. These defaults will be used on the Vessel Wizard nozzles page when adding new nozzles. Note, the nozzle design procedure will increase the flange class rating if required.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Legs The Legs page consists of three (3) sections of data input1: General Leg Detail, Reinforcing Pad Details, and Base Plate Details.

General Leg Detail.

Lengths Set the 'Overall' and 'Base to Girth' leg lengths. Note, the overall leg length must be greater than the base to girth length.

Material Specify a name for the material to be used for the legs. This input is a description only, all the required material properties are input separately.

Material Properties Input appropriate values for the Effective Length coefficient (K); Stress Coefficient (Cm); Elastic Modulus (E); Yield Stress (Fy); Use a structural steel hand book such as AISC as a reference for these inputs.

Leg Geometry Ensure valid inputs are provided for the Number of Legs - COMPRESS will accept leg designs with any number of legs between three (3) and forty two (42). Angular position - Angle from the X-Axis to the first leg in the group. Number of Anchor Bolts per Leg - must be at least 1.

Leg Structural Member Select the type of structural member from the 'Structural type' combo

COMPRESS Help


box. The sketch displays a graphic representation of the type. Select the minimum structural member size from the combo box. COMPRESS will use this size unless the design calculations require a stronger leg, in which case COMPRESS will increase the structural member size.

Braced Leg Support Select this option to have leg bracing included on leg supported vessels.

Reinforcing Pad Details.

If COMPRESS is to include reinforcing pads on legs, when using this defaults file, select the 'Legs have reinforcing pads' switch and specify the minimum dimensions for the pads. Note, COMPRESS will use these inputs as a starting point and increase them if necessary.

Base Plate Details.

Specify the minimum dimensions for the base plate length, width and thickness. Specify the Allowable Stress and Foundation Bearing Stress. 1Note:

A number of these default values can be overridden on the Vessel Wizard Supports page.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Support Skirt The Support Skirt page consists of two (2) sections of data input: 1. General Skirt Detail and Base Ring Details.

General Skirt Detail.

Material Use the combo box to select the appropriate material for the support skirt. The available materials are based on the currently selected ASME division / addendum.

Length Specify an overall length for the support skirt. Note, base ring thickness is not included in this dimension.

Skirt Properties Input appropriate values for the Nominal Thickness; Inner corrosion; Design temperature; Vacuum temperature; Weld joint efficiencies, top & bottom;

COMPRESS Help


Base Ring Details.

Select the base ring type from the available support configurations. COMPRESS will use the standard base ring details for the base ring dimensions. (To review the standard base plate details, select 'Skirt Base Ring' from the 'Supports' menu and then click the 'Standard Base Plate Details' button on the second input screen). Input appropriate values for all the base ring inputs. 1Note:

A number of these default values can be overridden on the Vessel Wizard Supports page.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Support Lugs

Number of Lugs -- Enter the total number of lugs on the vessel. Angular Position -- Enter the angular position of the lug nearest 0° in plan view. Distance to Datum -- Enter the distance from the datum line to the bottom of the support lug. LugStiffnessRatio --The ratio of the stiffness of the lug in the radial direction to that in the circumferential direction.

Top Plate Width (Wp) -- Enter the top plate width. Top Plate Thickness (t) -- The top plate required thickness is determined by the equations in Bednar Chapter 5.2. The minimum required thickness is displayed to the right.

Base Plate Width (Wb) -- Enter the base plate width. Base Plate Thickness (tb) -- The base plate thickness is determined by using Table 10.3 and Equation 10.32b found in Brownell and Young.

Lug Length (L) -- Enter the lug length. Length is the distance from the side closest to the vessel

COMPRESS Help


to the side farthest from the vessel.

Gusset Height (h) -- Enter the gusset height. Gusset Thickness (tg) -- The required gusset thickness is calculated using the formula found in Bednar, Chapter 5.2.

Gusset Separation (S) -- The inside to inside distance between gussets. Attachment Weld Size -- Enter the fillet lug weld size. The attachment weld is sized using the method shown in Bednar, Table 10.3, Case 4. This method assumes the lug is attached to the vessel using a continuous fillet all around.

Lug Allowable Stress -- COMPRESS does not access the stress database for lug allowable stresses. Enter the desired lug allowable stress. This allowable stress is used when sizing the base plate gussets and top plate. The allowable local shell stress is based on ASME code rules.

Distance to Load (d) -- Enter the distance to the center of action of the load (F) supported by the lug.

Force Bearing Width -- Enter the width of support in direct contact with the lug base plate. Pad Dimensions-- If support lugs should include pads by default select this option and input default geometric values.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Wind Code The Wind code page allows the selection of the default wind code and the input of the corresponding default values. 1 See also seismic code defaults

Wind code

Select the default wind code from the available codes in the combo box. If no wind loading is to be applied, select 'None'. 1Note,

some error checking is performed to help ensure valid inputs however the building code should be referenced to ensure appropriate input values.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Seismic Code The Seismic code page allows the selection of the default seismic code and the input of the corresponding default values. 1 See also wind code defaults.

Seismic code

Select the default seismic code from the available codes in the combo box. If no seismic loading is to be applied, select 'None'. Note, some error checking is performed to help ensure valid inputs however the building code should be referenced to ensure appropriate input values.

COMPRESS Help


Vertical Accelerations If vertical accelerations are to be considered in the seismic analysis, select the 'Consider Vertical Accelerations' switch and set the required multipliers. 1Note:

A number of these default values can be overridden on the Vessel Wizard Wind / Seismic

page.

COMPRESS Help


Defaults - Other The Other page consists of three (3) sections of data input: Stiffener Rings, Insulation, and Lining.

Stiffener Rings. See General Options - Design Conditions - Stiffener Rings for information on including stiffener rings on wizard files.

Ring Material Use the combo box to select the appropriate material for the stiffener ring. The available materials are based on the currently selected ASME division / addendum.

Ring Structural Member Select the type of structural member from the 'Structural type' combo box. The sketch displays a graphic representation of the type. Select the minimum structural member size from the list box. COMPRESS will use this size unless the design calculations require a larger ring , in which case COMPRESS will increase the structural member size.

Minimum Ring Spacing Input a minimum ring spacing. COMPRESS will limit the spacing of stiffener rings to this value.

COMPRESS Help


Insulation Details.

If 'Insulation' is selected on the Vessel Wizard - General Options page, COMPRESS will use the default values set on this page when adding insulation to the vessel.

Lining Details.

If 'Lining' is selected on the Vessel Wizard - General Options page, COMPRESS will use the default values set on this page when adding lining to the vessel.

COMPRESS Help


General Options The General Options page consists of eight (8) sections of data input. 1. General Info 2. Design Conditions 3. Dimensions 4. General Settings 5. Vessel Wizard Defaults 6. Material 7. Liquid Level 8. Options

General Information.

The general information section allows for the input of vessel / customer specific data (Location, Purchaser, Vessel Name, Service, P.O. Number, Tag Number). This information is optional and not required by COMPRESS. It can be displayed on the report cover page by selecting the 'Show general information on report cover page' switch. To edit this information after creating the vessel, use the 'Set Vessel General Info' menu item, from either the 'Action=>Reports' menu when editing the vessel, or the 'Reports' menu when viewing the reports.

Design Conditions.

The design conditions are set from the active defaults file, and can be revised on this screen.

COMPRESS Help


External Pressure If the vessel is to be subjected to external pressure, set the 'External Pressure' switch and input the appropriate design pressure and temperature.

Stiffener Rings Set the 'Allow stiffener rings' switch if stiffener rings are to be included on the vessel. COMPRESS will continue to add stiffener rings in an attempt to reduce the required shell thickness due to external pressure below the nominal thickness due to internal pressure. The number of rings will be limited by the ring spacing set in Vessel Wizard Defaults - Other page If external pressure still governs with the maxium number of rings then COMPRESS will optimize the design by only using a sufficient number of rings to obtain the maxium reduction in nominal shell thickness.

Dimensions.

The dimensions are set from the active defaults file, and can be revised on this screen. See Vessel Wizard Defaults - General Info page for information on these inputs.

Capacity The capacity value is based on the currently selected diameter, tangent-to-tangent length, corrosion, head type and material. Any change in these inputs will result in a corresponding update of the capacity. If the capacity is to be an input value, the tangent-totangent length will be updated to correspond.

General Settings.

The vessel orientation and head type are set from the active defaults file, and can be revised on

COMPRESS Help


this screen. See Vessel Wizard Defaults - General Info page for information on these inputs.

Radiography The radiography settings are from the active defaults file, and can be revised on this screen. See Vessel Wizard Defaults - Material page for information on these inputs. Select the "Seamless heads (no longitudinal radiography)" option to create seamless heads.

Design Code If a license is available for the ASME Section VIII Division 2 module, its option will be available. Note, material and radiography values should be check when changing between design codes.

Vessel Wizard Defaults.

The currently active vessel wizard defaults file is displayed in this section.

Select Defaults File Use this button to select a new active default file. Vessel wizard default files have an extension of '.cwd' and are created by saving defaults values through the 'Set Vessel Wizard Defaults' button.

Re-load defaults from file Use this button to re-load the default values from the currently active defaults file. This is helpful if a number of the inputs have been changed and the user decides to re-start the vessel design with the default values. If the selected Design Code differs from the code used in the defaults file, the default program values (Action=>Set Mode) for material and radiography will be used.

Set Vessel Wizard Defaults Use this button to edit the currently active default file or to create a new default file. This button will display the 'Vessel Wizard Defaults' screens. See Setting Defaults for more information.

COMPRESS Help


Material.

The material for shell, head, nozzle, nozzle pad and flanges are set from the active defaults file, Vessel Wizard Defaults - Material and can be revised using the combo boxes in this section. The available materials for shells, heads, nozzles and nozzle pads are based on the currently selected ASME division / addendum. The flange material is based on 1996 edition of ASME B16.5, and B16.47. The selected material for nozzles and nozzle pads will be applied as the default material for all nozzles. These materials can be changed for each nozzle using the Nozzles Data Inputs on the Nozzles page.

Liquid Level.

The liquid level inputs are set from the active defaults file, and can be revised using the inputs in this section.

Fill to Top of Chamber Use this button to set the liquid level to the top of the vessel.

COMPRESS Help


Options.

This section allows for the inclusion of Nozzles, Supports, Insulation, Lining, Wind and Seismic codes on the vessel.

Nozzles Select this option if the vessel wizard is to include nozzles on the vessel. If the Nozzles option is selected a separate nozzle input page will be displayed after clicking 'Next'.

Supports Select this option if the vessel wizard is to include supports on the vessel. If the Supports option is selected for a vertical vessel, a separate support input page will be displayed after clicking 'Next'.

Insulation / Lining Select either of these options if the vessel wizard is to include insulation and/or lining on the vessel. The values used for insulation and lining are from the currently active defaults file.

Building Codes Select the wind and/or seismic option if the vessel wizard is to include wind and/or seismic loading on the vessel. If the 'Use settings from defaults file' switch is set, the default wind and seismic values will be from the currently active defaults file and no additional page will be displayed for reviewing or editing the values. In order to review / edit the parameters to be used in the wind or seismic loading, do not select the 'Use settings from VW defaults' switch. After clicking 'Next' an additional page detailing the wind and seismic loading will be displayed.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzles The nozzle page provides a list of all the nozzles that will be added to the vessel. The list is retained from the previous vessel created by the Vessel Wizard. The nozzle and pad material will be set to the value from the 'General Options' page. Before selecting 'OK' on this page, ensure that the nozzle list accurately represents the required nozzles for the vessel. Highlighting a nozzle in the list will display its data in the 'Nozzle Data Input' section.

Settings for Auto Nozzle Design.

The vessel wizard uses the 'quick nozzle design' procedure for designing nozzles. The Nozzle\Quick Design option allows a nozzle to be added to the vessel with a minimum of input. Nozzle wall thickness, weld sizes and reinforcement pad sizes are all automatically provided by COMPRESS. This procedure first increases wall thickness, then increases nozzle internal projection and finally will add a reinforcement pad, if required, to satisfy code reinforcement requirements. See the COMPRESS manual for more information on nozzle design. Use this button to select default settings for the quick nozzle design procedure. Note, the 'Add a blind to the flange' option will be overridden by the selection on the Vessel Wizard nozzle page.

List Selector.

The nozzle list selector will filter the nozzle list to show only the nozzles on the components of interest, either heads, shells or all components.

Nozzle Editing Options

COMPRESS Help


Add a Nozzle Click the 'Add' button to add a new nozzle to the nozzle list. The inputs in the 'Selected Nozzle Data' section will become active and automatically populate with default values. Make any required changes to the nozzle inputs and click 'Save' to save the nozzle data to the nozzle list. To abort adding the new nozzle, click the 'Cancel Edit' button.

Edit an Existing Nozzle Click the 'Edit' button to edit the first selected nozzle on the nozzle list. The inputs in the 'Selected Nozzle Data' section will become active and automatically populate with the values from the selected nozzle. Make any required changes to the nozzle inputs and click 'Save' to save the nozzle data to the nozzle list. To abort editing the selected nozzle, click the 'Cancel Edit' button.

Copy an Existing Nozzle Click the 'Copy' button to create a copy of the first selected nozzle on the nozzle list. The inputs in the 'Selected Nozzle Data' section will become active and automatically populate with the values from the selected nozzle. The 'Drawing mark' and 'Identifier' will automatically be incremented. Make any required changes to the nozzle inputs and click 'Save' to save the nozzle data to the nozzle list. CAUTION: Ensure that the 'Offset' and/or 'Angle' are changed to ensure that the new nozzle does not overlap the existing nozzle. To abort copying the selected nozzle, click the 'Cancel Edit' button.

Delete Existing Nozzle(s) In the nozzle list, select all the nozzles which are to be deleted. Use 'Ctrl' or 'Shift' keys with the mouse to select multiple nozzles. Click the 'Delete' button to delete all the selected nozzles from the nozzle list. WARNING: No confirmation of deletion is provided. All selected nozzles are immediately and permanently deleted from the list.

COMPRESS Help


Nozzle Data Inputs.

The nozzle data section will display the details of the currently selected nozzle.

Drawing Mark Input a unique drawing mark for the nozzle. Typically this corresponds to the nozzle identifier to be used on the drawing.

Identifier Input a unique identifier for the nozzle.

Nominal Pipe Size Select the nominal pipe size (NPS) to be used for the nozzle.

Nozzle Material The nozzle material will automatically be set to the default nozzle material for new nozzles and to the existing material for nozzles being edited or copied. Select the desired material from the combo box. The available materials are based on the currently selected ASME division / addendum.

Attached To Select the component that the nozzle will be attached to.

Nozzle Offset For nozzles attached to the shell, the offset refers to the distance from the bottom tangent line to the nozzle centerline. Input a value from 0 to a maximum of the Tan-To-Tan dimension. For nozzles attached to heads, the offset refers to the distance from the center of the head. Input a value from 0 to the head radius - nozzle radius.

COMPRESS Help


Angle This angle refers to the plan view position from the top/left hand side of the vessel. In the COMPRESS scheme, 0° is at 12 o'clock, 90° is at 3 o'clock, 180° is at 6 o'clock, and 270° is at 9 o'clock.

Nozzle Type Select the nozzle type from the combo box. The nozzle type is restricted to the values in the combo box, the sketch displays a graphic representation of the nozzle type.

Internal / External Projection The initial internal / external nozzle projection values for new nozzles are set from the currently active defaults file. These values can be changed for each nozzle. The external nozzle projection value should meet or exceed the default minimum nozzle projection value set in the Set Mode -> Nozzles1 page. An input for internal projection is only available for nozzle types that include an internal projection.

Nozzle Pad Material For nozzle types that include a reinforcing pad, the pad material can be selected from the combo box. The nozzle pad material will automatically be set to the default nozzle pad material for new nozzles and to the existing material for nozzles being edited or copied. The available materials are based on the currently selected ASME division / addendum.

ASME B16.5/B16.47 Flange ASME B16.5 and ASME B16.47 flanges are attached to nozzles by selecting this option. The flange rating is based on the design temperature (internal pressure) of the component to which the nozzle is attached. The flange material set on the General Options page will be used for all flanges. Select the desired flange type and class from the available options. Note, the nozzle design procedure will increase the flange class rating if required. Select the 'Include blind flange' option to have a blind flange added to the nozzle. This will override the general setting for blind flanges in the Set Mode => Nozzles2 page. The nozzle list will indicate whether a nozzle includes a flange.

COMPRESS Help


Supports

The supports page provides an option of Leg, Skirt, or Lug supports for vertical vessels. The default values are from the active defaults file.

Support Type.

Select between Legs , Skirt, or Lugs. for the type of support. The default selection will be determined by the 'Default Vertical Support' option set in the active defaults file.

Legs. The inputs available for leg supported vessels are subset of the leg defaults, values with the addition of Anchor bolt specification.

Skirt The inputs available for skirt supported vessels are a subset of the skirt defaults, values with the addition of top and bottom skirt diameter, bolt circle diameter and Anchor bolt specification inputs.

Lugs The inputs available for lug supported vessels are described in the lug defaults, section.

Bolts

Select the bolt type from the available options. Input a valid bolt circle and bolt size. Use the 'Bolt Look Up' button to select from standard bolt sizes. For leg supported vessels, ensure the correct number of bolts per leg are input.

COMPRESS Help


Wind and Seismic The default selection for each code will be determined by the wind defaults or seismic defaults as set in the active defaults file.

Wind Code. From the Wind Code combo box, select the desired building code. Refer to the selected building code to ensure appropriate input values.

Seismic Code. From the Seismic Code combo box, select the desired building code. Refer to the selected building code to ensure appropriate input values.

COMPRESS Help


Overview Design The heat exchanger wizard designs the complete exchanger: tubesheet(s), tubes, expansion joint, shell, channels, flanges, head closures, nozzles, etc. Up to eight design and/or hydrotest conditions may be specified. If no hydrotest conditions are specified, COMPRESS will generate shell side & tube side hydrotest conditions based on the input design conditions. See 'Tube Side Design Conditions' section for details. All conditions are investigated simultaneously. The heat exchanger components may be evaluated using ASME UHX,, TEMA, or both ASME UHX & TEMA. The TEMA & ASME UHX option provides the tubesheet design thickness from both design codes allowing the nominal tubesheet thickness assignment to be based on either set of design rules. COMPRESS requires that the tube sheet thickness meets the ASME requirements. The governing design condition, neglecting hydrotest conditions, specified in the heat exchanger wizard is automatically used for the vessel component ASME VIII-1 calculations (e.g. shell, channels, head closures, nozzles). It is not permissible to change the design parameters such as internal design pressure/temperature of individual components. These values must be changed through the heat exchanger wizard.

MAWP / MAP Calculations The MAWP and MAP of the tubesheet, tube-to-tubesheet joint, and expansion joint (if present) will be determined if the options Calculate MAWP and Calculate MAP are active on the Calculation tab in the Set Mode Options dialog (F7). For MAWP/MAP calculations the shell side and tube side maximum pressure values are solved simultaneously by iteration. Maximum pressure determination: COMPRESS starts at the design pressure values as input. If these are not adequate (e.g. rating mode), then the pair of pressures (tube side and shell side) will be decreased proportionally until the heat exchanger is satisfactory with the given pair of pressures. Using the satisfactory design pressure on the tube side in combination with the shell side pressure, the shell side maximum pressure will be iterated to the maximum acceptable value. Next the tube side maximum pressure is determined by setting the shell side pressure to the average of the maximum shell side pressure and the original acceptable shell target pressure. A final iteration is performed using the final maximum pressure values in case there is additional pressure that could be given to the shell side. For instance, tubesheet bending stress on tube side limits the tube side maximum pressure, therefore, a higher shell side pressure is permissible.

COMPRESS Exchanger Help


The governing MAWP is taken as the largest MAWP calculated from all of the design conditions specified (excluding hydrotest conditions). The governing MAP is taken as the largest MAP calculated from all of the hydrotest conditions specified. A specification of at least one hydrotest condition is required in order to determine the tubesheet MAP; otherwise, the tubesheet MAP will be listed as zero in the pressure summary. COMPRESS will determine hydrotest conditions based on the design conditions if no hydrotest conditions are specified. This functionality is due to the possibility that varying shell side and tube side test temperature may affect the tubesheet MAP due to thermal expansion consideration. If both TEMA & ASME UHX are investigated simultaneously, then the higher of the respective MAWP/MAP values will be reported on the pressure summary. This is based on the assumption that the most economic set of design rules will be chosen as the basis for the exchanger design.

Modification of Existing Exchangers The heat exchanger module in COMPRESS places certain restrictions on the vessel geometry. Existing components may always be edited through the Heat Exchanger dialog. However, adding or deleting components such as heads, cylinders, and cones will damage the heat exchanger file. In general, adding, editing or deleting attachments, such as nozzles, or supports is permitted. Deleting of components is enforced through the available list in the Delete dialog.



Introduction COMPRESS Heat Exchanger. Introduction The heat exchanger provides a Wizard based interface that allows quick and simple input of all required design data based on ASME and / or TEMA design rules. It logically steps the user through all the relevant design inputs and creates a complete 3-D model of the heat exchanger. Start the Heat Exchanger Wizard Edit an existing Heat Exchanger Heat Exchanger Layout

Start the Heat Exchanger Wizard Start the Heat Exchanger Wizard from the COMPRESS main screen by using one of the following four (4) options; 1. Press 'Ctrl-T' 2. Click the Heat Exchanger button on the main tool bar

3. Select the 'Heat Exchanger' option from the 'File' menu. 4. If the current file is a new blank Division 1 vessel, click the 'HE' button on the components toolbar.

Use the 'Set Mode'(F7) options dialog to set default values before the wizard is launched. See the COMPRESS manual for more information on 'Set Mode Options'.

Edit an existing Heat Exchanger To edit an existing heat exchanger, open the file and then use one of the following two (2)



options; 1. Right click with the mouse over top of the heat exchanger and select 'Heat Exchanger' from the pop-up menu. 2. Click the 'HE' button on the components toolbar.

Heat Exchanger Layout The heat exchanger is divided into the following input dialogs: General Options < 23 - 1 > Tube Side Design Conditions < 23 - 9 > Shell Side Design Conditions < 23 - 19 > Tubesheet Design Conditions < 23 - 23 > Floating Tubesheet Channel Design Conditions (optional) < 23 - 16 > Operating Temperature Design Conditions (optional) < 23 - 27 > Liquid Level Design Conditions Kettle Options (optional) < 23 - 32 > Tubes and Shell < 23 - 34 > Channel < 23 - 66 > Expansion Joint (optional) < 23 - 45 > Tubesheets < 23 - 57 > Rear Shell Closure Options < 23 - 41 > Tube-To-Tubesheet Joint < 23 - 74 > Pass Partition (optional) < 23 - 78 > Nozzles < 23 - 81 > Some input dialogs are optional depending on input selections.



General Options Heat Exchanger Defaults

Heat Exchanger Defaults allow you to save every input in the Heat Exchanger Wizard so that they may be re-used when a new heat exchanger is created. The selections above are available when a heat exchanger is being created.

Select Defaults File - Click this button to select a heat exchanger defaults file. The values in this defaults file will be used to create the heat exchanger.

Create New Defaults File - This button creates a new defaults file. The values in the new defaults file will be based off of the most recent defaults file used.

Update Defaults File as this Exchanger is Created - Check this box to update the current defaults file as the heat exchanger is created. If this box is unchecked, the current defaults file will remain unchanged.

The selections above are available when a heat exchanger is being edited.

Save Current Values - This button saves all the values for the current heat exchanger to the current defaults file.

Save Defaults As... - Click this button to save the values for the current heat exchanger to a defaults file with a different name.

Tube Layout Option Click on this button to launch the Tube Layout program. This program can be used to determine the number and layout of tubes. See the Tube Layout Program Help Site for


Heat Exchanger Design < 23 - 1 >

more information.

Exchanger Options

This button will open the Exchanger Design tab in the Set Mode Options. There, the amount of data entry required may be reduced by directing COMPRESS to make design assumptions for various corrosion allowances, MDMTs and design temperatures.

Exchanger Type COMPRESS handles the three different types of heat exchangers. The heat exchanger type selected will determine which options will be available throughout the wizard design. Once the heat exchanger has been designed, modification of the exchanger type is not permitted.

Fixed Tubesheets - A heat exchanger consisting of a tube bundle fixed between two tubesheets. U-Tube - A heat exchanger consisting of a single tubesheet with a U shaped tube bundle. Floating Tubesheet - A heat exchanger where one of the two tubesheets is free to move axially as the tubes expand or contract.

Exchanger Calculation Method

Select the design calculation method from the available options. The 'ASME' method may limit various exchanger options.

TEMA - TEMA standard is used to evaluate the tubesheet(s), tubes, and shell. If this option is selected, further TEMA details are specified in the TEMA option section (see below).

ASME - ASME Section VIII-1 UHX is used to evaluate tubesheet(s), tubes, channel, and shell. TEMA & ASME - Both TEMA and ASME UHX analysis methods are performed simultaneously allowing designer to select either as the basis for design. When this option in



active, the required thickness for both TEMA and ASME will be presented in the dialog allowing the design method yielding the lowest cost to be used. For any of the options selected, the main vessel components and nozzles are designed in accordance with ASME Section VIII-1. When ASME is selected for the exchanger calculation method, the assumptions are as follows: For fixed exchangers, the tubesheets and channels are assumed to be identical at both ends Kettle shell types are not permitted If the exchanger is designed according to ASME, the 2001 ASME Edition is the earliest available edition. For ASME Code Editions selected (Codes\ASME menu option) earlier than the 2001 Edition, the 2001 ASME Appendix AA rules will be used. For ASME Code Editions from 2003 forward, UHX rules will be used.

ASME Exchanger Options

Shell Bands Present - Activate this option when the shell has a different thickness and/or different material adjacent to the tubesheet (see ASME VIII-1 Figure UHX-13.4). Shell bands are beneficial in reducing the bending stresses in the tubesheets, shell, or channel. Note that shell bands may be used to optimize the tubesheet thickness even when the shell and channel stresses are not excessive. This option is only applicable when the shell is integral with the tubesheet.

Use Operating Temperatures - For load cases involving thermal loading, the elastic moduli, yield strengths, and allowable stresses may be taken at the operating temperature instead of the design temperature. If this option is activated, additional inputs are required for the operating temperatures of the various components.

Consider Radial Differential Thermal Expansion Adjacent to the Tubesheet per UHX13.8 - Activate this option to include consideration of radial differential thermal expansion (RDTE) adjacent to the tubesheet in the ASME UHX calculations. In the ASME 2004 Edition,



consideration of RDTE is no longer mandatory. RDTE should be considered when cyclic or dynamic reactions due to pressure or thermal variations are a concern, when specified by the user, or when optional investigation is desired. Note that consideration of RTDE is only available for fixed and floating heat exchangers. The tubesheet rim temperature, shell temperature adjacent to the tubesheet, channel temperature adjacent to the tubesheet, and material properties relevant to these temperature inputs all become available when this option is active.

Use Conservative Values of P*s and P*c - When this option is active, the temperatures in ASME UHX 13.5.5 Step 5 (fixed) and UHX 14.5.5 Step 5 (floating) are assigned as follows: Tr = T', Ts* = Ts', and Tc* = Tc'. The result is a conservative calculation of Ps* and Pc*.

Check TEMA Requirements for ASME Only Design - This option activates the minimum thickness TEMA checks for ASME only exchanger designs.

TEMA Exchanger Options

TEMA Edition For exchangers designed in accordance with TEMA, select either the 1988, 1999, or 2007 TEMA edition.

TEMA Class Class "R" - For the severe requirements of petroleum and related processing applications. Class "C" - For the generally moderate requirements of commercial and general process applications.

Class "B" - For chemical process service. Once a heat exchanger has been designed, modification of the TEMA class is not permitted.



Expansion Joint

Activate the Expansion Joint Present switch to include an expansion joint, otherwise known as a flexible shell element (FSE), in the heat exchanger. An expansion joint may be necessary in fixed tubesheet exchangers in order to reduce the shell and tube longitudinal stresses and/or tube-totubesheet loads. As an expansion joint is not necessary for U-Tube or Floating Tubesheet exchangers, this option is not available for these types of exchangers. This option can be used to add or remove an expansion joint from an existing heat exchanger. The detailed inputs are displayed on the flanged and flued or bellows expansion joint input page.

Flanged and Flued - Expansion joint is designed per TEMA RCB-8. Up to six flexible shell elements are permitted. The spring rate is calculated per TEMA RCB-8.5 based on the effective spring rate of the system. Optionally, a user defined spring rate may be input on the Tubesheet Design Conditions input page.

Bellows Type - Expansion joint is designed per ASME VIII-1 Appendix 26. For this type of expansion joint, a user defined spring rate input is required.

Tubesheets of Differing Thickness - fixed Exchangers Only

TEMA RCB-7.166 includes a calculation method allowing two tubesheets of different thickness. One condition that may warrant the use of this option is significantly differing elastic moduli and/or allowable stresses. When this option is not active, the tubesheets are assumed to be the same thickness. This option does not apply to U-Tube exchangers and is not available when ASME is selected as a calculation method.

Add Saddles

If this option is activated, the heat exchanger orientation will be set to horizontal and saddles will be automatically included. The saddles will be sized based on the standard saddle details per the Process Industry Practices (PIP) VECV1001 Vessel Design Criteria 1997. If this option is not selected, then the heat exchanger orientation will be vertical. After a heat exchanger is created, alteration of the orientation is allowed by selecting Set Datum



from the Action menu (or press F8 key).

Shell Type

Select the shell type. The sketch in the dialog displays a representation of the selected shell type. The K: Kettle, Transition on Front End Only shell type selection is only available for U-Tube and Floating Tubesheet heat exchangers. The K: Kettle, Transition on Both Ends shell type selection (not shown above) is only available for TEMA Fixed/Stationary heat exchangers. After a heat exchanger is designed, modification of the shell type is not permitted.

Floating Tubesheet Exchanger Type

The floating tubesheet heat exchanger type selection defines the overall exchanger configuration as presented in ASME Figure UHX-14.1. The corresponding TEMA Figure N-1.2 nomenclature is shown for the selected floating exchanger type. Any of the six fixed/stationary tubesheet configurations shown in Figure UHX-14.2 are permitted. But, the floating tubesheet configurations available are limited to the ones listed in ASME Figure UHX-14.1 based on the exchanger type selected. Note: The tubesheet configurations are specified later in the heat exchanger dialogs.



Type (a)

Immersed floating head (TEMA types S and T): The floating tubesheet configurations permissible are as follows: Configuration A - Tubesheet Integral Configuration B - Tubesheet Gasketed, Extended as a Flange Configuration C - Tubesheet Gasketed, Not Extended as a Flange

Type (b)

Externally sealed floating head (TEMA type P): Only one floating tubesheet configuration is permissible as follows: Configuration A - Tubesheet Integral

Type (c)

Internally sealed floating head (TEMA type W): Only one floating tubesheet configuration is permissible as follows: Configuration D - Tubesheet Internally Sealed



Floating Tubesheet Head Type

This selection defines the type of head attached to the internal floating tube side section and is only available for a type (a) floating tubesheet exchanger.



Tube Side Design Conditions

Design Condition Active - A maximum of eight simultaneous design conditions are allowed. Activate the switch of each condition to be investigated. If design parameters for only one condition are specified and that design condition is selected to be a hydrotest condition, then all of the design pressure inputs for the main vessel components will automatically be set to zero. The reason is that a design condition was not specified, only a hydrotest condition. The main vessel components will not be designed for a hydrotest condition.

This is a Hydrotest Design Condition - By default, COMPRESS automatically creates tube side and shell side hydrotest conditions in accordance with ASME VIII-1 UG-99. These default hydrotest conditions are based on the settings on the Testing tab located on the Set Mode dialog (F7). Note that the default hydrotest conditions created will not appear in the dialog but may be reviewed in the Hydrostatic Summary report, Design Conditions Summary report, as well as the detailed heat exchanger component reports. Optionally, the default hydrotest condition(s) may be over-ridden by assigning user defined hydrotest condition(s). This is done by activating the This is a Hydrotest Design Condition option and inputting the applicable hydrotest design parameters. When a user defined hydrotest is specified, the pressure chamber to which the design condition applies is selected immediately below (e.g. Shell Side or Tube Side). If user defined hydrotest conditions are desired for both the shell side and the tube side, then a separate design condition must be filled out for each pressure chamber. This is based on the assumption that each chamber is tested in isolation (i.e. pressure in opposite chamber is zero). The static head pressure will automatically be added to the input hydrotest pressure. A hydrotest condition differs from a regular design condition as follows: Typically a percentage of yield is used as the allowable stress basis A hydrotest condition will not cause the tubesheet thickness to increase. If the tubesheet thickness selected is insufficient to meet a specified hydrotest condition, an error will be presented in the deficiencies summary.



Description - Input the description of the condition (e.g. operating). For a condition specified as a hydrotest condition, one of the following options must be selected from the drop down field:

Shell Side - Shell side hydrotest condition Tube Side - Tube side hydrotest condition None - If None is selected, the Hydrotest Design Condition switch will be deactivated. Use Differential Pressure - Typically, the worst-case design pressure is used in the design of the heat exchanger components. The worst case tube side pressure is the specified tube side design pressure assuming the shell side pressure is zero and vice versa for the shell side. If it is desired to design the heat exchanger components for the differential pressure between the shell side and tube side, then activate this option for the desired condition. If this option is used in the design, special care should be taken in developing operating procedures that ensure that the heat exchanger components will never experience an operating pressure that exceeds the difference in the shell side and tube side design pressures. Note: In the calculation of the MAWP/MAP of the heat exchanger components, the maximum pressure values determined when this option is active are differential pressures. For example, if the tubesheet is rated for a 50 psi differential MAWP, then any combination of simultaneous tube side and shell side working pressures are permissible where the difference between the two chamber's working pressures do not exceed 50 psi.

Differential Design Pressure - This should be used to set the worst case differential design pressure. If zero is entered for this value, COMPRESS will use the difference between the shell side and tube side pressures as the differential design pressure.

Internal Design Pressure - Enter the internal design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger of a specified condition. This is the internal pressure acting on the inside of the channel and tubes.

Internal Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature for the tube side components of a specified condition. The design temperature input is assigned to all tube side components except for the tubes. The tube design temperature is a separate input located in the Tube frame.

External Design Pressure - Enter the external design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger of a specified condition. This input allows a vacuum to be specified for any design condition and can be used in the determination of the external design pressure for individual components.

Operating Pressure - Enter the operating pressure for the tube side of the exchanger of a specified condition. The operating pressure considers differential thermal expansion.



Tube

Material - Select the material for the tubes. The available materials listed in the pull down menu is dependent on the ASME Edition set under the Codes\ASME menu as well as the materials activated through the material filter. To add a single material to the drop down list, select the Add Material ... option located at the top of the material pull-down list, navigate to the desired material, activate the material by highlighting it, and then select OK . Optionally, when heat exchanger wizard is not active, multiple materials may be added and/or removed by selecting the ASME Materials option from the Materials main menu item. With this option, navigate to the desired material(s) and activate or deactivate the material(s) by clicking the use column. A check mark is present for all materials listed in the material pull-down lists.

Poisson's Ratio - Enter the Poisson's ratio of the tube material. This input is only available when ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.

Show material properties - This option switch allows the relevant tube material properties to be viewed. As the material properties are typically only necessary when user defined values are desired, deactivation of this option can save time and reduce confusion by only presenting the necessary inputs. When designing a new heat exchanger, the data source is automatically set to match the selected calculation method. The ASME data source is used for ASME only and for TEMA / ASME calculation methods. The TEMA data source is used for the TEMA only calculation method.

Tube Design Temperature - The tube design temperature is the maximum temperature that any of the tubes in the bundle are expected to reach for the specified condition. This maximum temperature could occur with both shell side and tube side fluids present simultaneously or with either the shell side or tube side fluid present in isolation. When determining the coincident tube design temperature for external pressure design, the worst case tube side design temperature will be used from all of the design conditions specified. Note that the shell design temperature (actual worst case design temperature along the shell) is not considered for the tube external pressure design.

Tube Mean Metal Temperature - Enter the mean metal temperature of the tubes.



The tube mean metal temperature is the calculated metal temperature of the tube in contact with both the shell side and tube side fluids. The mean metal temperature is based on the operating temperatures of the shell side and tube side fluids. See TEMA RCB-1.432 and T-4 for additional information.

Thermal Expansion Coefficients Source - Select the source for the thermal expansion coefficient of the tube material. Note: The same source selection is used for all active design conditions. This applies to all of the source selections throughout the dialogs.

User Defined - To manually input the thermal expansion coefficient, select this option. ASME Tables TE-1 through TE-5 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the thermal expansion coefficient from ASME II-D Tables TE-1 through TE-5 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.

TEMA Table D-11 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the thermal expansion coefficient from TEMA Table D-11 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature. When TEMA is selected as the source, an additional input is required to set the material type. The TEMA material type may be selected from the drop down box. Optionally, the TEMA material type may be set by pressing the View button to display the data for Table D11 and then by selecting the material type from the list.

Coefficient at Mean Metal Temperature - The tube thermal expansion coefficient at the tube mean metal temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.

Yield Stress Source - Select the source for the minimum yield stress of the tube material. User Defined - To manually input the minimum yield stress select this option. ASME Table Y-1 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the minimum yield stress from ASME II-D Table Y-1 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.

Yield Stress at Design - The tube minimum yield stress at the tube side design temperature is listed here as a read-only value if the source ASME Table Y-1 is selected. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from Table Y-1 and a user defined value must be input.

Modulus of Elasticity Source - Select the source for the modulus of elasticity of the tube material.



User Defined - To manually input the modulus of elasticity, select this option. ASME Tables TM-1 through TM-5 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the modulus of elasticity from ASME II-D Tables TM-1 through TM-5 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.

TEMA Table D-10 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the modulus of elasticity from TEMA Table D-10 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature. When TEMA is selected as the source, an additional input is required to set the material type. The TEMA material type may be selected from the drop down box. Optionally, the TEMA material type may be set by pressing the View button to display the data for Table D10 and then by selecting the material type from the list.

Modulus of Elasticity at Mean - The tube modulus of elasticity at the tube mean metal temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.

Modulus of Elasticity at Design - The tube modulus of elasticity at the tube design temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient. This input is only available if ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.

Channel

For a TEMA only heat exchanger or an ASME heat exchanger where the tubesheet is not integral with the channel, the only required input is the channel material.

Material - Select the material for the channel cylinder. See the tube material description for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials.

Poisson's Ratio - Enter the Poisson's ratio of the channel material.



Show material properties - This option switch allows the relevant channel material properties to be viewed. As the material properties are typically only necessary when user defined values are desired, deactivation of this option can save time and reduce confusion by only presenting the necessary inputs. When designing a new heat exchanger, the data source is automatically set to match the selected calculation method. The ASME data source is used for ASME only and for TEMA / ASME calculation methods. The TEMA data source is used for the TEMA only calculation method.

Channel Temperature at Tubesheet - Enter the channel metal temperature at the junction between the tubesheet and the channel.

Thermal Expansion Coefficients Source - Select the thermal expansion coefficient source for the channel material.

User Defined - To manually input the thermal expansion coefficient select this option. ASME Tables TE-1 through TE-5 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the thermal expansion coefficient from ASME II-D Tables TE-1 through TE-5 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.


Coefficient at Temperature at Tubesheet - The channel thermal expansion coefficient at the channel metal temperature at the tubesheet is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.

Yield Stress Source - Select the source for the minimum yield stress of the channel material. User Defined - To manually input the tube minimum yield stress select this option. ASME Table Y-1 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the minimum yield stress from ASME II-D Table Y-1 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.

Yield Stress at Design - The channel minimum yield stress at the channel design temperature is



listed here as a read-only value if the source ASME Table Y-1 is selected. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from Table Y-1 and a user defined value must be input.

Modulus of Elasticity Source - Select the source for the modulus of elasticity of the channel material.



Modulus of Elasticity at Design - The channel modulus of elasticity at the channel design temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.



Floating Tubesheet Channel Design Conditions This dialog appears when a floating tubesheet exchanger type (a) is selected. The inputs provide the ability to specify a variation in design temperature and metallurgy for the floating and stationary channel sections. This may be desirable due to the exposure of the floating channel to both the shell side and tube side fluids. Note that the design temperature input applies to the complete floating channel section (the separate cylinder if present and the head closure), and the Floating Tubesheet Channel Cylinder inputs are only applicable to the channel cylinder.

Floating Tubesheet Channel Design Temperature - This design temperature is the maximum temperature that any of the floating channel components are expected to reach for the specified design condition. This input allows the entry of a design temperature different from the stationary channel due to exposure to both the tube side and shell side fluids. If only a single tube side design temperature value is known for both the stationary and floating channel sections.

Floating Tubesheet Channel Cylinder The inputs in this section are only necessary when the floating channel is integral with the tubesheet. If a separate cylinder is not present and the head straight flange is integral with the tubesheet, then these inputs apply to the head straight flange.

Material - Select the material for the cylinder located in the floating channel section. Note that if an integral straight flange is attached directly to the tubesheet, then input the head/straight flange material. The available materials listed in the pull down menu is dependent on the ASME Edition set under the Codes\ASME menu as well as the materials activated through the material filter. To add a single material to the drop down list, select the Add Material ... option located at the top of the material pull-down list, navigate to the desired material, activate the material by highlighting it, and then select OK . Optionally, when heat exchanger wizard is not active, multiple materials may be added and/or removed by selecting the ASME Materials option from the Materials main menu item. With this option, navigate to the desired material(s) and activate or deactivate the material(s) by clicking the use column. A check mark is present for all materials listed in the



material pull-down lists.

Poisson's Ratio - Enter the Poisson's ratio of the floating channel cylinder material. This input is only available when ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.

Show material properties - This option switch allows the relevant floating channel cylinder material properties to be viewed. As the material properties are typically only necessary when user defined values are desired, deactivation of this option can save time and reduce confusion by only presenting the necessary inputs. When designing a new heat exchanger, the data source is automatically set to match the selected calculation method. The ASME data source is used for ASME only and for TEMA / ASME calculation methods. The TEMA data source is used for the TEMA only calculation method.

Channel Temperature at Tubesheet - Enter the channel metal temperature at the junction between the floating tubesheet and the channel. Note that this input is only relevant when the channel is integral with the floating tubesheet.

Thermal Expansion Coefficients Source - Select the source for the thermal expansion coefficient of the floating channel cylinder material. Note: The same source selection is used for all active design conditions. This applies to all of the source selections throughout the dialogs.

User Defined - To manually input the thermal expansion coefficient, select this option. ASME Tables TE-1 through TE-5 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the thermal expansion coefficient from ASME II-D Tables TE-1 through TE-5 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.


Coefficient at Temperature at Tubesheet - The floating channel cylinder thermal expansion coefficient at the channel temperature at the tubesheet is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.

Yield Stress Source - Select the source for the minimum yield stress of the floating channel



cylinder material.

User Defined - To manually input the minimum yield stress select this option. ASME Table Y-1 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the minimum yield stress from ASME II-D Table Y-1 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.

Yield Stress at Design - The floating channel cylinder minimum yield stress at the tube side design temperature is listed here as a read-only value if the source ASME Table Y-1 is selected. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from Table Y-1 and a user defined value must be input.

Modulus of Elasticity Source - Select the source for the modulus of elasticity of the floating channel cylinder material.



Modulus of Elasticity at Design - The floating channel cylinder modulus of elasticity at the floating channel design temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient. This input is only available if ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.



Shell Side Design Conditions

Internal Design Pressure - Enter the internal design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger of a specified condition. This is the internal pressure acting on the inside of the shell and the outside of the tubes.

Internal Design Temperature - The shell design temperature is the maximum temperature that any of the shell side components are expected to reach for the specified condition.

External Design Pressure - Enter the internal design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger of a specified condition. This input allows a vacuum to be specified for any design condition and can be used in the determination of the external design pressure for individual components.

Operating Pressure - Enter the operating pressure for the shell side of the exchanger of a specified condition. The operating pressure considers differential thermal expansion.

Shell

Material - Select the material for the shell. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials.

Poisson's Ratio - Enter the poisson's ratio of the shell material. This input is only available when ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.



Show material properties - This option switch allows the relevant shell material properties to be viewed. As the material properties are typically only necessary when user defined values are desired, deactivation of this option can save time and reduce confusion by only presenting the necessary inputs.

Shell Mean Metal Temperature - Enter the mean metal temperature of the shell. The shell mean metal temperature is the calculated metal temperature of the shell in contact with the shell side fluid. The mean metal temperature is based on the operating temperatures of the fluid in contact with the shell metal. See TEMA RCB-1.431 and T-4 for additional information.

Shell Temperature at Tubesheet - Enter the shell design temperature at the junction between the tubesheet and the shell. This input is only available if ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method. If the option Shell Bands Present per UHX-13.6 is active on the General Options dialog, then the temperature at the shell band to tubesheet juncture is input in the Shell Bands section in lieu of this input. When designing a new heat exchanger, the data source is automatically set to match the selected calculation method. The ASME data source is used for ASME only and for TEMA / ASME calculation methods. The TEMA data source is used for the TEMA only calculation method.

Thermal Expansion Coefficients Source - Select the source for the thermal expansion coefficient of the shell material.



Coefficient at Mean Metal Temperature - The shell thermal expansion coefficient at the shell mean metal temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.



Coefficient at Tubesheet Temperature - The shell thermal expansion coefficient at the shell design temperature at the tubesheet is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.

Yield Stress Source - Select the source for the minimum yield stress of the shell material. User Defined - To manually input the minimum yield stress select this option. ASME Table Y-1 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the minimum yield stress from ASME II-D Table Y-1 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.

Yield Stress at Design - The shell minimum yield stress at the shell side design temperature is listed here as a read-only value if the source ASME Table Y-1 is selected. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from Table Y-1 and a user defined value must be input.

Modulus of Elasticity Source - Select the source for the modulus of elasticity of the shell material.

User Defined - To manually input the modulus of elasticity select this option. ASME Tables TM-1 through TM-5 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the modulus of elasticity from ASME II-D Tables TM-1 through TM-5 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.


Modulus of Elasticity at Mean - The shell modulus of elasticity at the shell mean metal temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.

Modulus of Elasticity at Design - The shell modulus of elasticity at the shell side design temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other



source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient. This input is only available if ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.

Shell Bands

The inputs for shell bands are only available if the option Shell Bands Present per UHX-13.6 is selected on the General Options dialog. The shell band input descriptions are identical to the shell input descriptions except they pertain to the shell band material.



Tubesheet Design Conditions For fixed\stationary tubesheet heat exchanger designs unless the option "Allow Fixed Tubesheets of Differing Thickness" is active on the General Options dialog, rear tubesheet inputs are not available as the front tubsheet and rear tubesheet are assumed identical in construction. For floating tubesheet heat exchanger designs, the Rear\Floating Tubesheet inputs are always available.

Front\Stationary Tubesheet

Material - Select the material for the front tubesheet. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials.

Poisson's Ratio - Enter the Poisson's ratio of the front tubesheet material. This input is only available when ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.

Show material properties - This option switch allows the relevant tubesheet material properties to be viewed. As the material properties are typically only necessary when user defined values are desired, deactivation of this option can save time and reduce confusion by only presenting the necessary inputs.

Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature for the front tubesheet. Mean Metal Temperature - Enter the mean metal temperature for the front tubesheet. The front tubesheet mean metal temperature is the calculated metal temperature of the tube in contact with both the shell side and tube side fluids. The mean metal temperature is based on the operating temperatures of the shell side and tube side fluids. See TEMA RCB-1.432 and T-4.33 for additional information.

Tubesheet Temperature at Rim - Enter the tubesheet metal temperature at the outer rim of the front tubesheet. This input is only used when ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.



When designing a new heat exchanger, the data source is automatically set to match the selected calculation method. The ASME data source is used for ASME only and for TEMA / ASME calculation methods. The TEMA data source is used for the TEMA only calculation method.

Yield Stress Source - Select the source for the minimum yield stress of the front tubesheet material.

User Defined - To manually input the minimum yield stress select this option. ASME Table Y-1 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the minimum yield stress from ASME II-D Table Y-1 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.

Yield Stress at Design - The front tubesheet minimum yield stress at the front tubehseet design temperature is listed here as a read-only value if the source ASME Table Y-1 is selected. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from Table Y-1 and a user defined value must be input.

Modulus of Elasticity Source - Select the source for the modulus of elasticity of the front tubesheet material.

User Defined - To manually input the modulus of elasticity select this option. ASME Tables TM-1 through TM-5 - Select this option for an automatic look-up of the modulus of elasticity from ASME II-D Tables TM-1 through TM-5 based on the material selection and the relevant temperature.


Modulus of Elasticity at Mean - The front tubesheet modulus of elasticity at the front tubesheet mean metal temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient.

Modulus of Elasticity at Design - The front tubesheet modulus of elasticity at the front tubesheet design temperature is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the



coefficient. This input is only available if ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.

Thermal Expansion Coefficients Source - Select the source for the thermal expansion coefficient of the front tubesheet material. This input is only available if ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.



Coefficient at Rim Temperature - The front tubesheet thermal expansion coefficient at the front tubesheet metal temperature at the rim is listed here as a read-only value for both the TEMA and ASME source options. If zero is listed, then a match could not be made from the source selected and one of the other source options must be used. If the source is User Defined , then input the coefficient. This input is only available if ASME is selected as an exchanger calculation method.

Rear\Floating Tubesheet

Separate inputs are available for the rear/floating tubesheet to allow for different metallurgy or design temperatures. For more information about the inputs see the descriptions for the Front\Stationary Tubesheet . Note that the rear tubesheet inputs only appear for a TEMA fixed\stationary tubesheet heat exchanger design when the option Allow Fixed Tubesheets of Differing Thickness is active.



Expansion Joint

If the Expansion Joint Present option is selected on the General Options dialog, then the option to input user defined expansion joint spring rates for each design condition is available. This input frame is only visible for a fixed\stationary heat exchanger design.

User Defined Expansion Joint Spring Rates - Activate this option to input user defined spring rates for each design condition. For a flanged and flued expansion joint, the automatic calculation of expansion joint spring rates per TEMA RCB-8 is superseded by the user defined spring rates inputs when this option is active. The spring rates will be calculated using a Line Element FEA analysis unless the TEMA 8th edition or earlier is selected, in which case the closed form solution is used.

Spring Rate, Sj New - Enter the expansion joint spring rate for the new (uncorroded) condition.

Spring Rate, Sj Corroded - Enter the expansion joint spring rate for the corroded condition.



Operating Temperature Design Conditions The material property inputs at operating temperatures are only available for an ASME exchanger design when the option Use Operating Temperatures is active on the General Options dialog. Per ASME VIII-1 Appendix UHX-13.4(b) & UHX-14.4(c), it is permissible to use operating temperatures instead of design temperatures in determining the elastic moduli, yield strengths, and allowable stresses for load cases involving thermal loading. By using the material properties at the operating temperatures for the load cases including self-limiting loading (i.e. load cases involving thermal loading), a more cost efficient design may be achieved. The source (i.e. ASME tables, TEMA tables, or User Defined) for determining the yield stress and modulus of elasticity values are defined on the previous dialogs. For example, if the source is specified as ASME Table Y-1 for the tube yield stress at the design temperature, then Table Y-1 is used for the tube yield stress at the tube operating temperature as well. Yield stress and modulus of elasticity inputs are read-only when the source option is set as ASME or TEMA. If the read-only input is listed as zero, then a match could not be located in the specified source and another source option must be selected. If the source is set as User Defined, then the yield stress and modulus of elasticity is input manually.

Tube

Operating Temperature - Enter the operating temperature for the tube material. Yield Stress at Operating - The yield stress of the tube material at the tube operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the tube yield stress at the tube design temperature on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Modulus of Elasticity at Operating - The modulus of elasticity of the tube material at the tube operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the tube modulus of elasticity at the tube design temperature on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Elasticity at Tubesheet Operating - The elasticity at the tubesheet operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the tubesheet modulus of elasticity at the tubesheet design temperature on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog.



Shell

Operating Temperature - Enter the operating temperature for the shell material. Yield Stress at Operating - The yield stress of the shell material at the shell operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the shell yield stress at the shell design temperature on the Shell Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Modulus of Elasticity at Operating - The modulus of elasticity of the shell material at the shell operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the shell modulus of elasticity at the shell design temperature on the Shell Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Stationary Tubesheet

For ASME designs the front and rear tubesheet material are assumed identical; thus, only one set of inputs is available for both tubesheets.

Operating Temperature - Enter the operating temperature for the front\stationary tubesheet material.

Yield Stress at Operating - The yield stress of the front\stationary tubesheet material at the tubesheet operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the shell yield stress at the shell design temperature on the Shell Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Modulus of Elasticity at Operating - The modulus of elasticity of the front\stationary tubesheet material at the tubesheet operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the tubesheet modulus of elasticity at the tubesheet design temperature on the Tubesheet Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Floating Tubesheet



Operating Temperature - Enter the operating temperature for the floating tubesheet material. Yield Stress at Operating - The yield stress of the floating tubesheet material at the tubesheet operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the shell yield stress at the shell design temperature on the Shell Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Modulus of Elasticity at Operating - The modulus of elasticity of the floating tubesheet material at the tubesheet operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the tubesheet modulus of elasticity at the tubesheet design temperature on the Tubesheet Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Stationary Channel

Operating Temperature - Enter the operating temperature for the front\stationary channel material.

Yield Stress at Operating - The yield stress of the front\stationary channel material at the channel operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the channel yield stress at the channel design temperature on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Modulus of Elasticity at Operating - The modulus of elasticity of the front\stationary channel material at the channel operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the channel modulus of elasticity at the channel design temperature on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Floating Tubesheet Channel

Operating Temperature - Enter the operating temperature for the floating tubesheet channel material.

Yield Stress at Operating - The yield stress of the floating tubesheet channel material at the channel operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the channel yield stress at the channel design temperature on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.



Modulus of Elasticity at Operating - The modulus of elasticity of the floating tubesheet channel material at the channel operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the channel modulus of elasticity at the channel design temperature on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Shell Bands

The shell band inputs at the operating temperature are only available when the option Shell Bands Present per UHX-13.6 is active on the General Options dialog. The shell bands use the same operating temperature and design temperature input as the shell.

Yield Stress at Operating - The yield stress of the shell band material at the shell operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the shell band yield stress at the shell design temperature on the Shell Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.

Modulus of Elasticity at Operating - The modulus of elasticity of the shell band material at the shell operating temperature is a read-only input for ASME or TEMA source selections. The source selection is set for the shell band modulus of elasticity at the shell design temperature on the Shell Side Design Conditions dialog. Enter a value if User Defined is selected as the source option.



Liquid Level Design Conditions Both tube side and shell side liquid levels can be activated for any active design condition. If activated, the static head will be considered in the tubesheet and expansion joint calculations.

Include static pressure - Use the check boxes and / or the selection buttons to activate or deactivate the desired liquid levels for each design condition.The liquid levels are always activated for hydrotest conditions.

Liquild Level is active - Use the main switch Vessel Tube side liquid level is active and / or Vessel Shell side liquid level is active to indicate if the vessel has an active liquid level on the tube or shell side. If active, this provides the same liquid level input options as the main vessel liquid level diaog .



Kettle Options A kettle type exchanger is selected by selecting either the Kettle, Transition on Front End Only or the Kettle, Transition on Both Ends option located on the General Options dialog. The Kettle, Transition on Front End Only option is only applicable for U-Tube or Floating tubesheet designs. The Kettle, Transition on Both Ends option is only available for TEMA fixed tubesheet exchangers and the conical sections on both ends are assumed to be identical.

Port Cylinder

The port cylinder is the cylinder attached to the small end of the conical section.

Material The material can be set using the drop down list . The available materials are dependent on the ASME Edition set under the Codes\ASME menu as well as the materials activated through the material filter. To add a single material to the drop down list, select the Add Material ... option located at the top of the material pull-down list, navigate to the desired material, activate the material by highlighting it, and then select OK.

Length - Enter the axial length of the port cylinder. Thickness - Enter the nominal thickness of the port cylinder. Inside Diameter - Enter the uncorroded inside diameter for the port cylinder. If the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout then this input will not be active and the Tube Layout program must be used to change this value.

Inner Corrosion - Enter the inside corrosion allowance for the port cylinder. Outer Corrosion - Enter the outside corrosion allowance for the port cylinder. MDMT - Enter the minimum design metal temperature for the port cylinder. Impact test evaluation and MDMT rating are in accordance with ASME VIII-1



Cone

Material The material can be set using the drop down list . The available materials are dependent on the ASME Edition set under the Codes\ASME menu as well as the materials activated through the material filter. To add a single material to the drop down list, select the Add Material ... option located at the top of the material pull-down list, navigate to the desired material, activate the material by highlighting it, and then select OK.

Axial Length - Enter the axial length of the conical section. Thickness - Enter the nominal thickness of the conical section. Large End Inside Diameter - Enter the large end inside diameter of the conical section. Inner Corrosion - Enter the inside corrosion allowance for the conical section. Outer Corrosion - Enter the outside corrosion allowance for the conical section. MDMT - Enter the minimum design metal temperature for the port cylinder. Impact test evaluation and MDMT rating are in accordance with ASME VIII-1

Concentric - For horizontal exchangers this option allows the specification of the cones to be either concentric or eccentric down. For vertical exchangers this option is not available as the cones are required to be concentric.



Tubes and Shell Tube Geometry Tube geometry is specified on the Tube and Shell page.

Length between outer tubesheet faces (Lt) - For fixed and floating exchangers enter the tube length between the outer faces of the tubesheet.

Tube length from outer tubesheet face to bend (Lt) - For U-Tube exchangers enter the tube length from outer (tube side) face of tubesheet to the tube bend tangent point.



Outer Diameter - Enter the tube outer diameter of a single tube. If the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout then this input will not be active and the Tube Layout program must be used to change this value.

Wall Thickness - Enter the nominal thickness of the tube wall. Inner Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the inside of the tubes. Outer Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the outside of the tubes. Tube Expansion Depth Ratio - Enter the ratio of the expanded length of the tube in the tubesheet (lt,x) over the tubesheet nominal thickness (h). The tube expansion depth ratio (ρ) must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to one (0 d Α d 1).

U-Tubes Circumferential Stress Joint Efficiency - Select the U-Tubes are constructed from a single piece of tube option if all of the tubes in a U-Tube exchanger are fabricated without circumferential welds. When this option is selected, a joint efficiency (E) of 1.0 will be used in the determination of the tube design thickness, MAWP, and MAP in the circumferential stress direction. If circumferential welds exist in the tubes, such as the case for U-bends welded to the straight portions of the tubes, then do not activate this option and input a Circumferential Stress Joint Efficiency factor. The Circumferential Stress Joint Efficiency (E) input will be used in the determination of the tube design thickness, MAWP, and MAP.



Shell Geometry

Select Pipe - If a pipe material is selected for the shell, then this option is present to assign the nominal pipe size and pipe schedule. When this option is utilized, the shell inner diameter and thickness are automatically set per ASME B36.10 and the NPS and schedule selected are presented to the right of the option button.

Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the shell. For kettle type exchangers, the shell inner diameter is the diameter mating with the large end of the conical section. For non-kettle type exchangers if the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout then this input will not be active and the Tube Layout program must be used to change this value.

Thickness - Enter the nominal thickness of the shell. Inner Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the inside of the shell. Outer Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the outside of the shell. MDMT - Enter the minimum design metal temperature for the shell. Impact test evaluation and MDMT rating are in accordance with ASME VIII-1.

Overall Length - Enter the actual length of the main shell compnent. The additional length of attached flanges, port cylinders, or conical sections should not be included in this input. For example, if a weld neck flange is attached to the end of the shell, the length of the flange hub should not be added to the shell length input.

Number of Shell Courses - Enter the number of desired shell courses. All shell courses will use the same material and thickness. Individual shell course length may be entered in the table



below. When a shell course length is changed, the length of the other shell courses is automatically updated so that the sum of the lengths equals the overall length. When an expansion joint is present, the number of shell courses is limited to 2 and the shell course lengths are dictated by the position of the expansion joint.

Shell Bands -ASME Fixed Exchangers Only

Shell bands are necessary when the shell varies in thickness and/or material adjacent to the tubesheets (see ASME VIII-1 UHX-13.6). The shell bands on each end of the fixed exchanger are assumed identical in nominal thickness, inner diameter, and material. The length of each shell band may be different. For an exchanger where TEMA & ASME is selected as the exchanger calculation method on the General Options dialog, the shell bands are ignored in the TEMA analysis. Shell bands are also allowed for U-Tube and Floating Tubesheet heat exchangers when the tubesheet is integral with the shell. Note that shell bands can be very effective in reducing the required thickness of the tubesheet when the tubesheet to shell stresses are governing. The following shell band inputs are available only when the option Shell Bands Present per UHX-13.6 is active on the General Options dialog.

Thickness - Enter the nominal thickness of the shell bands adjacent to the tubesheets (t s,1 in ASME VIII-1 Figure UHX-13.4).

Front Band Length - Enter the length of the shell band adjacent to the front tubesheet (l1 in ASME VIII-1 Figure UHX-13.4).

Rear Band Length - Enter the length of the shell band adjacent to the front tubesheet (l1 ’ in ASME VIII-1 Figure UHX-13.4).

Inner Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the inside of the shell bands. Note that this input applies to both the front and rear shell band when both are present.

Outer Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the outside of the shell bands. Note that this input applies to both the front and rear shell band when both are present.



Baffles The baffles are a series of perforated plates, located between the front and rear tubesheets. They are used to direct shell side fluid flow and support the tubes.

Baffles Present - Check this box to include baffles on the heat exchanger. Automatic Baffle Placement - When this option is selected, the Baffle Cut Direction and location of each baffle will be set automatically based on the geometry of the heat exchanger and baffle count. Turn this option off to manually specify the baffle spacing.

Each Baffle supports every Tube - This option is not shown in the image above. It is available for Single Segmental baffles. When this option is selected, it indicates that each baffle supports every tube in the heat exchanger. This will affect tube calculations in most cases by shortening unsupported tube lengths.

Each Central Baffle supports every Tube - This option is available for Double Segmental baffles. When this option is selected, it indicates that each central baffle supports every tube in the heat exchanger. This will affect tube calculations in most cases by shortening unsupported tube lengths.

Each Wing Baffle supports every Tube - This option is available for Double Segmental baffles. When this option is selected, it indicates that each wing baffle supports every tube in the heat exchanger. This will affect tube calculations in most cases by shortening unsupported tube lengths.

Baffle Type - Select the baffle type. Single segmental and double segmental baffles are



available and are depicted in the picture to the left if the input box.

Baffle Material - Enter name of the material used for the baffles. This is optional and is used for reporting purposes only.

Thickness - Enter the baffle thickness. The minimum baffle thickness from TEMA Table R-4.41 or Table CB-4.41 is displayed to the right of the input box. More than one baffle must be present for this to be a valid value.

Shell Clearance - Enter the difference between the baffle outer diameter and the shell inner diameter. The maximum shell clearance from TEMA Table RCB-4.3 is displayed to the right of the input box. TEMA states that up to twice the maximum shell clearance may be used if it does not significantly affect the shell side heat transfer coefficient or mean temperature difference. COMPRESS does not restrict the value input for shell clearance. For kettle type exchangers, the shell clearance is the difference between the baffle outer diameter and the inner diameter of the front port cylinder.

Baffle Cut Definition - Select whether to specify the baffle cut lengths by percentage of the shell inner diameter or by distance.

% of Shell Inside Diameter - Enter the percent of the shell inner diameter (%D in the picture to the left of the input box). This will govern the Cut Distance to Shell Center (L) for single segmental baffles and the Wing Baffle Cut Distance (L1 ) for double segmental baffles. Central Baffle Cut Distance (L2 ) will be calculated so that the central baffle net free area flow matches that of the wing baffles (TEMA RCB-4.1).

Cut Distance from Center (L) - Enter the distance (L) from the centerline of the single segmental baffle, to the baffle cut. L must not exceed the shell radius minus half of the shell clearance.

Wing Cut Distance from Center (L1)- Enter the distance (L1) from the midpoint between the two wing baffles, to the wing baffle inner cut. L1 must not exceed the shell radius minus half of the shell clearance.

Central Cut Distance from Center (L2) - Enter the distance (L2) from the centerline of the central baffle, to the central baffle cut. L2 must not exceed the shell radius minus half of the shell clearance.

Baffle Count - Enter number of baffles present on the heat exchanger. Baffle Orientation - Enter the baffle orientation. The baffle orientation describes which axis the baffle cuts will be made along.

Front Baffle Cut Direction - Enter the direction that the cut will be facing for the first baffle in the group. The following baffles will alternate in cut directions.

Front Tubesheet to First Baffle - Enter the distance from the shell side face of the front



tubesheet to the centerline of the first baffle. This input is only available if Automatic baffle placement is not selected.

Baffle to Baffle Spacing - Enter the separation distance between centerlines of all adjacent baffles. This input is only available if Automatic baffle placement is not selected.



Rear Shell Closure Options This dialog applies to the closure section that attaches to the main shell and only appears when a floating tubesheet exchanger type (a) is selected. The inputs available vary according to the closure type selected.

Closure Type Copy Shell Properties- Select this option to copy the shell inputs (material, diameter, thickness, corrosion allowance, and MDMT) into the bonnet and rear shell cylinder input fields.



Specify Channel Flange & Cover - Select this option to specify the design details for the end closure flange and cover. Select Appendix 2 Flange for a custom ASME Appendix 2 flange and UG-34 bolted cover or ASME B16.5/B16.47 Flange for an ASME B16.5/B16.47 standard flange and blind. The design details do not have to be specified at this time as an Appendix 2 weld neck flange and UG-34 bolted cover are added to the exchanger by default. Modifications can be made later if desired. Note that this option is only present for a Channel Type closure.

Channel Type

This rear shell closure option provides a cylinder, flange, and bolted cover. The flange specified here is the flange on the channel end opposite the tubesheet (i.e. the end closure flange). By default, a weld neck flange and bolted cover are automatically provided. To manually specify a custom flange and bolted cover, select the Specify Channel Flange & Cover option.

Bonnet Type

This channel option provides a channel cylinder and a head closure. The head closure options are as follows:

Ellipsoidal - An ellipsoidal head closure with a 2:1 head ratio is provided by default. Modification of the head ratio is permissible by editing the individual head component outside of the heat exchanger dialog.

F&D - A formed and dished head closure with a inside crown radius and knuckle radius. The diameter, thickness, crown radius and knuckle radius can be specified by the user. There is also a button to calculate default crown and knuckle radii based on the current diameter and thickness.

Hemispherical - A hemispherical head closure is provided with this option.



Bonnet The Bonnet inputs only are only visible/applicable when a Bonnet Type rear shell closure is selected (ellipsoidal head, F&D head, or hemispherical head).

Material- Select the material for the rear shell closure bonnet. Inner Diameter- Input the inner diameter for the rear shell closure bonnet. As a minimum the inner diameter input has to be greater than the outer diameter of the floating channel.

Minimum Thickness- Input the minimum thickness for the rear shell closure bonnet. Note that the minimum not the nominal thickness should be input.

Straight Flange Length - Enter the length of the integral head straight flange. If a straight flange is not present, then enter zero.

Crown Inner Radius- For a F&D bonnet closure, enter the inner crown radius. By default, the inner crown radius is set to the head outer diameter minus 6 inches.

Knuckle Inner Radius- For a F&D bonnet closure, enter the inner knuckle radius. By default, the inner knuckle radius is set to 6 percent of the head outer diameter.

Default Radii- Select this option to reset the F&D head closure inner crown and knuckle radii to the default values. The inner crown radius default is the head outer diameter minus 6 inches. The inner knuckle radius default is 6 percent of the head outside diameter.

Rear Shell Closure Flanged

Rear head to shell connection is flanged - Activate this option, if a flange connection exists



between the main shell and the rear shell closure. The individual flanges may be detailed by selecting the Specify Flange on Shell and Specifiy Flange on Head options. Appendix 2 or ASME B16.5/B16.47 flanges may be used. If the flanges are not detailed, Appendix 2 flanges sized using the flange wizard are automatically added.

Rear Shell Closure Cylinder This section of inputs applies to a separate cylinder welded to the rear shell closure head. For a Bonnet Type head for the case where the head is welded directly the main shell or flanged connection, do not use this option.

Has rear shell cylinder- Select this option if the rear shell closure has a separate cylinder attached to the bonnet head (i.e. a non-integral cylinder welded to the head). For a Channel Type, a rear shell cylinder is always assumed to exist and this option switch is not available.

Copy Bonnet Properties - Select this option to copy the bonnet inputs (material, diameter, and thickness) into the rear shell cylinder input fields.

Material- Select the material for the rear shell cylinder. Length- Input the length of the rear shell cylinder. Inner Diameter- Input the inner diameter for the rear shell cylinder. Note that if the cylinder is made from pipe, a Select Pipe option is available to select a standard pipe size and schedule.

Thickness- Input the nominal thickness for the rear shell cylinder.



Expansion Joint Flanged and Flued

Identifier - Enter a description for the expansion joint. The description will appear in the output report.

Calculate Cycle Life - In the 2004 Edition of ASME VIII-1, the mandatory required joint design life cycle calculation was removed. To calculate the maximum cycle design life of the expansion joint per ASME VIII-1 2001 A03 Edition Appendix 5-3(c), activate this option. The required joint design life in cycles is determined by the designer considering anticipated number of stress cycles (pressure and/or deflection) expected to occur during the operation life of the exchanger unit. The required joint design life in cycles may not be less than 100. The required joint design life should be compared to the maximum cycle design life output by COMPRESS.

Inner Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the inside of the expansion joint. The inner corrosion allowance input applies to all flexible shell elements specified.

Outer Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the outside of the expansion joint. The outer corrosion allowance input applies to all flexible shell elements specified.

Distance to shell side face of front tubesheet - Enter the distance from the shell side face of the front tubesheet to the first (closest) expansion joint element.

Consider mid-point of expansion joint as a line of support - This option switch allows the expansion joint to be considered as a line of support in determining the unsupported length in the external pressure calculations for shell, shell bands and expansion joint elements between the tubesheets. Additional investigation may be necessary to prove the expansion is adequate to serve as a line of support. COMPRESS does not perform any calculations to prove the adequacy of the expansion joint as a line of support.



Location

This option to specify the expansion joint location is only available for kettle type exchangers. Default values for the expansion joint outside diameter and distance from tubesheet are assigned when the location is changed.

Number of Elements

Elements - Enter the number of flanged and flued elements (either 2, 4, or 6 elements). The expansion joint sketch changes to depict the number of elements selected. The geometry may be any combination of cylinders and annular plates with out without knuckle radii at their junctions.



Element #

Each flexible shell element must be defined and may have varying geometries, thickness, and/or material. Select each element from the picture and define each element using the following inputs: Note that the following inputs apply to the current flexible shell element selected from the picture in the dialog. For example, click on the first flexible shell element in the picture and the text will change to "Element #1" with the following inputs applicable to element #1 only.

Description - Enter the description for the individual element. The description will appear in the output report.

FSE Thickness (te) - Enter the nominal thickness of the flexible shell element as indicated in TEMA Figure RCB-8.21.

Inner Knuckle - Activate this switch if an inner knuckle radius is present and input the following:

Ra - Enter the inner knuckle radius. The radius specified should be greater than or equal to three times the element thickness (te).

fa - Enter the length of the straight portion of the knuckle from the knuckle tangent line to the intersection with the main shell or added inner cylinder (see TEMA Figure RCB-8.21).



Outer Knuckle - Activate this switch if an outer knuckle radius is present and input the following:

Rb - Enter the outer knuckle radius. The radius specified should be greater than or equal to three times the element thickness (te).

fb - Enter the length of the straight portion of the knuckle from the knuckle tangent line to the intersection with the adjoining element or added outer cylinder (see TEMA Figure RCB-8.21).

Material - Enter the material for the flexible shell element. Each element may be a different material. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials

Fatigue Factor (Kg) - When the Calculate Cycle Life option is active, enter the fatigue strength reduction factor (Kg) used in the ASME VIII-1 Appendix 5-3(c) maximum expansion joint life calculation. The Kg factor accounts for geometric stress concentration due to local thickness variations, weld geometry, and other surface conditions. The range of Kg is from 1.0 to 4.0 where the minimum applies to smooth geometries and the maximum applies to sharp corners and fillet welds. Per Appendix CC(3), a Kg equal to 1.0 may be used for elements where the knuckle and flue radius are equal to or greater than three times the corresponding joint thickness and where the knuckle and flue meet all the design conditions, fabrication, and examination requirements of Appendix CC. For flanged only elements, a Kg = 4.0 is recommended at the element-to-shell weld. The maximum range of stress (Sn) is determined from evaluating each individual point where the maximum cylindrical element stresses (Scl) occur. See TEMA RCB-8-83 Note (4) for the definition of maximum stress points. The maximum stress range is taken at an individual point over the complete range of load cases as the fatigue factor times the summation of the maximum tensile stress and the absolute value of the maximum compressive stress. For example, say at point x = la (see TEMA Figure RCB-8.22), the maximum tensile stress (Scl, outer fiber) from all load cases is 50,000 psi. If the maximum compressive stress (Scl, outer fiber) from all load cases at point x = la is -40,000 psi, then the maximum stress range would be Kg (50,000 psi + 40,000 psi) = Kg (90,000 psi). Depending on the point at which the maximum stress range occurs, the fatigue factor may need to be modified if elements exist where one end has a radius and the other is a sharp juncture. Of course in this situation, a fatigue factor of 4.0 could be used conservatively with the assumption that the maximum stress range will occur at the sharp juncture.

Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the expansion joint element as depicted in the



picture in the dialog (also see TEMA Figure RCB-8.21). The outer diameter input must be input for all odd number elements. For the even number elements, this input field is read-only and the value displayed equals the outer diameter input for the previous element.

Inner Diameter (G) - Enter the inner diameter of the element (see TEMA Figure RCB-8.21). For the first and last elements, this input field is always read-only and displays the inner diameter of the main shell. For the second element in a 4 element expansion joint and the fourth element in a 6 element expansion joint, the inner diameter must be input and may vary from the main shell diameter.

Copy Values to Next Element - Use this option to copy the inputs from a previous element to the current element. For example, a 6 element expansion joint can easily be created by entering the values for the first element, and then selecting this option 5 times. This would create a expansion joint with 6 uniform elements.

Outer Cylinder \ Inner Cylinder

Activate the Outer Cylinder or Inner Cylinder switch to include a cylinder welded between two flexible elements. The optional outer cylinder inputs are available for flexible elements 1, 3, and 5. The optional inner cylinder inputs are available for flexible elements 2, 4, and 6.

Thickness, to and ti - Enter the thickness of the outer or inner cylinder as applicable (see TEMA Figure RCB-8.21).

Length, lo and li - Enter the length of the outer cylinder or inner cylidner welded to the flexible shell element as applicable. When two flexible elements are joined by a cylinder, the cylinder length lo or li is half of the actual cylinder length.

Material - Enter the material for the outer or inner cylinder as applicable. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials



Longitudinal Seam RT - Select the radiograph to be applied to the longitudinal seams of the expansion joint. If the elements are seamless, select Seamless No RT from the list. This input combined with the Circumferential Seam RT input is used in the evaluation of the straight flange sections between flexible elements per ASME Appendix 5-3(g).

Circumferential Seam RT - Select the radiograph to be applied to the circumferential seams of the expansion joint. This input combined with the Longitudinal Seam RT input is used in the evaluation of the straight flange sections between flexible elements per ASME Appendix 5-3(g).



Bellows Expansion Joint Bellows Design Conditions This page of the Heat Exchanger dialog is used to specify the configuration type of a bellows expansion joint and the materials of its subcomponents.

Show material properties - Inputs displayed when clicking Show material properties are similar to those seen in previous pages such as Tubesheet Design Conditions.

Collar Present - Check this box to add a collar to the expansion joint. Bellows Type - Choose whether this is an Unreinforced, Reinforced, or Toroidal Bellows. Reinforcing Type - A Reinforced Bellows may have either Reinforcing Fasteners or Integral Reinforcing Rings.

Integral Reinforcement Type - Bellows with Integral Reinforcing Rings may have either Hollow Tube or Solid Bar rings.

Ring Material - The Ring Material selection input is available when the Reinforced Bellows option is specified.



Fastener Material - If Reinforcing Fasteners is selected, the Fastener Material selection input is available.

Expansion Joint page This page of the Heat Exchanger dialog is used to specify the sizing and configuration details for an ASME VIII Appendix 26 bellows-type expansion joint.

The image above depicts the dialog for an unreinforced bellows expansion joint with collar. The sketch in the upper left-hand corner of the dialog changes dependent upon the bellows configuration that was specified on the Bellows Design Conditions page.

Distance to tubesheet - Enter the distance from the expansion joint to the shell side face of the front tubesheet.

Identifier - Enter a description for the expansion joint. The description will appear in the output report.



Thickness of ply, t - Enter the thickness of the bellows section. Total ply thickness is subject to the limit specified in ASME Section VIII Appendix 26 (n * t less than or equal to 0.2")

Pitch, q - Enter the pitch of the bellows section. Height, w - Enter the height of the bellows section. Mean Radius, r - Enter the radius of the bellows section. Diameter, Db - Enter the diameter of the bellows section. Convolutions, N - Enter the number of convolutions present in this expansion joint. Annealed checkbox - Specify whether or not the material shown is annealed. The material may be changed on the Bellows Design Conditions page of the Heat Exchanger dialog.

Number Plies, n - Enter the number of plies for this expansion joint. End Length Tangent, Lt - Enter the length of the bellows section end tangent. Fatigue Factor, Kg - Enter the fatigue factor. Convolution to Weld Length, Ld - Enter the convolution to weld length. The root and crest radii can be specified for unreinforced and reinforced bellows when the option is activated.

Root Inner Radius, rir - Enter the root inner radius. Crest Inner Radius, ric - Enter the crest inner radius. Cylinder Forming Details - Select the cylinder forming details. Forming Method - Select the forming method. Material Type for Yield Strength Multiplierg - Select the material type for the yield strength multiplier.

Collar If a collar is specified in the Bellows Design Conditions page, the following inputs become available:



Thickness, tc - Enter the thickness of the collar. Length, Lc - Specify the length of the collar. Longitudinal Joint Efficiency Collar, Cwc - Specify the joint efficiency of the collar weld. Cross Sectional Area, Atc - Specify the cross sectional area of the collar. This input is only available for toroidal bellows type expansion joints.

Reinforced Bellows Additional inputs appear when reinforced bellows of different types (fastener, hollow bar, or solid bar) are selected. If a reinforced bellows type is selected that has reinforcing fasteners, the following inputs are present on the Expansion Joint page:

Area, Atc - Enter the area value. Mean Diameter, Dc - Enter the mean diameter value. Longitudinal Joint Efficiency Reinforcement Ring, Cwr - Specify the joint efficiency of the reinforcement ring weld.



Effective Length Reinforcement Fastener, Lf - Enter the fastener effective length value. Bolting inputs - Specify the reinforcement fastener bolt size and type. The Bolt Look Up tool is available to assist in sizing.

Reinforcement Outer Diameter - Enter the outer diameter of the reinforcement. This input is used for both reinforcing fasteners and reinforcing rings type bellows.

Reinforcement Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter of the reinforcing ring. This input is only used for hollow reinforcing rings type bellows.

Longitudinal Joint Efficiency Reinforcement Ring, Cwr - Specify the joint efficiency of the reinforcement ring weld.

Cross Sectional Area of One Reinforcement Ring, Ar - Enter the cross-sectional area of the reinforcing ring. This input is used only for reinforcing fasteners type bellows.

Toroidal Bellows

If the Toroidal Bellows type is selected, it can be attached externally or internally. The available inputs change when the Toroidal Bellows option is selected:



Mean Toroidal Radius, r - Enter the average radius of the toroidal convolution. Mean Diameter of Toroidal Convolutions, Dm - Enter the distance from the center of the toroidal convolution to the centerline of the vessel.

Toroidal Attachment Weld Spacing, Lw - Enter the spacing of attachment welds. Axial Displacement, Compression - Enter the axial displacement from compression. Axial Displacement, Extension< - Enter the axial displacement from extension. Shell Area, Ats - Enter the shell area. This only applies to internally attached types.



Tubesheets Shear Related Inputs

Activate this option to input the tube layout perimeter and area. These values will be used in the TEMA RCB-7.133 tubesheet shear calculations if shear is a controlling factor (i.e. if P/S < 1.6 (1 - do / pitch)2 ). Typically, tubesheet shear calculations are not required per the TEMA rules. When shear calculations are required, COMPRESS automatically calculates conservative area and perimeter values based on the shell ID minus the tube OD. The assumed values are used in the tubesheet shear calculations and a deficiency is returned to alert the designer of this assumption. To override the assumed area and perimeter values, activate the switch and input the required values.

Perimeter, C - Enter the perimeter (length) for the tube layout measure stepwise in increments of one tube pitch from the center-to-center distance of the outermost tubes. See TEMA Figure RCB-7.133 for a typical example of a triangular and square tube layout pattern.

Enclosed Area - Enter the total area enclosed by the perimeter of the tube layout.

Tube Layout Pattern

Select the layout pattern of the tube. Triangular (30°), Rotated Triangular (60°), Square (90°), and Rotated Square (45°) tube patterns are available and are shown below. See TEMA Figure RCB2.4 for more information. If the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout then this input will not be active and the Tube Layout program must be used to change this value.



Front Tubesheet

Total Area of Untubed Lanes (AL ) - Enter the total area of untubed lanes where AL = UL1 *LL1 + UL2 *LL2 + ... (limited to 4*Do *p). See ASME VIII-1 UHX Figure UHX-11.2 for further guidance. Note that this was added in the ASME VIII-1 2004 Edition.

Thickness - Enter the nominal thickness of the front tubesheet. The tubesheet thickness input is the actual uncorroded tubesheet thickness. Inputs for the shell side corrosion, tube side corrosion allowance, tube side pass partition gasket groove depth, and shell and tube side gasket groove depths are available and automatically considered if applicable. If a shell side longitudinal baffle groove is present, the nominal tubesheet thickness must be compensated for manually as currently this is not available as an input.

Outer Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the front tubesheet. The tubesheet outer diameter input is only available for certain tubesheet configurations. For example, if the shell side and tube side tubesheet configuration are set to Integral , this input is not available and the tubesheet outer diameter is set equal to the maximum of the shell or channel outer diameter.

Shell Side Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance acting on the shell side of the tubesheet.



Tube Side Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance acting on the tube (channel) side of the tubesheet.

MDMT - Enter the minimum design metal temperature for the front tubesheet. Impact test evaluation and MDMT rating are in accordance with ASME VIII-1.

Tube Side Pass Groove Depth - Enter the maximum tube side pass partition groove depth in the tubesheet. The tube side pass partition groove is used in determining the effective tubesheet thickness (defined for TEMA designsin RCB-7.12).

Impact Tested - Activate this option if the front tubesheet material is impact tested. When active, the impact test temperature may be changed by selected the button control that appears to the right of this switch. Note that the same impact test temperature is used for all impact tested materials in a heat exchanger file.

Material Normalized - Activate this option if the front tubesheet material is normalized. Typically for carbon and low alloy materials, a lower tubesheet MDMT rating is obtained if the tubesheet material is normalized and produced to a fine grain.

Produced to Fine Grain Practice - Activate this option if the front tubesheet material is produced to a fine grain practice.

PWHT Performed - Activate this option if the front tubesheet is post weld heat treated. For carbon and low alloy materials, providing a PWHT when not otherwise a requirement of VIII-1 will lower the MDMT rating by 30° F per UCS-68(c).

Configuration Simple Support Calculation Option For ASME tubesheet designs starting with the 2007 Edition there is a switch to specifiy that the simply supported tubesheet calclation option from UHX-12.6, UHX-13.9 or UHX-14.7 be used.

Shell Side The front tubesheet configuration is defined using the available tubesheet attachment options. For example, to define a tubesheet integral with both the shell and channel, select Integral for both the Shell Side and Tube Side . To define a tubesheet configuration where the tubesheet is sandwiched between a shell side and tube side flange, select Gasketed for both the Shell Side and Tube Side . The tubesheet configuration defined is displayed in the sketch on the dialog. Integral - Select this option if the front tubesheet is integral\welded to the shell side cylinder. Gasketed - Select this option if the shell side of the front tubesheet is gasketed. Specify Flange - If the shell side of the tubesheet is gasketed, then the option to specify the



attached flange details is available by selecting this option. If the shell side flange is not specified, a weldneck flange with default values is automatically included. The shell side flange may be modified after the exchanger is created.

Tube Side Integral - Select this option if the front tubesheet is integral\welded to the tube (channel) side cylinder. Gasketed - Select this option if the tube (channel) side of the front tubesheet is gasketed. Specify Flange - If the shell side of the tubesheet is gasketed, then the option to specify the attached flange details is available by selecting this option. If the shell side flange is not specified, a weldneck flange with default values is automatically included. The shell side flange may be modified after the exchanger is created. Note: For a fixed/stationary heat exchanger the tubesheet configuration integral on the tubeside and gasketed on the shell side is not permitted.

Tubesheet extended as This option is available when either the Shell Side or Tube Side tubesheet attachment detail is assigned as Gasketed with the opposite side assigned as Integral . Flange - Select this option if the front tubesheet is extended as a flange (i.e. the attached flange is bolted to a integral tubesheet flanged extension). Stub End - Select this option if the front tubesheet provides a mating surface for gasket seating but not a flanged extension for bolting (i.e. acts as like a lap joint stub end).

Gasket Groove Depth - Enter the gasket groove depth on the gasketed side of the tubesheet. This value is used in determining the TEMA effective tubesheet thickness and in the ASME A05 Addenda UHX-9 tubesheet flanged extension required thickness check.



Tube Related Inputs

Tube Hole Count - Enter the number of holes in one tubesheet. For U-Tube heat exchangers, there are twice as many tube holes as there are tubes, but for all other types, the number of tube holes is equal to the number of tubes. If the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout then this input will not be active and the Tube Layout program must be used to change this value.

Tube Pitch - Enter the center-to-center distance between the tubes. TEMA RCB-2.5 list minimum tube pitch distances depending on the TEMA class definition. If the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout then this input will not be active and the Tube Layout program must be used to change this value.

Tube Passes - Enter the total number of passes for the tube side fluid. For example, the tube side fluid in a 2 tube pass exchanger enters the front channel and completes one pass by crossing through the portion of tubes segregated by a pass partition plate to the rear channel. Then, the second tube pass is completed when the tube side fluid returns to the front channel. If the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout then this input will not be active and the Tube Layout program must be used to change this value.

Radius to Outermost Tube Center - Enter the radius from the centerline of the exchanger to the centerline of the outermost tube row. This input is only required for ASME UHX heat exchanger designs.

Largest Center-to-Center Distance Between Adjacent Tube Rows - Enter the maximum center-to-center distance between any two adjacent tube rows (defined as UL in UHX 11.3 of ASME 2004 Edition, A05 addenda). UL should not exceed four times the tube pitch. If a UL less than or equal to the tube pitch is input, the value is automatically changed to zero to prevent the effective tube pitch (p*) calculated per UHX-11.5.1from being less than the actual tube pitch (p). This input is only required for ASME UHX heat exchanger designs and is not available when designing to the ASME VIII-1 2004 Edition or later.

TEMA RCB-7.21 Tube Hole Diameter - Looks up tube hole diameters from the appropriate TEMA table. Choose from Standard Fit, Special Close Fit, or enter a user defined Custom Fit



value. In TEMA 7 and TEMA 8 this is from RCB-7.41.

Rear Stationary Tubesheet The rear tubesheet inputs are available for TEMA only designs when the option Allow Fixed Tubesheets of Differing Thickness is active. If this option is not active, the rear stationary tubesheet is always assumed to be identical to the front stationary tubesheet.

Rear Floating Tubesheet The floating tubesheet is the tubesheet that is free to move axially thereby eliminating the thermal expansion stresses associated with the expansion or contraction of the tubes.

Configuration - Select the floating tubesheet configuration from the available options. The configurations presented are dependent on the Floating Tubesheet Exchanger Type selected (see ASME Figure UHX-14.1 and Figure UHX-14.3).

Configuration A: Tubesheet integral



The integral tubesheet option is availble for floating tubesheet exchanger types: (a) - immersed floating head (b) - externally sealed floating head

Configuration B: Tubesheet gasketed, extended as a flange

The integral tubesheet option is availble for floating tubesheet exchanger type: (a) - immersed floating head

Configuration C: Tubesheet gasketed, not extended as a flange

The integral tubesheet option is availble for floating tubesheet exchanger types: (a) - immersed floating head For this floating tubesheet configuration, the shell side flange may be specified as an ASME B16.5/B16.47 standard flange, an ASME Appendix 2 flange, or a TEMA backing ring. The four TEMA backing ring styles shown in TEMA Figure RCB 5.141 are available for both ASME or TEMA heat exchanger designs. Style A

Style A is a split ring backing ring with a 45 degrees minimum and a 75 degrees maximum bevel that mates with a matching bevel in the tubesheet.



Style B

Style B is a split ring backing ring with an optional facing extension beyond the tubesheet OD. Note that no credit is taken for the optional facing height in the bending and shear calculations. Style C

Style C is a split key ring backing ring. Style D

Style D is a split ring backing ring with an optional facing extension beyond the tubesheet OD and extension with a 1/32" maximum clearance. Note that no credit is taken for the optional facing height and extension in the bending and shear calculations.

Configuration D: Tubesheet internally sealed

The integral tubesheet option is availble for floating tubesheet exchanger types: (c) - internally sealed floating tubesheet

Stepped Tubesheet



Stepped tubesheets allow the user to provide a design that will confine the gasket between the flange and tubesheet. Stepped tubesheets are generally designed in conjunction with flanges with a confined facing. The Specify Stepped Tubesheet button can be found next to the section where the tubesheet flanges are designed as shown in the image below.

Pressing the button opens the Stepped Tubesheet dialog where the user can specify the diameters and the depths of the stepped tubesheet.

Depending on the whether or not the tubesheet has a flanged extension or if the mating flange does not have a confined facing, some inputs may be inactive if it does not apply to the design. The details on the right hand side of the dialog assist the user with designing the stepped tubesheet based on the mating tubesheet flange data.



Channel Front Channel

Copy Shell Properties - Select this option to copy the shell dimensions (diameter, thickness, corrosion allowance, and MDMT) into the front channel input fields.

Specify Channel Flange & Cover- Select this option to specify the design details for the flange and cover. Select Appendix 2 Flange for a custom ASME Appendix 2 flange and UG-34



bolted cover or ASME B16.5/B16.47 Flange for an ASME B16.5/B16.47 standard flange and blind. The design details do not have to be specified at this time as an Appendix 2 weld neck flange and UG-34 bolted cover are added to the exchanger by default. Modifications can be made later if desired. Note that this option is only present for a Channel Type or a Reducer channel selection.

Channel Type

This channel option provides a channel cylinder, flange, and bolted cover. The flange specified here is the flange on the channel end opposite the tubesheet. By default, a weld neck flange and bolted cover are automatically provided. To manually specify a custom flange and bolted cover, select the Specify Channel Flange & Cover option.

Reducer

This channel option provides a channel transition and ASME Appendix 2 flange. The flange specified here is the flange on the channel end opposite the tubesheet. By default, a weld neck flange is automatically provided. To manually specify a custom flange, select the Specify Channel Flange & Cover option. For horrizontal exchangers the option exists to specify the reducer as concentric. If this is not



selected then the reducer will be eccentric down. For vertical exchangers this option is not available as the reducers are required to be concentric. You may also specify cylinders on the large and small ends of the reducer by activating the Has Small/Large Reducer Cylinder options. Note that when a large reducer cylinder is present, its material is set on the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog, and the channel cone material is no longer restricted.

Bonnet Type

This channel option provides a channel cylinder and a head closure. The head closure options are as follows:

Ellipsoidal - An ellipsoidal head closure with a 2:1 head ratio is provided by default. Modification of the head ratio is permissible by editing the individual head component outside of the heat exchanger dialog.

F&D - A formed and dished head closure with a inside crown radius and knuckle radius. The diameter, thickness, crown radius and knuckle radius can be specified by the user. There is also a button to calculate default crown and knuckle radii based on the current diameter and thickness.

Hemispherical - A hemispherical head closure is provided with this option. Note that unless this option is used to specify the channel flange and cover, the channel flange material will default to the material assigned on the Defaults tab located in the Set Mode Options dialog. The material selection for heat exchanger flanges may be changed after the wizard creates the heat exchanger.



Bonnet Head

Material - Select the material for the bonnet (ellipsoidal head, F&D head, or hemispherical head). This option is not available if a Channel Type or Reducer channel type is specified. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials

Inner Diameter - Enter the inner diameter for the front channel. For a Bonnet Type channel, specify the inner diameter for both the bonnet and channel. If a Reducer channel is specified, then input the small end diameter of the reducer section. Note that the input description changes to Small End Inner Diameter. The large end inner diameter of the reducer section is set equal to the inner diameter of the shell (Tubes and Shell dialog).

Minimum Thickness - Enter the minimum thickness of the front bonnet head. Note that the head straight flange thickness is assigned to the thickness input. The straight flange nominal thickness may be changed by editing the head directly outside of the heat exchanger dialog.

Straight Flange Length - Enter the length of the integral head straight flange. If a straight flange is not present, then enter zero.

Crown Inner Radius- For a F&D bonnet closure, enter the inner crown radius. By default, the inner crown radius is set to the head outer diameter minus 6 inches.

Knuckle Inner Radius- For a F&D bonnet closure, enter the inner knuckle radius. By default, the inner knuckle radius is set to 6 percent of the head outer diameter.

Default Radii- Select this option to reset the F&D head closure inner crown and knuckle radii to the default values. The inner crown radius default is the head outer diameter minus 6 inches. The inner knuckle radius default is 6 percent of the head outside diameter.

Head straight flange is the channel cylinder- Activate this option if the straight flange on the head closure constitutes the complete channel cylinder (i.e. there is not a separate channel



cylinder welded to the head closure). When this option is activate, the Channel Length input is not available.

Head connected to channel cylinder with body flanges- This option allows the head to be connected to the channel cylinder via body flanges.

Channel

Material- The front channel cylinder material is echoed in this dialog for reference. The front channel material is input in the Tube Side Design Conditions dialog.

Inner Diameter- Input the inner diameter for the front channel cylinder. Note that if the cylinder is made from pipe, a Select Pipe option is available to select a standard pipe size and schedule.

Thickness- Input the nominal thickness for the front channel cylinder. Channel Cylinder Length - Enter the length of the channel cylinder. This input is for the cylindrical channel component only and does NOT include any length from channel flanges. This option is not available if the option Channel cylinder is integral with the head option is active.

Inner Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the inside of the channel cylinder\reducer and head closure. For a Bonnet Type channel, the inner corrosion specified applies to both the cylinder channel and the head closure. This input does not apply to channel flanges.

Outer Corrosion - Enter the corrosion allowance on the outside of the channel cylinder\reducer and head closure. For a Bonnet Type channel, the outer corrosion specified applies to both the cylinder channel and the head closure. This input does not apply to channel flanges.

Do Cover Deflection Calculations (RCB-9.21) - TEMA RCB-9.21 provides a method for calculation of the channel cover deflection for multipass units. Cover deflection consideration is not required for single pass channels or for channel covers that do not have a pass partition gasket



seal. For excessive cover deflections, some acceptable remedies are: Increase channel cover thickness by the cube root of the ratio of the calculated deflection to the recommended limit Addition of strong backs Change channel type construction See TEMA RGP-RCB-9.21 for additional information and limitations pertaining to the RCB9.21 calculation method.

Cover Deflection Limit - Enter the channel cover deflection limit. This option is available only if the option Do Cover Deflection Calculations (RCB-9.21) is active. Per RCB-9.21 the recommended cover deflection limit to prevent excessive leakage is: 0.03" (0.8 mm) or nominal diameters through 24" (610 mm) 0.125% of the nominal diameter (nominal diameter / 800) for larger sizes

Set Recommended Limit- Activate this button to have the cover deflection limit set to a recommended value.

Pass Groove Depth- Enter the pass groove depth for the channel.

Rear Channel\Floating Tubesheet Assembly For ASME UHX calculations, the front channel and rear channel are assumed to be identical. For this reason only the front channel is considered in the ASME UHX calculations regardless of what inputs are specified for the rear channel.



For fixed\stationary exchangers, these inputs apply to the rear channel. For floating tubesheet exchangers, these inputs apply to the floating tubesheet channel. The rear\floating channel options are identical to the Front Channel options except for the Copy Front End Properties option described below, and for a floating tubesheet channel the available closure types are as shown below.



Copy Front End Properties - This option copies the front channel inputs to the rear channel. Further modification of the rear channel inputs is allowed.



Do Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint Calculations

Activate the Do Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint Calculations option switch to evaluate the tube-totubesheet joint loads and welds. This option is only applicable for fixed\stationary tubesheet heat exchangers. Note that Appendix A may be used for partial strength welds to establish allowable loads when it is preferred to use smaller welds than required by UW-20. Note that the worst case tube-to-tubesheet load is assumed to occur at the periphery of the bundle. When UHX is selected, the actual tube-to-tubesheet load is based on the calculated axial tube stress determined from UHX-13.5.9 and the maximum tube-to-tubesheeet loads are determined per UW-20. The actual load is compared against the maximum load for all relevant design conditions and load cases. When Appendix A is selected, the maximum effective tube-to-tubesheet joint load is calculated per TEMA RCB-7.25, and the maximum axial load is determined per ASME VIII-1 Appendix A2. As TEMA RCB-7.25 only considers the tubes at the periphery of the bundle, the assumption is made that the peripheral tubes are the most highly stressed. For certain conditions of loading and/or geometry, additional consideration of the tube stress distribution throughout the tube bundle may be warranted (see TEMA RGP-RCB-7 for additional information).



UHX Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint Options

Select one of the five acceptable types of tube-to-tubesheet strength weld configurations shown in Figures UW-20.1 sketchs (a-d) and UHX-11.1 sketch (d).

UHX Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint Inputs

Weld Type - UW-20.2(a) defines a Full Strength Weld as one in which the design strength is = maximum allowable axial tube strength. By selecting Full Strength Weld, the requirements of UW-20.4 are enforced, and qualification by shear load testing is not required. UW-20.2(b) defines a Partial Strength Weld as a weld where the design strength is based on the mechanical and thermal axial tube loads (in either direction) that are determined from the actual design conditions. By selecting Partial Strength Weld, the requirements of UW-20.5 are enforced, and qualification by shear load testing is not required. Note that both strength weld selections provide



tube joint leak tightness.

Fillet Weld, Af - Input the leg size of the fillet weld attaching the tube to the tubesheet. This input is applicable for Figure UW-20.1 sketches (a), (c), and (d).

Groove Weld Size, Ag - Input the leg size of the groove weld attaching the tube to the tubesheet. This input is applicable for Figure UW-20.1 sketches (b), (c), and (d).

Weld Corrosion, Tube Side - Input the design corrosion allowance acting on the tube side of the weld. This input is the corrosion allowance applied the face of the weld perpendicular to the weld throat dimension. Note that this corrosion allowance input is only used in the tube-totubesheet calculations.

Weld Corrosion, Shell Side - Input the design corrosion allowance acting on the shell side of the weld. This input is the corrosion allowance applied the face of the weld perpendicular to the weld throat dimension. Note that this corrosion allowance input is only used in the tube-totubesheet calculations.

Appendix A Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint Options

Select the applicable tube-to-tubesheet joint type per ASME VIII-1 Appendix A Table A-2. Note: An expanded joint is produced by applying an expansion force inside the portion of the tube to be engaged in the tubesheet. The design temperature for an expanded joint should not be in the creep range (i.e. time-dependent) for the selected tubesheet or tube material. The maximum operating temperature should be limited such that the interface pressure due to expanding the



tube at joint fabrication plus the interface pressure due to differential thermal expansion does not exceed 58 percent of the smaller of the tube or tubesheet yield strength as listed in ASME Section II, Part D, Table Y-2 for the operating temperature,.

Expanded Length - Enter the length of the expanded portion of the tube for tube-to-tubesheet joint types (k) and (h). For TEMA exchanger designs, see TEMA RCB-7.5 for specific requirements regarding minimum expansion lengths.

Factor fr determined by test per A-3 and A-4 - Activate this option if the joint efficiency is determined from test results in accordance with ASME VIII-1 Appendix A-4 or as tabulated in Appendix A Table A-2. For tube-to-tubesheet joint type (b-1) this option is automatically activated, and factor fr(test) must be input (see ASME VIII-1 Table A-2 note (2)).

Factor fr - Input the joint efficiency factor for the tube-to-tubesheet joint determined per test results in accordance with ASME VIII-1Appendix A-4 or Table A-4. The joint efficiency factor should be less than 1.0.

Interface Pressure Po - Interface pressure between the tube and tubesheet that remains after expanding the tube at fabrication. This input must be greater than or equal to zero. The combination of tube and tubesheet material used has a pronounced affect on the interface pressure Po. A method for calculating the residual contact pressure is outlined in Mechanical Design Of Heat Exchangers And Pressure Vessel Components by Singh and Soler in section 7.8.

Interface Pressure PT - Interface pressure between the tube and tubesheet due to differential thermal growth. This input can be any number (negative, positive or zero).



Pass Partitions Front Pass Partition Present

Material - Select the material for the front pass partition plate using the pull-down list. The material selection is used to determine the allowable tensile stress used in the pass partition required thickness determination per TEMA RCB-9.132.

Copy 'm' and 'y' from front channel flange gasket - Select this option to copy the front tube side flange gasket factor m and gasket factor y from to the front pass partition plate gasket factor inputs. Optionally, the front pass partition gasket factors may be input manually. Gasket factors are listed in ASME VIII-1 Appendix 2 Table 2-5.1 or as specified by the gasket manufacturer.

Gasket Factor m - Enter the front pass partition plate gasket factor. Gasket Factor y - Enter the front pass partition plate minimum seating stress. Effective Seating Width br - Enter the total effective seating width of all of the front pass partition plates. If only one pass partition plate is present, then the effective seating width is as depicted in the figure below.



Total Rib Length rl - Enter the total length of the front pass partition plates. In the figure above, the length of the pass partition plate is the length in/out of the page (e.g. the diameter of the channel cylinder).

Edge Support - Select the type of edge support for the front pass partition plate as depicted in TEMA Table RCB-9.132. Immediately above this input in the dialog, the recommended edge support is listed based on the front channel type selection. General rule is as follows: Channel type front channel - Long sides fixed & short sides simply supported. Bonnet type front channel - Three sides fixed & one side simply supported.

Calculate 'a' and 'b' from front channel dimensions - Select this option for an automatic calculation of the front pass partition plate dimensions 'a' and 'b' as depicted in TEMA Table RCB-9.132. If the Long Sides Fixed edge support option is selected, then the 'a' dimension is automatically set to the front channel length, and the 'b' dimension is automatically set to the front channel inner diameter minus a 0.0625" for fit-up purposes. If the Three Sides Fixed edge support option is selected, then the 'a' dimension is automatically set to the front channel inner diameter minus a 0.0625" for fit-up purposes, and the 'b' dimension is automatically set to the summation of the front channel length, straight flange length, and head depth. Note that the automatic calculation of the 'a' and 'b' dimensions can be used to get an idea of the approximate lengths, and then further modification can be made to the length values.

Dimension a - Enter the front channel dimension 'a' as depicted in TEMA Table RCB-9.132. For a Long Sides Fixed edge support, dimension 'a' is the total length from the gasketed end at the tubesheet face to the gasketed end at the end closure. For a Three Sides Fixed edge support, dimension 'a' is the inside diameter of the front channel minus the fit-up distance on each side of the partition plate.

Dimension b - Enter the front channel dimension 'b' as depicted in TEMA Table RCB-9.132. For a Long Sides Fixed edge support, dimension 'b' is the inside diameter of the front channel minus the fit-up distance on each side of the partition plate.



For a Three Sides Fixed edge support, dimension 'b' is the total length from the gasketed end at the tubesheet face to the inside of the head (depth direction).

Pressure Drop q - Enter the pressure drop across the front pass partition plate. Thickness - Enter the minimum (new) front pass partition plate thickness. The minimum thickness is determined per TEMA RCB-9.132 and reported in the dialog next to this input. If the Tube Layout program has been used to create a tube layout and the pass partition thickness entered in the Tube Layout program is sufficient then this value will be provided by the Tube Layout program. The user can still update the value in this dialog. If the thickness is changed then the Tube Layout program should be re-run.

Total Corrosion - Enter the total corrosion allowance acting on both sides of the front pass partition plate.

Fillet Weld Leg Size - Enter the front pass partition plate fillet weld leg size. The minimum fillet weld leg size is determined per TEMA RCB-9.133 and reported in the dialog next to this input.

Rear Pass Partition Present The rear pass partition plate input descriptions are identical to the front pass partition plate input descriptions.



Nozzles The nozzle dialog quickly adds nozzles to a heat exchanger by using the automated nozzle design feature. The nozzle inputs available are intended to cover the most typical nozzle designs. Some limitations follow: All nozzles created are radial to the vessel surface All nozzles will be the same type. For example, all nozzles will be pipe with the same ASME B16.5 flange type (e.g.. weldneck) or all nozzles will be long welding necks or heavy barrel connections. All nozzles created will have the same type of ASME B16.5 flange attached as specified on the Nozzles 2 tab by selecting the Nozzle Preferences option in the Set Mode Options. Inlet and outlet nozzles with optional vent & drain connections are available for both the tube side and shell side. The nozzles are places in logical locations based on the shell type and number of tube passes. After the exchanger is created, it is permissible to modify existing nozzles and add/delete nozzles. For example, a nozzle designed with the wizard may be altered to a hillside connection after the exchanger is created. Additionally, nozzle details (diameter, wall thickness, reinforcement, position, etc.) may be modified. Note that many of the nozzle inputs are set with default values. The default values can be changed with the nozzle preferences selection.

Tube Side

Inlet Nozzle - Activate this option to include a tube side inlet nozzle Location - Set the position of the inlet nozzle by selecting either Top (at 0°) or Bottom (at 180°).



Orientation - If the nozzle is located on a head, this will set the orientation of the nozzle. On Head - Check this box to have the nozzle automatically placed on the head. This checkbox is available if it is possible to place the nozzle on the channel head.

Nominal Pipe Size - Select the nominal pipe size of the inlet nozzle from the pull-down list. The nominal pipe sizes available in the drop down are dependent on the default flange type selected in the Nozzle Preferences\Nozzles 2 dialog and are filtered to show only the available sizes of the selected default flange. For example, if a socket welded flange is selected, then nominal pipe sizes up to 3 inches are shown as standard socket welded flanges are available only up to 3 inches.

Corrosion - Enter the inside corrosion allowance for the tube side inlet nozzle. Material - Select the material for the nozzle neck using the pull-down list. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials

Auxiliary Connections Auxiliary connections, typically used as pressure\temperature connections, are nozzles\couplings that are located on the tube side inlet and outlet nozzles. To include one or two auxiliary connections on the tube side inlet nozzle, activate one or both of the Aux. Connection 1 and Aux. Connection 2 switches. The following inputs are available only if an auxiliary connection is present.

Material - Select the material for the nozzle auxiliary connections attached to the tube side inlet nozzle using the pull-down list. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials

Coupling Type - Activate this option if the tube side inlet auxiliary connections are couplings/fittings. Activation of this switch forces the nozzle to be a type 5 nozzle in COMPRESS.

Nominal Size - Select the nominal size of the first and\or second auxiliary connection from the pull-down list.

Outlet Nozzle - The Outlet Nozzle input descriptions are identical to the Inlet Nozzle input descriptions except they apply to the tube side outlet nozzle.

Vent and Drain Vent and/or drain connections may be necessary depending on the exchanger configuration. A typical scenario is a one tube pass exchanger where the tube side fluid enters the front channel



through the tube side inlet nozzle located at 0°, passes through the tubes, and then exits through the tube side outlet nozzle located at 180° in the rear channel. For this example, typically a drain would be placed at 180° in the front channel and a vent would be placed 0° in the rear channel. To accomplish this in the wizard, the Vent and/or Drain switches merely needed to be activated and the following inputs entered. The wizard will place the vent and drain at the appropriate orientation based on the tube side inlet and outlet nozzle orientation selections. To include a vent and/or drain on the tube side, activate the Vent and/or Drain switch. The following inputs are available only if a vent and/or drain is present.

Material - Select the material for the tube side vent and drain using the pull-down list. See the tube material description in the tube side design conditions section for additional information regarding the availability of additional materials

Coupling Type - Activate this option if the tube side vent and drain are couplings/fittings. Activation of this switch forces the nozzle to be a type 5 nozzle in COMPRESS.

Nominal Size - Select the nominal size of the vent and/or drain from the pull-down list. Flange Gasket Description - Select the gasket type from the pull-down list for use with the tube side nozzle(s).

Shell Side The Shell Side nozzle inputs are identical to the tube side nozzle inputs.

Nozzle Preferences The nozzle preferences option opens to the Nozzles Defaults tab that contains default values used in the automatic nozzle creation process. More information about the options can be viewed on the Nozzle Defaults page.



HTRI Interface The HTRI Interface enables shell and tube heat exchanger files created through the HTRI Xchanger Suite software to be opened from within COMPRESS.

HTRI Interface Availability -- HTRI Xchanger Suite must be installed for the HTRI Interface features to be available.

HTRI Security Key -- An active HTRI security key must be present in order to use the HTRI Interface.

This dialog box is displayed when a feature that requires the HTRI software is used. If an active HTRI security key is not present, this dialog may take up to 5 minutes to close. Make sure to have a valid HTRI security key when using the HTRI Interface features. If COMPRESS detects that the HTRI Xchanger software is properly installed, the following features will be available from the HTRI Interface toolbar or the File=>HTRI Interface menu.

Open HTRI File -- This button will allow an HTRI file to be selected to open within COMPRESS

Set HTRI Interface Preference Values -- This button will open the HTRI Interface Preferences dialog .

Display HTRI Import Data -- This button will open the dialog that displays the HTRI File Import Values .

Perform a Thermal Rating on the Heat Exchanger -- This button uses the HTRI Xchanger software to rate the current exchanger. The updates to the original HTRI file are displayed as well as thermal rating values .

Save the current Exchanger as an HTRI File -- This button will allow the current heat exchanger to be saved as an HTRI Xchanger file. The file saved is the original HTRI file with all



of the updates listed when the thermal calculations are run.

HTRI files may also be opened by using the 'Open File' dialog and specifying "HTRI File (.htri)" as the file type.



HTRI Interface Preferences

This dialog is used to review and set the preference values that will be used when importing HTRI Xchanger files. The preference values are the values that are not explicitly set within HTRI Xchanger and will affect the mechanical design of the heat exchanger. Sets of default values may be saved in the .CWHD format.

Setting the Preference Values -- Preference values may be set simply by navigating through the tree view on the left hand side of the dialog to the desired category, then selecting the value in the list to the right. Pressing Enter or simply pressing a number will move the cursor to the edit box where the selected value may be changed.

Apply -- This closes the dialog and sets the preference values displayed to be used the next time an HTRI Xchanger file is opened.

Apply Value To Group -- Groups of corrosion allowances and MDMTs may be set all at once by changing one of the values, then clicking the 'Apply Value To Group' button.

File Name: -- The name of the file that stores all of the displayed preference values is displayed here.

Save File -- This button saves the set of preference values to the file displayed in the 'File Name'



box.

Save File As -- This allows the current set of preference values to be saved to a new file. Load File -- This allows a preference value file to be selected for editing or use. Reset Values -- This resets all of the preference values to their default values. Set Corrosions According to TEMA Class -- Clicking this will set the corrosion allowances to the TEMA standard based on the "TEMA Class" specified in the "General" category.

HTRI File Import Values

This dialog displays the values used to interface the HTRI file with COMPRESS. The values are separated into categories based on their function and how they were derived.

Show ALL -- Selecting "Show All" displays all values that would normally be used to create a heat exchanger in COMPRESS. The sub-categories correspond to the different pages in the Heat Exchanger Wizard and the colors of the values correspond with the legend shown in the bottom left.

Show Design Preferences -- This displays all of the preference values used to create the heat



exchanger. These preferences need to be specified before the HTRI Xchanger file is opened.

Show Calculated Results -- Selecting this displays key values that COMPRESS calculates. Although COMPRESS calculates many other values, these are design values that COMPRESS was able to optimize.

Show Design Assumptions -- This displays values that COMPRESS assumed based on the style and geometry of the heat exchanger. It also includes material properties.

Show Inputs Direct From HTRI File -- This displays values that are based directly on information extracted from the HTRI Xchanger file.

HTRI Interface Update Results

The HTRI Interface Update Results dialog displays the differences between the original HTRI file and the updated values used to run HTRI thermal calculations.

Messages: -- The "Messages" box displays any discrepancies found when updating the HTRI Xchanger file. Values that COMPRESS was not able to update may be investigated by saving the heat exchanger as an HTRI Xchanger file and troubleshooting with the HTRI software.



HTRI Exchanger Rating

The HTRI Exchanger Rating dialog displays key rating values that were calculated through the HTRI Xchanger software.

Original File Value -- The values displayed in this column are taken from the original HTRI file when it was first opened in COMPRESS.

Current Value -- These values are the current values calculated by the HTRI Xchanger software. They may have changed because of changes to the heat exchanger that were made manually or automatically. However, all changes that affect the HTRI Xchanger file are displayed in the HTRI Interface Update Results dialog.

Difference -- The values displayed in this column are the differences from the original file value to the current file value and may be displayed as a normal value or as a percentage by checking the "Display as Percentage" checkbox.



Set Mode Options The Set Mode Options dialog (F7) allows assignment of default inputs, calculation assumptions, and functionality options. These settings should be reviewed before starting the heat exchanger vessel wizard on the Exchanger Design page.



Weight Distribution The weights are calculated as detailed in the COMPRESS help file with the exception of some heat exchanger specific components as outlined below.

Tube Weight Exchanger Type

Vertical and / or Baffles

Horizontal no baffles

Fixed

weight distributed evenly between tubesheet locations

half of tube weight applied at each tubesheet location

UTube

weight distributed evenly between front tubesheet location and bottom of shell

all tube weight applied at tubesheet location

Floating

weight distributed evenly between front tubesheet location and bottom of shell or shell band

half of tube weight applied at each tubesheet location

Floating Tubesheet Weight Type

Tubesheet

Floating channel

Floating type (a)

tubesheet weight distributed on shell and / or rear shell channel at correct location

channel weight distributed on shell and / or rear shell channel at correct location

Floating type (b)

tubesheet weight distributed on shell and / or rear shell channel at correct location

channel weight added at bottom of shell

Floating type (c)

half of tubesheet weight added to bottom of N / A shell, half tubesheet weight added to top of rear channel

Baffles Baffles are handled the same way as trays, packed beds and rings.



Introduction to INSPECT Mechanical Integrity, Fitness For Service (FFS) Software INSPECT is specifically designed to help you make "run, repair or replace" decisions for your ASME pressure vessels and heat exchangers. The software tracks your inspection data, calculates remaining life and inspection schedules as well as performs API 579 Fitness for Service analysis. For more detailed information, visit our website to watch our videos:

Perform API 579 Fitness for Service Analysis For cases where your equipment is outside its original design conditions, INSPECT performs API 579 FFS analysis and provides "run, repair or replace" recommendations and supporting calculation reports. INSPECT performs Level 1 and 2 API 579 2007-1 assessments for: Part 3 - Brittle Fracture (prerequisite for Part 5 and 6) Part 4 - General Metal Loss Part 5 - Local Metal Loss (includes groove-like flaws) Part 6 - Pitting Corrosion INSPECT addresses supplemental loads for Part 5 and 6 as well as combined local metal loss and pitting. Additionally, FFS analysis may be performed on ASME B31.3 Piping. To support the detailed analysis required by API 579 and 510, INSPECT includes all underlying ASME calculations. For example, your equipment's minimum thicknesses (tmin) are calculated automatically by our built-in ASME Section VIII engine.

Prioritize Resources Using API 510 Once your inspection data is uploaded to INSPECT, use our API 510 capabilities to calculate the

INSPECT Help


remaining life and required inspection intervals for all of your vessels and exchangers. Inspection points requiring further API 579 analysis are highlighted on our 3D model with details available in reports. User-based permission controls manage who has access to view and modify your records.

Run"What If?" Remaining Life Analysis INSPECT offers the ability to perform "What If?" analysis. Determine if it's acceptable to de-rate equipment based on measured operating conditions and generate supporting calculations using our built-in ASME Section VIII engine. This results in significant savings when equipment life is extended and unnecessary shutdowns are avoided. The main API 510 features include: Inspection CMLs < 25 - 5 > API 510 Details API 510 Data Security < 25 - 19 > Projected Vessel State < 25 - 23 > Customize Inspection Report Vessel Data Chart < 25 - 26 >

INSPECT Help


API 510 Menu The API 510 features in INSPECT provide a means of recording vessel flaws and corrosion in order to predict the remaining vessel life. Thickness is measured and recorded at Condition Monitoring Locations (CMLs) during inspections and used to establish corrosion rates. This information is used to determine required inspection dates and to schedule future inspections. Important API 510 information, such as required and scheduled inspection dates, may be viewed for multiple vessels at once in a convenient pivot chart format via the Project Toolbar.

To get started, see the guide on how to use API 510 Features. Inspection CMLs < 25 - 5 > API 510 Details API 510 Data Security < 25 - 19 > Projected Vessel State < 25 - 23 > Customize Inspection Report Vessel Data Chart < 25 - 26 >

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 1 >

How to use the API 510 Features The API 510 features in INSPECT provide a means of recording vessel flaws and corrosion in order to predict the remaining vessel life. Thickness is measured and recorded at Condition Monitoring Locations (CMLs) during inspections and used to establish corrosion rates. This information is used to determine required inspection dates and to schedule future inspections. Important API 510 information, such as required and scheduled inspection dates, may be viewed for multiple vessels at once in a convenient pivot chart format via the Project Toolbar.

How to use the API 510 Features Create a New Maintenance Inspection It is important to have the vessel model as complete as possible before adding API 510 information to the model. To begin, select New Maintenance Inspection from the API 510 drop-down menu.

The New Inspection Dialog will be shown. The Inspection Date is the only required information at this point, the rest may be entered at a later time. Enter an Inspection Date and click Next.

Add CMLs to the Inspection The Inspection CMLs Dialog will now be displayed. This is where thickness measurements for all CMLs will be entered. There are four different ways of creating CMLs, which are described in detail here. Once the CMLs are created, enter in their thickness data into the Data Grid if you have not already done so, then click "OK". Inspection points should now be visible in the 3D view.

Generate a Data Collection Sheet This optional step allows Data Collection Sheets to be generated for inspectors to fill out in the field.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 2 >

Once CML locations are established, select the Generate Data Collection Sheet option from the API 510 menu. A printable Data Collection Sheet that contain tables indicating CML locations as well as 2D layout images of the vessel will be generated in PDF format.

Add Additional Inspections to establish a Corrosion Rate The full benefit of the API 510 features is not seen until thickness data for multiple inspections are entered. Once this is done, INSPECT will calculate the corrosion rate and a remaining life for each CML. New Inspections may also be added by using the API 510New Inspection menu item or by clicking the New Inspection button on the Inspection CMLs Dialog. INSPECT will now give the option to automatically copy the CML locations from the previous inspection, it is recommended that this be done in order to ensure that CMLs are placed in the same location for each inspection.

Enter Detailed Information Edit details via the Inspection CMLs Dialog by choosing the Inspection CMLs item from the API 510 menu, then selecting an item from the Input dislay option tab. All API 510 details for the equipment, every Inspection and every CML may be set here. An unlimited number of User Defined Fields, Notes, and Supporting Documents & Images may be added. This information is closely integrated with the Project Toolbar, as described later in this guide. For easier navigation, the information page for any CML may be accessed by through the Inspection CMLs Dialog by right clicking the CML in the Data Grid and choosing Edit CML Details. Likewise, Inspection may be accessed by double clicking the Inspection Date listed on the left hand side.

Create a Report It is important to remember that only the Active Inspection and its related CMLs will be reported. The Active Inspection is specified on the Inspection CMLs Dialog. Choose the Customize Inspection Report item from the API 510 menu. This will bring up the Customize Inspection Report Dialog. Use this dialog to choose which report sections you want included in the inspection report and also set the order in which they are reported. Click "OK" after customizing the report to the desired format. Now press F3 to generate the report. The report may take longer than normal depending on your system resources to generate due to the large number of calculations necessary to find the remaining vessel life. The Inspection Report is found under the name current Active Inspection.

Check your Answer Choose the Projected Vessel State item from the API 510 menu to open the Projected

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 3 >

Vessel State Dialog. This dialog allows you to save a copy of the vessel at its projected corroded state at any point in time. Use this to check the calculations at the vessel's actual thickness after inspections are performed. Also use it to check to see what deficiencies may have arisen between the vessel in its original design condition and its projected retirement date.

Protect your Data Click the Inspection Data Security item from the API 510 Menu, or click the lock in the top left corner of the Inspection CMLs Dialog. This will open the API 510 Data Access Dialog, which allows you to create and edit user accounts and set different permissions. This helps to ensure the integrity of the API 510 data, while still allowing the file to be viewed or edited by other users. More information on how to use this feature can be found here.

Organize and Manage Multiple Vessels The API 510 features have been integrated with the Project Toolbar in order to allow an organized and convenient way of sorting through vessel information and inspection schedules. Simply add vessel files that have API 510 information to a Project, then click the Inspection Data Summary button at the top of the Project Toolbar.

The Vessel Data Chart dialog will be opened, which is where a customizable set of important API 510API 510 information for each INSPECT file can be viewed and sorted in a convenient pivot chart form. An unlimited number of User Defined Fields for each vessel file may be displayed as well. More information on how to create user defined fields may be found here.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 4 >

Inspection CMLs Inspection CMLs Dialog The Inspection CMLs Dialog is where thickness measurements for all CMLs will be entered and where the calculation results can be viewed in a convenient grid format. Please note that INSPECT does not currently support placing CMLs on the following component types: Flanges Heat Exchanger Tubes Lift Lugs Saddles Straight Flanges (Coming Soon) Support Legs Support Lugs Tubesheets

Basic Layout (more details below)

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 5 >

Menu Items

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 6 >

Data Grid Any cell on the Data Grid may be edited while “Measured Thickness” is selected as the Display type by simply clicking the cell and typing the value, or by copying and pasting data from another spreadsheet. This includes the Elevation and Angular Location cells as well.

Entering CML thickness measurement data There are four different ways of creating CMLs in INSPECT: Manually Copy and paste from an Excel spreadsheet or a similar type Using the Automatic CML Population Dialog Using the Add Group of CMLs Dialog

Manually Adding CMLS Make sure that the Measured Thickness Display option from the Input tab is selected. Enter the Angular Location of the CML in the top row of the Data Grid and enter the elevation of the CML in the first column. To enter thickness data, simply enter the thickness into the appropriate cell. To add an additional angular location, simply enter an angle into the top right empty cell of the CML Data Grid. A new column will appear for the specified angular location. To add an elevation location, enter an elevation value into the bottom left empty cell of the CML Data Grid. A new row will appear for the elevation entered. If at any point a mistake is made while editing data in the CML grid, Undo and Redo buttons are available on the top toolbar. Ctrl+Z and Ctrl+Y may be used as well.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 7 >

Copy and Pasting CML thickness data Thickness data may be copied and pasted from an Excel spreadsheet or a similar type so long as the elevations are located in the left most column and the angular locations are located in the top row. For Example, to copy an entire grid of data from Excel, highlight the entire grid, right-click it and choose Copy.

Make sure that the Measured Thickness Display option is selected on the Inspection CMLs dialog, click the top left cell in the Data Grid , then press Ctrl+V or right-click and choose Paste. Smaller blocks of data may be pasted as well. Data can also be copied from INSPECT to another spreadsheet. Clicking the top left data cell will highlight the entire Data Grid . Pressing Ctrl+C will copy the data, where it may be pasted into an Excel spreadsheet or similar type of program.

Inspection List

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 8 >

The Inspection List shows the dates of all of the available inspections. Clicking an inspection causes the data for that inspection to be displayed in the data grid and makes it the Active Inspection. Only data for the Active Inspection will be reported when the calculations are run. Right-clicking an inspection gives the option to edit the details for that inspection or to delete it. Double-Clicking an inspection will allow you to edit the details for that inspection as well. All details for the selected inspection, including related images and files may be edited.

Equipment Details Select the Equipment Details display option on the Input tab. An unlimited number of User Defined Fields , Notes , and Supporting Documents & Images may be added. If the vessel file is included in the current project in the Project Toolbar , this dialog will keep the Related Files and User Defined Fields in sync with the project.

Use the UG-116 Required Markings section to set the pressures and temperatures that will be used in the remaining life calculations. For more information click here . Most fields may be left blank. If a field is not blank, then it will be included in the inspection report. Clicking different tabs at the top of the dialog will show different pages of information for each item.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 9 >

A new drop-down style edit box is used for many fields that will receive the same information repetitively. This drop-down box will remember what was previously entered so that it does not have to be typed out again. Dates may be entered by typing directly into the edit box or by clicking the arrow on the right side of the edit box to bring up a calendar. User Defined Fields , Notes , and Supporting Documents & Images may be entered for the equipment.

Inspection Schedule This tab is only available when the Equipment Details display option is selected from the Info tab. This is is where the upcoming inspections may be scheduled and the vessel retirement date may be set. The scheduled inspection dates for multiple vessels may be viewed and sorted by using the Vessel Data Chart , which is available through the Project Toolbar

Retirement Date This date will be used in the reports and displayed in the Vessel Data Chart . Inspection Interval The inspection interval for next thickness, internal, and external inspections may be set by either entering the desired length of time in years months and days, or by typing in a date in the Next

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 10 >

Inspection edit box. The date or length of time will be updated, depending on which way the inspection interval was set. This data will be displayed in the Vessel Data Chart as well.

User Defined Fields An unlimited number of User Defined Fields may be created here. A User defined field can be text, a checkbox, a number, or a date.

Equipment Details User Defined Fields are available as sortable items in the Vessel Data Chart . When a User Defined Field is created for an Inspection, that User Defined Field is available for all Inspections. User Defined CML Fields behave in the same way. Add Field Clicking this button brings up the User Defined Field dialog.

Enter a label and choose the type of information that the User Defined Field will contain

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 11 >

Remove Field Remove a User Defined Field by clicking that field in the grid above, then click Remove Field Save as Default Fields This will make the current set of User Defined Fields the default for when new vessels are created. If Equipment Details is currently selected, this will be the default set of Equipment Details User Defined Fields. The same applies to User Defined Inspection Fields and User Defined CML Fields.

Notes An unlimited number of notes may be added for the equipment, any Inspection, or any CML. Notes will be included in the report.

Click Add Note to create a new note. Edit the Label and Note directly in the table above. If more space is required, right-click the note in the table and select Edit Note in Large Window .

Related Files An unlimited number of notes may be added for the equipment, any Inspection, or any CML. This makes files easy to organize and keep track of by storing their location and automatically including them in the current project.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 12 >

Right-clicking any file will bring up the options to Open File , Open Containing Folder , Remove the file, or Browse for File to select a different file. Add File Clicking Add File will bring up a file browse dialog to select the desired file. Alternatively, file paths may be edited directly in the table above. Include Images in the Report Any image file will be shown next to its related item in the report. Include Images in the Report Any image file will be shown next to its related item in the report. Automatically add files to current Project If the current INSPECT (.CW7) file is included in the current project, this option will add all related files to the current project and organize them in the appropriate folders. See the example below.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 13 >

Inspection Details Page (Also the New Inspection Dialog) Basic details for an inspection are entered here. This is displayed when creating a new inspection as well as for editing existing inspections.

Only the Inspection Date field and type of inspection performed are required. The rest of the information will be included in the report if entered. User Defined Fields , Notes , and Supporting Documents & Images may be entered for each individual Inspection. Inspections Performed Check which types of inspections were performed for this inspection. This information will be used in determining the next required Thickness, Internal or External inspection date. Inspection Name Enter a name for the inspection. A name is not required, but if one is entered then it will be used as the title of the inspection report. Inspection Date This is the date that the inspection was performed. The date entered here will be used with the measured thicknesses taken during the inspection to establish corrosion rates. Note that clicking the arrow on the right hand side of this input will bring up a calendar that makes choosing a date easier. Report ID This is only used for reporting purposes and is not required. Condition

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 14 >

General condition of the vessel. This input uses the auto-complete input as well. It is only used for reporting purposes and is not required. Inspection Company Name of the inspection company. This input uses the auto-complete input as well. It is only used for reporting purposes and is not required. Description Brief description of the inspection. This is only used for reporting purposes and is not required. New Equipment Check this box if the vessel is new at the time of the inspection. Service Change Check this box if the vessel is now used in a different service than it was during the previous inspection. Note that if a Service Change is specified for an inspection, the thickness measurements from previous inspections are no longer used in the corrosion rate determination. In this case, a User Defined Corrosion Rate may be utilized. Comments Enter any comments that should appear in the report for this inspection. This is not required.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 15 >

CML Details

Select the CML in the grid above to display and edit its details. Basic details for any CML may be edited here. Like the Equipment and Inspection details; User Defined Fields , Notes , and Supporting Documents & Images may be entered for each individual CML. Only the Inspection Date field and type of inspection performed are required. The rest of the information will be included in the report if entered.

UG-116 Required Markings Enter the pressures and temperatures that will be displayed on the vessel nameplate or markings as per UG-116. These will be the pressures and temperatures used to determine the remaining life of the vessel.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 16 >

This dialog is only displayed while creating the initial inspection. Afterwards, the data may be viewed / edited via the Equipment Details display option on the Inspection CMLs dialog .

MAWP / MAEP Design P as input - The design pressure for each individual component will be used. Calculated Chamber MAWP / MAEP - The calculated chamber MAWP / MAEP for each chamber will be used. User Defined - Enter a user defined pressure that will be used for every component in the vessel.

@ Internal / External Temperature Design T as input - The Internal / External design temperature for each individual component will be used. User Defined - Enter a user defined temperature that will be used for every component in the vessel.

Add Group of CMLs This dialog will add evenly spaced CMLs to cylinders, transitions, and skirts.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 17 >

Number of Rows: Specify the number of CML elevation locations to be added to the vessel. Starting Elevation: The first CML elevation added to the vessel will start here. This is to be specified as the distance from the datum line. Elevation Increment: The CML elevations will be spaced out by the specified distance. Number of Columns: Specify the number of CML Angular Locations to be added to the vessel. Starting Angle: The first CML Angular Location will be added at this angle. Angular Increment: The following CML Angular Locations to be added will be spaced out at this increment. Clicking the top left data cell will highlight the entire Data Grid . Pressing Ctrl+C will copy the data, where it may be pasted into an Excel spreadsheet or similar type of program. To enter thickness data, make sure that the Measured Thickness Display option is selected, then simply enter the thickness into the appropriate cell. Image

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 18 >

API 510 Data Security This feature helps to ensure the integrity of API 510 data while still allowing the file to be viewed or edited by other users. This is done by creating individual user accounts that have certain permissions set by an administrator.

Data Security Dialog

Check the box to restrict access to API 510 data. This box may be un-checked at any time by an administrator to remove all data access restrictions from the file. Users will not be able to edit the API 510 data for that file unless they are logged in as a user that has the required permissions. If an administrator account has never been created for the file, checking this box will require an administrator account to be created. Enter the user name and password for an administrator account. Change Log In... This will allow you to change the Active Account and log in as a different user. Manage Accounts... This will open the API 510 User Accounts Dialog, where user accounts may be edited, created, or deleted for the currently open file.

API 510 User Accounts Dialog This dialog is available for Administrators to add, edit, or delete user accounts.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 19 >

Add... This will create a new account. Remove This will delete the currently selected account. Edit Account... This will open a dialog that allows the User Name and Password to be changed for the currently selected account.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 20 >

Data Collection Sheet INSPECT can generate a set of Data Collection Sheets for inspectors to fill out in the field. Data Collection Sheets are fully customizable and contain tables indicating CML locations as well as 2D layout images of the vessel. To use this feature, select the Generate Data Collection Sheet option from the API 510 menu.

Select Inspection for Data Collection Sheet

The CML locations from the selected inspection will be used as the basis for the Data Collection Sheet . An inspection that already has thickness measurements may be used if CMLs should be measured at the same locations.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 21 >

Customize Data Collection Sheet

Use this dialog to customize which sections will be included in the Data Collection Sheet . Click OK to generate the Data Collection Sheet and launch it in a printable PDF format.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 22 >

Projected Vessel State This feature saves a copy of the vessel in its projected state on any given date based on corrosion rates established by previous inspections.

Use this to check the calculations at the vessel's actual thickness after inspections are performed. Also use this to check to see what deficiencies may have arisen between the vessel in its original state and at its projected retirement date. The corrosion rate applied is the highest measured corrosion rate for each component and is based on what type of corrosion rate is selected on the API 510 Calculation Options page. If there is not enough inspection information available to establish a corrosion rate, component thicknesses will be set to their minimum measured thickness.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 23 >

Inspection Report

Select Inspection to be Reported This dialog appears when the calculations are run (F3). The measured values and additional data from the selected inspection will be used for the Inspection report.

Leave Calculation Trail Window open for review Select this option to prevent the Remaining Life Calculation Progress window from being closed as soon as the calculation is complete.

Report Vessel Calculations in the Projected State on: When the Remaining Life Calculation is performed, the component reports will be in the projected state of the vessel on either the Calculated Retirement Date or the Date of the Selected Inspection . If the Calculated Retirement Date option is selected and the a retirement date could not be found, the component reports will be in the projected state of the vessel at the selected inspection date.

Customize Inspection Report Opens the Customize Inspection Report dialog, where sections of the inspection report may be reordered and included / excluded.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 24 >

Customize Inspection Report Use this dialog to customize the sections included in the Inspection report that is generated when the calculations are run (F3).

Report sections will be added to the Inspection report in the order shown in the Fields Displayed list. Note that the order of these report sections can be changed by clicking and dragging an item up or down, or by selecting an item and clicking the up or down arrow.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 25 >

Vessel Data Chart

Vessel Data Chart The Vessel Data Chart makes management of multiple vessels easier by adding the capability to view important inspection related data for multiple files all at once in a customizable grid.

How to use the Vessel Data Chart To use this feature, open a project file that contains at least one .CW7 file with inspection information, then click the Vessel Data Chart icon located on the Project Toolbar .

This will open the Vessel Data Chart dialog, which displays a customizable summary of the general vessel and inspection data for all files contained in the currently selected folder.

Note that this dialog is resizable; its bottom right corner may be clicked and dragged change the size. The chart may be sorted according to any field by clicking the title of that field in the top row. The width of each field may be changed by clicking and dragging the edge of its title field in the top row.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 26 >

Clicking the Customize Table button will open the Customize Vessel Data Chart dialog, where the fields displayed may be selected.

Customize Vessel Data Chart Set what fields are displayed in the Vessel Data Chart and in what order they are displayed.

Fields will be displayed on the Vessel Data Chart in the order that they are shown in the list on the left hand side. Note that items can be clicked and dragged up or down to change their order, or the up and down arrows may be used to change the position of the selected item. A standard set of fields is always available. If any of the files displayed in the Vessel Data Chart have any User Defined Fields set, those fields will be available here as well.

INSPECT Help

API 510 Menu < 25 - 27 >

How to use the API 579 Features The API 579 features in INSPECT are provided for performing fitness for service calculations, which evaluate a deteriorated vessel for acceptability for continued service, and help establish when remediating action must be taken.

How to use the API 579 Features Create a Flaw Choose the desired flaw type under the API 579 menu. It is important to have the vessel model as complete as possible before adding API 579 flaw information to the model. The model should be built with the original design values if possible.

Keep in mind that flaws will be placed in the vessel model in the specified location and in some cases can be combined with other flaws. After a flaws are created, you will see a graphical representation of the flaw on the parent component. You may edit the flaw by right-clicking over the flaw, or by pressing F4 and selecting the flaw from the Select Component dialog. If supplemental loads are to be considered for vertical vessels, they may be entered manually or determined automatically based on the applied loads, forces, wind and seismic codes. For more information, see Supplemental Loads. Currently, calculations are not supported for flaws centered on or overlapping onto: - Nozzles - Shell Area of Reinforcement for a Nozzle - Straight Flanges - Bolted or Welded Covers - Cone to Cylinder Junctures

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 1 >

- Knuckles and Flares on Cones - Junctures of Shells of differing thicknesses - Tubesheets - Heat Exchanger Tubes Flaw Specific Calculation Values A unique LOSS and FCA value may be entered for each flaw. Each flaw may also contain its own longitudinal and circumferential joint efficiency, which should be based on its location relative to the seams. Flaws may also include a Part 3, Brittle Fracture Analysis. For more information, see Part 3, Brittle Fracture Assessment. Viewing Your Results Press F3 or select Action -> Perform Code Calculations. A flaw report will appear in the Index of HTML reports or Bookmarks of PDF reports, and this report will contain the evaluation results. Supplemental reports will also appear as applicable. The reports will bear the name of the Identifier assigned to the flaw. Level 2 calculations will only be performed if Level 1 requirements are not met or if Level 1 is not applicable.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 2 >

If maintenance inspections are present on the vessel model, you will be asked to select either an inspection or the original design calculations including API 579 flaws before the calculations will run. Also, when the API 510 -> Project Vessel State feature is used, flaw data will be retained with the vessel, but flaw thickness readings will not project. The Project Vessel State feature only projects CML information from Maintenance Inspections. Flaw calculations will not be performed when Perform Projected State Calculations is selected from the Select Inspection to be Reported dialog.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 3 >

API 579 Part 4 or Part 5, General or Local Metal Loss Feature This feature is provided for performing general (API 579 Part 4) and local (API 579 Part 5) metal loss fitness for service calculations. Level 1 and 2 calculations for both types of metal loss use equations from API 579 Annex A along with ASME Section VIII Division 1. ASME Section VIII Division 2 can be used by activating Code Case 2695 provided that the original fabrication of the vessel being evaluated meets the criteria outlined in API 579 for using current ASME Editions or Addenda. Thickness measurements may be input either in point thickness reading (PTR) or critical thickness profile (CTP) format. Thickness readings for CTPs may either be input as a grid, where the CTP values are automatically determined, or CTP values may be input manually. Create a Metal Loss Flaw It is important to have the vessel model as complete as possible before adding API 579 flaw information to the model. To begin, select Metal Loss, General or Local from the API 579 drop-down menu.

The API 579 Metal Loss dialog will be shown. Characterize the Flaw On the API 579 Metal Loss dialog, define the Evaluation Method , Flaw Center Point, Metal Loss Location, Measurement Type , and Corrosion parameters.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 4 >

The Offset (L) may be referenced from the datum, a circumferential seam, or the center of a head. This reference point may specified in the from dropdown menu, and a component may be specified in the Located on dropdown menu when Datum is not the selected offset reference. Notice that the Measurement Type option PTR is not allowed when Part 5, Local Metal Loss is active. LOSS is the amount of uniform metal loss away from the flaw area being evaluated. The LOSS input is not available for the PTR measurement type because it is automatically calculated within the evaluation. FCA is the future corrosion allowance. Check the Perform Part 3 Brittle Fracture Assessment box to include a Part 3 analysis in the Pitting report. For more information, see Part 3, Brittle Fracture Assessment .

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 5 >

Select Next >> to move on to the measurements dialog. Enter the Thickness Measurement Data The API 579 Metal Loss Measurements dialog is where thickness reading data is entered. For the CTP measurement types, inputs for grid spacing and the number of planes in the longitudinal and circumferential directions are provided. The joint efficiencies used in the fitness for service calculations are also defined here. If the flaw is located on a head, a switch for establishing whether or not the flaw is in the dished region of the head is available. This determination may be user defined or automatic. For Part 5 flaws, an additional user input for the distance to the nearest major structural discontinuity is provided. Below is an example of the Measurements dialog for a Part 5 flaw located on a head, using the CTP grid measurement type.

Thickness readings may be entered manually, or by copying and pasting data from an Excel spreadsheet or similar type. Prior to copying and pasting from an external source, ensure that the number of Longitudinal Planes matches the number of rows in the data set, and the number of Circumferential Planes matches the number of columns. Click OK , you will see a graphical representation of the flaw on the parent component. You may edit the flaw by right-clicking over the flaw, or by pressing F4 and selecting the flaw from the Select Component dialog. Groove Like Flaw Dimensions

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 6 >

Groove like flaws may overlap an area of pitting damage for a combined calculation. Enter the Flaw Dimensions , Local Joint Efficiency , and Distance to Major Structural Discontinuities for the groove like flaw. Click Supplemental Loads to manually specify weight and thermal loads for vertical vessels. For more information, see Supplemental Loads .

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 7 >

API 579 Part 6, Pitting Corrosion Feature The API 579 Pitting Corrosion feature in INSPECT is provided for performing API 579 Part 6 Pitting Corrosion fitness for service calculations. Level 1 and 2 calculations are available as applicable for widespread and localized pitting inside, outside, or both inside and outside the vessel surface. Pitting damage may also be combined with areas of local metal loss for a combined calculation. ASME Section VIII Division 2 may be used by activating Code Case 2695 provided that the original fabrication of the vessel being evaluated meets the criteria outlined in API 579 for using current ASME Editions or Addenda. Creating a Pitting Flaw It is important to have the vessel model as complete as possible before adding API 579 flaw information to the model. To begin, select Part 6, API 579 Pitting Corrosion from the API 579 drop-down menu.

The API 579 Pitting dialog will be shown. Characterize the Flaw On the API 579 Pitting dialog, define the Analysis Type , Pitting Type , Flaw Center Point, Pitting Location, Measurement Type , and Corrosion parameters.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 8 >

The Offset (L) may be referenced from the datum, a circumferential seam, or the center of a head. This reference point may specified in the from dropdown menu, and a component may be specified in the Located on dropdown menu when Datum is not the selected offset reference. LOSS is the amount of uniform metal loss away from the flaw area being evaluated. FCA is the future corrosion allowance. Check the Perform Part 3 Brittle Fracture Assessment box to include a Part 3 analysis in

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 9 >

the Pitting report. For more information, see Part 3, Brittle Fracture Assessment . Select Next >> to move on to the Measurements dialog. Level 1 Pitting Measurement Data Define the Pitting Damage , Size of Pitting Region , and Joint Efficiency parameters.

Click Flaw Images to specify one or more images to be included in the pitting report. API 579, Part 6 requires a photograph with a reference scale for a level 1 evaluation. Level 2 Pitting Measurement Data Define the Pit Couples , Size of Pitting Region , Joint Efficiency , Distance to Major Structural Discontinuities , and Measurement parameters.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 10 >

Thickness readings may be entered manually, or by copying and pasting data from an Excel spreadsheet or similar type. Prior to copying and pasting from an external source, ensure that the Number of Pit Couples matches the number of rows in the data set. Click the Supplemental Loads button to specify the supplemental loads at the flaw location. For more information, see Supplemental Loads . If the flaw is located on a head, a switch for establishing whether or not the flaw is in the dished region of the head is available. This determination may be user defined or automatic. Click OK , you will see a graphical representation of the flaw on the parent component. You may edit the flaw by right-clicking over the flaw, or by pressing F4 and selecting the flaw from the Select Component dialog.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 11 >

API 579 Part 3, Brittle Fracture Assessment The option to perform an API 579 Part 3 Brittle Fracture Assessment is provided on a per-flaw basis. Part 3 Brittle Fracture Assessment

Checking the Perform Part 3 Brittle Fracture Assessment box will cause a Part 3 Brittle Fracture Assessment section to appear in the report of the related flaw. The brittle fracture assessment will be performed to the specified CET instead of the design MDMT. The original fabrication joint efficiency will be used for the assessment and the CET rating will be based on the design pressure.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 12 >

Supplemental Loads for API 579 Flaws Supplemental load calculations are provided for the applicable load cases of cylinders and transitions of vertical vessels. Specifying Supplemental Loads Manually

Check the Enter Supplemental Loads Manually box to enter the Weight Case Loads at the related flaw. Check the Enter Thermal Case Loads to consider the thermal case loads as well. If the Enter Supplemental Loads Manually box is not checked and a vessel support is present. The supplemental loads will be determined automatically, taking the applied loads, forces, wind and seismic codes into account. Calculations will include the ASCE 2.4.1 Basic Load Combinations.

INSPECT Help

API 579 Menu < 26 - 13 >

ASME B31.3 Piping Document An ASME B31.3 Piping document for performing API579 Fitness-For-Service calculations on a section of pipe. ASME B31.3 Piping documents are limited to only one pipe section because API 579 does not require an analysis of the entire piping run. Enter any forces /moments on the pipe in the supplemental loads dialog for each flaw. ASME B31.3 calculations and a database of ASME B31.3 materials supplements API 579 calculations. Create a full user defined material for any material missing from the database.

How to use the ASME B31.3 Piping Document Features

Create an ASME B31.3 Piping Document Select File | New | B31.3 Piping...

Or by clicking the B31.3 Piping icon on the Standard toolbar.

Define the Piping Properties

INSPECT Help

ASME B31.3 Piping < 27 - 1 >

Identifier -- The identifier is simply your name for the component you are designing. INSPECT supplies a default name, which you can override.

Material -- Presents a default material (specified in Action | Set Mode | Defaults ). To change the material, click on the down arrow button to the right of the material field to display a drop down box containing a "short list" of ASME materials. This short list provides quick access to materials so you do not have to sort through the entire ASME database every time you specify a material. You can add or remove materials from this short list, thereby achieving a personalized database from which to work (use Materials | ASME B31.3 Piping Materials to add/remove materials by accessing the main material database). Highlight a material from the list, then click on it or press Enter.

Material Properties -- A dialog that displays the details for the currently selected material such as nominal composition and density.

User Defined -- An option to specify a user defined material, which is useful for situations where the desired material is not found. Full user defined materials are comparable to ASME materials and contain the material properties and data required to complete Code checks currently performed.

INSPECT Help

ASME B31.3 Piping < 27 - 2 >

Internal Pressure/External Pressure -- The design differential pressures across the component at the design temperatures. The ASME Code refers to this as "design pressure". Internal pressure acts on the concave surfaces (normally inner surface) of formed heads and on the inside of cylinders. External pressure acts on the convex surface of formed heads and on the outside of cylinders.

Internal Temperature/External Temperature -- The internal and external design or rerating temperatures. All materials have a maximum permissible temperature as specified by the ASME code. If you enter a temperature higher than the maximum allowed, INSPECT displays a warning message and the maximum temperature permitted.

Corrosion, Inner and Outer -- The corrosion values are applied to the inside and/or outside of the pipe.

Impact Tested -- Click here if the material is impact tested. When you click here another box appears showing the test temperature. Click on the box to change the temperature. INSPECT may require impact testing if it is required by Code rules.

Material Normalized -- If a UCS material is normalized, the impact testing temperature is lower than when the materials is not normalized.

Produced to Fine Grain Practice -- Check if material is produced to fine grain practice.

PWHT Performed -- Check if material is produced to fine post weld heat treatment is performed on the material.

Quality Factor, E -- Enter the quality factor, E from table A-1A or A-1B. Factor Y -- Enter the coefficient Y from table 304.1.1. Weld Strength Reduction Factor, W -- Enter the weld joint strength reduction factor, W in accordance with para. 302.3.5(e).

Component Commentary -- Reports anything you type in here in the Component Commentary section of the report for this pipe section.

Define the Pipe Dimensions

INSPECT Help

ASME B31.3 Piping < 27 - 3 >

Inner/Outer Diameter -- Specifies reference measurement for Pipe Diamter. Pipe Diameter --Input the diameter. Length -- Specifies the length of the pipe section. Thickness -- Enter the pipe wall thickness. If selecting a pipe or tube material, calculations account for mill tolerance unless Piping made from pipe or tube material is entered as minimum thickness is selected in the Set Mode Options (F7) dialog.

Select Pipe or Coupling -- Displayed if the cylinder is made from a pipe material. Access it if you want to have INSPECT look up a particular pipe size and fill in the diameter and nominal thickness. When you select Pipe, the following screen appears:

INSPECT Help

ASME B31.3 Piping < 27 - 4 >

Choose the pipe or coupling diameter and schedule. INSPECT lists all the pipe sizes indicated in ASME B36.10M-2000 which includes non-standard schedule sizes. Select the Standard Schedules Only button to reduce the list to the standard schedule sizes. Note, for piping in non-U.S. Customary units the pipe size includes a 'DN' designation.

Add API 579 Flaws Use the API 579 menu to add flaws to the piping. INSPECT performs Level 1 and 2 API 579 2007-1 assessments for: Part 3 - Brittle Fracture (prerequisite for Part 5 and 6) Part 4 - General Metal Loss Part 5 - Local Metal Loss (includes groove-like flaws) Part 6 - Pitting Corrosion

INSPECT Help

ASME B31.3 Piping < 27 - 5 >

Or any combination supported by the API 579 code.

INSPECT Help

ASME B31.3 Piping < 27 - 6 >

TLP Dialogs

The various inputs required for tube layout are grouped as under: Shell and Tube < 28 - 1 > Nozzles < 28 - 5 > Baffles < 28 - 7 > Preferences < 28 - 13 > Title Block < 28 - 14 >

Shell and Tube

Shell ID The inside diameter of heat exchanger shell.

OTL Diameter The Outer Tube Limit diameter which contains all tubes. This diameter should be a non-zero number equal to or less than the Shell ID

Tube OD The outside diameter of heat exchanger tube.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 1 >

Tube Pitch The center-to-center distance between adjacent tubes. Tube pitch should be atleast 1.25 times the tube diameter as recommended by TEMA RCB 2.5.

Tube Pattern The tube pattern as per TEMA RCB 2.4. Triangular - 30° Rotated Triangular - 60° Square

- 90°

Rotated Square

- 45°

No. of Tube Passes The number of tube side passes in heat exchanger. Valid number of passes are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8.

Pass Partitions The tube side pass partition arrangement can be ribbon, mixed or pie as shown below.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 2 >

Flow Direction The fluid flow direction - horizontal or vertical. The baffle cut edge is perpendicular to the flow direction and the tube pattern 30° and 60° is oriented as per flow direction.

Vertical Tube Clearance The vertical distance between outside of a tube and edge of a horizontal pass partition.

Horizontal Tube Clearance The horizontal distance between outside of a tube and edge of a vertical pass partition.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 3 >

Tube Count % Deviation The tube count % deviation specifies the maximum variation allowed in each pass tube count above or below the average tube count. TLP calculates the positions of pass partitions such that number of tubes in each pass are as close as possible to the average tube count per pass, within the specified limit, keeping the total number of tubes to maximum possible. Due to the size and layout limitations, it may be possible that the best arrangement has a variation amount more than the maximum limit specified.

Pass Partition Thickness The thickness of pass partition plates for front channel and rear channel, if any.

Offset First Tube Draws the first tube "off" tubesheet center at an offset equal to tube pitch for tube patterns 30°, 45° and 60°.

Cleaning Lanes The cleaning lanes option will automatically lay out the tubes such that there is a clear path through the bundle to facilitate cleaning the exterior tube surfaces. The Tube Layout Program does this while providing the maximum number of tubes by finding the optimum (minimum) tube clearances. For certain designs such as multiple pass, mixed flow exchangers optimum values for both vertical and horizontal tube clearances are provided.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 4 >

Nozzles

Inside Diameter The inside diameter of shell side inlet and outlet nozzles. A zero value specifies that no nozzles are to be considered.

Offset The offset distance from tubesheet center to nozzle center.

Location Location of nozzle, either on top or bottom of the shell.

Impingement Plate Provides an impingement plate near the nozzle.

Impingement Plate Diameter/Width The diameter or width of a circular or rectangular impingement plate.

Impingement Plate Thickness The thickness of the impingement plate.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 5 >

Impingement Plate to tube clearance The minimum clearance between the tube outside diameter and the impingement plate edge.

Free Height The minimum required free height at nozzle centerline, h1, as per TEMA RGP-RCB-4.62.

Un-equal free heights Specifies that free heights at inlet and outlet can be un-equal. When this option is selected, the tube layout may not be with optimum/uniform tube count in each pass. If not selected, the free height considered is greater of the inlet and outlet free heights.

RGP - RCB 4.62 Calculates the minimum required free height per TEMA RGP-RCB-4.62, based on fluid flow rate, density and maximum allowed ρV².

Fluid flow rate The shell side fluid flow rate through the heat exchanger.

Fluid density The density of shell side fluid.

Maximum allowed ρV² The maximum allowed value of ρV² that will be used to calculate the minimum required free height. Recommended value as per RCB 4.62 is 4000 lb/(fts²) or 5953 kg/(ms²).

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 6 >

Baffles

Baffle Type The transversal baffle type - single or double segmental.

Baffle Orientation Baffle orientation determined by fluid flow direction - vertical for horizontal fluid flow and vice versa.

No Tubes in Window Calculates the tube layout without any tubes in the baffle cut window.

Baffle cut definition % Shell ID - Baffle cut is defined as percentage of shell inside diameter. Distance from center - Baffle cut is defined by distance from center of tubesheet.

% Shell ID Baffle Cut (inner baffle cut for double segmental) as percentage of shell inside diameter.

Baffle cut on tube centerline Calculates the baffle cut near the centerline of a tube.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 7 >

% of net free area The calculated baffle cut as percentage of total net free area inside the shell (shell cross sectional area minus the total tube area). For a double segmental baffle specified as % of shell ID, the distance L2 for outer baffle cut is calculated such that the area A1 (net free area for inner baffle cut) is equal to area A2 (net free area for outer baffle cut).

Distance from center The calculated or specified distance from center to baffle cut line.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 8 >

Attachments

This dialog can be used to edit the tube layout. User can add a tie rod, dummy tube, skid bar, seal bar and other attachments. The editing of tube layout should be done as a last task, after all other design parameters are specified. Once the tube layout is edited, any subsequent changes in design parameters, e.g. tube pitch, will create a new standard layout losing the customization.

Editing Modes TLP has Add, Remove, Remove Window, Move and Edit modes. When the program is started the default mode is Edit. Add: This mode can be used to add an attachment to the tube layout. Click the Add button, select the attachment type. The dialog at this time shows the default data for the attachment which is about to be added. This data can be changed for the attachment to be added, for example, diameter of a tie-rod can be changed at this time. The identifier for attachments is named by default, for example, Tie Rod #1. Click on a location inside tube layout to add the attachment.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 9 >

Remove: This mode can be used to remove an attachment from the tube layout. Click the Remove button. The dialog information at this time shows the current state. Click on a tube or an attachment in tube layout to remove it. The identifiers are renamed to maintain consecutive numbers for the attachments of same type. For example, if there are 10 tie rods and tie rod # 5 is deleted, tie rod #6 to #10 is renamed as #5 to #9. The dialog is updated to show new #5 tie rod. Remove Window: This mode can be used to remove multiple tubes and /or attachments from the tube layout. Click the Remove Window button. The dialog information at this time shows the current state. Click on an empty location in the graphic and drag it to select multiple items in a rectangular area and release the mouse to delete them. The dialog is updated to show new identifier of remaining attachments. Move: This mode can be used to move attachments inside the tube layout. Click the Move button, select the attachment type and identifier to be moved and edit the location, for example the X co-ordinate and Y co-ordinate for a tie-rod can be changed, and hit ReDraw button (or Enter key). The attachments can also be moved graphically by clicking on the attachment and dragging it to a new valid location. The dialog is updated to show the correct location of the attachment that is moved. This mode is used to move only attachments. Tube locations are optimized based on pitch and clearances and cannot be changed. Edit: This mode can be used to edit the attachment attributes such as diameter, width, thickness, location and orientation. Click on Edit button, select the attachment type and identifier, change its attributes and hit ReDraw button (or Enter key). The attachment to be edited can also be selected graphically by clicking on it.

Attachment types Tube: A new tube can be added only at a valid location. A valid location is such that the tube is within the OTL and satisfies the pitch and clearance requirements. TLP assists the user by changing the cursor to a cross-wire at a valid location. Generally, a valid location would be a default tie-rod location or a deleted tube location. Tie Rod: A new tie rod can be added anywhere within the shell ID where it does not interfere with any other tube or attachment. TLP assists the user by changing the cursor to a cross-wire at a valid location. Generally, a valid location would be an existing tube location or an empty location. Dummy Tube: A dummy tube can be added anywhere within the shell ID where it does not

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 10 >

interfere with any other tube or attachment. TLP assists the user by changing the cursor to a cross-wire at a valid location. Generally, a valid location would be an existing tube location or an empty location. Skid Bar: A skid bar can be added in pair at an angle on either side of vertical axis. The radial orientation of skid bar is determined by the clicked location. Radial Seal Bar: A radial seal bar can be added at an angle from the vertical axis. Its radial orientation and width is determined by the clicked location. A valid location for radial seal bar is inside a tube. The seal bar is placed radially in proximity of the clicked tube with a specified clearance, extending to shell ID. Vertical Seal Bar: A vertical seal bar can be added at a horizontal distance from the vertical axis. Its vertical distance from center line and width is determined by the clicked location. A valid location for vertical seal bar is inside a tube. The seal bar is placed vertically in proximity of the clicked tube with a specified clearance, extending to shell ID. Horizontal Seal Bar: A horizontal seal bar can be added at a vertical distance from the horizontal axis. Its horizontal distance from center line and width is determined by the clicked location. A valid location for horizontal seal bar is inside a tube. The seal bar is placed horizontally in proximity of the clicked tube with a specified clearance, extending to shell ID.

Identifier Prefix TLP provides each attachment an identifier in the form of "identifier prefix" + "serial number". The identifier prefix can be changed by user as per different company standard naming practices.

Identifier This is used to identify each attachment uniquely.

Location This specifies the X-Y position of tie rod, dummy tube, vertical and horizontal seal bar inside the tube layout.

Diameter This specifies the diameter of tie rod and dummy tube.

Radial Orientation This specifies the angle from vertical axis for skid bar and radial seal bar, zero degree being at the top of vertical axis.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 11 >

Width This specifies the width of skid bar, radial seal bar, vertical seal bar and horizontal seal bar.

Thickness This specifies the thickness of skid bar, radial seal bar, vertical seal bar and horizontal seal bar.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 12 >

Preferences

Tube Pass Boundaries Specifies that tube pass boundaries will be drawn for each pass and partition. The tube pass boundaries can be drawn for the front channel, rear channel or both. The No Colors option draws the tube pass boundaries in black. This is also required when you want to print the layout with solid black boundaries, rather than gray boundaries for a grayscale print.

User defined partition Allows user to locate pass partitions. Check the option or click the button and then click on the dimension in the new dialog to edit it. The tube layout for user defined partitions is not optimized for equal tube counts for each pass.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 13 >

Title Block

All the above information can be included in a printed page along with the tubesheet layout. To exclude any field, simply make it blank. The TEMA Class, R, C, or B is used to determine the number and diameter of tie rods per RCB 4.7 of TEMA.

Tube Layout Help

Inputs < 28 - 14 >

File Menu

New A new file is opened with default inputs and a blank layout (available only for stand-alone version).

Open Opens an existing tube layout (.tlf) file (available only for stand-alone version).

Save Saves the current tube layout to a .tlf file. An untitled layout is prompted for a filename (available only for stand-alone version).

Save As Saves the current tube layout to another .tlf file (available only for stand-alone version).

Save Defaults Saves the current layout inputs as defaults for next run of TLP.

Export Exports the current tube layout to an ACAD DXF format and Windows WMF image format. The tube locations can also be exported to an ASCII text file.

Print Layout Prints the current tube layout to default printer. The printer can be changed in the print dialog.

Tube Layout Help

Menu Options < 29 - 1 >

Print Report Prints the current tube layout html report to default printer. The printer can be changed in the print dialog.

Print Preview Displays the full page with tube layout, design data and title block.

Page Setup The layout orientation and report header/footer and margins for printed page can be set in this dialog.

Exit Closes the Tube Layout program, after prompting to save an unsaved layout (available only for stand-alone version).

Tube Layout Help


Edit Menu

The Edit Menu can be used to undo and redo the editing actions done graphically on the tube layout.

Undo Select this option from the Edit Menu or click Undo button on toolbar to Undo the last actions. Undo is available for Add, Remove, Remove Window and Move actions done graphically on the layout.

Redo Select this option from the Edit Menu or click Redo button on toolbar to Redo the last one undone action. Redo is available for Add, Remove, Remove Window and Move actions done graphically on the layout.

Tube Layout Help


View Menu

Zoom In Select this option to scale up the graphical tube layout. If you have a mouse with wheel, you can magnify the graphics by pressing CTRL key and turning the mouse wheel up.

Zoom Out Select this option to scale down the graphical tube layout. If you have a mouse with wheel, you can scale down the graphics by pressing CTRL key and turning the mouse wheel down.

Zoom All Select this option to restore the original scale of the graphical tube layout.

Redraw Select this option to refresh the graphical tube layout.

Settings Select this option to specify program preferences and update settings.

Tube Layout Help


Help Menu

Contents This opens up the help file with its contents tab selected.

Search for Help on This can be used to search the help file for any keyword(s).

Get Updates This command checks for availability of TLP program update from Codeware online update server, if the user's computer is connected to the internet.

Codeware on the web If the user's computer is connected to the internet, this menu option can direct the default web browser to Codeware's web site, technical support page or the search knowledgebase page.

About Tube Layout This displays the TLP program build number and copyright notices.

Tube Layout Help


Export Tube Layout

AutoCAD DXF Exports the tube layout to a DXF file.

AutoCAD DWG Exports the tube layout to a DWG file.

WMF Exports the tube layout to a Windows Meta file (WMF). This is an image format which can be opened in any graphics viewer including Internet Explorer.

TXT (Tube locations) Exports the tube locations to an ASCII text file in a comma delimited format.

Browse Allows you to select the export file location.

File Name The file name to which the exported tube layout will be saved. When no path is specified the file is saved in the install directory.

Tube Layout Help


Page Setup

Report Header/Footer Provides a space for you to type header/footer text that will appear at the top of the page. To print specific information as part of the header/footer, click on the arrow button and select the appropriate menu item to insert the character codes for header/footer text. The header/footer text can be built using the following variables. Variables can be combined with text (for example, Page &p of &P). To print this Type this Current page number &p Total number of pages &P Date in short format (as specified by Regional Settings in Control Panel) Date in long format (as specified by Regional Settings in Control Panel) Time in the format specified by Regional Settings in Control Panel Time in 24-hour format Right-aligned text (following &b) Centered text (between &b&b)

&d &D &t &T &b &b&b

A single ampersand (&)

&&

Tube Layout Help


Report Margins Sets the printing area of the page. The printer will print only within these margins.

Layout Orientation The print and the print preview will use this orientation for tubesheet layout only.

Tube Layout Help


Settings

TLP remembers the setting selected in this dialog and uses it for all new tube layout.

Options page This dialog has settings related to tube layout program.

Automatic Tie Rods TLP has capability to automatically locate tie rods in the tube layout, if this option is selected. The number and diameter of tie rods is selected as per RCB 4.7 of TEMA.

Tube Layout Help


Report TLP creates a html report of the tube layout design. This report is presented in a window on the bottom left of the program main window. The TLP report contains: Tubes per pass. Number of tie rods and its diameter based on nominal shell diameter and TEMA class as per RCB 4.7 of TEMA. Baffle Window areas (if baffles are selected). Shell Entrance/Exit Areas (if RGP RCB 4.62 selected). The report can be printed from the File/Print/Report menu selection or right click on the report window and select "Print" from the menu. The report can be printed with user-defined margins and header/footer from the Page Setup dialog.

Tube Layout Help

Layout Design Report < 30 - 1 >

Integration with COMPRESS Heat Exchanger Wizard Tube Layout Program (TLP) can be launched from within Codeware's COMPRESS program which can design a complete Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger. A tube layout that is created becomes part of the heat exchanger .cw7 file and the data used for tube layout can be conveniently ported to the heat exchanger design wizard by selecting the option shown below.

If this option is not selected, the tube layout data is not transferred to the heat exchanger design wizard. However the tube layout generated is saved along with the heat exchanger design in the .cw7 file for any future design.

Tube Layout Help

Integration with COMPRESS < 31 - 1 >

Troubleshooting Solutions to many common (and uncommon) issues can be found in our searchable knowledgebase and FAQ area (http://www.codeware.com/support/faq.html). Articles on engineering and design as well as computer and systems administration are available. Most COMPRESS application problems can be resolved by restarting your computer and using the COMPRESS repair function. You will need local administrator privileges to perform the repair function.

General Considerations: Below are a few questions to assist you with identifying possible causes of your issue. Providing answers to these questions when contacting Codeware for support will enable us to provide you with the fastest resolution possible to your issue. When did the problem start occurring? Is it affecting just one file or all files? Does this problem occur on other computers running COMPRESS? If not, what are the differences? Have there been any recent updates or changes to your PC or server? Have you restarted your computer recently?

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting < 32 - 1 >

Common Issues and Suggested Resolutions: Issue Online Update does not work

Possible Reason(s) Inability to access the internet

Recommendation(s) Check your internet connection Check your firewall settings

Inability to access our server COMPRESS program crashes1 (repeatedly)

Corrupted system libraries Incorrect system settings Software bug

Contact your IT department Restart your computer Run the COMPRESS Repair function Contact us using the online Support Request Form Check the Task Manager for Compwin and select ‘End Process’ if possible

COMPRESS freezes on save or while performing calculations

Loss of network connectivity

Restart your computer Check network connectivity

Operating system updates

Contact your IT department

AntiVirus or other 3rd party software Vessel graphic displays incorrectly

Selected rendering device is unavailable

Run our utility file (see FAQ 1309)

Error message: COMPRESS (USB) hardware key not found

Firmware is not updated

Review security hardlock key (HASP) related FAQs in the Support Center

Incorrect data was entered during network installation

Contact us using the online Support Request Form

1When

COMPRESS crashes, it captures the state of the program along with program settings and creates a crash report. Please submit this report to Codeware.

Troubleshooting


How to Contact Codeware: Customers current with their Support and Update Service (SUS) are eligible for email and phone support. When contacting Codeware for support, please have your security key number ready. You can find your key number by selecting Help > Key Information from within COMPRESS. This information is also provided on your invoice. To answer most questions, Support Engineers require the applicable COMPRESS .cw7 file(s). For this reason, we recommend using the online support request form to contact us: http://www.codeware.com/support/contact.html. General Support: Submit an online support request (recommended): http://www.codeware.com/support/contact.html Email: [email protected] Phone: 941.927.2670, option 2, option 1 Security Key Updates/Passwords: Email: [email protected] (recommended) Phone: 941.927.2670, option 2, option 2 Installation and Networking Support: Email: [email protected] (recommended) Phone: 941.927.2670, option 2, option 3

Troubleshooting


COMPRESS Help Index AISC Appendix B 14-18 bolt root tensile area 11-15, 11-18 chapter H 11-13 leg allowable stresses 11-12, 11-16 local buckling 14-18

Allowable Stress temperature 4-40, 14-3, 14-4 base plate 11-22, 11-26, 11-31 bolt 11-10, 11-15, 11-29 compressive stress on the skirt 11-3 lug 8-9, 8-12, 10-17, 11-26, 14-4, 21-22 saddle 11-7, 14-4 structural components 14-4 values 4-40, 7-3, 10-17, 14-4

ANCHOR BOLT allowable stress 11-10, 11-15, 11-29 bolt circle 11-15, 11-29 Brownell and Young 11-23 design 10-4, 11-23, 11-32, 11-33 initial tension 11-24 spacing 11-29 number of 11-15, 11-32, 21-17 size 11-11, 11-15, 11-19, 11-23, 11-32 sizing 11-23, 20-20 types 11-11, 11-15, 11-18, 11-29

ANSI CODE B16.47 7-24, 8-23, 8-24, 9-7, 9-8, 9-9, 9-13, 9-22, 20-17, 21-31, 21-36 B16.5 4-26, 7-24, 7-25, 7-31, 8-17, 8-23, 8-24, 8-46, 9-7, 9-8, 9-9, 9-13, 9-22, 9-42, 18-9, 20-17 21-31, 21-36 APPENDIX 14 FLAT HEAD 7-1, 7-23

ASME CODE appendix 1-1 8-15, 9-18 Appendix 2 7-14, 7-17, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-32, 7-33, 7-34, 8-9, 8-20, 9-6, 9-7, 12-3 18-9 Appendix 2, figure 2-4 7-32 Appendix 2-9(a) 7-34 Appendix 2-9(b) 7-34 Appendix S-2 7-29 Fig. 2-13 7-33

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 1 >

Fig. 2-4, Sketch (1) 7-33 Figure UCS-66 7-4 Figure UG-34 7-19, 7-24 Materials Part D 7-3, 14-5 Part D, Subpart 1 11-3 Part D, Subpart 3 11-3 subsection C 14-5 Table 2-5.2 7-28 Table UCS-57 8-8 tensile stress (Materials Part D) 7-3 tensile stress (Subsection C/Materials Part D) 14-5 UCS-66 4-40, 7-3, 7-4, 8-8, 8-28, 9-11, 12-3, 14-18 UCS-66 materials 8-8 UG-32 7-10, 7-12, 8-11 UG-34 7-17, 7-19, 7-21, 7-22, 7-24 UG-36(c)(3)(a) 9-17 UG-37 7-5, 7-8, 8-15, 8-22, 8-23, 9-6, 9-12, 9-13, 9-16, 9-17, 9-18, 9-22, 9-40, 11-5 UG-39 7-22, 7-24 UG-41 9-13, 9-17, 9-22 UG-45 4-39, 7-8, 8-23, 9-5, 9-13, 9-17, 9-19, 9-22 UG-99(b) 8-27 UW-16 9-3, 9-4, 9-5, 9-13, 9-22 UW-2 7-4 vacuum charts (Appendix 5/Materials Part D) 14-5 vacuum charts (Materials Part D) 7-3 ATTACHMENT OFFSET 11-3

BASE RING add 8-12, 11-3, 20-13 calculations 14-14, 20-13 centered bolt chair 11-29, 11-35 length 21-19

BEDNAR table 10.3, case 4 21-22

BOARDMAN analysis 8-8

BODY FLANGE BOLT

7-1, 7-14, 7-15, 7-25, 7-28, 9-6

allowable stress 11-10, 11-15, 11-29 clearance 7-31, 8-18, 11-16, 11-30 corrosion allowance 7-30, 11-11, 11-15, 11-19, 11-29 material 7-29, 8-18, 11-10, 11-15, 11-19, 11-29, 11-32

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 2 >

BOLTED COVER factor C 7-19, 7-21, 9-27, 12-18, 20-8

BOLTS DATABASE bolt root area 14-13 categories of bolts 14-13 description 14-13 minimum bolt spacing 14-13 nominal size 14-13

BROWNELL AND YOUNG Equation 10.32b 11-27, 21-21 table 10.3 11-27, 21-21

BUILDING CODES ASCE 7-93 12-9, 12-24, 12-35, 12-36, 20-16 ASCE 7-95 12-9, 12-23, 12-25, 12-34, 12-47, 20-16 ASCE gust response 12-12 UBC 1991 12-18, 12-23, 12-44 UBC 1994 12-18, 12-23, 12-44, 12-45 user defined codes 12-4

CALCULATING THE WEIGHT deflection 20-3 empty weight 20-1 fabrication weight 20-1

CAMERA SETTINGS 8-3, 8-55, 18-3 COMPONENT MENU circumferential seam x-ray 7-5 corrosion, inner and outer 7-3 identifier 4-12, 7-2, 7-35 impact tested 7-3 internal temperature/external temperature 7-3 longitudinal seam x-ray 7-4, 7-5 material normalized 7-4 MDMT 7-3, 7-4, 7-11, 7-13, 7-14 PWHT performed 7-4

COPY LAST pushbutton 7-5

DAMPING empty condition 12-13 insulation 12-13 lining 12-13 liquid sloshing 12-13 material 12-12

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 3 >

operating condition 12-13 soil foundation 12-13 test condition 12-13 total 12-13

DAMPING COEFFICIENTS DATUM LINE

12-12

set 4-9, 8-2, 9-11, 10-17, 13-5

DEFAULTS bolt allowable stress 11-29 bolt clearance 8-18, 11-16, 11-30 lug allowable stress 11-26 seismic loading 21-24 saddle allowable stress 11-7 saddle yield stress 11-8 wind loading 11-7, 12-5, 12-20, 21-23

DESIGN MODE design nozzles 8-13 design P only 8-14 get thickness from pressure 8-7, 8-14 cone-shell juncture calculations 8-8 MAWP 2-1, 7-4, 7-14, 8-8, 8-14 required thickness 7-14 DOUBLE BASE PLATE 11-28, 11-34

ELLIPSOIDAL HEAD head ratio 7-11 internal head 7-11, 7-13

EXTERNAL CHAIRS compression plate thickness 11-33 compression plate width 11-33 inputs 11-33, 11-34, 11-35 pipe sleeve ID 11-33 pipe sleeve wall thickness 11-33

F & D HEAD add 7-1, 7-12 crown inner radius 7-12 knuckle inner radius 7-12 FEA NOZZLES 9-31, 9-33, 9-38

FILLET WELD size 7-32, 7-36, 9-20, 11-19, 11-26

FLANGE

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 4 >

add 4-26, 7-17, 8-23, 9-6, 9-7, 9-41 attached to 9-8, 21-36 blind 8-23, 9-9, 21-16, 21-33, 21-36 body flange 7-1, 7-15, 7-25, 7-28, 9-6 bolt circle, C 7-32 bolt diameter 7-31, 7-32 bolt material 7-29 bolt type 7-29, 8-18 class 8-17, 8-23, 9-9, 21-16, 21-36 contact OD 7-33 corrosion allowance 7-26, 8-19 cover also 7-17 design temperature 9-7, 9-8, 21-36 flange ID, B' 7-33 flange ID, B, new 7-32 flange OD 7-33 full face gasket 9-7 fvc 9-9 gasket facing sketch 7-32 gasket ID 7-32 gasket OD 7-31, 7-32 gaskets 8-17, 14-15 hub thickness g0, new 7-32 hub thickness g1, new 7-32 length e 7-32 lower fillet weld H 7-32 number of bolts 7-32 pair of split rings 7-34 pressure ratings 9-8 radial load 7-26, 7-27 rigidity calcs 7-29 thickness 7-11, 7-22, 7-26, 7-29, 7-32, 7-33 types 7-27, 9-9 user defined moment 7-26 GLOBAL CHANGE 8-3, 8-47

HELP material 7-29, 9-6 soil coefficient 12-37 HEMI HEAD 4-19, 7-1, 7-13, 8-20, 8-54

HILLSIDE head 9-5

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 5 >

ICONS INSULATION add 4-31, 7-2, 10-13, 12-13, 21-27 components 4-31, 10-13 thickness 10-13, 12-9

INSTALLING COMPRESS network installation 2-1 system requirements 2-1 uninstalling COMPRESS 2-1

JUNCTURE CALCULATIONS LADDER

8-8

weight 10-2, 10-3

LATERAL FORCE construction stages 13-2 position from datum 13-2

LEGS anchor bolt types 11-15 bolt circle 7-32, 11-15, 21-37 base to girth seam 11-13 bolts/leg 11-15 eccentricity 11-14, 13-3 elastic modulus 11-13, 11-16, 21-17 number of 11-13, 11-15, 21-17, 21-37 overall length 7-32 pad length 11-21 pad thickness 9-20, 11-21 pad width 9-20, 11-21 rerating mode 11-21 stress coefficient 11-13, 21-17 types 9-9, 11-15, 11-20, 12-44 yield stress 11-13, 11-16, 21-17 LIMIT MAWP 8-9

LIMITS OF REINFORCEMENT LIQUID LEVEL

8-14, 9-17, 9-19, 11-6, 19-9

level from datum 13-6 specific gravity 4-35, 13-6

LUG allowable stress 21-22 angular position 10-16, 11-27, 21-21 attachment weld size 11-27

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 6 >

base plate thickness 11-27, 21-21 base plate width 11-27, 21-21 design factor 10-16, 10-20 distance to load 11-27, 21-22 force bearing width 11-27, 21-22 material 10-15, 10-17, 11-26 top plate thickness 11-27, 21-21 top plate width 11-27, 21-21

MAP maximum allowable pressure 7-3, 19-12 MDMT 4-13, 4-40, 7-3, 7-11, 8-8, 8-19, 8-28, 9-11, 12-3

NOZZLE adequate reinforcement 9-12, 9-21 angle 9-5, 9-12, 9-14, 11-6, 13-3, 21-36 chord length 9-6 circumferential moment 9-26 circumferential shear 9-26 distance r 9-12 drawing mark 9-6, 21-35 elbow connections 8-24, 9-41 hillside 9-5, 9-6, 9-20, 9-21 inner corrosion 8-19, 8-23, 9-11 inside projection 9-20 limits of reinforcement 9-17, 19-9 longitudinal bending moment 9-26 longitudinal shear 9-26 no solving 9-26 on cylinder 9-28, 19-2 pad thickness 9-20 plan view 9-21, 9-39 radial limit of reinforcement 9-16 radial loading 9-26 rating 8-14, 9-12, 9-13, 9-22, 21-16 reinforcement rules 9-18 shell thickness 9-20 types 9-3, 9-11, 21-15, 21-36 weld sizes 21-33 Nozzle Pro 8-23, 9-31, 21-15, 21-36

PACKED BED add 4-34, 10-1 density 10-9

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 7 >

depth 10-9 diameter 10-9 identifier 10-9 liquid hold-up 10-9

PAD diameter 9-25, 9-40 thickness 9-20, 11-21

PIPE stress values 4-39, 7-8, 8-11 cylindrical shell design 7-8 PIPING 8-24, 9-41, 9-42, 9-43, 10-1, 10-12, 20-2, 20-18 PLAN VIEW 9-12, 9-21, 9-39, 10-3, 10-5, 10-16, 11-27, 21-21, 21-36 PLATFORM/LADDER 4-29, 4-30, 10-4 POINTS 8-3, 8-40, 8-42, 10-23, 10-24, 10-25, 11-17 PREFERENCES 5-2, 8-24, 8-32, 8-57, 9-14, 18-6, 21-4

PWHT RADIOGRAPHY circumferential seam 4-13, 7-5, 8-25, 9-42 full 7-4, 8-8 longitudinal seam 4-13, 7-4, 7-5, 12-3

RATING MODE ASME code 7-11, 8-8 get pressure rating 8-8 impact testing 8-8 view the pressure summary 8-8

REINFORCEMENT exemptions 9-17 limits 8-14, 9-17, 9-19, 9-40, 11-6, 19-9

RENDERING style 8-3

RENDERING STYLE min/max 8-3 points 8-3 unshaded 8-3 wire frame 8-3

REPORT maximize 4-3 COMPRESS 4-2, 4-3, 4-36, 8-8, 8-27, 9-13, 9-22, 9-34, 18-1, 19-1, 19-2 limiting 9-13, 9-22

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 8 >

pressure summary 8-8, 8-25, 8-44, 19-1, 19-12 wind 8-27, 12-5, 12-9, 12-12

RIB number of 11-10 spacing 11-10 thickness 11-10

SADDLE allowable stress 11-7 base length 11-10 base width 11-10 bolt material 11-10 bolt size 11-11 bolt types 11-11 centered web 11-9 coefficient of friction 11-10 contact angle 11-8, 20-5 distance between saddles 11-8 distance from datum 11-8 edge of rib 11-9 longitudinal reaction 20-4 material specification 11-7 number of bolts 11-11 number of ribs 11-10 reaction forces 20-4 rib placement 11-9 rib spacing 11-10 rib thickness 11-10 saddle height 11-8 saddle width 11-8 use MAWP 11-11 wear plate thickness 11-8 wear plate width 11-8 web thickness 11-10 yield stress 11-8

SADDLES transverse reaction 20-5

SEISMIC delete 12-24 help screen 7-29, 12-37 loading conditions 12-4 no seismic 21-24 turn off seismic loading 12-24

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 9 >

zonal velocity ratio 12-38, 12-39 4-9, 8-2, 13-5

SET DATUM SHEAR

tangential shear stress 11-8, 20-6, 20-7

SINGLE BASE PLATE allowable stress 11-29, 11-31 gusset height 11-32 gusset separation 11-31 gusset thickness 11-32 initial bolt preload 11-32 material 11-29, 11-31, 11-32 nominal anchor bolt size 11-32 number of bolts 11-29, 11-32 outer diameter 11-33 screen 11-28, 11-33 thickness 11-31, 11-32, 11-33

SKIRT add 10-12, 11-1, 11-4, 11-5, 18-9, 20-1, 20-2, 20-13, 21-37 attachment offset 11-3 bottom diameter 11-3 compressive buckling check 11-3 corrosion inside 11-3 design temperature 8-11, 11-3, 21-19 identifier 12-11, 13-3 joint efficiency 11-3 material 8-11, 11-3, 11-32, 12-44, 21-8, 21-9, 21-19 nominal thickness 11-3, 21-19 overall length 11-3, 21-19 top diameter 11-3

STRESSES DATABASE allowable stress values 14-4 specification 7-29, 14-4 temperature 14-4

STRUCTURES DATABASE add 7-36, 14-16, 14-18 area 7-36, 14-18 governing thickness 14-18 inertia Ix-x 14-18 inertia Iy-y 14-18 materials menu 14-16 NA distance x Axis Y-Y 14-18 NA distance y Axis X-X 14-18

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 10 >

radius of gyration Rz-z 14-18 section depth 14-18 section description 14-18 section width 14-18 types 7-37 STUDDED OUTLET 9-17 TAPPED HOLE 9-17

TILE windows 16-1

TOP PLATFORM/LADDER platform angle 10-4 platform width, length 10-4

TRANSITION add 4-11, 4-16, 10-12 concentric 7-9 eccentricity 7-9 knuckle radius 7-10 large end diameter 7-9 overall length 7-10

TRAYS identifier 10-7 liquid depth on tray 10-7 liquid specific gravity 10-8 location of bottom tray 10-7 support & misc weight 10-7 tray spacing 10-7 tray weight 10-7 TRIAL LENGTH 7-6, 7-7 UNSHADED 8-3 UPDATE RATE 8-57

VACUUM RINGS add 7-35, 7-36, 11-11, 20-1, 20-2 identifier 7-35 location of rightmost ring 7-35 material 7-35, 11-11 number of rings 7-35, 11-11 ring spacing 7-36

VERTICAL LOAD add 13-3

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 11 >

eccentricity 13-3 position from datum 13-3

VESSEL COSTER blind flange 9-9

VESSEL DRAFTER blind flange 9-9 pipe sleeves 11-33

WEB at edge of rib 11-9 centered 11-9 thickness 11-10

WEIGHT empty 20-1, 20-2 fabrication 20-1 operating 9-33, 10-8, 20-2 test 20-2

WELD deficiencies 8-15, 9-13, 9-22

WELDED COVER head diameter 7-22, 7-23 reinforcement 7-22 thickness 7-22

WIND add 4-11, 4-21, 10-4, 12-9 ASCE 4-21, 10-4, 12-5, 12-8, 12-9, 12-15, 12-17, 12-18, 12-19 loading conditions 12-4 platform wind shear 12-5, 12-21 projected area 10-4, 12-4, 12-5, 12-8, 12-20 shear on top head 12-4, 12-20 turn off wind loading 12-5 UBC 1991 12-18 UBC 1994 12-18 user defined codes 12-4 wind pressure profile 12-4 wind shear 10-3, 10-4, 12-4, 12-5, 12-10, 12-20, 12-21

WINDOW MENU cascade 16-1 report 16-1 status bar 16-1 tile 16-1 toolbar 16-1

WIRE FRAME

8-3

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 12 >

WRC-537 nozzle on a cylinder 9-23, 9-29 WRC local stress 9-9, 9-21, 9-23, 9-29, 10-1, 10-16

COMPRESS Help Index

< 33 - 13 >

Vessel Wizard Index BEDNAR 21-21, 21-22 BROWNELL AND YOUNG GENERAL OPTIONS

21-21

capacity 21-29 liquid level 21-28, 21-31 stiffener rings 21-8, 21-26, 21-29

NOZZLE data inputs 21-31, 21-35 editing options 21-33

NOZZLE\QUICK DESIGN VESSEL WIZARD

21-33

active defaults file 21-6 building codes 21-32 create defaults file 21-5 create new vessel 21-3 defaults file 21-4, 21-5, 21-6, 21-30 general defaults 21-8 general information 21-11, 21-28 general options 21-28 legs 21-8, 21-17, 21-37 material 21-13, 21-17, 21-19, 21-26, 21-31, 21-35, 21-36 nozzles 21-8, 21-15, 21-32, 21-33 nozzle data inputs 21-35 nozzle editing options 21-33 other 21-8, 21-26 radiography 21-13, 21-30 seismic code 21-8, 21-24, 21-38 set defaults from active file 21-7 stiffener rings 21-26, 21-29 supports 21-32, 21-37 support lugs 21-21 support skirt 21-19 tangent to tangent length 21-11 wind code 21-23, 21-38

VESSEL WIZARD DEFAULTS select defaults file 21-30 set vessel wizard defaults 21-5, 21-7, 21-30 re-load defaults from file 21-30

Vessel Wizard Index

< 34 - 1 >

Exchanger Help Index .CWHD format ASME CODE

23-86

APPENDIX A 23-3, 23-74, 23-76, 23-77 ASME VIII-1 2004 EDITION 23-58, 23-61 ASME VIII-1 APPENDIX A-4 23-77 ASME VIII-1 APPENDIX 5-3(c) 23-48 ASME VIII-1 APPENDIX 26 23-5 B16.5/B16.47 23-42, 23-44, 23-63, 23-67 B36.10 23-36 TABLES TE-1 THROUGH TE-5 23-12, 23-14, 23-17, 23-20, 23-25 TABLES TM-1 THROUGH TM-5 23-13, 23-15, 23-18, 23-21, 23-24 TABLE Y-1 23-12, 23-14, 23-15, 23-18, 23-21, 23-24, 23-27

BAFFLES % of shell inside diameter 23-39 automatic baffle placement 23-38, 23-40 baffle count 23-38, 23-39 baffle cut definition 23-39 baffle material 23-39 baffle orientation 23-39 baffles present 23-38, 23-39 baffle type 23-38 baffle to baffle spacing 23-40 central cut distance 23-39 cut distance 23-39 each baffle supports every tube 23-38 each central baffle supports every tube 23-38 each wing baffle supports every tube 23-38 front baffle cut direction 23-39 front tubesheet to first baffle 23-39 shell clearance 23-39 thickness 23-39 wing cut distance 23-39

BONNET HEAD crown inner radius 23-69 default radii 23-69 head straight flange is the channel cylinder 23-69 inner diameter 23-44, 23-69 knuckle inner radius 23-69 material 23-44, 23-69 minimum thickness 23-69

Exchanger Help Index

< 35 - 1 >

straight flange length 23-69

CHANNEL channel temperature at tubesheet 23-14, 23-17 poisson's ratio 23-13, 23-17 thermal expansion coefficient 23-14 yield stress source 23-14, 23-17

CHANNEL CYLINDER inner diameter 23-70 length 23-70 material 23-13, 23-17, 23-18, 23-70 thickness 23-70

COMPONENTS adding 22-2 deleting 22-2

COVER DEFLECTION CALCULATIONS COVER DEFLECTION LIMIT 23-71 EFFECTIVE SEATING WIDTH br 23-78 EXPANSION JOINT

23-70, 23-71

bellows 23-51, 23-52, 23-54 calculate cycle life 23-45, 23-48 circumferential seam RT 23-50 distance to shell side face of front tubesheet 23-45 distance to tubesheet 23-52 elements 23-45, 23-46, 23-49, 23-50 fatigue factor (Kg) 23-48 flanged and flued 23-5, 23-26, 23-45, 23-46 inner diameter 23-37, 23-49 length, lo and li 23-49 location 23-46 longitudinal seam RT 23-50 number of elements 23-46 outer diameter 23-48, 23-49 outer knuckle 23-48 pitch, q 23-53 reinforced 23-51, 23-52, 23-53, 23-54 thickness, to and ti 23-49 FLOATING TUBESHEET ASSEMBLY 23-71

FLOATING TUBESHEET CHANNEL channel temperature at tubesheet 23-17 coefficient at temperature 23-17


< 35 - 2 >

cylinder 23-16 design temperature 23-16 modulus of elasticity 23-18, 23-21, 23-29 poisson's ratio 23-17, 23-19 show material properties 23-17, 23-20 thermal expansion coefficients source 23-17, 23-20 yield stress source 23-17, 23-21

FLOATING TUBESHEET EXCHANGER TYPE FLOATING TUBESHEET HEAD TYPE 23-8 FRONT CHANNEL

23-6, 23-16, 23-41, 23-62, 23-63, 23-64

bonnet type 23-68, 23-69, 23-70, 23-79 channel type 23-67, 23-69, 23-71, 23-79 copy shell properties 23-66 reducer 23-67, 23-68, 23-69, 23-70 specify channel flange & cover 23-66, 23-67 GASKET FACTOR m 23-78 GASKET FACTOR y 23-78

GENERAL OPTIONS exchanger calculation method 23-22, 23-23 shell bands 23-20, 23-22, 23-30, 23-37 tube layout option 23-1

HEAT EXCHANGER edit 22-2, 22-3, 23-1, 23-69 wizard 22-1, 22-3, 23-1, 23-11, 23-16, 23-68 HTRI EXCHANGER RATING 23-89 HTRI FILE IMPORT VALUES 23-87

HTRI INTERFACE import data 23-84 interface preference 23-84, 23-86 suite software 23-84 thermal rating 23-84

HTRI INTERFACE PREFERENCES 23-86 HTRI INTERFACE UPDATE 23-88, 23-89 hydrotest conditions 22-1, 22-2, 23-9, 23-31 IMMERSED FLOATING HEAD 23-7, 23-63 KETTLE cone 23-33


< 35 - 3 >

inside diameter 23-32, 23-33, 23-39 length 23-32, 23-33, 23-36, 23-39 material 23-3, 23-32, 23-33, 23-36, 23-39 port cylinder 23-32, 23-33, 23-36, 23-39 thickness 23-3, 23-32, 23-33, 23-36, 23-39 MAWP/MAP CALCULATIONS 22-1

NOZZLES auxiliary connections 23-82 coupling type 23-82, 23-83 maximum 22-1 minimum 23-4 nozzle preferences 23-81, 23-82, 23-83 vent and drain 23-82, 23-83

OPERATING TEMPERATURE DESIGN CONDITIONS floating tubesheet channel 22-4, 23-29 modulus of elasticity at operating 23-27, 23-29, 23-30 operating temperature 22-4, 23-3, 23-27, 23-29, 23-30 shell bands 23-3, 23-30 stationary channel 23-29 yield stress at operating 23-27, 23-29, 23-30

PASS PARTITIONS copy 'm' and 'y' 23-78 edge support 23-79, 23-80 effective seating width br 23-78 fillet weld leg size 23-80 front pass partition 23-78, 23-79, 23-80 gasket factor m 23-78 gasket factor y 23-78 pressure drop q 23-80 thickness 23-78, 23-80, 23-81 total rib length rl 23-79

POISSON'S RATIO channel 23-13, 23-17 tube 23-11, 23-13, 23-17, 23-19, 23-23 tubesheet design conditions 23-23

REAR SHELL CLOSURE OPTIONS bonnet type 23-42, 23-43, 23-44 channel type 23-42, 23-44 copy shell properties 23-41 has rear shell cylinder 23-44 rear shell closure cylinder 23-44 rear shell closure flanged 23-43


< 35 - 4 >

specify channel flange & cover 23-42

REAR STATIONARY TUBESHEET configuration 23-62, 23-63, 23-64 configuration A: tubesheet integral 23-62 configuration B: tubesheet gasketed, extended as a flange 23-63 configuration C: tubesheet gasketed, not extended as a flange 23-63 style A 23-63 style B 23-64 style C 23-64 style D 23-64 configuration D: tubesheet internally sealed 23-64

SADDLES heat exchanger 23-5

SET MODE OPTIONS SHELL BANDS front band length 23-37 inner corrosion 23-37, 23-45 outer corrosion 23-37, 23-45 rear band length 23-37 thickness 23-3, 23-4, 23-5, 23-23, 23-37

SHELL GEOMETRY inner corrosion 23-36, 23-37 inner diameter 23-36, 23-37, 23-39 length 23-36, 23-37, 23-38, 23-39 outer corrosion 23-36, 23-37 thickness 23-36, 23-37, 23-39

SHELL SIDE DESIGN CONDITIONS coefficient at mean metal temperature 23-20 coefficient at tubesheet temperature 23-21 modulus of elasticity 23-21, 23-24, 23-28, 23-30 poisson's ratio 23-19, 23-23 shell bands 23-20, 23-22, 23-30 shell mean metal temperature 23-20 shell side design temperature 23-21 shell temperature at tubesheet 23-20 show material properties 23-20, 23-23 yield stress source 23-21, 23-24 SHELL TYPE 23-3, 23-6, 23-81

TEMA class 23-4, 23-61, 23-87 edition 23-4, 23-26


< 35 - 5 >

TEMA CODE FIGURE N-1.2 23-6 FIGURE RCB-8.21 23-47, 23-49 FIGURE RCB-8.22 23-48 RCB-1.432 23-12, 23-23 RCB-2.5 23-61 RCB 5.141 23-63 RCB-7 23-5, 23-57, 23-59, 23-61, 23-62, 23-74, 23-77 RCB-7.12 23-59 RCB-7.25 23-74 RCB-8 23-5, 23-26, 23-47, 23-48, 23-49 RCB-8.5 23-5 RCB-8-83 23-48 RCB-9.132 23-78, 23-79, 23-80 RCB-9.133 23-80 RCB-9.21 23-70, 23-71 TABLE D-10 23-13, 23-15, 23-18, 23-21, 23-24 TABLE D-11 23-12, 23-14, 23-17, 23-20, 23-25 TABLE R-4.41 23-39 TABLE RCB-4.3 23-39 TEMA BACKING RING 23-63

TUBE coefficient at mean metal temperature 23-12, 23-20 mean metal temperature 23-11, 23-12, 23-23, 23-24 modulus of elasticity source 23-12, 23-18, 23-21, 23-24 poisson's ratio 23-11, 23-23 thermal expansion coefficient 23-12, 23-25 tube design temperature 23-11 yield stress source 23-12, 23-14, 23-17, 23-21, 23-24

TUBE GEOMETRY inner corrosion 23-35, 23-36, 23-37 length 23-34, 23-35, 23-36, 23-37 outer corrosion 23-35, 23-36, 23-37 outer diameter 23-35 tube expansion 23-35 u-tubes circumferential stress joint efficiency 23-35 wall thickness 23-35

TUBE RELATED INPUTS center-to-center distance between adjacent tube rows 23-61 radius to outermost tube center 23-61 tube passes 23-61 tube pitch 23-61


< 35 - 6 >

TUBE SIDE DESIGN CONDITIONS differential pressure 23-10 hydrotest design condition 23-9, 23-10 tube side design temperature 23-11, 23-12 tube side pressure 23-10

TUBESHEET configuration 23-6, 23-7, 23-51, 23-52, 23-58, 23-59, 23-60, 23-62, 23-63, 23-64, 23-75 enclosed area 23-57 fine grain practice 23-59 gasketed 23-7, 23-59, 23-60, 23-63, 23-79 gasket groove depth 23-60 groove depth 23-60 impact tested 23-59 integral 23-3, 23-7, 23-13, 23-16, 23-17, 23-37, 23-59, 23-60, 23-62, 23-63, 23-64 material normalized 23-59 MDMT 23-59 outer diameter 23-58 perimeter, c 23-57 PWHT 23-59 shear calculations 23-57, 23-64 shear related inputs 23-57 specify flange 23-59, 23-60 stub end 23-60 thickness 22-1, 23-3, 23-5, 23-9, 23-35, 23-37, 23-58, 23-60, 23-62 total area of untubed lanes 23-58 tube layout pattern 23-57 tube pitch 23-57, 23-61 tube side corrosion 23-58, 23-59 tubesheet extended 23-60

TUBESHEETS differing thickness 23-5, 23-62

TUBESHEET DESIGN CONDITIONS at rim temperature 23-25 expansion joint 22-4, 23-26, 23-31, 23-51, 23-53 expansion joint spring rates 23-26 mean metal temperature 23-23, 23-24 modulus of elasticity 23-24, 23-27, 23-28, 23-29, 23-30 poisson's ratio 23-23 rear\floating tubesheet 23-23, 23-25 show material properties 23-23, 23-51 thermal expansion coefficients source 23-25 tubesheet temperature at rim 23-23


< 35 - 7 >

yield stress source 23-24

TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET JOINT CALCULATIONS TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET JOINT INPUTS

23-74

creep 23-76 expanded length 23-77 factor fr 23-77 fillet Weld, Af 23-76 full strength weld 23-75 groove weld size, Ag 23-76 interface pressure Po 23-77 interface pressure PT 23-77 partial strength weld 23-75 weld corrosion, tube side 23-76 weld corrosion, shell side 23-76 weld type 23-75

UHX CODE UG-34 23-42, 23-66, 23-67 UG-99 23-9 UHX-11.2 23-58 UHX 11.3 23-61 UHX-11.5.1 23-61 UHX-13.4 23-3, 23-27, 23-37 UHX-13.4(b) 23-27 UHX 13.5.5 23-4 UHX-13.5.9 23-74 UHX-13.6 23-20, 23-22, 23-30, 23-37 UHX-14.1 23-6, 23-62 UHX-14.2 23-6 UHX-14.3 23-62 UHX-14.4(c) 23-27 UHX 14.5.5 23-4

WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION floating tubesheet weight 23-91 tube weight 23-91


< 35 - 8 >

INSPECT Help Index API 510 Menu How to use 25-1, 25-2, 25-4, 25-26

API 510 DATA SECURITY Change Log In... 25-19 Data Security Dialog 25-19 Manage Accounts... 25-19 User Accounts Dialog 25-19

API 579 Menu How to use 26-1 Supplemental Loads 26-1, 26-7, 26-11, 26-13

API 579 PART 3, BRITTLE FRACTURE ASSESSMENT Perform Part 3 Brittle Fracture Assessment 26-12

API 579 PART 4 or PART 5, GENERAL OR LOCAL METAL LOSS Characterize the Flaw 26-4 Create a Metal Loss Flaw 26-4 Groove Like Flaw 26-6, 26-7 Thickness Measurement Data 26-6

API 579 PART 6, PITTING CORROSION Characterize the Flaw 26-8 Level 1 Pitting Measurement Data 26-10 Level 2 Pitting Measurement Data 26-10

DATA COLLECTION SHEET Customize Data Collection Sheet 25-22 Select Inspection 25-21

EQUIPMENT DETAILS Add Field 25-11 Inspection Interval 25-10 Inspection Schedule 25-10 Notes 25-12 Related Files 25-12 Remove Field 25-12 Retirement Date 25-10 Save as Default Fields 25-12 User Defined Fields 25-11

INSPECTION CMLS Basic Layout 25-5 Copy and Pasting CML thickness data 25-8 Inspection List 25-8

INSPECTION DETAILS PAGE CML Details 25-16

INSPECT Help Index

< 36 - 1 >

Inspection Date 25-14, 25-16 Inspection Name 25-14 Inspections Performed 25-14 New Inspection Dialog 25-14 UG-116 Required Markings 25-9, 25-16

INSPECTION REPORT Customize Inspection Report 25-24, 25-25 Select Inspection 25-24 NEW INSPECTION DIALOG 25-2, 25-14

PROJECTED VESSEL STATE Projected state on any given date 25-23

VESSEL DATA CHART Customize Vessel Data Chart 25-27 How to use 25-26

INSPECT Help Index

< 36 - 2 >

Tube Layout Index ACAD DXF 29-1 ATTACHMENTS add 28-9, 28-10, 28-11 attachment types 28-10 edit 28-9, 28-10 editing modes 28-9 identifier 28-9, 28-10, 28-11 identifier prefix 28-11 move 28-9, 28-10 radial orientation 28-11 remove 28-9, 28-10 remove window 28-9, 28-10

ATTACHMENT TYPES dummy tube 28-10, 28-11 horizontal seal bar 28-11, 28-12 radial seal bar 28-11, 28-12 skid bar 28-11, 28-12 tie rod 28-10, 28-11 tube 28-10, 28-11, 28-12 vertical seal bar 28-11, 28-12

BAFFLES % of net free area 28-8 % shell ID 28-7 baffle cut definition 28-7 baffle orientation 28-7 baffle type 28-7

EDIT MENU redo 29-3 undo 29-3

EXPORT TUBE LAYOUT AutoCAD 29-6 DWG 29-6 DXF 29-6 TXT 29-6 WMF 29-6 FILE MENU 29-1

HELP MENU updates 29-5

NOZZLES

Tube Layout Index

< 37 - 1 >

fluid flow rate 28-6 free height 28-6 impingement plate 28-5, 28-6 un-equal free heights 28-6

PAGE SETUP header/footer 29-2, 29-7, 30-1 layout orientation 29-2, 29-8 report margins 29-8

PREFERENCES tube pass boundaries 28-13 user defined partition 28-13 REPORT 29-2, 29-7, 29-8, 30-1

SETTINGS automatic tie rods 29-9 options page 29-9

SHELL AND TUBE cleaning lanes 28-4 no. of tube passes 28-2 offset first tube 28-4 OTL diameter 28-1 pass partitions 28-2, 28-4 tube count % deviation 28-4 tube pattern 28-2, 28-4 tube pitch 28-2, 28-4

TEMA CODE RCB-4.62 28-6 RCB 4.7 29-9, 30-1 TITLE BLOCK 28-14

VIEW MENU redraw 29-4 settings 29-4 zoom 29-4

Tube Layout Index

< 37 - 2 >

All rights reserved. This publication contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transcribed, translated into any language or computer language or transmitted in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of Codeware, Inc. Codeware, Inc. 5224 Station Way Sarasota, Florida 34233 United States Telephone (941) 927-2670 Fax (941) 927-2459 Sales [email protected] Support [email protected] Website www.codeware.com

© 2013 Codeware, Inc. www.codeware.com © 2015 Codeware, Inc. www.codeware.com

Compress software manual.pdf

Recommend Documents